IT_G9_LibreOffice_ebook

Information Technology

Subject Code 402

Windows 11 and LibreOffice

Foreword

In today’s era of digital revolution, technology stands as the driving force, propelling our daily lives forward. It profoundly influences every facet of our existence, shaping the way we interact with one another, conduct our work, and engage in the process of learning. It is not merely a domain of technical expertise; rather, it represents an essential skill for individuals of all backgrounds.

Acknowledging this pivotal role of Information Technology, the National Education Policy (NEP), 2020 underscores the necessity of instilling practical IT competencies in school curricula, ensuring that students are well-prepared for the challenges of the 21st century.

On that note, Uolo is proud to present a two-book series dedicated to Information Technology (Subject Code 402), and meticulously designed for students of grades 9 and 10. This series goes beyond delivering theoretical knowledge as it also fosters the development of hands-on experience in IT skills.

These books are meticulously crafted to align seamlessly with the most up-to-date CBSE curriculum, presenting the material in a lucid manner. Within these pages, students will discover all the resources they need to excel in both theoretical and practical IT examinations.

Our books encompass all the prescribed CBSE learning objectives and introduce students to the foundational principles of digital documentation, spreadsheets, presentations, database management, and internet security. Moreover, these volumes incorporate units that nurture essential employability skills and vocational proficiencies among students.

We hope that this series becomes a trusted companion on your educational journey, empowering you to attain academic excellence and equipping you to seize the opportunities offered by the modern world.

Position I: Symbol Keys

The keys with symbols on them are located above the letters on the keyboard. When pressed individually, these keys function as number keys. However, when used in combination with the shift key, they function as symbol keys.

The following table shows the symbol given above the digits (Position I):

Key Elements — A Quick Glance

The BPM (Business Process Management) industry in India is a significant and rapidly growing sector within the broader ITeS industry. BPM primarily involves the outsourcing of various business processes by organisations worldwide to service providers in India, where skilled professionals handle tasks such as answering phone calls, sorting papers, and performing computer work on behalf of other companies. These tasks are often non-core functions, allowing businesses to focus on their core activities while improving efficiency and reducing costs.

The BPM industry in India has indeed experienced substantial growth, contributing significantly to the country’s economy.

Fig. 2.8: Toggle Keys on a Keyboard

Some advantages of BPM are as follows:

Caps Lock key: All alphabetic characters are capitalised when the setting is ON; otherwise, they are all small.

Important points to aid memory and recall.

Recap and Assessment Unit 2: Data Entry & Keyboarding Skills

Scroll Lock key: This key is no longer seen on the majority of contemporary keyboards because it is rarely used. However, if it is available on a keyboard, it aids in stopping page scrolling until it is in use.

Key Terms

Num Lock key: This key is used to turn numeric 1–9 keys off. With this key in on mode, the numeric keys 8, 4, 2, and 6 can be used as navigation keys.

1. Risks reduction

2. Better organisational control

3. Optimised processes

4. Increased agility

5. Improved collaboration

Keyboarding Skills: The ability to touch, type, or input data through the keyboard smoothly while typing is called keyboarding skills

Position II: Numeric Keypad

Alphabet Keys: There are 26 alphabet keys on the keyboard. They are marked from A to Z.

Home Keys and Guide Keys

Number Keys: There are 10 number keys on a keyboard, numbered from 0 to 9.

The IT industry primarily involves programming and coding. In reality, IT encompasses a wide range of activities, including hardware, software development, cybersecurity, networking, and more. It’s a diverse field with various career opportunities beyond coding.

6. Workflow automation

7. Ensured compliance

It is located at the end of the right side of the keyboard. It is also known as a numeric keypad since it resembles a telephone number pad and used for entering numbers at a faster pace. It works in two different modes. The Num Lock key is provided to switch between these two modes.

Modifier Keys: A modifier key is a key that modifies the action of another key when pressed simultaneously. These are used in combination with other keys to perform any action.

Structure of the IT-BPM Industry

Activity Time

1. Num Lock On: On pressing the numeric keys, the respective digits are typed.

The keys are placed as:

Home row keys and

Guide keys

Fun facts related to the topic, included to captivate students’ interest.

With good keyboard skills, time is saved, tiredness is reduced, text creation speed is increased, accuracy is improved, and workplace productivity is increased. These good keyboarding skills can be achieved only by learning the touch-typing method. Touch typing is a way of typing (with all your fingers) without looking at the keyboard; only the movement of fingers is required to press keys. With extensive training, touch typists use muscle memory to remember where the keys are present on the keyboard.

Shift Key: It is used as a keyboard shortcut key in conjunction with another key to switch between uppercase and lowercase letters.

Ctrl Key: To create control characters, combine the control key with other keys. Depending on the program that is running, each control character has a different meaning.

Activity 1: Making a Chart

Important terms to ensure a firm grasp of important concepts.

2. Num Lock Off: When Num Lock is off, the keys 8, 2, 4, and 6 function as arrow keys for navigation, whereas 7, 1, 9, and 3 act as home, end, page up, and page down keys, respectively.

Navigation Keys: The navigation keys are the keys on a keyboard used to move around a screen.

Did You Know?

The IT-BPM industry is an industry that combines information technology and business processes to streamline operations, improve efficiency, and deliver high-quality services. It encompasses a wide range of services, including software development, data management, and customer support.

Alt Key: This key, known as an alternate, functions as a second control key. In addition, it is combined with other keys as a keyboard shortcut key.

The IT-BPM industries are categorised based on several key factors:

1. The specific market or region the company serves.

Caps Lock key: All alphabetic characters are capitalised when the setting is ON; otherwise, they are all lowercase.

Usually, some of the keyboards on laptops do not have a numeric keypad on the right side.

2. The types of services offered by the company.

Scroll Lock key: This key is no longer seen on the majority of contemporary keyboards because it is rarely used.

However, if it is available on a keyboard, it aids in stopping page scrolling until it is in use.

S, D, and F are the left-hand home row keys on a typical QWERTY keyboard, whereas J, K, L, and ; are the right-hand home row keys The fingers are trained to make the correct movement to other keys, and each finger returns to its home key instantly.

Punctuation Keys

Num Lock key: This key is used to turn numeric 1–9 keys off. With this key in on mode, the numeric keys 8, 4, 2, and 6 can be used as navigation keys.

Prepare a chart on the role of IT in everyday life. Include examples of how social media, and e-learning.

Activity 2: Preparing Case Study

Analyse a real-world case study on the implementation of IT in a business challenges faced by the organisation.

Activity 3: Making a Poster

3. The geographical coverage and reach of the company’s services.

4. The extent of the company’s operations and the profits it generates.

The keys ‘F’ and ‘J’ are known as the left- and right-hand guide keys, respectively. Both have a small and raised noticeable mark that allows the touch typist to correctly place their fingers on the home keys.

Pointing Device: A pointing device is a sort of input device that allows a user to interact with a computer by moving a pointer across a screen to choose icons and perform desired actions.

Correct punctuation adds clarity and precision to the text. There are generally 14 punctuation marks used in the English language. (Refer Fig. 2.3.)

Gross Speed: Gross or raw speed is a measurement of how quickly you type without accounting for errors.

The following points should be kept in mind for successful keyboarding techniques:

Net Speed: Net speed is a calculation of how quickly you can type error-free.

Press the keys with a feather touch, and do not put undue pressure on them.

Unit-end point-wise summary to consolidate concepts.

Typing Accuracy: It is measured as the proportion of correctly typed characters to total characters.

Rest your fingers on the home row while typing.

Typing Errors: Typing error is the percentage of wrongly typed words out of the total number of typed words.

Things to Remember

Allow your fingers to fall naturally on the keys so that each rest on top of the next key along the same horizontal row.

Alt

Research and create a poster about various career opportunities in the such as software developer, data analyst, and IT support specialist.

MNCs: Multinational corporations (MNCs) are global companies with operations in multiple countries. In the IT-BPM industry, they often establish subsidiaries or offices in various countries to tap into local talent and markets.

Data entry is the process of transcribing information or entering physical data into an electronic device, such as a computer, through data entry or input devices.

Touch typing is done using a standard QWERTY keyboard with the hands placed at a starting location called the home row keys.

There are generally 14 punctuation marks used in the English language.

Chapter

1 •

Applications of IT

Classroom and laboratory-based group and individual activities for an enhanced learning experience.

Chapter-end exercises containing objective and subjective questions to enable comprehensive practice of concepts.

Chapter Checkup

All alphabetic characters are capitalised when the setting is ON; otherwise, they are all lowercase.

A Select the correct option.

Scroll Lock key: This key is no longer seen on the majority of contemporary keyboards because it is rarely used. However, if it is available on a keyboard, it aids in stopping page scrolling until it is in use.

Num Lock key: This key is used to turn numeric 1–9 keys off. With this key in on mode, the numeric keys 8, 4, 2, and 6 can be used as navigation keys.

Reference list of viva questions to better prepare for oral examinations.

3

Sample paper, adhering to CBSE guidelines, to ensure preparedness for theoretical exams.

ISPs: Internet Service Providers (ISPs) provide internet connectivity and services, forming the backbone of the IT-BPM industry by enabling online communication and data transfer.

1  What does IT stand for in the context of modern education? a  International Technology b  Information c  Innovative Techniques d  Integrated

Pointing Device: A pointing device is a sort of input device that allows a user to interact with a computer by moving a pointer across a screen to choose icons and perform desired actions.

Gross Speed: Gross or raw speed is a measurement of how quickly you type without accounting for errors.

Net Speed: Net speed is a calculation of how quickly you can type error-free. Typing

Things to Remember

Recommended list of practical questions for active learning. Common misconceptions with clear solutions.

2  Which industry has been significantly transformed by IT, allowing and manage finances conveniently? a  Agriculture b  Manufacturing c  Banking

3  Which of the following are global companies with operations in a  GICs b  ISPs c  MNCs

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

• Data entry is the process of transcribing information or entering physical data into an electronic device, such as a computer, through data entry or input devices.  Touch typing is done using a standard QWERTY keyboard with the hands placed at a starting location called the home row keys.

1 are staffed with customer service representatives who

2  IT also supports research, enabling data analysis and

There are generally 14 punctuation marks used in the English language.

3 outsourcing includes internal business functions such administrative tasks.

4 machine records brain electrical activity, diagnosing epilepsy,

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements

1  It is a combination of both information and technology.

2  ISPs are offshore or nearshore centres established by MNCs to handle savings and access to skilled labour in other countries.

3  The IT-BPM industry is an industry that combines information technology operations, improve efficiency, and deliver high-quality services.

4  The adoption of cloud computing in home computing allows easy collaboration and data sharing.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What are BPO services?

A1. BPO stands for business process outsourcing. It is a business practice service provider or vendor to perform specific business tasks. These support, data entry, human resources, accounting, and other

• Find and replace the word He/She with the name of the teacher.

• Check the spelling and grammar of the paragraph.

7. Create the following document in Writer:

Shape nameFormula to calculate area RectangleA = length × width

A = Side2 Circle A = πr2

Detailed projects that promote the application of knowledge. Solutions to unsolved questions to support independent practice and learning.

Fig. 2.3: Punctuation Keys on Keyboard

Syllabus

Part-A

Employability Skills

Methods of Communication

Communication is the essence of our interconnected world. It is the means through which information, ideas, and emotions flow from one person to another, from one organisation to another, and across the huge digital landscapes that define the 21st century. It is an essential aspect of human interaction and plays a fundamental role in our personal, professional, and societal lives.

The word ‘communication’ originated from the Latin word ‘commūnicāre’, which means ‘to share’. Therefore, communication can be defined as the way or process of sharing information, thoughts, feelings, or messages between individuals or groups using various methods, mediums, and channels. It functions as a bridge that links us through words, actions, and even visuals.

Methods of Communication

Imagine attempting to express oneself without words or trying to thrive in a world where one cannot convey ideas or understand the thoughts of others. Scary, isn’t it?

Methods of communication are like the pipeline through which knowledge, emotions, and intentions are shared, allowing us to collaborate, learn, and connect at a deeper level. For effective communication to take place, mankind uses a balance of verbal, non-verbal, and visual forms of communication.

Communication Methods Are Rigid: Communication methods keep evolving over time. Assuming that what worked in the past will always be effective can lead to outdated and inefficient communication strategies.

Verbal Communication

Verbal communication is a powerful and dynamic method of sharing ideas, thoughts, and information using spoken or written words. The use of language in verbal communication allows us to accurately and effectively express ourselves, engage in conversations, and convey messages to others. Verbal communication plays a pivotal role in our day-to-day interactions and interactions with the world around us.

There are two types of verbal communication: Oral or Spoken Communication and Written Communication.

Verbal

Communication

Oral or Spoken Communication

Communication that involves talking or speaking.

Oral Communication

Written Communication

Communication that involves written or typed words.

Oral communication, a subset of verbal communication, refers to the exchange of information through spoken words. It involves conversations, discussions, presentations, and speeches that occur face-to-face or through various electronic devices like phones, video platforms, or radios. When we engage in oral communication, we depend on our voice, tone, pitch, and volume to convey meaning and emotion. From casual chats with friends to important business meetings, oral communication allows us to connect and share ideas directly with others.

Types of Oral or Spoken Communication

Face-to-face conversations

Video/phone conversations

It is when you can physically see and listen to the person/people you want to communicate with in front of you.

It also includes small group communication when a group of people connect/collaborate to discuss a matter.

Each participant contributes to the communication process.

Public speaking, too, is a part of face-to-face conversations where one person talks to others while trying to persuade or convince them of something.

It is when you communicate through a phone or any other device.

Whether used for personal or professional reasons, phone or video conversations play a crucial role in maintaining connections, even when physical distance separates us.

Rohan and Tina have met at Rohan’s house to discuss a project.

Rohan, Tina, Yogesh, and Shalu connect to discuss the roles and responsibilities for their group project.

Kashika gives a speech on ‘Green and Clean Environment’ in school assembly.

Ms Sarika works as an Academic Content Developer for an EdTech firm. She connects with her colleagues working from another state through video-conferencing tools.

Factor of Effective Oral Communication Effective oral communication involves several key parameters:

Pace Speaking at a comfortable speed, neither too fast nor too slow.

Fluency Speaking smoothly and without stumbling over words.

Choice of words Using appropriate words and clear language for the audience.

Volume Speaking at a suitable volume so that the listener can hear clearly.

Clarity Pronouncing words clearly with proper stress to ensure understanding.

Tone Using the right tone to convey emotions and intent. It can be friendly, formal, persuasive, and so on.

Think and Tell

1. Which one do you think is easier, small group face-to-face conversations or large group face-to-face conversations?

2. Are there any other examples of oral or spoken communication that you can think of?

Written Communication In contrast to oral communication, written communication entails utilising written language to share information. This form of communication includes various forms such as emails, letters, articles, social media posts, and text messages. When we use written communication, we put our thoughts into words that others can read and understand. Written communication is essential when the sender and receiver are in physically distant places or when documentation of the conversation is needed.

For written communication to be effective, one needs to use clear and concise language, organise information in a logical way, and tailor one’s communication according to the preferences, level of understanding, knowledge, interests, and expectations of the audience.

The various types of written communication are explained below.

Types of Written Communication

Letters

Letters are written, typed, or printed messages that are enclosed in envelopes and sent through postal services. They serve as a formal or informal means of communication, suitable for various purposes.

Rashi lives in New Delhi. She wrote a letter to her grandmother living in Kerela to inform her of her life events.

An SMS, or a short message service, is a modern way of communicating through text messages on mobile phones. These messages are usually quick and to the point, making them ideal for sending brief updates or information. They can be sent to multiple people at the same time. Rohan is able to track the delivery of his new shirt through the SMS that he receives from the delivery company.

(continued...)

SMS

Types of Written Communication

Emails Email stands for electronic mail, which is the electronic form of a letter. It is sent through a computer via a network.

Emails can be used for official or personal purposes. They offer a convenient way to share personal or professional news, thoughts, documents, and more.

Rajneet works for Infotechnology Company. He sends emails to all the clients, wishing them ‘Happy Dusshera’.

Books, newspapers, and magazines

Books, newspapers, and magazines are written forms of communication intended for a large audience. They are used to inform, educate, and entertain people from various walks of life.

Advantages of Verbal Communication

Ease and speed

Adaptability

Communicating to the masses

Emotional expression

Cultural barriers

Language and clarity

Non-verbal elements

Limited to auditory sensory channel

Rakesh reads newspaper to keep himself up-to-date with the events around the world.

Verbal communication is often quick and straightforward. It allows you to express your thoughts, ideas, and questions in real-time, and you can receive an immediate response. This is particularly beneficial in situations where prompt communication is essential.

For instance, face-to-face conversations or phone calls can quickly convey important information or resolve issues.

Verbal communication offers flexibility in adapting your message based on the responses of the person you’re communicating with.

You can adjust your tone, words, and even your approach as the conversation unfolds.

For example, if you’re explaining a concept to someone and notice confusion, you can modify your explanation to make it clearer.

Verbal communication is efficient when sharing ideas with a larger audience.

Public speeches, classroom teaching, and media such as books, magazines, and newspapers enable dissemination of information to many people simultaneously.

This allows for mass education, entertainment, and awareness campaigns.

Verbal communication allows individuals to convey their emotions, feelings, and attitudes effectively through tone of voice, intonation, and choice of words. This emotional aspect can enhance the impact of a message.

Disadvantages of Verbal Communication

A significant challenge in verbal communication arises from cultural differences. Different cultures have their own languages, expressions, and accents. These distinctions can lead to misunderstandings, misinterpretations, and even offence. Therefore, it is crucial to navigate these barriers to ensure effective communication.

Verbal communication heavily relies on choosing the right words. If words are not carefully selected or used incorrectly, the message’s meaning can become unclear.

Miscommunication can occur from using vague or unfamiliar terms, leading to confusion among participants.

Although verbal communication involves spoken words, it’s important to note that non-verbal elements (such as facial expressions, gestures, and tone of voice) play a significant role in conveying meaning.

A mismatch between verbal and non-verbal cues can lead to mixed messages or misunderstandings.

Verbal communication relies solely on the auditory channel, which means it may not be accessible to or effective for individuals with hearing impairments.

Think and Tell

1. Can you list out the different types of oral, spoken, and written communication?

2. Give two advantages and disadvantages of verbal communication.

Non-verbal Communication

Non-verbal communication is a way of sending messages without using words. This implies the ability to interact with others without the use of spoken or written language. Instead, it involves using facial expressions, hand signals, body postures, stances, and various gestures.

Hence, we can define non-verbal communication as the type of communication that does not involve words. It involves sharing signals and messages with others through expressions, gestures, and body language.

Non-verbal communication involves expressions, posture, gestures, touch, space, eye contact, and paralanguage. Understanding the aspects of non-verbal communication can help us be better communicators. Using the right gestures and expressions while speaking helps us get our point across. Such understanding also aids us in understanding our audience’s reaction and altering our behaviour or communication accordingly.

Being professional at work requires that we be aware of appropriate gestures and postures. If noise, distance, etc. interfere with spoken communication, we can communicate using hand gestures to get our message across. For example, putting a finger on the lips signals that silence is required.

Types of Non-verbal Communication

Facial expressions

Gestures

Did You Know?

It has been observed that in our daily communication, information is constantly being shared and perceived through body movements (face, arm movements) and voice control (volume, tone, pauses), which are non-verbal in nature.

Think and Tell

1. Have you ever played a game of dumb charades? What are the various ways in which you communicate in the game? Discuss with your teacher.

2. Have you ever felt confused when someone’s expression did not match their spoken words?

Facial expressions convey the emotional state of a person to others.

For example, people smile when they are happy or frown when they are upset.

Gestures are a form of non-verbal communication used to express an idea or meaning through the movement of parts of the body, especially the hands or the head.

For example, nodding of the head indicates agreement and understanding. Waving at others indicates a greeting.

How to Use Non-verbal Communication Effectively?

Maintain a calm expression. Be subtle and neutral. Align expression to words being spoken. Maintain eye contact.

It is important to keep in mind that it is considered impolite to use your finger to point at someone.

Try placing your hands by your sides instead of in your pockets when you’re having a conversation. Show that you are paying attention by nodding your head slightly when conversing or listening.

(continued...)

Types of Non-verbal Communication

Posture

Touch

Postures refer to the stances individuals maintain while they are either standing or sitting. A posture often plays a role in conveying our confidence or mood.

For example, a confident person stands with their back straight, and a person with hands on their heads suggests exhaustion.

Physical contact such as a handshake or a pat on the back is a form of non-verbal communication.

For example, as a kind of encouragement, sports coaches often pat their players on the back.

Space

Eye contact

Paralanguage

It is the amount of physical distance that exists between people when they are talking. It depends on their relationship with each other and the situation.

Maintaining eye contact while conversing shows interest and makes the other person feel that you are paying attention.

Avoiding eye contact can sometimes signal that you are not paying attention.

It is a form of non-verbal communication that includes things like volume, tone, and pace of speaking. Speaking too quickly can indicate anxiousness or eagerness. Speaking slowly might convey seriousness.

How to Use Non-verbal Communication Effectively?

Keeping your upper body relaxed and shoulders straight signifies confidence. Sitting cross armed can be perceived as defensive or closed off.

Keep your arms relaxed and open to signal openness and receptiveness.

It is important to keep in mind that your touch does not make the other person uncomfortable. In professional settings, scratching your nose or hair is considered impolite.

It is important to maintain proper distance with the person you are communicating with, depending on the formal or informal nature of your relationship with them.

It is important to remember to maintain an optimum level of eye contact and have relaxed body language.

It is important to not make the person you are communicating with uncomfortable.

It is important to take care of our volume, tone, and pace while speaking in professional settings. It is especially important to maintain a moderate volume and pace.

Advantages of Non-verbal Communication

Gives clarity It helps to give clarity and enhance understanding in communication as it makes the message clearer and more understandable.

Replacement to verbal communication In situations where verbal communication is not possible or appropriate, non-verbal cues become the primary means of conveying information.

Tool for emotional expression

Help to handicapped people

Lead to confusion

Incomplete communication

Conflicting cues

Absent in distant communication

They are a powerful tool for expressing emotions. Facial expressions, body language, and tone of voice allow individuals to convey their feelings more clearly.

Non-verbal communication can also be useful for handicapped people who cannot speak or hear properly.

They use sign language and facial expressions instead of talking or hearing, respectively.

Disadvantages of Non-verbal Communication

Non-verbal cues can be interpreted in many ways. A gesture or facial expression may have different meanings in different contexts and cultures.

Nonverbal communication cannot convey all types of information. Important details and facts need to be coupled with verbal means, which are more comprehensive.

In cases where verbal and non-verbal communication may conflict with each other, there may be room for confusion for the receiver.

Non-verbal cues are less effective or absent in cases of long-distance communication, such as phone calls or online messaging.

Visual Communication Visual communication is when we use pictures, symbols, and designs to share ideas and information. It is like sending a message without using words but by using things like signs, logos, captivating writing styles, drawings, and even moving pictures or animations.

Imagine if you are taking a car ride and you see a sign of a man working. That indicates that there is some construction work going on ahead.

Therefore, visual communication can be defined as the use of visual components, such as signs, logos, drawings, graphic design, illustrations, animations, etc., to share ideas and information.

Following are some of the most common examples of visual communication:

A traffic sign that instructs drivers not to honk their horns.

Sign for the women’s and men’s restrooms.

Sign for flammable substances.

A symbol for pausing a video or music file on a computer or smartphone.

Traffic lights that signal Red for Stop, Yellow for Wait, and Green for Go.

Indication of a railway crossing.

Think and Tell

Can you tell other examples of visual communication that you commonly see around you?

Advantages of Visual Communication

Makes meaningful Use of graphics, diagrams, charts, or models makes communication effective and purposeful.

Easy comprehension

Attention grabbing

Lack of details

Support of visual aids makes information easy to understand.

Visual communication, when coupled with verbal communication, makes it more appealing and attention-grabbing.

Disadvantages of Visual Communication

Visuals may lack the depth and detail necessary to fully understand complex concepts or provide comprehensive information.

Costly Some visual aids used for visual communication may be expensive.

Subjectivity

Interpretation of visuals can be personal and may vary from person to person. What is clear to one person may be ambiguous to another.

Differences Between Verbal, Non-verbal, and Visual Communication

BasisVerbal Communication

Meaning

Use of language

Forms

Medium

Involves using spoken or written words to convey messages and information.

Requires the use of language, including grammar and vocabulary.

Face-to-face conversations, phone calls, speeches, and written documents.

Utilises spoken words, written documents, phones, and computers.

Non-verbal Communication

Conveys meaning through facial expressions, gestures, body language, and other non-verbal cues.

Does not use language directly but involves elements like tone, volume, and pace.

Facial expressions, gestures, posture, eye contact, and touch.

Utilises body language, facial expressions, gestures, and physical presence.

Visual Communication

Relies on visual elements, such as symbols, images, and design, to communicate ideas and concepts.

May or may not use language, but uses visual cues and elements to convey messages.

Logos, posters, comics, product packaging, and illustrations.

Utilises images, graphics, videos, and animations.

Example Writing an email or giving a speech.Nodding head or shaking hands.Logo of a brand.

Activity Time

Activity Time

Activity 1: Pros and Cons of Verbal and Non-verbal Communication (Group Work)

In a small group of 4–5 students, choose and discuss any one type of communication. Converse on the advantages and disadvantages of the chosen form of communication.

On an A3 size sheet, list the advantages and disadvantages discussed. You may make it creative and display it in the class.

Activity 2: Common Body Language Mistakes (Group Work)

Form groups of 4–5 students and engage in discussion on the dos and don’ts of body language that should be followed in a formal and informal setting.

To make the presentation interesting, you can create a small skit displaying the good and bad body language in different scenarios.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  What is the medium of verbal communication?

a  To use pictures and symbols

b  To exchange information through spoken or written words

c  To communicate using only gestures

d  To convey emotions through facial expressions

2  Which of the following is an example of non-verbal communication?

a  Writing an email

c  Smiling, to express happiness

3  Visual communication involves:

a  Using only written words

b  Sharing information through spoken words

c  Using pictures, symbols, and designs

d  Using gestures and body language

b  Speaking on the phone

d  Sending a text message

4  Which of the following is not a form of visual communication?

a  Nodding head

c  Poster

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

b  Logo

d  Charts

1 communication occurs when we talk or write using words.

2  Non-verbal communication involves expressions, gestures, , touch, space, eye contact, and paralanguage.

3 is a planned and organised act of talking to a large group of people to share information, influence, or entertain them.

4  Visual communication uses pictures, symbols, and to share ideas and information.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  Verbal communication involves only written words.

2  Non-verbal communication includes facial expressions but not gestures.

3  Public speaking is a form of verbal communication.

4  Visual communication uses only spoken words to convey messages.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. Explain the difference between verbal and non-verbal communication, providing examples of each.

A1.

Basis

Verbal Communication

DefinitionVerbal communication involves the use of spoken or written words to convey messages.

ExampleFace-to-face conversations and written documents.

Non-verbal Communication

Non-verbal communication involves conveying messages without using words.

Facial expressions (e.g., smiling), gestures (e.g., waving), and body language (e.g., posture).

Q2. Give examples of how various types of non-verbal communication are used to convey messages in different situations.  A2. Non-verbal communication includes various types:

• Facial expressions: Smiles indicate happiness, whereas frowns may indicate sadness or displeasure.

• Gestures: Nodding one’s head can signal agreement, whereas pointing can convey direction or emphasis.

• Posture: Standing upright may convey confidence, whereas slouching may indicate disinterest.

• Touch: A pat on the back can show encouragement, whereas a firm handshake may signify confidence.

• Space: Personal space varies by culture and context; standing too close or too far can send different messages.

• Eye Contact: Maintaining eye contact can show interest and attentiveness, whereas avoiding it may convey discomfort.

• Paralanguage: This includes tone, volume, and pace of speech. Speaking slowly may indicate seriousness, whereas a fast pace can signal excitement.

Q3. Meenal sat for a written test for the role of a communication trainer. The test paper included a question asking her to identify the type and form of communication taking place in different situations. Look at the scenario and help Meenal identify them.

S. No. Scenario

Type of Communication

S. No. Scenario

1.A person sending a text message on a smartphone.

Type of Communication

Written communication through text messages under verbal communication.

2.A teacher giving a lecture in a classroom.Oral communication under verbal communication.

3.A person using sign language to communicate with a deaf individual.

4.A group of coworkers having a video conference call.

Non-verbal communication through sign language.

Oral communication (through video conference) under verbal communication.

5.A group of protesters holding signs with slogans. Visual communication.

Answer Key

A 1. b   2. c   3. c   4. a

B 1. Verbal    2. posture   3. Public speaking   4. designs

C 1. False. Verbal communication involves both written and oral words.

2. False. Non-verbal communication includes facial expressions, gestures, postures, and eye contact.

3. True.

4. False. Visual communication uses charts, designs, logos, signs, and symbols to convey messages.

2. 3. 4. 5. A3.

Communication and Its Elements

Communication is a fundamental aspect of our lives that enables us to connect with others, share our ideas, express our emotions, and collaborate on various tasks. Imagine a world without communication; it would be a silent and isolated place where understanding and cooperation would be challenging. Communication plays a significant role in our personal relationships, education, business, and every other aspect of our daily interaction.

Communication

Communication can be described as the act of transmitting information, thoughts, concepts, or emotions between individuals or groups through a range of mediums, including verbal language, written expressions, non-verbal cues, body language, gestures, visual or auditory cues, and modern technology. This act serves as the binding agent that unites communities by helping us to express our requirements, convey our individuality, and build connections. It plays a vital role in the functioning of our society.

Importance of Communication Skills

Communication is the cornerstone of human interaction and is integral to our daily lives and everyday existence. It enables us to express our ideas, thoughts, needs, desires, and emotions and thus foster connections with others. Effective communication is vital for building relationships, resolving conflicts, addressing disputes, sharing knowledge, and collaborating in various spheres of life, including personal, academic, and professional settings. Good communication skills are crucial for the following reasons:

Building Relationships Effective communication helps in establishing and maintaining strong relationships, whether with friends, family, or colleagues. It nurtures trust and understanding.

Effective Interaction Communication skills are important when we interact with others, whether in personal, professional, or social contexts. We have to express our thoughts and ideas clearly for a meaningful exchange.

Problem Solving When faced with challenges, effective communication is crucial for finding solutions. Misunderstandings can give rise to larger problems. To resolve conflicts, individuals have to express their concerns, understand others’ views, and find mutually agreeable solutions to problems.

Sharing Knowledge Through communication, we can pass on knowledge from one generation to the next, ensuring that society continues to learn and grow.

Leadership and Influence People who can communicate well generally become effective leaders as they are able to convey their vision properly, inspire others, and influence decisions within an organisation.

Expressing Emotions It allows us to express our emotions, ranging from joy and affection to frustration and sadness, helping us connect with each other on a deep level.

Personal Development Communication skills contribute to a person’s growth and confidence. They are able to speak confidently in public and express themselves clearly while giving presentations, speeches, or group discussions, which helps boost their self-esteem.

Negotiation Skills The skill of negotiation heavily depends on the quality of communication, whether it is in personal or professional life. It is an important skill to possess in current times.

Think and Tell

1. Imagine a world where communication happens using basic gestures and sounds. How do you think this would impact human relationships, knowledge sharing, and development of societies?

2. How is communication important in your life? Give two reasons.

Elements of a Communication Cycle

In a communication cycle, all the elements work together to facilitate effective and meaningful interaction between individuals or groups. Each step, from generating ideas to receiving feedback, contributes to successful communication and promotes mutual understanding.

Sender The sender, also known as the communicator or source, starts the communication process by generating a message to convey. It is the sender’s responsibility to present their thoughts, ideas, emotions, or information in a clear and coherent manner. This sets the foundation for effective communication.

Example: Rakesh, an employee of Bindiya Textiles, composes an email to his manager, regarding a project update. Ideas Ideas refer to the thoughts, concepts, or information that a sender intends to transmit during the whole process. These ideas may include opinions, facts, instructions, or emotions that the sender wants to share with the receiver.

Example: Rakesh thinking and organising the information or details before writing the email.

Encoding Encoding includes putting ideas or information into a format that can be transmitted to the receiver. This often involves selection of words, creating visuals, using symbols, gestures, or body language to convey the intended message accurately.

Example: Rakesh decides to use formal language when writing email to his manager.

Communication Channel The communication channel is the medium through which the encoded message is transmitted from a sender to the receiver. Channels can be verbal (spoken or written) or non-verbal (visual cues, gestures, and body language), and they influence how the message is received and comprehended.

Example: Rakesh uses a digital channel for drafting and sending email to update his manager.

Receiver The receiver is the intended recipient of the message. They play a crucial role in the communication process. They actively listen, observe, and interpret the message. The receiver’s understanding impacts the success of the communication.

Example: Rakesh’s manager, Mr Palabh, is the receiver of the message.

Decoding Decoding is the process by which the receiver interprets the encoded message and extracts its meaning. It involves understanding the words, symbols, or gestures used by the sender and translating them into thoughts or emotions.

Example: Mr Palabh reads the email sent by Rakesh and tries to understand the updates shared by him.

Feedback Feedback is the response or reaction provided by the receiver to the sender’s message. It helps confirm whether the intended message was received and understood accurately. Feedback can be verbal or non-verbal and aids in closing the communication loop.

Example: Mr Palabh (receiver) decides to reply to Rakesh’s email congratulating him for sharing descriptive information on the project.

Scenario: A Project Update Meeting

1. Sender (Communicator): Raghav, a project manager in a multi-national firm, has valuable updates on a critical project and wants to communicate these updates to his team.

2. Ideas: Raghav’s ideas revolve around the project’s progress, challenges faced, and solutions proposed to deal with them. He aims to ensure that his team is well-informed and motivated to overcome the obstacles they encounter.

3. Encoding: Raghav encodes his ideas into a well-structured presentation, carefully choosing appropriate technical terms and illustrative visuals to convey complex information effectively.

4. Communication Channel: Raghav decides to use a combination of verbal and visual communication channels. He plans to present his updates using a presentation during a virtual team meeting.

5. Receiver: The intended receivers comprise his project team members and stakeholders. They will participate in the virtual meeting to receive the updates and provide any other valuable insights.

6. Decoding: During the meeting, team members decode Raghav’s presentation by actively listening, observing the slides, and mentally processing the information to understand the project’s status and the direction in which it is heading.

7. Feedback: Following Raghav’s presentation, the team members offer their feedback. They ask questions for clarification, provide suggestions for improvement, and share their thoughts on the project’s way forward.

In this scenario, Raghav, as the sender, initiates the communication cycle by encoding his project updates into a presentation. The communication channel involves a virtual meeting where he presents the updates to his team (receivers). They decode the presentation’s content, engage in discussions, and provide feedback, thus completing the communication cycle.

Effective communication in a business setting ensures that important information is shared accurately and that team members are aligned with project goals. The cycle promotes the collaborative nature of communication and plays a significant role in achieving successful outcomes.

Error Alert!

A common misconception about the communication cycle is that it is a one-way process focused on the sender transmitting information to the receiver. In reality, a communication cycle involves a two-way exchange of information. The receiver actively decodes and interprets the message, providing feedback that completes the cycle.

Activity Time

Activity 1: Communication Cycle in Real-Life Scenarios (Group Work)

Form a group of 4 students. Choose a real-life scenario (e.g., job interview, team project, family dinner) and identify how each element of the communication cycle applies to your chosen scenario.

In an A3-sized sheet, create a diagram to represent the communication cycle in your context. Present it to your class and explain your choice.

Activity 2: Role-play for Effective Communication (Pair Work)

Pair up with a classmate. Select a communication scenario between an unhappy customer and a customer service agent.

Plan your role-play and focus on using the communication cycle effectively. Perform the role-play in front of your class.

Chapter Checkup

A  Select the correct option.

1  What is the role of feedback in the communication cycle?

a  It initiates the communication process.

b  It completes the communication cycle and ensures mutual understanding.

c  It encodes the message for the receiver.

d  It selects the communication channel.

2  Which of the following is NOT a function of having good communication skills?

a  Building relationships

b  Ability to negotiate with others

c  Low self-esteem

d  Having problem-solving abilities

3  What is the primary purpose of encoding in the communication process?

a  To select the communication channel

b  To convert ideas into a form that can be transmitted

c  To provide feedback to the sender

d  To actively listen and interpret the message

B  Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  Through communication, we can pass on from one generation to the next.

2  Effective communication fosters trust and understanding, which are essential for building and maintaining .

3 is the process by which the receiver interprets the encoded message and extracts its meaning.

4  Feedback from the receiver helps confirm whether the intended message was received and understood accurately, thus closing the loop.

C  State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  Communication channels can only be verbal.

2  Encoding is the process of interpreting an encoded message.

3  Feedback is not a crucial element in the communication cycle.

4  The receiver is the intended recipient of the message.

D  Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. Why is feedback an essential part of effective communication?

A1. Feedback allows the sender to gauge the receiver’s understanding of the message. It helps clarify any misunderstandings, reinforces the message’s importance, and ensures that the communication cycle is complete. This two-way exchange of information is crucial for achieving mutual understanding and successful communication.

Q2. List any five ways in which communication skills are important for us.

A2. Good communication skills are very crucial for the following reasons:

• Building Relationships: Effective communication helps in establishing and maintaining strong relationships, whether with friends, family, or colleagues. It fosters trust and understanding.

• Effective Interaction: Communication skills are very important when we interact with others, whether in personal, professional, or social contexts. We have to express our thoughts and ideas clearly for a meaningful exchange.

• Problem Solving: When faced with challenges, effective communication is crucial for finding solutions. Misunderstandings can escalate into larger problems. To resolve conflicts, individuals have to express their concerns, understand others’ views, and find mutually agreeable solutions to problems.

• Sharing Knowledge: Through communication, we can pass on knowledge from one generation to the next, ensuring that society continues to learn and grow.

• Leadership and Influence: People who can communicate well generally become effective leaders as they are able to convey their vision properly, inspire others, and influence decisions within an organisation.

Q3. There has been a lot of technological advancement in communication recently, such as social media. Rohan decides to post a picture and share a caption related to it. He receives a lot of comments and likes from his friends online. Explain the elements of the communication cycle in this situation.

A3. The elements of communication cycle in the situation are as follows:

• Sender: Rohan is the sender of the message, as he decides to post his picture with a caption.

• Idea: His picture and caption are the ideas he wants to share.

• Encoding: Rohan message is encoded in the form of a picture and caption. That means he uses visual and verbal communication. He uses words, images, and symbols that will be understood by the receivers.

• Channel: He uses social media channels to transmit his verbal and visual messages.

• Receiver: His friends on social media platforms are the receivers of his messages.

• Decoding: They interpret and comprehend the messages shared by Rohan.

• Feedback: Rohan receives feedback on his message through the comments and likes shared by his friends online.

Answer Key

B 1. knowledge  2. relationships  3. Decoding  4. communication

C 1. False. Communication channels can be verbal or non-verbal.

2. False. Encoding is the process of converting ideas into a form that can be transmitted.

3. False. Feedback is a crucial element in the communication cycle.

4. True.

Perspectives in Communication

Communication primarily helps in understanding each other’s thoughts or viewpoints, which can further strengthen relationships and increase the flow of information. Communication is greatly impacted by an individual’s thoughts, culture, and way of perceiving certain situations.

Perspectives in Communication

Perspectives are ideas, views, or fixed ways of thinking, and this affects how communication is conducted within a group or between individuals. To fully understand the need for communication and encoded messaging, one must explore them from different perspectives. These perspectives provide varied lenses through which we can understand dynamic messaging holistically.

For example, if an employee believes his boss or manager is severe to them, even when they are kind, they may find it difficult to accept their views or feedback. They will be closed to communication, and this can lead to an unpleasant environment.

Thus, there are views that are mostly accountable for the type of communication we have with one another. However, there are different reasons that shape perspectives towards situations or people. Communication does not have a straightforward or single approach. It is deeply impacted and shaped by factors that affect how we express ourselves, understand others, and perceive the complexities of human connection. Our cultural background, the language we use to express our emotions, personal experiences, and our handling of technology all play a significant role in building our perspectives. These might prevent us from sharing and understanding messages.

Did You Know?

1. Perspectives are important because they help to determine what the other person is thinking.

2. Perspectives allow for a successful, productive conversation that leads to positive results.

Factors Affecting Perspectives in Communication

Language The language one uses to express themselves and one’s proficiency in a language can influence communication. When someone employs incorrect terminology, unfamiliar jargon, or fails to provide sufficient detail, language can act as a barrier to communicating what one wishes to convey.

Example: In a multinational company, Tanisha has to meet a client from France. She is proficient in English and Hindi and knows a few phrases and words in French. Mr Andrew, her French client, struggles with English.

Perception  Visual perception is the ability of the brain to infer what we see through our eyes. Humans have the tendency to focus only on the parts that are easily noticeable or accessible; this leads to forming perspectives based on incomplete information.

Example: Look at the image. What do you see?

On first glance, one may see a tree with widespread branches. But on staying further with the visual, one can notice the animals tiger and gorilla too.

We tend to form perspectives and judgments on the first look at this, and they may act as obstacles in communication.

Experiences The experiences of the past give shape to a person’s communication habits, triggers, and sensitivities. A traumatic experience from the past can stop us from understanding or communicating clearly or without hesitation.

Example: Last year, while presenting at the Annual Sales meeting, Rishika mispronounced a word. She noticed her colleagues exchanging glances and giggles. This experience has stayed with her. Thus, when she was asked to present this year, she hesitated and felt under-confident. She was conscious during her presentation and was of the perception that her colleagues might be looking for a moment to mock her.

Visual

Prejudice Prejudices, or previously built notions about individuals, groups, or something, can affect how we communicate and express them. If we have biases against a particular group, we may be less likely to listen to their perspectives or give them the benefit of the doubt.

Example: Kamlesh is a hard-working employee and has been trying to prove it to her management through her rigour and efficiency. In spite of all this, she has not been promoted. The management has a biased opinion that she may not be able to balance her personal and professional lives when scaling up the ladder.

Feelings Feelings play a pivotal role in communication. One’s feelings towards a person, thing, or group decides the type of communication that will take place.

Feeling negatively or unsure about things may lead to closed and unclear communication. It can be influenced by one’s personal opinion.

Example: Sakshi is a Product Developer at Youth Edtech. She feels insecure about her job role. Thus, every time someone proposes a great idea in a product meeting, she tries to shun them away. Though she believes in the potential of the ideas, she allows her feelings to overpower her while communicating her feedback.

Environment The environment in which communication is taking place plays a significant role in forming a perspective.

A noisy or chaotic environment may cause barriers to communication.

Example: Two colleagues conversing at a loud office party may not be able to focus. They face difficulty in understanding the information shared. On the other hand, if we communicate in a calm and peaceful environment, we will be able to communicate productively.

Cultural Difference Different cultural backgrounds may lead to different interpretations of a message or idea being communicated.

Gestures and symbols that have a certain meaning in one culture may have a different interpretation in another culture. This can lead to misunderstandings when people from different cultural backgrounds interact.

Example: India is a land of diverse cultures. While some cultures are loud and expressive in their communication, others may find it disrespectful.

In a nutshell, it is important to allow these elements to impede the sharing of information in any way.

Activity Time

Activity Time

Activity 1: What Is Your Opinion (Group Work)

Choose any one factor affecting perspective in communication. Form a group of 4–5 students and discuss the chosen factor in detail.

Make notes and choose volunteers to summarise the discussion.

Activity 2: My Experience (Individual Work)

Share a personal account/experience when you felt your communication was impeded by any one of the factors affecting perspectives in communication. Share details as to what happened and mention the factor that led to the miscommunication/misinterpretation.

Activity 3: Group Discussion (Group Work)

In a group of 4–5 students each, discuss the example of factors affecting communication in the workplace. You may discuss and list one example for each factor.

To make your presentation interesting, you may also enact the scene of how these factors can impact communication at work.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  Which of the following is not a factor affecting perspective in communication?

a  Feeling

c  Attitude

2  Perspective is an individual’s:

a  Point of view

c  Activity

b  Prejudice

d  Love

b  Body language

d  None of these

3  You are talking to a friend at a function where there is loud music being played by the orchestra. Which factor affects this statement?

a  Language

c  Feelings

b  Environment

d  Past experiences

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1 is a negative attitude, especially when it is related to hatred or intolerance for certain groups of people.

2 is a mindset that decides how individual perceives an idea or situation and responds to it.

3  Our also serves as a caution and help us protect ourselves from dangerous situations.

4 and not trusting others affect communication.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  Language can act as a barrier to communicate what one wishes to convey.

2  Feelings cannot affect our ways of communication.

3  Perspectives are ideas, views, or fixed ways of thinking. These sometimes affect our communication.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. How does the environment affect communication? Give an example.

A1. The environment in which communication is taking place plays a significant role in forming a perspective. A noisy or chaotic environment may cause barriers to communication.

Example: Two colleagues conversing at a loud office party may not be able to focus. They face difficulty understanding the information shared.

Q2. Surabhi and her friends were debating an artwork. Some of them think that it is a jungle scene, whereas others perceive it as the journey of a person. Which factor is influencing their perspective on that artwork?

A2. Visual perception is the factor that influences Surabhi and her friends. Visual perception is the brain’s ability to make sense of what we see through our eyes.

Q3. Elaborate on how the factors can become barriers in communication.

A3. Factor

How factor can become a barrier?

Language In case of the use of incorrect words, unfamiliar language and lack of detail, language can act as a barrier to communicate what one wishes to convey.

Visual perception Visual perception is the brain’s ability to make sense of what we see through our eyes.

Experience Letting our earlier experience stop us from understanding or communicating clearly.

Prejudice If we have biases against a particular group, we may be less likely to listen to their perspectives or give them the benefit of the doubt.

Feelings Our feelings and emotions, such as lack of interest or not trusting the other person, affect communication.

Environment Noise or disturbances in the surroundings may make communication difficult.

Culture Signs that have different meanings in different cultures, such as showing a thumb, may mean a good job for some people but may be insulting to others.

Answer Key

B 1. Prejudice    2. Attitude    3. Experience   4. Feelings

C 1. True.

2. False. Feelings can affect our ways of communication.

3. True.

Basics of Writing Skills

Writing helps us share ideas, feelings, and information in a way that lasts. In this digital era, with constantly expanding information, communication, and technology, writing is all the more significant. It is not just about sending an email or typing an essay; it is a skill that helps us express ourselves clearly and connect with others. A written document or information lasts longer and can be referred to later.

Good writing requires good command and understanding of the language in which one is communicating. It is important to ensure that the writing is free from grammatical errors. In order to improve one’s writing skills, it is pivotal to know about the fundamental elements of grammar.

Sentences

Sentences are the basic building blocks of written and spoken communication in many languages, including English. A sentence is group of words that combine to make complete sense. A sentence conveys a complete thought or idea and often serves as a complete statement or question. A sentence always starts with a capital letter and ends with a full stop, question mark, or exclamation mark.

For example:

Lavina loves to play badminton.

Dheeraj is going to Shimla.

Parts of Sentence

A sentence contains a subject and a predicate. A subject in a sentence is the thing or person about whom we get information from the sentence. A predicate in a sentence is what is being said about the person or thing in the sentence.

Subject (Who/what the sentence is about)

Predicate (What is being said about the subject)

Lavina loves to play badminton.

In this sentence, ‘Lavina’ is the subject, as the sentence is telling about what she loves and ‘loves to play badminton’ is the predicate, as it gives some information about Lavina, the subject.

The book is very captivating.

In this sentence, ‘The book’ is the subject, as it is something that is being talked about in the sentence and ‘is very captivating’ is the predicate, as it is giving some information about the book. It tells us what kind of book it is.

Subject-Verb-Object

Each sentence in the English language has a sentence structure. A sentence structure may consist of a subject, verb and/or an object. The Subject shows what or whom the sentence is about. A Verb shows an action and what the subject is doing. An Object describes who or what receives the action.

Example:

Sentence

The girl sat on the bed.

The girl sat the bed

The boy bought a book. The boy bought a book

She picked the ripe mangoes. She picked mangoes

The ladder fell on the bike.

Kinds of Sentences

Sentences are of four kinds.

Declarative/ Assertive

Kind of Sentences

Assertive or Declarative sentence

Imperative sentence

Interrogative sentence

Exclamatory sentence

The ladder fell the bike

Imperative

Kind of Sentences

Definition

It states facts, information, or arguments. It ends with a period (.).

It is used to give commands, make requests, offer advice, or issue instructions.

It doesn’t use subject, but ‘you’ is often understood as the implied subject.

It may end with a period (.) or an exclamation mark (!).

It is used to ask questions. It ends with a question mark (?).

It primarily uses the WH question words.

It states strong emotion, excitement, surprise, or other intense feelings.

It makes use of the exclamation mark (!) either in between the sentence or at the end.

Think and Tell

Examples

The sun sets in the West. New Delhi is the capital of India.

Please open the door.

Come here.

Have a good day!

What are you planning for the weekend?

Are you joining us for the group study tomorrow?

Well done!

Hurray! We won the match.

1. Identify the subject and the predicate in the given sentence. Students enjoy reading storybooks.

2. Give one example of an exclamatory sentence.

Phrases

A group of words that come together to form a unit but is not complete in itself is called a phrase. They do not make complete sense when used independently.

Example:

a fragrant flower

Phrase

Sentence

Rohan gifted his mother a fragrant flower.

In the first case, ‘a fragrant flower’ is a group of words that have been combined to make a unit. But does it make complete sense? In the second case, we get complete information about the flower. We are told that Rohan gifted the flower to his mother. going downhill

The men are going downhill to get the groceries.

In the first case, ‘going downhill’ is a group of words that has combined to make a unit. It is understood what going downhill means, but we do not have complete information. In the second case, we get complete information about who is going downhill and why.

Types of Phrases

Types of Phrases

Noun phrase

Verb phrase

Adjective phrase

Prepositional phrase

Adverb phrase

Description

It is a group of words that work as a noun in a sentence. It consists of a noun (the main word) and its modifiers, which can have adjectives, articles, pronouns, and other words that give additional information about the noun. He is looking at the dewy white mountains

It is a group of words that forms a verb in a sentence. It includes the main verb and the helping verbs within a sentence. I should have reported the incident to the police.

It is a group of words that describe a noun or a pronoun. The group of words provides more information about the noun in the sentence. The huge grey elephant raised its trunk.

It is a group of words that starts with a preposition and usually ends with a noun or pronoun, the object of the preposition.

They function as adjectives or adverbs to provide additional information in a sentence, typically about location, direction, time, or manner.

Ragini is dancing with great enthusiasm

It is a group of words that provides additional information about the action, verb, adjective, or adverb it modifies.

It describes how, when, where, why, or to what extent something is happening. The car is parked right outside the door

Identify the types of phrases in the sentences below.

1. A book on the shelf is a classic.

2. The big brown dog belongs to my neighbour. Think and Tell

Parts of Speech

Parts of speech are the essential building blocks that help us construct meaningful sentences, express our ideas clearly, and engage in effective communication with others. There are 8 parts of speech in the English language. These are nouns, pronouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, and interjections.

Parts of Speech

Nouns

Pronouns

Verbs

Adjectives

Adverbs

Prepositions

Definition

It is the name of a person, place, or thing.

It is a word used in place of a noun. It helps reduce repetition.

It expresses an action. It tells what the subject is doing in the sentence.

It describes the noun.

It is used to give details/information about the noun in a sentence.

It provides additional information about a verb, adjective, or another adverb in a sentence.

It often answers questions such as how, when, where, why, or to what extent an action is taking place.

It tells about location, direction, time, or the relationship between various elements in a sentence. Words like in, on, into, behind, beside, at, across, through, and between are prepositions.

Examples

Rohan is singing a song.

The vase is blue in colour.

Rohan is singing a song. He is enjoying it very much.

The vase is blue in colour. It is kept on the table.

Rohan is singing a song.

The dog is barking at the passerby.

Rohan is singing a classic song.

The blue vase is kept on the table.

Rohan is singing melodiously.

The books are organised neatly on the shelf.

The vase is on the table.

Rakesh is running across the corridor.

(continued...)

Parts of Speech Definition Examples

Conjunctions mean to connect.

Conjunctions

Interjections

They are words used to connect words, phrases, clauses, or sentences, creating a logical relationship between them.

Some of the conjunctions are and, or, but, although, because, otherwise, and so on.

It is used to express strong or sudden emotions, feelings, or reactions.

They are often one or two words and can stand alone in a sentence.

They are used to convey various emotions such as surprise, joy, anger, approval, disapproval, and more.

Did You Know?

The word conjunction comes from the Latin word ‘coniunctio’ which means to join together.

Articles

Although Rohan was enjoying singing, but he loves dancing.

Neither Kashika nor Simran will appear for the interview.

Wow! You sang melodiously.

Shh! The baby is sleeping.

Think and Tell

Fill in the blanks with the most appropriate part of speech.

1. The airplane flew (preposition) the clouds, and the passengers gazed (adverb) at the breathtaking view.

2. He said, ‘ ’ (interjection), when he realised he had left his wallet at home.

The words ‘a’, ‘an’, and ‘the’ are known as articles. Articles are generally used before nouns in a sentence.

Example:

After the long meeting, the cup of coffee tasted good.

By using the article the, we have shown that it was one specific meeting that was long. The use of the for cup of coffee refers to a specific cup of coffee that tasted good.

Example:

After a long meeting, a cup of coffee tastes particularly good.

By using the article a, we have created a general statement, implying that any cup of coffee would taste good after any long meeting.

Types of Articles

Articles are of two types: Definite and Indefinite Articles.

Example: ‘an hour’ (because ‘hour’ starts with a vowel sound).

‘a university’ (because ‘university’ starts with a consonant sound).

Definite Article (the) We use ‘the’ when we are talking about a specific thing that the listener or reader already knows about or can easily identify.

Did You Know?

The choice between ‘a’ and ‘an’ depends on the sound that follows, not just the first letter.

Examples:

1. The manager called a staff member to carry the files. (a particular manager)

2. Please pass the documents. (some specific documents)

Rules for Using the Definite Article (the)

1. Specificity: Use ‘the’ when referring to a specific item or group of items that the listener or reader can identify with or is already familiar with.

Example: ‘I saw the woman in a red saree, praying at the temple’. (You are referring to a particular woman in a red saree and a specific temple.)

2. Unique Objects: Use ‘the’ when referring to a unique object or something that is one of a kind.

Example: I visited the Taj Mahal last year. (There is only one Taj Mahal.)

3. Superlative Forms: Use ‘the’ before superlative adjectives (e.g., the best, the tallest) to indicate that something has the highest degree of quality.

Example: She is the best manager to work with. (Meaning she is the manager with the highest level of leadership quality.)

4. Ordinals: Use ‘the’ with ordinal numbers (e.g., the first, the second) when referring to specific items in a sequence.

Example: He won the first prize in the contest. (referring to a specific prize—the first one)

5. Geographical Features: Use ‘the’ before the names of oceans, seas, rivers, mountain ranges, and other geographical features.

Example: The Ganga River flows through eleven Indian states.

6. Countries With Plural Names: Use ‘the’ when referring to countries with plural names, such as ‘the United States’ or ‘the Netherlands’.

Example: I have never been to the Netherlands.

7. Musical Instruments: Use ‘the’ before the names of musical instruments.

Example: She plays the harmonium beautifully.

8. Newspapers: Use ‘the’ before the names of newspapers.

Example: I read the Times of India every morning.

9. Religious Books: Use ‘the’ with religious books to indicate a specific, well-known, and revered text within a particular religious tradition.

Example: I find comfort in reading the Bhagavad Gita every morning.

10. Nationality as a Noun: Use ‘the’ with nationalities when they are used as nouns to refer to the people of a specific country.

Example: The Japanese are known for their punctuality.

Indefinite Articles (a/an) We use ‘a’ or ‘an’ when we are talking about something in a general or non-specific way.

Examples: I have a meeting at 2 pm. She is an excellent candidate for the job.

1. Countable Nouns: Use ‘a’ or ‘an’ with countable nouns when you are referring to one nonspecific item or thing.

Example: I saw a dog in the park. (referring to one dog in general)

2. Singular Nouns: Use ‘a’ before singular nouns that begin with a consonant sound.

Example: He is a teacher. (Teacher starts with a consonant sound: /t/.)

Use ‘an’ before singular nouns that begin with a vowel sound.

Example: She has an umbrella. (Umbrella starts with a vowel sound: /ʌ/.)

3. Singular Nouns Starting with a Silent ‘H’: Use ‘an’ before singular nouns that begin with a silent ‘h.’

Example: He’s an honest person. (Honest starts with a silent ‘h’ and begins with the vowel sound of ‘o’)

4. Professions and Nationalities: Use ‘a’ or ‘an’ when referring to someone’s profession or nationality without specifying a particular person.

Example: She is a lawyer. (referring to any lawyer in general)

She is an Indian chef.

5. General Statements: Use ‘a’ or ‘an’ to make general statements about a group.

Example: ‘I need a book for my research’. (referring to any book that fits the research).

6. First Mention: When you introduce a new, singular, and nonspecific noun in a conversation or text, use ‘a’ or ‘an’.

Example: ‘I saw a car on the street’. (The car hasn’t been mentioned before in the conversation.)

Specific vs. nonspecific: ‘a’ and ‘an’ indicate a nonspecific or generic item, whereas ‘the’ indicates a specific or previously mentioned item.

‘I need a pen’. (Any pen will do.)

‘I need the pen you borrowed yesterday’. (referring to a specific pen)

Cases with zero article usage, often referred to as ‘zero article’, occur when we don’t use any article (neither ‘the’, ‘a’, nor ‘an’) before a noun.

Use

Remember

Uncountable and plural nouns: In the case of uncountable nouns or plural nouns, we do not use ‘a’ or ‘an’.

Incorrect: ‘I need a information.’ Correct: ‘I need information.’

Reason

I don’t like pets. Pets in general—general meaning. What time do you have breakfast? Meals- lunch, breakfast, dinner. 2021 was a great year. Years, months, days. He does not speak Telugu. I love studying Biology. Languages. School subjects. We went to the shopping mall last week. Next, last.

Connecting Ideas: Paragraphs

Now that we have read about sentences, let us learn how to put them together to make paragraphs. Think of a paragraph as a group of friends who share something in common. Just like how friends stay close, sentences within a paragraph remain interconnected as they discuss a common topic.

Here are two important things to remember when making paragraphs:

1. One Idea at a Time: Each paragraph should focus on one main idea. This helps your reader understand what you’re talking about.

2. Moving Smoothly: When you start a new idea, start a new paragraph. This helps your writing flow smoothly and keeps things organised.

A well-structured paragraph typically consists of three essential elements:

1. A topic sentence

2. Supporting details

3. A concluding sentence

Topic Sentence The topic sentence is like the headline of your paragraph. It introduces the main idea or point that the paragraph will discuss. It is a crucial element that guides the reader’s understanding of what’s to come.

Supporting Details Supporting details are sentences or examples that provide evidence or an explanation for the topic sentence. They add depth and context to your main idea.

Concluding Sentence The concluding sentence summarises the paragraph’s main point and often provides a smooth transition to the next paragraph.

Let’s look at an example.

Topic

Online Classes

Online classes have become a prominent mode of education, offering convenience, flexibility, and accessibility to learners of all ages.

In recent years, the shift towards online classes has been significant. One of the primary benefits is the flexibility they provide. Students can attend classes from the comfort of their own homes or while on the go, making it easier for those with busy schedules. Additionally, the vast array of online courses and programs cater to a diverse range of interests and fields, enabling students to pursue their passions or further their careers. Furthermore, the ability to access digital resources and interact with instructors and peers online fosters a global learning community, transcending geographical boundaries.

In conclusion, online classes have revolutionised education, offering a convenient and cost-effective way for individuals to learn and grow in an increasingly interconnected world.

Topic

Sentence Supporting Details

Concluding Sentence

Think of a well-written paragraph as a burger, with each part of it contributing to a distinct flavour. In the opening topic sentence, it is important to introduce the topic. Imagine it as the title of a chapter in a book; it gives you an idea of what’s to come. This is followed by detail/details about the topic. You may support the details with examples to strengthen your topic’s idea or argument. A good paragraph has a closing sentence that concludes the topic and the main idea. Your closing sentence wraps everything up neatly. It reminds your reader of the main idea you discussed and provides a sense of closure.

A well-structured paragraph is like a mini-story. It has a beginning, a middle, and an end. By following this structure, your writing becomes more organised, making it easier for your readers to understand and enjoy. So, think of paragraph structure as a friendly guide that helps your thoughts flow smoothly and cohesively, turning your writing into a delightful journey of expression.

Activity Time

Activity Time

Mindful Use of Technology (Individual Work)

Write a paragraph on the topic ‘Mindful Use of Technology’. Use the graphic organiser below.

Title

Topic Sentence

Supporting Details

Concluding Sentence

Chapter Checkup

A  Select the correct option.

1  Select the sentence that has highlighted the verb and underlined the adjective correctly.

a  Ram saw a beautiful lady in London. b Ram saw a beautiful lady in London.

c  Ram saw a beautiful lady in London d  Ram saw a beautiful lady in London

2  My brother exercises for hour every morning.

a  a b  an

c  the d  a/an

3  Select the declarative sentence from the options given below.

a  You are going the wrong way! b  Would you take a look?

c  The car is white and black. d  Do not go out.

B  Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  Leena watched ant walking over her shoe.

2  Yatin wanted to play indoor it was too cold.

3 are a part of speech that expresses strong feeling or emotion.

4  Samira grabbed the apple while going to school today.

C  State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  A well-structured paragraph may not have supporting details.

2  An adverb is a part of a sentence that modifies a verb.

3  A predicate in a sentence tells about the subject.

4  The definite article ‘the’ is used when nationality is referred to as a noun.

D  Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. Describe the parts of sentences. Give an example.

A1. A sentence contains a subject and a predicate. A subject in a sentence is the thing or person about whom we get an information from the sentence. A predicate in a sentence is what is being said about the person or thing in the sentence.

Example: Kashika is a hard-working girl.

‘Kashika’ is the subject about whom we get information from the sentence and ‘is a hard-working girl’ is a predicate as it gives information about the subject.

Q2. Give five usages of the definite article.

A2. The use of the definite article is as follows:

• Specificity: Use ‘the’ when referring to a specific item or group of items that the listener or reader can identify with or is already familiar with.

Example: ‘The girl in the blue dress is my best friend’.

• Unique Objects: Use ‘the’ when referring to a unique object or something that is one of a kind.

Example: I visited the Qutub Minar in Delhi.

• Superlative Forms: Use ‘the’ before superlative adjectives (e.g., the best, the tallest) to indicate that something has the highest degree of quality.

Example: She is the best manager to work with.

• Ordinals: Use ‘the’ with ordinal numbers (e.g., the first, the second) when referring to specific items in a sequence.

Example: He won the third prize in the drawing competition.

Q3. Nigma has to write a paragraph (15–20 sentences) on one of the topics ‘The Importance of Recycling’. Help her to write the paragraph, ensuring a clear introduction, supporting details, and a concluding statement.

A3. The Importance of Recycling

Recycling is crucial for environmental preservation and resource conservation, offering numerous benefits. Recycling serves as a powerful tool for waste reduction, minimising the burden on landfills while simultaneously reducing harmful greenhouse gas emissions during decomposition. Additionally, this practice plays a significant role in the conservation of natural resources. For example, recycling aluminium cans not only saves energy but also mitigates the need for energy-intensive processes associated with mining and refining new aluminium. Furthermore, by reusing paper products, we contribute to the protection of forests and their wildlife habitats. In conclusion, recycling is not only an individual responsibility but also a collective effort that holds the key to a more sustainable and environmentally conscious future, benefiting both current and future generations.

Answer Key

A 1. a    2. b       3. c

B 1. an   2. because   3. Interjections   4. red/juicy

C 1. False. A well-structured paragraph will have supporting details.

2. False. An adverb is a part of speech that modifies a verb, adverb, or adjectives in a sentence.

3. True.

4. True.

Unit Reflection

Key Terms

Articles: The words ‘a’, ‘an’, and ‘the’ are known as articles. Articles are generally used before nouns in a sentence.

Communication: Communication can be described as the act of transmitting information, thoughts, concepts or emotions between individuals or groups through many media, including verbal language, written expressions, non-verbal cues, body language, gestures, visual or auditory cues and modern technology. Various methods of communication are verbal, non-verbal and visual.

• Verbal communication: Verbal communication is a powerful and dynamic method of sharing ideas, thoughts and information, using spoken or written words.

ο Oral communication: Oral communication refers to exchange of information through spoken words. This type of communication involves conversations, discussions, presentations and speeches that occur face-to-face or through various electronic devices.

ο Written communication: Written communication entails utilising written language to share information. This type of communication includes various forms such as emails, letters, articles, social media posts and text messages.

• Non-verbal communication: Non-verbal communication implies interacting with others without the use of spoken or written language. Instead, it involves using facial expressions, hand signals, body postures, stances and other gestures.

• Visual communication: Visual communication is done using pictures, symbols and designs to share ideas and information.

Various elements of a communication cycle are:

• Sender: A sender, also known as a communicator or a source, starts the communication process by generating a message to be conveyed.

• Idea: An idea refers to the thoughts, concepts or information that a sender intends to transmit during a communication process.

• Encoding: Encoding includes putting ideas or information in a format that can be transmitted to a receiver.

• Communication channel: A communication channel is the medium through which an encoded message is transmitted from a sender to a receiver.

• Receiver: A receiver is an intended recipient of a message who actively listens, observes and interprets the message.

• Decoding: Decoding is the process by which a receiver interprets an encoded message and extracts its meaning. This process involves understanding the words, symbols or gestures used by the sender and translating them into thoughts or emotions.

• Feedback: Feedback is the response or reaction provided by a receiver to a message. The feedback helps confirm whether the intended message was received and understood accurately.

Sentence: A sentence is a group of words that combines to express a complete thought. A sentence conveys a complete thought or idea and often serves as a complete statement or question. There are four kinds of sentences:

• Assertive/Declarative sentence: It states facts, information or arguments and ends with a full stop (.).

• Imperative sentence: It is used to give commands, make requests, offer advice or issue instructions.

• Interrogative sentence: It is used to ask questions and ends with a question mark (?).

• Exclamatory sentence: It states strong emotion, excitement, surprise or other intense feelings. The exclamation mark (!) is used either in between the sentence or at the end.

Perspectives: Perspectives are ideas, views or fixed ways of thinking that affect how communication is conducted within a group or between individuals.

Phrase: A group of words that together form a unit but do not convey a complete thought is called a phrase. A phrase does not express a complete thought or idea when used independently.

Visual perception: Visual perception is the ability of our brain to infer what we see through our eyes.

Things to Remember

• Non-verbal communication involves expressions, posture, gestures, touch, space, eye contact and paralanguage.

• Good communication skills are important for building relationships, effective interaction, solving problems, sharing knowledge, expressing emotions, personal development, being a leader and negotiating with others.

• Various factors that affect perspectives in communication are language, visual perception, past experiences, prejudices, feelings, and environment and cultural differences.

• A sentence contains a subject and a predicate. A subject in a sentence is the thing or person about whom we get information from the sentence. A predicate in a sentence is what is being said about the person or thing in the sentence.

• Each sentence has a sentence structure that consists of a subject, verb and/or an object. The subject shows what or whom the sentence is about. The verb shows an action and what the subject is doing. The object describes who or what receives the action.

• Various types of phrases are noun phrase, verb phrase, adverb phrase, prepositional phrase and adjective phrase.

• Eight parts of speech are nouns, pronouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions and interjections.

• There are two types of articles – definite and indefinite.

• A well-structured paragraph typically consists of three essential elements–a topic sentence, supporting details and a concluding sentence.

A. Select the correct option.

Test Your Knowledge

1. Which of the following elements is not a part of non-verbal communication?

a. Expressions

c. Gestures

b. Postures

d. Email

2. Which of the following is not an attribute of communication?

a. Essential for human interaction and relationships

b. Vital for personal, professional and academic success

c. Discourages sharing of ideas, emotions and knowledge

d. Enables influence, persuasion and societal development

3. Which part of a language can act as a barrier to communication?

a. Correct terminology

c. Complete details

b. Unfamiliar jargons

d. Use of correct expressions

4. ‘Will you join us for the party tomorrow?’ What type of sentence is this?

a. Interrogative

c. Assertive

b. Exclamatory

d. Imperative

5. Rajan connecting with his friends through video conferencing is an example of which type of communication?

a. Written

c. Oral

b. Non-verbal

d. Visual

6. What is the response or reaction provided by the receiver to the sender’s message called?

a. Feedback

c. Idea

b. Sender

d. Receiver

7. What is a group of words that together form a unit but do not convey a complete idea?

a. Sentence

c. Subject

b. Phrase

d. Object

8. ‘A beautiful red butterfly is sitting on the flower’. Identify the type of phrase.

a. Noun phrase

c. Adverb phrase

b. Verb phrase

d. Adjective phrase

B. Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1. are generally used before nouns in a sentence.

2. Visual communication is when we use pictures, and designs to share ideas and information.

3. A in a sentence is the thing or person about whom we get information from the sentence.

4. The is the intended recipient of a message.

5. is the ability of our brain to infer what we see through our eyes.

C. State whether the following are True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1. An SMS is a written, typed or printed message that is enclosed in an envelope and sent through a postal service.

2. A noisy or chaotic environment will enhance the communication process.

3. Effective communication helps in establishing and maintaining strong relationships, whether with friends, family or colleagues.

4. The article ‘a’ should be used before the noun ‘hour’.

5. Good writing requires good command and understanding of the language in which one is communicating.

D. Short answer-type questions.

1. How are encoding and decoding parts of the communication cycle?

2. What are the advantages of visual communication?

3. What are the types of articles? Give an example each.

E. Long answer-type questions.

1. Differentiate between verbal and non-verbal communication.

2. Describe any three factors, which affect perspectives in communication.

3. What is a sentence? Explain the two parts of a sentence with an example.

F. Competency-based questions.

1. Rajan works as a marketing head in AND Digital Marketing Co. He was given preference over his peers because of his good communication skills. Tell us how these skills can help a person to grow in life and career.

2. Your friend Tina has decided to participate in a paragraph-writing competition. Her topic is ‘My Dream Career’. What things would you like to tell her in order to help her write a well-structured paragraph?

Self-management and Its Impact

In today’s dynamic world, it is important to regulate and control one’s thoughts, behaviour, and emotions to be able to lead an accomplished life on both a personal and a professional front. It empowers an individual to understand the complexities of life, make informed decisions, and maintain equilibrium.

Self-management

Self-management is the capability of an individual to exercise control over one’s feelings, ideas, thoughts, emotions, and behaviour to achieve the desired goals in both personal and professional settings. It helps an individual make effective decisions and maintain their well-being. It includes working towards the pre-determined goals and motivating oneself. Those who are better at managing themselves are able to set their priorities, manage their time, control their impulses, and take responsibility for their actions. They are more productive and content in life.

Everyone knows some form of self-management if they can take care of their most basic needs. To successfully accomplish the established future goals and to reach a high degree of self-management, a variety of abilities must be acquired, combined with discipline.

Example:

Rutuja works as a Product Analyst at Initiative EdTech Co. She manages herself efficiently and handles all her tasks, time, and emotions well. She sets her targets and manages several ongoing projects with tight deadlines and a constant stream of meetings. The way she has managed herself helps her to practice healthy living, enhances her productivity, reduces stress, and gives her sufficient time to spend with her family.

Self-management Skills

Self-management makes a person trustworthy and reliable. A few skills have been listed below that can help manage the overall personality of a person.

Skill

Self-awareness

Explanation

It is to know oneself as an individual—be it one’s likes, dislikes, strengths, or weaknesses, and reflect on one’s experiences to gain valuable insights into one’s personality.

Self-confidence

It is to believe in oneself that they can complete any task and face all the obstacles that come their way.

Self-motivation

It an intrinsic feeling that encourages one to complete tasks and achieve goals independently. It is an internal drive or enthusiasm that prompts one to take initiative.

Problem solving

It is to identify problems and challenges, thereby trying to find practical solutions to solve them. It includes analyzing issues and implementing strategies to resolve them.

Teamwork

It is to collaborate and work together as a team, and believe in the collaborative effort of different individuals who work towards the same goal.

Time management

It is the ability to successfully complete tasks within specified deadlines and the ability of an individual to minimise distractions and unproductive activities.

Goal setting

It requires one to plan clear and achievable goals that can be accomplished and to provide motivation for one’s personal or professional growth. A goal that an individual sets should be SMART. It should be specific, measurable, achievable, relevant, and time-bound.

Decision making

It is an individual’s ability to make informed decisions by evaluating options and consequences and taking the most appropriate way forward.

Stress management

It is the coping mechanism that enables an individual to handle work efficiently, even under pressure or difficulties.

Error Alert!

Self-management Is About Complete Control:

This is a misconception because self-management is not about eliminating all uncertainties or challenges but rather about effectively navigating them. It involves understanding and regulating oneself, making informed decisions, and adapting to changing circumstances.

Positive Results of Self-management

Effective self-management leads to improved productivity, personal well-being, and the fulfilment of long-term goals of an individual. As we grow in life, we encounter various challenges which increase stress and confusion in our minds. Hence, managing ourselves is of paramount importance for us to strive through these difficulties and complete our tasks on time.

Here are a few benefits of self-management:

Helps in Achieving Goals Self-management skills help individuals to have clear objectives in mind and how they have to move towards the end goal. Whether they are academic, career-related, or personal aspirations, effective self-management is very important.

Time Efficiency Managing one’s time is essential for all individuals to enhance one’s productivity. One has to allocate time wisely for tasks which are at priority to avoid unnecessary delays.

Think and Tell

How do you manage yourself when you approach your exams, have to cover vast syllabus, and encounter stressful situations?

Reduces Stress Self-management will help one reduce the stress of pending tasks as they will be dealt with according to priority.

Improves Relationships Self-management helps manage one’s relationships better due to better communication and emotional regulation. It also encourages people to build stronger social connections as they trust the selfmanaged individual and their capabilities.

Makes You More Organised If one plans one’s schedules wisely and allots time slots to different activities in a day, one will be able to organise their resources. Being well-organised contributes to enhanced productivity and efficiency.

Enhances Problem-solving Abilities Problem-solving skills are enhanced by self-management. A self-managed and aware individual is better equipped to deal with conflicts and disagreements.

Career Advancement Self-management skills are significant for growth in the workplace. It will help the employees fulfil their responsibilities, make quick decisions, and work well in a team environment.

Instils Discipline Discipline is crucial as it will help one to maintain focus, not pay attention to distractions, and stay committed to one’s tasks and goals.

Activity Time

Activity 1: Self-management Skills (Individual Work)

Draw an outline of your right hand and label each finger with different self-management skills that you possess.

Activity 2: Strength and Weakness Analysis (Individual Work)

Self-reflect to identify and analyse your strengths and areas to work on. Now, in an A4 sheet, create a table with two columns and list them down. Present them to the class. You may keep it at your study table at home to keep yourself motivated.

Chapter Checkup

A  Select the correct option.

1  Knowing and understanding your strengths is associated with

a  time management

c  self-awareness

2  Which of the following is not a self-management skill?

a  bargaining

c  setting a goal

3  Efficient time management involves

a  expressing affirmations and optimistic thinking

c  working together as a team

b  problem-solving

d  teamwork

b  self-motivation

d  problem-solving

b  allocating time wisely to tasks

d  none of these

B  Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  If you plan your schedules wisely, you will be able to your resources.

2  When you are , you know yourself as an individual, primarily your likes, dislikes, strengths, and weaknesses.

3  Believing in yourself that you can do any task is called

4  Self-management skills help individuals to have clear in mind.

C  State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  Self-management can help in overcoming challenges and difficulties.

2  Being able to manage yourself helps you deal with conflicts and challenges.

3  Self-management does not include stress management.

4  We can make informed decisions without evaluating our options.

D  Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What do you mean by self-motivation?

A1. Self-motivation refers to the internal drive or enthusiasm which prompts an individual to take initiatives, complete tasks, and achieve goals independently. If you are self-motivated, you try to put in efforts even when you face challenges and obstacles.

Q2. What are the benefits of self-management?

A2. Here are a few benefits of self-management:

• Helps in Achieving Goals: Self-management skills help individuals to have clear objectives in mind and how they have to move towards the end goal. Whether they are academic, career-related, or personal aspirations, effective self-management is very important.

• Time Efficiency: Managing one’s time is essential for all individuals to enhance their productivity. You have to allocate time wisely to tasks which are of priority to avoid unnecessary delays.

• Reduces Stress: Self-management will help you reduce the stress of pending tasks as they will be dealt with according to priority.

Q3. Ranita has to appear for a unit test tomorrow. However, she has not been able to prepare well and is under a lot of stress at the last moment. List a few self-management skills that she could have used while preparing for her test.

A3. Ranita should have:

• Set specific goals and objectives that she wanted to achieve.

• Managed her time well and completed her preparation within the deadline.

• Been self-aware about her strengths and weaknesses. She should have allocated more time to the portion which she was least confident about.

Answer Key A 1. c   2. a   3. b B 1. organise   2. self-aware   3. self-confidence   4. objectives/goals

C 1. True.

2. True.

3. False. Self-management includes stress management.

4. False. We can make informed decisions by evaluating all our options.

Self-confidence

It is very important to have confidence in oneself because it helps us build our aspirations and navigate the journey of life. While one may possess intelligence, dedication, and brightness, the absence of self-confidence and initiative can make it difficult for others to recognise an individual’s potential. Fortunately, there’s encouraging news: it’s achievable to enhance self-confidence by changing one’s perspective and behaviour.

Self-confidence

Self-confidence involves believing in one’s own judgement, abilities, and capabilities. It is reflected in one’s thoughts, ideas, and behaviour. It allows an individual to tackle difficult challenges and communicate well with others. Confidence is very significant for the health and psychological well-being of an individual. A self-confident person believes that they are capable of achieving their goals and will be an asset to any organisation. They typically possess these three qualities:

1. Trust in their own capability

2. Readiness to accept new challenges

3. Willingness to take risks

The illustrations below demonstrate these three qualities that a confident person has.

Are you sure you want to participate in this debate competition? You have not done it before.

Yes, I am sure I shall work hard and try to do a good job.

Are you nervous about tomorrow’s test? I am very scared. We got only one day to prepare.

Think and Tell

Nervousness will make things worse. Let’s try to do the best we can in one day.

Can you think of an instance in your life where you showed all three attributes of a confident person?

Qualities of a Self-confident Person

Here are a few qualities that are commonly associated with self-confident people:

Quality Example

Self-belief Consider Mahendra Singh Dhoni as an example, who steered his team to a World Cup victory. He had faith in both himself and his team, ultimately guiding them to a remarkable triumph on cricket’s global stage in 2011.

Hard work

Think about Dr APJ Abdul Kalam, who came from a humble background. He worked incredibly hard and became a scientist of legendary status. His dedication eventually took him all the way to becoming the President of India.

Commitment Consider Nelson Mandela, who never wavered in his commitment to achieving independence for his country, even when he was imprisoned. His dedication and determination led his nation to freedom.

Positive attitude Look no further than Malala Yousufzai, who faced immense challenges and even survived a life-threatening attack. Yet she maintains a positive outlook, continues her education, and fearlessly pursues her dreams, inspiring countless other young girls along the way.

Error Alert!

It is a common misconception that self-confidence is natural and unchangeable. The truth is that self-confidence can be developed through conscious efforts and strategies.

Factors Influencing Self-confidence

The three main factors that influence self-confidence are:

Factors Influencing Self-confidence

Social Factors

Cultural Factors

Physical Factors

Social Factors

A society is a collection of people living in close proximity to one another. Our society comprises our family, neighbourhood, friends, relatives, school, and even strangers. Everyone we know, and even those we don’t know, is a part of our society. The way we perceive ourselves and the world is significantly influenced by our earliest interactions with the society around us. In this way, society acts like a mirror, reflecting and shaping our self-perception. Therefore, society plays a vital role in moulding and nurturing our self-confidence.

Our sense of self can be impacted by the opinions of others, such as our parents, teachers, classmates, and friends. This can lead to an increase or decrease in self-confidence over time.

Below are a few examples illustrating how the society around us positively influences our self-confidence:

Example 1

Imagine being part of a football team. During an important match, you score a goal that contributes to your team’s victory. Your teammates and coach congratulate you, acknowledging your skill and quick thinking. This positive feedback boosts your self-confidence in your abilities on the field. Consequently, you begin to believe in your capacity to contribute further to your team’s success, encouraging you to take on more challenging plays and put in extra effort for future matches.

Example 2

There was a young artist named Maya who loved painting. She often created beautiful artwork at home. Acknowledging her talent, her parents displayed her paintings around the house and expressed their admiration for her creativity. Maya’s parents also enrolled her in art classes to enhance her skills. This support from her parents created a nurturing environment where she started believing in her artistic abilities, ultimately boosting her confidence and leading to further development of her talent.

It is also crucial to be aware of situations where social factors can negatively impact our self-confidence. Below are a few examples where negative social influences from peers, teammates, and parents can contribute to decreasing your self-confidence in different areas of life.

Example 1

Consider Mariam, a passionate science enthusiast in school. However, science was often considered a subject for boys in her school, and her classmates often mocked her enthusiasm. As time passed, Mariam became more self-conscious and less confident in openly expressing her interest. The negative comments from her peers created social pressure that undermined her confidence in pursuing her passion for science.

Example 2

Now, let us look at a scenario involving Simran. Her parents had high academic expectations and constantly compared her to her older sibling, who excelled in school. Even when Simran achieved good grades, her parents expressed disappointment and suggested she could do better. Simran’s ongoing comparisons and the absence of a supportive environment provided by her parents prompt her to question her values and capabilities, resulting in a decrease in her self-confidence.

The examples above highlight how external pressures, comparisons, and discouraging comments can weaken an individual’s self-belief and confidence. Lack of attention, punishments, excessive criticism, and negative remarks can break a person’s confidence. Therefore, it is essential to be mindful of how our actions and words influence the self-confidence of those around us.

Cultural Factors

The term “culture” describes the customs, beliefs, traditions, and values of a specific society, community, or ethnic group. Our cultural background shapes how we understand ourselves and the world around us. Hence, it naturally influences our self-confidence as well. Influences that come out of our culture, whether direct or subtle, can play a significant role in shaping our self-confidence. For instance, in some cultures, certain roles or professions may be traditionally associated with one gender, limiting the aspirations of individuals who do not fit these norms. These cultural norms can create self-doubt and hinder the development of self-confidence.

On the other hand, cultural factors can also boost self-confidence. Embracing and celebrating one’s cultural identity can nurture a sense of belonging and pride. When individuals are encouraged to celebrate their cultural heritage, it can lead to an enhanced sense of self-worth and self-confidence. India is a culturally diverse country, and therefore, we need to delve into how cultural factors can influence our self-confidence.

Below are a few examples illustrating how cultural factors influence our self-confidence:

Example 1

Let’s look at Priya, who comes from a community that highly values music and dance. Priya’s family and community support her interest in performing arts, providing her with opportunities to learn and showcase her talents. This positive cultural influence strengthens Priya’s self-confidence, as she feels valued and empowered to pursue her passion.

Example 2

Consider Rahul, born into a community with a long line of doctors. The cultural pressure to follow this legacy becomes overwhelming, and even though Rahul’s heart is in the arts, he feels compelled to pursue medical sciences. This conflict between his cultural expectations and personal interests impacts his self-confidence in making a choice that aligns with his passion.

In conclusion, cultural factors play a significant role in shaping our self-confidence. They can either empower us to embrace our uniqueness or limit us by imposing rigid expectations. By understanding how culture influences our self-perception, we can understand its impact and work towards building our self-confidence.

Physical Factors

Physical factors refer to elements like physique, mental state, and appearance. Our physical well-being, how we present ourselves, and how we perceive our appearances all contribute to influencing our self-confidence. It is crucial to be aware of how physical factors not only impact your confidence but also that of others. Hence, to create a self-confident society, it is important to embrace the unique appearances of people around us and treat those with physical disabilities with kindness and equality.

Here are a few examples to understand the influence of physical factors on a person’s self-confidence:

Example 1

Let us take a look at Neha, who makes it a habit to exercise regularly and eat nutritious meals. Her physical well-being directly affects her confidence levels. Regular exercise boosts her energy and improves her mood, which, in turn, enhances her self-confidence in various aspects of her life.

Example 2

Meet Rajeev, a determined individual with a physical disability. Due to his disability, everyday activities like walking demand additional effort from him. Rajeev’s confidence sometimes falters when he notices people treating him differently or excluding him. These moments make him doubt himself and reduce his self-confidence when interacting with others and going out.

Example 3

Now, let us introduce you to Gita, a girl who loves art and music. Gita often comes across images on the internet of celebrities with seemingly flawless skin. She feels pressured to look just like them to fit in and be considered attractive. As Gita compares herself to these impractical beauty ideals, she begins to doubt her appearance. This self-doubt affects her confidence, and she starts avoiding social gatherings and activities that she used to enjoy.

These physical factors vary from person to person, contributing to the development, enhancement, and maintenance of self-confidence. Other factors, such as self-esteem, personality traits, and the environment, can also play a role in influencing self-confidence.

Remember

Self-confidence is a multifaceted concept that is influenced by social, cultural, and physical factors.

Did You Know?

Studies have shown that smiling, even when you don’t necessarily feel like it, can improve your mood and boost your self-confidence.

Factors That Decrease Self-confidence

There are some factors that work against us and do not help us boost our confidence.

1. Negative Self-belief: When we convince ourselves that we cannot accomplish a certain task or goal, it creates self-doubt. This negative self-belief undermines our confidence and prevents us from even attempting to succeed. Over time, this mindset can result in opportunities being overlooked and a lack of progress.

2. Dwelling on Past Mistakes: Continuously replaying our past mistakes and dwelling on them can be harmful to our self-confidence. While it is important to learn from our errors, focusing on them too much and feeling bad about them can create a cycle of self-criticism and self-doubt.

3. Fear of Failure: Expecting instant success and avoiding situations where failure is a possibility can negatively impact self-confidence. When we fear failure, we may avoid trying new things or pursuing our goals, and this avoidance fuels the belief that we cannot succeed.

4. Negative Surroundings: Being surrounded by individuals with a consistently negative attitude can influence our mindset. Negative speech and pessimistic viewpoints can seep into our thoughts and self-perception, impacting our self-confidence. Constant exposure to negativity can lead us to question our abilities and values.

Thus, building self-confidence involves challenging negative self-beliefs, understanding past mistakes as learning experiences, embracing the possibility of failure as a part of growth, and seeking positive and supportive influences.

Tips to Build Self-confidence

Using these tips and strategies in our lives can make a remarkable difference in how we perceive ourselves and our capabilities. It is important to remember that building self-confidence is a journey that requires patience, practice, and a willingness to embrace both successes and failures.

Get Rid of Negative Thoughts Getting rid of negative thoughts is a significant step in building one’s self-confidence and maintaining it. A person has to change their mindset and shift their focus to more positive things in life. One should be aware of one’s negative thoughts and how they get triggered. One should also look for the causes of these thoughts whether they are based on facts, some sort of assumption, or irrational fear. Then, an individual should give themselves positive self-talk and change these negative thoughts into positive ones. One should also try to set realistic and achievable expectations and goals; otherwise, it would create a lot of problems. Meditation and practising a hobby enable one to get rid of negative thoughts.

For example: Zoya is a graphic designer who faced some difficulties at work. She was getting a lot of negative thoughts about quitting her job. However, she did not let those negative thoughts get the better of her and choose to focus on the lessons she learned from her experience. She acknowledged the areas that needed improvement and took active steps to enhance her skills. This not only helped her overcome challenges but also enhanced her self-confidence in her professional abilities.

Think Positively Positive thinking involves focusing on the positives, understanding, and working towards improvement rather than focusing on the negatives. This mindset will help a person believe in their abilities, take on challenges, and achieve their goals. When faced with challenges, a positive mindset enables an individual to view difficulties as natural and perhaps even as opportunities for growth. A positive attitude has a direct impact on their energy levels and overall performance. One is more likely to feel motivated and enthusiastic about their tasks. It will enhance their ability to communicate effectively, collaborate with people, and adapt to changing environments. Thus, a positive mindset promotes overall well-being and spreads happiness to those around us. When one focuses on the positives in their life, they experience lower stress levels, improved mental health, and a greater sense of contentment.

Get rid of negative thoughts

Think positively

Find happiness in small things

Stay clean, hygienic and smart Chat with positive people

Tips to Build Self-confidence

For example: Charan had set a goal to improve his public speaking skills. He began by participating in small group discussions and gradually progressed towards giving presentations. After each successful public speaking experience, Charan took a moment to acknowledge his achievement. Even when he fumbled during a presentation, he recognised it as a chance to learn and become better. Over time, Charan’s efforts and positive mindset not only improved his public speaking skills but also boosted his self-confidence.

ELIMSStart Your Day in a Positive Way:

Begin each day by setting a positive tone. Reflect on something one is grateful for. One can even read or watch something that boosts their mood.

Manage Time to Relax:

Allocate time for relaxation and self-care. Engage in activities that bring joy and calmness, like reading, taking walks, or practising deep breathing exercises. By managing stress, one can create room for a positive mindset to flourish.

Imagine the Best in Any Situation:

Instead of dwelling on potential failures, focus on the opportunities that lie ahead.

Learn to Take Feedback in a Positive Way:

Consider feedback as an opportunity for learning and growth. For example, if a teacher provides feedback on an assignment, consider it valuable guidance to improve one’s work.

Express Gratitude:

Regularly express gratitude for the good things in your life. Whether it is a supportive friend or a good book, acknowledging these aspects cultivates a positive perspective.

Positive thinking is a powerful tool that can shape one’s experiences and outlook on life. By embracing the ‘SMILE’ acronym, one can actively nurture a positive attitude and get numerous rewards.

Find Happiness in Small Things One should try to appreciate the little joys in life, as it will cultivate a positive mindset and enhance one’s selfconfidence. An individual can reflect on small positive things in their daily life, as it would boost their mood, help them appreciate present moments, and increase self-awareness. One can have meaningful interactions with one’s friends and family, spend time in nature, celebrate minor achievements, pursue hobbies and activities that they enjoy, and be delighted by the simple everyday pleasures of life. Everyone should remind themselves of the positive aspects of their lives and the people who support them unconditionally.

For example: Riya enjoys her life to the fullest even amid her hectic schedule as a finance manager at a marketing firm. She finds happiness in her cup of tea, spending time with her parents, and enjoying the fresh breeze while taking a walk in the park. This helps her to remain motivated and enhances her confidence.

Stay Clean, Hygienic and Smart Every individual should maintain good personal hygiene, cleanliness, and a well-groomed appearance. It will boost their confidence and help them communicate well with others. It will reduce any sort of doubt that you have in your mind regarding your appearance. Everyone must maintain a daily routine to take care of their hygiene and also try to dress appropriately according to the context of the situation. Regular physical activity and having a balanced diet will contribute to overall well-being and appearance. One should embrace their unique qualities and not try to make comparisons with other people.

Chat With Positive People Positive individuals provide encouragement, inspiration, and support, which helps other people feel more confident. They will help others believe in their abilities, reinforce their achievements, and create a supportive and uplifting atmosphere. They can also serve as role models and inspire others to adopt an optimistic attitude. It is beneficial to take feedback from positive individuals, as they can be constructive and guide us to develop our skills. Positive conversations reduce negativity and unnecessary stress.

These strategies or tips can be beneficial for all individuals and boost their self-confidence. It is a gradual process, and it is normal to have moments of self-doubt. But by adopting these tips consistently, an individual can develop a more positive mindset.

Activity Time

Activity Time

Activity 1: Role Play on Building Self-confidence (Pair Work)

In pairs, participate in a role-play exercise to practice building self-confidence in a job interview scenario. Each pair will consist of one “interviewer” and one “interviewee.” The interviewer’s role is to ask relevant job interview questions and observe the interviewee’s responses, confidence, body language, and communication skills. The interviewee’s role is to respond to the questions, showcase confidence, maintain positive body language, and effectively communicate their strengths. Each pair will perform the role-play in front of the whole class.

Activity 2: Chart on Positive Affirmations (Group Work)

Positive affirmations are empowering statements that can boost self-confidence and set a positive mindset for the day ahead. Each student will be creating their own set of positive affirmations/metaphors. These affirmations will serve as reminders of their strengths, capabilities, and positive qualities. Each affirmation should begin with a positive statement, such as “I am capable of handling challenges”, “I believe in myself”, and “I am confident in expressing my thoughts and ideas”. Each student has to write at least two affirmations on the chart paper. The completed chart should be put on the class board.

Activity 3: Helping Others (Group Work)

Form a group of three to four students. Look around your school and neighbourhood for people or animals who needs your assistance. Talk about your experience in the class and how you felt after extending your help.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  How does a person’s self-confidence get impacted?

a  By getting rid of negative thoughts b  By chatting with negative people

c  By finding happiness in small things d  By thinking positively

2  Which of the following is NOT a quality of a confident person?

a  Trust in their own capability

c  Fear of taking risks

b  Readiness to accept challenges

d  Willingness to learn

3  Which of the following factors impact your self-confidence?

a  Physical

c  Social

b  Cultural

d  All of these

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  Regularly express for the good things in your life.

2  Embracing one’s identity can foster a sense of belonging and pride.

3  Physical factors refer to elements like physique, mental state, and .

4  Positive individuals provide , inspiration and support, which help other people feel more confident.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  Self-confidence is natural and unchangeable.

2  Dwelling on past mistakes can harm self-confidence.

3  Fear of failure can positively impact self-confidence.

4  Society and culture have a strong influence on an individual’s self-confidence.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. Define self-confidence.

A1. Self-confidence involves believing in one’s own judgement, abilities, and capabilities. It is reflected in one’s thoughts, ideas, and behaviour. It allows you to tackle difficult challenges and communicate well with others. A self-confident person believes that they are capable of achieving their goals and will be an asset to any organisation. They typically possess these three qualities:

• Trust in their own capability.

• Readiness to accept new challenges.

• Willingness to take risks.

Q2. How can physical factors influence a person’s self-confidence?

A2. Physical factors like health, appearance, and physical abilities can significantly influence self-confidence. Our physical well-being, how we present ourselves, and how we perceive our appearances all contribute to influencing our selfconfidence. For example, if a person is in good physical health and feels confident about their appearance, they may have high self-confidence. Conversely, physical challenges or disabilities may impact self-confidence if the individual perceives these challenges as limitations.

Q3. Jayesh works as a consultant at Recent Publishing House. He is feeling very low these days and not able to bring any new ideas to the table. Due to his messed-up professional life, his personal life is also getting impacted. How do you think he can regain his self-confidence?

A3. Jayesh can regain his self-confidence by:

• Getting rid of negative thoughts that are arising in his mind.

• Thinking positively and ensuring himself that he will be able to perform well in the future.

• Being grateful for positive things in his life.

• Enjoying small things in his daily routine and spending time with his family.

• Going out for nature walks which will help him to think clearly and release the pressure from his mind.

• Having conversations with positive people around him who will encourage and inspire him.

Answer Key

A 1. b   2. c   3. d

B 1. gratitude    2. cultural   3. appearance   4. encouragement

C 1. False. Self-confidence can be developed through conscious efforts and strategies. 2. True.

3. False. Fear of failure negatively impacts self-confidence.

4. True.

Unit Reflection

Key Terms

Self-awareness: It is to know oneself as an individual—be it one’s likes, dislikes, strengths, or weaknesses, and reflect on one’s experiences to gain valuable insights into their personality.

Self-confidence: Self-confidence involves believing in one’s own judgement, abilities, and capabilities. It is reflected in one’s thoughts, ideas, and behaviour.

Self-management: Self-management is the capability of an individual to exercise control over one’s feelings, ideas, thoughts, emotions, and behaviour to achieve the desired goals in both personal and professional settings.

Self-motivation: It an intrinsic feeling that encourages one to complete tasks and achieve goals independently. It is an internal drive or enthusiasm that prompts one to take initiative.

Stress management: It is the coping mechanism that enables an individual to handle work efficiently, even under pressure or difficulties.

Time management: It is the ability to successfully complete tasks within specified deadlines and the ability of an individual to minimise distractions and unproductive activities.

Things to Remember

• Various self-management skills that an individual should possess are self-awareness, self-confidence, self-motivation, problem solving, teamwork, time management, goal setting, decision-making, and stress management.

• Effective self-management helps in achieving goals, managing one’s time, reducing stress, making a person more organised, improving relationships, enhancing problem solving abilities, career advancement and instilling discipline.

• A self-confident person is ready to accept new challenges, willing to take risks, and has trust in their own capabilities.

• A few qualities that are commonly associated with self-confident people are self-belief, hard work, commitment, and a positive attitude.

• The three main factors that influence self-confidence are social, cultural, and physical.

• There are some factors that work against us and do not help us boost our confidence, like negative self-belief, dwelling on past mistakes, fear of failure, and negative surroundings.

• To build self-confidence, one should think positively, stay clean, hygienic and smart, find happiness in small things, chat with positive people, and get rid of negative thoughts.

Test Your Knowledge

A. Select the correct option.

1. is to know about one’s likes, dislikes, strengths, and weaknesses, and reflect on one’s experiences.

a. Self-confidence

c. Self-management

b. Self-awareness

d. Self-motivation

2. Which factor can decrease an individual’s self-confidence?

a. Dwelling on past mistakes

c. Positive self-belief

b. Positive surroundings

d. No fear of failure

3. Which of the following is not a self-management skill?

a. Teamwork

c. Decision making

b. Time management

d. Taking a lot of stress

4. A benefit of managing one’s own self can be:

a. can’t achieve goals

c. can’t solve problems

b. time efficiency

d. no discipline in life

5. Which of the following is not a quality of a self-confident person?

a. Self-belief

c. Negative attitude

c. Hard work

d. Commitment

B. Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1. is the capability of an individual to exercise control over one’s feelings, ideas, thoughts, emotions, and behaviour to achieve the desired goals.

2. The factors which impact self-confidence are social, , and physical.

3. SMART goals stand for specific, measurable, , relevant, and time-bound.

4. A is a collection of people living in close proximity to one another.

5. is the ability to successfully complete tasks within specified deadlines.

C. State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1. Self-management makes a person trustworthy and reliable.

2. Being surrounded by individuals with a consistently negative attitude can influence our mindset.

3. One should not appreciate the little joys in life.

4. Self-management is about eliminating all uncertainties or challenges.

5. Self-confidence is a multi-faceted concept that is not influenced by any factor.

D. Short answer-type questions.

1. Define self-management.

2. How will staying smart, hygienic, and clean affect a person’s self-confidence?

3. What are a few qualities that a self-confident person possesses?

E. Long answer-type questions.

1. How can social factors impact an individual’s self-confidence?

2. What are the self-management skills that can help a person manage his overall personality?

3. Give a few tips to build self-confidence in an individual.

F. Competency-based questions.

1. Tanuj works as an associate product analyst in a multinational firm. He has learnt to manage himself very well. How will these skills help him to ensure that he is more productive than his colleagues?

2. Kashika and her colleagues share a great bond. They share their emotions, achievements, and failures with each other. Kashika has begun to notice that her work friends mock the failures of others. So much so that she stopped sharing things with them. This had an impact on her, and she began to feel insecure and underconfident when being around them. What is the factor that has impacted Kashika’s confidence?

Role of ICT

The modern society is greatly driven by Information and Communications Technology. ICT stands for Information and Communication Technology. It is a broad term that includes a wide range of technologies and tools used for handling, processing, storing, and communicating information. All communication devices, cell phones, radio, television, and computers along with satellite systems, are ICT tools.

It is a combination of wired and wireless networking tools that enables receiving and transmitting information and communicating through varied mediums.

Key Components of ICT

The following are the key components of ICT:

Computers Desktops, Personal computers, laptops, tablets, and smartphones help in processing and storing data.

Software Software applications like operating systems, LibreOffice applications (Writer, Calc, Impress, Base), multimedia tools, web browsers, and specialised applications perform specific tasks and help run ICT devices.

Internet The Internet is a global network that connects computers and servers. It allows users to get information, communicate, and share data across the world.

Telecommunication Communication technologies like telephones (landlines and mobiles), messaging, emails, video conferencing, and social media platforms are part of ICT.

Networking Computer networks, both wired and wireless, simplify the exchange of information between devices and across the internet. Wired (e.g., Ethernet) or wireless (e.g., Wi-Fi) networking enables the creation of local area networks (LANs) within homes or businesses and a wide area networks (WANs) that connect computers across larger geographical areas.

Data Storage Hard drives, solid-state drives (pen drives, SD cards), cloud storage (Google drive, iCloud), and external storage devices help ICT in storing data.

Think and Tell

When was the last time you saw or used a landline phone to make a call?

Error Alert!

The Cloud is Actually in the Sky! Cloud, literally means the sky, but in computer language, the cloud refers to remote servers and data centres located all around the world.

Information Security It involves measures and protocols needed for protecting the information and ensuring the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of data and information. It helps prevent data breaches, unauthorised access, and cyberattacks.

Multimedia ICT allows integration of text, images, audio, video, and interactive elements, contributing to richer content experiences.

Role of ICT

Think and Tell

You and your friends are making a presentation on a software application. What are the things that you will use to make your presentation interesting?

ICT tools have become an integral part of our lives and have a huge impact on the way we live, work, and interact with each other.

Importance of ICT in Personal Life

ICT has deeply impacted our personal lives. It has made possible the convenience, efficiency, connectivity, and accessibility of information and resources at every doorstep. It has become part of our lives at varied levels.

Purpose Tools

Connecting with people Smartphones, Messaging Apps, Social Media Platforms.

Entertainment Television, Radio, Tablets, Computer Applications, and Web Browsers for watching movies, listening to music and news.

Learning and information

Online Shopping

Internet enables us to watch educational videos, to find answers to questions, learn new things online.

Applications that allow people to shop easily from the comfort of their homes.

Organisation Tools like note-taking and digital calendars enhance the productivity of the people.

Money management

Making friends

Healthy living

Travel

Online banking apps have made sending and receiving of money secure and convenient. It can be used for paying bills.

Social media platforms have helped people connect with those who share common interests and make new friends.

Many health and fitness-related apps have allowed people to keep track of their daily steps and oxygen levels.

ICT has enabled people to travel across the globe by easy booking of train/bus/airplane tickets and hotels.

Importance of ICT at Workplace

ICT plays a very significant role in our workplace and has been contributing immensely to the economy through its seamless integration of varied sectors like education, business, communication, entertainment, agriculture, and research. At the workplace, it contributes to improved efficiency through different computer software and applications. These enable keeping important data safe and organised; collaborating with others on projects; training and learning skills needed for performing the job effectively; and presenting data and information using multimedia elements.

Example: In the education sector, the integration of ICT tools has enhanced the learning experiences through the use of videos, audios, images, and online quizzes while making learning more interactive. It provides a wide range of content for the students and teachers to learn from. They enable teachers to record students’ data and map their learning journey.

Sectors

Healthcare

Banking and finance

Use of ICT

It helps in maintaining electronic health records, telemedicine, testing, and consultancy for patients living far away.

It has enabled online banking, making payments through mobile apps, and managing finances efficiently.

Agriculture It helps in weather forecasting and enables farmers to do research and training in the field of agriculture for better farming practices.

Manufacturing and industry

ICT can help automate the production process and make use of the latest technologies and machinery for mass production and manufacturing.

Business Tools like note-taking and digital calendars enhance the productivity of the people.

Advertising and marketing

Fashion and retail

It enables marketing and advertising for products and services on online platforms through social media campaigns and analytics for advertising agencies.

It has helped in the online selling of goods and services to customers through applications, allowing virtual try-ons, and supply chain management for the fashion industry.

We are highly dependent on these tools and technology for our day-to-day life and for the efficient and effective functioning of our work. The constant development and integration of these technologies have transformed the way we live, work, learn, and interact, thereby improving our quality of life.

ICT Tools

ICT tools like smartphones, tablets, radio, televisions, laptops, and computers are part and parcel of modern society. The accessibility of these tools has made our daily chores easier and improved our quality of life.

Smartphones Mobile phones are portable communication devices that allow people to make and receive calls and send and receive messages. On the other hand, smartphones are advanced mobile phones. They allow one to do things one normally does on a computer. It has a touchscreen that permits users to browse the internet, take pictures, play games, and use multiple apps with touch. It has many helpful features like note-taking, voice assistance, GPS for maps, setting reminders, and so on. They have multiple apps for communications, entertainment, shopping, and banking purposes.

Tablets Tablets are portable computing devices that are bigger than smartphones but smaller than laptops. They have a flat, rectangular design with a touchscreen interface. Unlike laptops, they do not have a physical keyboard. Tablets are lightweight, easy to carry, and have a wide range of functions. They also have productivity applications like word processors, spreadsheets, and presentation software, making them useful for work-related tasks. They are suitable for a wide range of activities, making them popular among individuals of all ages for both personal and professional use.

Did You Know?

Google’s original name was “Backrub.” It was changed to “Google” in 1997, inspired by the word “googol,” which refers to the number 1 followed by 100 zeros, representing the vast amount of information the search engine aimed to organise.

Television Televisions, also known as TVs, are being used for a long time. They were invented in 1927, and since then, they have been making a significant impact on our society by influencing people, shaping culture, entertaining, and giving information. Television uses moving pictures with sounds. It has brought entertainment, news, and educational shows inside every house. Televisions have evolved over the years, and now we also have smart TVs that can connect to the internet and provide a wide range of options from online sources.

Radio Radio is one of the oldest and first ICT tools. It allows people to listen to audio broadcasts for entertainment, information, weather forecasts, commentary, and educational purposes. Radio uses radio waves to broadcast audio in long range. With the advent of the internet, radio has become a more interactive medium, allowing users to access content from anywhere and at any time, at their convenience.

Email Electronic Mail, commonly known as email, enables the exchange of digital messages between individuals and organisations. It has become a primary method of communication in both personal and professional environments. One can have access to their email on their smartphones, laptops, and tablets. It requires an internet connection and allows users to attach files in the form of images, audio, video, or documents.

E-newspaper An e-newspaper, or electronic newspaper, is a digital version of a traditional print newspaper that is accessible through electronic devices such as computers, tablets, smartphones, and e-readers. This allows readers to access news content anytime and anywhere, whether they’re commuting, travelling, or simply relaxing at home. E-newspapers can provide real-time updates and live coverage through text updates, images, and even live video streams.

E-readers An e-reader, short for electronic reader or e-book reader, is a specialised electronic device designed primarily for reading digital books and other written content. It serves as an ICT tool with a focus on helping readers enjoy the experience of reading at their own convenience. This is an environment-friendly initiative, allowing readers to have access to a library of books at their fingertips.

Difference Between ICT Tools

Portability (Easy to carry) Yes Yes No Yes

Applications Uses many applicationsUses many applications

Purpose Communication, Entertainment, Information Access

Communication, Entertainment, Information Access

Internet Yes Yes

Storage

Battery

Economical

Accessibility over large distance

May or may not use some applications No applications used

Entertainment, Information Access

May or May not SMART TV uses internet

Audio Content for Communication, Entertainment, Information Access

May or May not Podcasts are forms of radio broadcasts that use internet

Comes with different storage capacity Comes with higher storage capacity No storage capacityNo storage capacity

Operates on rechargeable battery

Comes in all price ranges

Can be accessed from places with network and internet coverage

Operates on rechargeable battery

Operates on power, not battery

Operates on power, not battery

Expensive than smartphones Comes in all price ranges Cheapest of all four

Can be accessed from places with network and internet coverage

Content control/ moderation No control No control

Accessible only within a given room or area

Controlled by Censor Board

Can be accessed through satellite or internet coverage

Controlled by Telecom Regulartory Authority

GPS Yes Yes No No

Activity Time

Activity 1: ICT in Routine Life

(Group Work)

In a group of 4–5 students, perform a role play presenting the important role of ICT tools in our personal and work lives. Each role-play should include at least two scenes showing the personal scenario and a work environment.

Activity 2: Importance of ICT (Group Work)

Divide the class into small groups of 4–5 students. Ask the groups to choose one of the two topics and discuss the role of ICT. They shall make a poster/ collage on the selected topic based on the ideas discussed.

Topics:

Role of ICT at Workplace

Role of ICT in personal life

Activity 3: Advertising ICT Tools

(Group Work)

In a group of 4–5 students, prepare a sales pitch for one of the ICT tools. Highlight the key advantages of the chosen tool in your presentation. You may prepare a poster to support your presentation.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  What is the main benefit of using ICT for information access?

a  Limited access to information

b  Instant access to a wide range of information

c  Offline access only

d  Access to information only during the daytime

2  Which aspect of personal life can be enhanced by ICT through online courses and tutorials?

a  Physical fitness b  Social interactions

c  Language learning d  Shopping experience

3  What is the significance of ICT in emergency situations?

a  No relevance in emergencies

b  Provides only entertainment during emergencies

c  Offers access to emergency services, information, and resources

d  Causes more problems during emergencies

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  The use of ICT tools has led to the rapid exchange of information and across the globe.

2  ICT tools have improved in the workplace, allowing teams to work together efficiently.

3  One of the potential risks of using ICT tools is theft, where sensitive information is accessed without authorisation.

4 is an ICT tool that enables users to search for information on the World Wide Web.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  E-readers are electronic devices designed for playing games and watching movies.

2  ICT has no role in managing personal finances or budgeting.

3  Remote work and online learning are made possible by ICT tools like video conferencing and collaboration platforms.

4  ICT primarily focuses on communication and does not impact other areas of life.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. Explain the meaning of “ICT tools” and provide two examples of commonly used ICT tools.

A1. ICT tools also known as Information and Communication Technology, is a broad term for various technological devices, software applications, and platforms that help us to communicate, access information, process data, and perform various tasks in personal, professional, educational, and other sectors.

Two examples of commonly used ICT tools are:

Smartphones: Smartphones are versatile ICT tools that combine communication, computing, and connectivity features. They allow users to make calls, send messages, access the internet, use apps for various purposes, take photos and videos, and perform a wide range of tasks.

Email Services: Email services like Gmail, Outlook, and Yahoo Mail provide platforms for sending and receiving electronic messages over the Internet. They enable communication through text, attachments, and media files, making it easy to correspond professionally and personally.

Q2. Describe how ICT tools have revolutionised the healthcare sector.

A2. ICT tools have sparked a profound revolution in the healthcare sector, transforming how medical services are delivered, accessed, and managed. Telemedicine platforms and video conferencing enable remote consultations, connecting patients with healthcare professionals, regardless of location. Electronic Health Records (EHRs) digitise patient information, streamlining data management, reducing errors, and improving care coordination. Smart watches and mobile apps empower patients to monitor vital signs and chronic conditions in real-time, allowing for proactive interventions.

Q3. Differentiate smartphones and tablets on the basis of any three aspects.

A3. Smartphones and tablets are different from each other in the following ways:

AspectsSmartphones

Purpose

Communication, Entertainment, Information Access

Communication, Entertainment, Information Access

Entertainment, Information Access

Audio Content for Communication, Entertainment, Information Access

Economical Comes in all price ranges Expensive than smartphones Comes in all price rangesCheapest of all four

Storage Comes with different storage capacity Comes with higher storage capacity No storage capacityNo storage capacity

Answer Key

A 1. b   2. c   3. c

B 1. communication   2. efficiency 3. cyber/data 4. Internet

C 1. False. E-readers are electronic devices designed for reading digital books and other written content.

2. False. ICT has a significant role in managing personal finances or budgeting.

3. True.

4. False. ICT has a huge impact on the way we live, work, and interact with each other.

Components of Computer System

Acomputer system comprises various interdependent components that work collectively to execute tasks and process data. Understanding these components is crucial to understanding the functioning of a computer system.

Basic Components of a Computer

Following are the basic components of a computer system:

Central Processing Unit (CPU)

The Central Processing Unit (CPU) is known as the brain of the computer. It executes instructions and performs calculations. It consists of the Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU), the Control Unit (CU), and the Memory Unit (MU). The ALU performs arithmetic and logical operations, while the Control Unit coordinates and manages the various components of the CPU.

Memory

Memory in a computer system is vital for storing and accessing data quickly. There are two types of memory: Random Access Memory (RAM) and Read-Only Memory (ROM). RAM is a type of computer memory that is used to store data and the machine code that is currently being used. It is a volatile memory, which means that data is stored temporarily in RAM and lost forever when the computer is turned off. On the other hand, ROM is a type of memory from which information can only be read. It is a non-volatile memory, as data is stored permanently in ROM and cannot be altered.

Motherboard

The motherboard is the primary circuit board that connects all the essential components of a computer system. It houses the CPU, memory, and the connectors for peripheral devices such as the hard drive, CD/DVD drive, and graphics card.

Storage Devices

Storage devices are used for long-term data storage. These can include Hard Disk Drives (HDDs), Solid-State Drives (SSDs), external storage devices like USB drives, and external hard drives.

Hardware and Software of a Computer System

Computer systems rely on both hardware and software components, which are integral for ensuring compatibility with the users.

Components of Computer

Hardware

Hardware refers to the physical components of a computer system. These are physical devices that can be seen or touched. Computer hardware can be categorised into different types—input devices, output devices, storage devices, and internal components.

1. Input Devices: These devices enable the users to input data and communicate with the computer system. Some examples of input devices include the keyboard, a mouse, and a scanner.

2. Output Devices: These devices display the results of user-performed tasks. Some examples of output devices are monitors, printers, and speakers.

3. Storage Devices: These devices are used to store data and are often referred to as secondary storage. Some examples of storage devices include CDs, DVDs, and hard disks.

4. Internal Components: These critical hardware components are integral parts of the computer system. Some examples of internal components include the CPU and the motherboard.

Software

Software is a set of instructions or programs given to the computer to complete a task. It is a part of the computer that cannot be touched or felt. Some examples of software are Windows, LibreOffice Writer, Microsoft Excel, PowerPoint, Google Chrome, Photoshop, and MySQL.

There are two types of computer software—system software and application software:

1. System Software: System software controls the overall working of a computer. It manages all the input and output operations of the computer. For example, the operating system is a part of the system software that makes a computer run smoothly.

2. Application Software: Application software facilitates fundamental computer operations. It performs specific tasks for users. This category includes word processors, spreadsheets, and a variety of other task-specific programs. There are two types of application software: general-purpose software and customised software.

Role and Functions of RAM and ROM

Did You Know?

The operating system manages computer hardware and software. It provides the users with an interface through which they communicate with the computer.

In computer systems, the memory is a hardware component of the system that stores data and information. The computer memory can be classified into two main types—primary memory and secondary memory. The primary memory is further divided into two main types—RAM and ROM.

Random Access Memory (RAM)

RAM, or Random Access Memory, serves as the primary memory in a computer system. It temporarily holds data and instructions that the computer is currently processing. RAM allows the CPU to access data quickly, enabling efficient multitasking and the smooth execution of programs.

Since it is a volatile memory, RAM loses its data when the computer is powered off. RAM, also referred to as the main memory of the computer, enables the CPU to have direct access to all its memory cells. RAM is mainly composed of semiconductive materials and typically takes the form of integrated circuits (ICs).

Read Only Memory (ROM)

ROM, or Read Only Memory, constitutes a primary computer memory that is used to store instructions and programs that do not require any changes, such as the basic input/output system (BIOS). This storage aids in creating computer firmware, and data is generally stored during the manufacturing process. Similar to RAM, ROM is a type of semiconductor memory formed as integrated circuits (ICs).

Data stored in ROM is permanent, signifying that it is non-volatile and retains its data even when the computer is powered off. Unlike RAM, the CPU can only read data from the memory cells of ROM but is unable to modify it.

Difference Between RAM and ROM

Parameter RAM

Full form RAM stands for Random Access Memory. ROM stands for Read Only Memory.

Definition

RAM is a primary memory of the computer that temporarily stores data and instructions on which the CPU is currently working.

Nature RAM is a volatile memory, which means it stores data as long as the computer system is turned on.

Data access The CPU of the computer can read, write, or alter the data on RAM.

There are two types of RAM:

Types

• SRAM (Static Random Access Memory).

• DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory).

Speed The speed of RAM is quite high.

Cost RAM is costly.

ROM is a primary memory of the computer that stores the computer instructions and programs that do not need to be altered in future, like BIOS.

ROM is a non-volatile memory. Which means it stores data permanently even when the computer system is turned off.

The CPU can only read data from ROM, but it cannot write or change.

There are three types of ROM:

• PROM (Programmable ROM)

• EPROM (Erasable PROM)

• EEPROM (Electrically EPROM).

The speed of ROM is slower than RAM.

ROM is not so expensive.

Role and Functions of the Central Processing Unit (CPU)

The Central Processing Unit (CPU) interprets and executes instructions, performs tasks such as arithmetic operations, logic comparisons, and data movement. It is responsible for coordinating and managing the various components of the computer system, ensuring that instructions are carried out accurately and efficiently. The CPU has three main components, which are responsible for different functions: Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU), Control Unit (CU), and Memory Unit (MU).

1. The Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU)

The Arithmetic and Logic Unit (ALU) is a crucial component of the CPU responsible for executing mathematical computations and logical decisions. It conducts basic arithmetic functions such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division, alongside logical comparisons that determine whether data items are larger, smaller, or equal. The ALU is essentially a foundational building block of the CPU, constituting a digital circuit designed specifically for carrying out arithmetic and logical operations.

2. The Control Unit (CU)

The Control Unit (CU), a vital part of the computer’s central processing unit, arranges and manages the flow of data to and from the CPU. It oversees the activities of the ALU, memory registers, and input/output units, and ensures the execution of all the instructions stored in the program. This unit decodes the fetched instructions, interprets them, and dispatches control signals to input/output devices, facilitating proper execution of operations by the ALU and the memory registers.

The Control Unit serves as the director of the processor’s activities, guiding the computer’s memory, ALU, and input and output devices in responding to the processor’s instructions.

3. Memory Unit (MU)

A temporary memory unit within the CPU is in the form of memory registers. They serve the purpose of directly storing data utilised by the processor. They come in various sizes, such as 16-bit, 32-bit, 64-bit, and so forth. Each register in the CPU is designated for specific functions like data storage, instruction storage, and memory location addressing. Assembly language programmers can utilise user registers to store operands, intermediate results, and other essential data.

Did You Know?

The Accumulator (ACC), a pivotal register within the ALU, contains one of the operands required for the operation to be executed within the ALU.

Procedure for Starting and Shutting Down a Computer

Starting Up

1. Connect the power cable and peripherals.

2. Press the Power button to start the computer.

3. Wait for the operating system to load.

Shutting Down

1. Save any open files and close running programs.

2. Click on the Start menu. Click on the Power button. Select Shut down option.

3. Wait for the computer to shut down completely before turning off the power.

Activity Time

Activity Time

Activity 1: Understanding Computer Parts (Group Work)

Organise students into small groups and provide them with either computer setups or visual aids showcasing computer parts.

Activity 2: Recognising Computer Parts (Individual Work)

Instruct students to recognise and name different hardware components, including the CPU, monitor, keyboard, mouse, and storage devices.

Activity 3: Group Discussion (Group Work)

Create groups of 4–5 students and discuss the specific roles and contributions of each hardware element to the overall functioning of a computer system.

Chapter Checkup

A  Select the correct option.

1  What is the primary function of the Control Unit in a CPU?

a  Execute mathematical computations

b  Manage data flow to and from the CPU

c  Store temporary data within the processor

d  Display results of user-performed tasks

2 is a type of application software.

a  Device driver

c  Word processor

3  What is the role of the motherboard in a computer system?

a  Coordinates and manages the CPU

c  Connects all essential components

B  Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

b  Operating system

d  BIOS

b  Displays the results of user-performed tasks

d  Executes instructions and calculations

1  The CPU consists of three main components, namely the , Control Unit, and Memory Unit.

2 is a type of secondary memory used for long-term data storage.

3  The is responsible for executing instructions and performing calculations in a computer system.

4 devices enable users to input data and interact with the computer system.

C  State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  The ALU performs arithmetic and logical operations within a CPU.

2  ROM is a volatile memory that loses data when the computer is powered off.

3  The motherboard houses the CPU, memory, and connectors for peripheral devices.

4  RAM is used for long-term data storage.

D  Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What are the two main types of memory in a computer system and how do they differ in their functions?

A1. The two main types of memory are RAM (Random Access Memory) and ROM (Read-Only Memory). RAM is used for temporary data storage, allowing the CPU to access data quickly for current operations. It is volatile, which means it loses its data when the computer is powered off. On the other hand, ROM is used to store essential software and firmware that cannot be altered. It is non-volatile, retaining its data even when the power is off. Unlike RAM, the CPU can only read data from ROM but cannot modify it.

Q2. Explain the role of the Control Unit in a computer’s CPU.

A2. The Control Unit is a vital part of the CPU that manages and coordinates the flow of data to and from the CPU. It oversees the activities of the Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU), memory registers, and input/output units, ensuring the execution of all instructions stored in the program. It decodes the fetched instructions, interprets them, and dispatches control signals to input/output devices, facilitating the proper execution of operations by the ALU and memory. It serves as the director of the processor’s activities, guiding the computer’s memory, ALU, and input and output devices in responding to the processor’s instructions.

Q3. Akshit wants to know about the hardware of a computer system and its different categories. Explain it to him.

A3. Hardware refers to the physical components of a computer system. These are tangible, physical devices that can be seen or touched. Computer hardware can be categorised into different types, including input devices, output devices, storage devices, and internal components.

• Input Devices: These devices enable users to input data and interact with the computer system. Examples of input devices include the keyboard, mouse, and scanner.

• Output Devices: These devices display the results of user-performed tasks. Examples of output devices are monitors, printers, and speakers.

• Storage Devices: These devices are used to store data and are often referred to as secondary storage. Examples of storage devices include CDs, DVDs, and hard disks.

• Internal Components: These critical hardware components are integral parts of the computer system. Examples of internal components include the CPU and motherboard.

Answer Key

B 1. Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU)

C 1. True.

Hard Disk Drive (HDD)

Central Processing Unit (CPU)

2. False. RAM is a volatile memory that loses data when the computer is powered off.

3. True.

4. False. ROM is used for long-term data storage.

Input

Peripheral Devices

In this chapter, we will dive into the complex world of computer hardware, where we explore the various components and peripherals that make up a computer system. Understanding these elements is crucial, as they form the backbone of computing technology, enabling us to perform an array of tasks from simple calculations to complex simulations.

Have you ever thought about how your computer detects key presses and mouse movements? Or how your printer turns digital files into printed pages? This all is possible with the help of the special devices that connect to your computer, known as peripherals.

Peripheral Devices

Peripheral devices are the tools that expand the capabilities of computing systems. They serve as connectors between the digital and physical worlds, facilitating interaction, communication, and the exchange of information.

A peripheral device, whether inside or outside the computer, is a tool that links directly to a computer or digital device but isn’t directly involved in its main function, like processing data. It helps users access and utilise the computer’s features. While the computer can work without these devices, some, like the mouse, keyboard, or monitor, are crucial for user-computer interaction. These devices are also known as input–output (I/O) devices.

Importance of Peripheral Devices

Peripheral devices significantly contribute to improving our overall interaction with computing systems and unlocking the full capabilities of our devices. Let’s explore why these tools are not merely add-ons but rather integral parts of our technological resources.

1. Enhanced Functionality: They expand the capabilities of computers and other digital devices, allowing users to perform a wider range of tasks, from simple operations to complex activities.

2. User Interaction: Peripherals such as a keyboard, mouse, and touchscreen enable users to interact with and control the digital system efficiently, making the user experience more intuitive and effective.

3. Data Input and Output: Devices like printers and scanners enable the conversion of digital data into physical formats and physical formats into digital data, respectively, making it easier to share and store information in various forms.

4. Connectivity: Peripherals such as modems, routers, and network adapters facilitate communication and data transfer between devices, enabling access to the internet and other networks.

5. Efficiency and Productivity: With the help of peripherals like external storage devices, users can store and retrieve data quickly, enhancing overall efficiency and productivity in various tasks.

6. Specialised Tasks: Certain peripherals are designed for specialised functions, such as graphic tablets for digital art, microphones for audio recording, and webcams for video conferencing, catering to specific user needs and preferences.

Types of Peripheral Devices

Let’s study the various categories of peripheral devices and explore the wide range of functionalities that they offer.

Input Devices

Input devices are electronic devices that receive instructions from the external environment and convert that data into a format that the computer can read and interpret. They act as a crucial link between the outside world and the computer, facilitating effective communication. When users input data using these devices, the information can be stored in the computer’s memory for later processing and manipulation. An input device transmits data to a computer, enabling users to interact with and manage it.

Types of Input Devices

The following are the various types of input devices:

Keyboard

The keyboard is the primary input device for feeding data into a computer. It comprises different keys for typing letters, numbers, and symbols. A keyboard closely resembles a typical typewriter. It also includes some keys for performing specific functions. Keyboards come in various varieties. The standard keyboard has 104 keys. It connects to a computer system using either a USB cable or a Bluetooth connection.

Characteristics of the Keyboard:

1. The keyboard has different keys to perform different functions.

2. It allows the use of arrow keys as an alternative to the mouse.

3. The main keys of a keyboard are the alphabet keys, special character keys, cursor keys, numeric keypad, and function keys.

Mouse

The mouse is the primary pointing device. Clicking and dragging the mouse enables the movement of the mouse pointer across the computer screen. The left mouse button facilitates item selection or relocation, while the right mouse button displays supplementary menus upon clicking. Some of the mouse types are trackball mouse, mechanical mouse, optical mouse, wireless mouse, etc.

Characteristics of the Mouse:

1. The mouse controls the movement of the cursor on the screen, enabling users to navigate in the desired direction.

2. It permits users to select files, folders, or multiple items or texts.

3. Users can hover the mouse pointer over any object.

4. The mouse can open files, folders, etc. This involves positioning the pointer over the file or folder and subsequently double-clicking to open or execute it.

Joystick

A joystick is a device used to navigate the cursor or pointer on a screen. It consists of a spherical ball attached to both ends of the stick, with the lower ball housed in a socket. The joystick allows for movement in all directions. They offer greater precision and durability compared to a mouse.

Characteristics of the Joystick:

1. It is used to control the position of the cursor or pointer on a screen.

2. It is commonly used for playing video games.

3. It has special push buttons that are pressed to provide input to the computer.

Light Pen

A light pen is a device resembling a pen that is used for pointing. It enables drawing on the monitor screen or selecting menu items. It contains a photocell and an optical system within a small tube. The photocell sensor component identifies the screen’s position and transmits a signal to the CPU when the light pen’s tip is moved across the monitor screen while the pen button is pressed.

Characteristics of the Light Pen:

1. The light pen is useful for drawing graphics.

2. It is used to select objects on the display screen.

Scanner

The scanner captures images, text, or other physical content from a physical source and converts them into a digital format that can be stored and manipulated on the computer. There are different types of scanners, like flatbed scanners, handheld scanners, sheetfed scanners, drum scanners, etc. Most scanners today are variations of the desktop (or flatbed) scanner. A flatbed scanner functions in a manner somewhat similar to a photocopier, with the key distinction being that a photocopier produces a physical paper copy, whereas a scanner creates a digital image that is stored on a computer.

Characteristics of the Scanner:

1. Scanners can handle low-quality or non-standard-weight paper.

2. They are versatile, enabling the scanning of various items regardless of their size. Whether small items or large documents, they can be scanned if appropriately positioned.

Webcam

A webcam is a video camera that captures and streams video in real time over the internet or a computer network. Webcams are commonly used for video conferencing, live streaming, online video chat, and video surveillance. They are often built into laptops, tablets, and smartphones, while external webcams can be connected to computers via USB or other interfaces.

Characteristics of a Webcam:

1. Image Quality: Webcams vary in image resolution and quality, typically measured in terms of pixels, with higher resolutions providing clearer and more detailed images.

2. Frame Rate: The frame rate represents the number of frames the webcam can capture per second, with higher frame rates leading to smoother and more fluid video.

3. Connectivity: Webcams can connect to computers through various interfaces, such as USB, Wi-Fi, or Bluetooth.

4. Additional Features: Some webcams come with built-in microphones, autofocus, low-light correction, and pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) capabilities (this allows the camera to move horizontally, vertically, and zoom in and out), allowing for enhanced video and audio performance.

5. Compatibility: Webcams can be compatible with various operating systems and video conferencing software, although some may have specific compatibility requirements.

Barcode Reader

A barcode reader is a device that interprets information represented by light and dark lines, known as a barcode. A barcode is frequently used for price and product identification, labelling objects, numbering books, etc. The barcode reader is used to scan and extract data from barcodes. By shining light beams on the lines of the barcode, the reader identifies the encoded data within the barcode.

Characteristics of the Barcode Reader:

1. You can scan the barcode by simply positioning the barcode reader near the code and scanning it.

2. Visual indicators provide users with confirmation that the card has been swiped accurately.

3. Upon inserting a card, automated barcode scanners initiate scanning immediately.

Output Devices

An output device is any hardware component that receives information from a computer and then presents it in various forms, such as audio, visual displays, or printed copies. These devices are responsible for translating computer data into a format that can be easily comprehended by humans. While input devices facilitate data entry into the computer, it is the output devices that showcase the results of computer operations to the user.

Types of Output Devices

Let’s learn about the various output devices.

Monitor

The primary output device of a computer is a monitor, commonly referred to as a visual display unit (VDU), which exhibits processed data, including text, images, videos, and audio. It achieves this by arranging minuscule dots, known as pixels. The clarity of the display, also known as its resolution, depends upon the number of pixels present. Higher resolution means more pixels are packed into the display area, hence better quality.

There are two types of monitors:

1. Cathode-Ray Tube (CRT): This monitor relies on a cathode-ray tube, which generates a stream of electrons via electron guns. These electrons strike the inner surface of a phosphorescent screen, creating images. The CRT monitor comprises millions of phosphorescent dots in three primary colours: red, blue, and green. These dots illuminate upon impact, resulting in image formation. Its key components include the electron gun, fluorescent screen, glass envelope, deflection plate assembly, and base.

2. Flat Panel Monitor: This type of display, in contrast to CRTs, is lighter, thinner, consumes less power, and has a higher resolution. It can be portable or mounted on walls, finding applications in devices such as calculators, video games, laptops, and graphical displays.

Did You Know?

Additionally, there is the plasma monitor, which is also a form of flat panel display. This technology utilises plasma cells positioned between two glass surfaces, containing noble gases and mercury solutions. When electricity is supplied, the gas transforms into plasma, generating UV light that produces an image.

Characteristics of the Monitor:

1. Resolution Pixels: Pixels are the smallest element of any image. The higher the number of pixels, the better the resolution of a monitor.

2. Size: The size of the monitor is the diagonal measurement of a desktop screen, which is typically 14 to 25 inches.

3. Refresh Rate: Total number of times per second that an image on a display is repainted or refreshed. The higher the refresh rate the better the display of the monitor.

4. Luminance: It is the brightness of the screen.

Printer

Printers are the output devices that produce a physical copy of a digital document or image. Printers are one of the most popular computer peripherals to print text and photos.

They are broadly classified into two categories:

1. Impact Printers: These types of printers employ a print head or hammer to transfer data onto the paper. The print head or hammer strikes an ink ribbon against the paper, resulting in the printing of characters. Some of the types of impact printers are:

• Dot matrix printer

• Daisy wheel printer

• Line printer

• Chain printer

2. Non-impact Printers: Non-impact printers are distinct in that they do not require a ribbon to print characters. These printers are frequently referred to as page printers due to their ability to print an entire page at once. Some of the types of non-impact printers are:

• Laser printers

• Inkjet printers

Characteristics of the Printer:

1. Print Quality: Printers vary in their ability to produce high-resolution text and images.

2. Printing Speed: The speed at which a printer can produce printed output varies, with some printers capable of high-speed printing for large volumes. The speed of a printer is measured in pages per minute (ppm).

3. Connectivity and Compatibility: Printers may offer various connectivity options, such as USB, Wi-Fi, or Bluetooth, and compatibility with different operating systems and devices.

Plotter

A plotter is an advanced device used for producing high-resolution graphics in various colour formats. While similar to a printer in some aspects, it offers more sophisticated capabilities. Its primary applications include printing large-scale maps, architectural designs, and oversized graphics. Additionally, it is employed for creating images, 3D renderings, advertising materials, and detailed schematics of internal machine structures.

Characteristics of the Plotter:

1. Large-size prints can be taken via plotters.

2. It is slow and expensive.

Projector

A projector is a device that enables individuals to display their computer or device output on a wall or screen. Through the use of light and lenses, it enlarges and projects text, images, and videos. Consequently, it serves as a valuable output device for delivering presentations or projecting movies.

Characteristics of a Projector:

1. They are portable and can be effortlessly connected and used to project an image on a wall by a single individual.

2. Projectors represent a highly economical solution for creating a large video display within the home.

3. Projectors are compact and can be easily mounted on a back shelf, bookcase, or ceiling, as they occupy no floor space.

Speaker

Speakers are essential peripherals linked to computers for audio output. To facilitate their function, sound cards are necessary. Available in diverse configurations, from basic two-speaker setups to more elaborate surround-sound systems with multiple channels, speakers come in various sizes and designs. They receive audio input from the computer’s sound card and translate it into audible sound waves.

Characteristics of Speaker:

1. Speakers are available in a wide range of qualities and prices.

2. Nowadays most computer systems include speakers in the CPU cabinets.

Microphone

A microphone is an audio input device that lets you talk or record sounds on your computer. Using a microphone, often called a mic, you can chat with friends, record your voice, or even control your computer using voice commands.

Characteristics of a Microphone:

1. A microphone can capture sounds from the surroundings very clearly.

2. It is easy to use by simply plugging it into your computer.

3. The microphones can be used for a variety of tasks such as online meetings, chatting with friends, voice recording, and giving voice commands.

4. Microphones used with computers are available in small sizes, making them convenient for desktop or laptop use.

Did You Know?

Most laptops these days are equipped with microphones, by default. With desktop computers, you can use either a pair of microphones or a headset that is a combination of microphones and speakers.

Storage Devices

Storage devices are integral components in which a computer retains all its data, including files, programs, operating system, etc. These devices are like virtual shelves, enabling the systematic organisation and retrieval of digital assets. Without storage devices, the computer would be unable to retain files, programs, or even its fundamental instructions. Storage devices safeguard and facilitate access to your data whenever required.

Types of Storage Devices

Let us learn about some commonly used storage devices.

Hard Disk Drive (HDD)

A Hard Disk Drive (HDD) comprises a rotating disk (platter) coated with a magnetic substance and a read/write head that records and retrieves data on the disk’s surface. The read/write head moves across the spinning disk to access different sections of the stored data. HDDs are commonly used to backup data.

Characteristics of a Hard Disk Drive (HDD):

1. Ample storage capacity: HDDs provide substantial storage space, with certain models capable of accommodating up to 16TB of data.

2. Cost-effectiveness: HDDs offer a budget-friendly solution for storing extensive volumes of data.

3. Larger physical dimensions: Although HDDs are often installed inside the CPU cabinets, nowadays external hard disks are also available. These can easily be carried from one place to another.

4. Slower operational speed: HDDs exhibit slower data access and transfer speeds in comparison with primary memory.

5. Mechanical components: HDDs include mechanical elements that can deteriorate over time.

Solid State Drive (SSD)

Solid State Drives (SSDs) utilise flash memory for data storage rather than a spinning disk. SSDs have significantly faster speeds, enhanced durability, and reduced vulnerability to mechanical breakdowns compared to HDDs.

Characteristics of a Solid-state Drive (SSD):

1. Faster performance: SSDs deliver notably faster data access and transfer speeds in comparison to HDDs.

2. Compact form: With smaller and lighter physical dimensions, SSDs are well-suited for integration into portable devices like laptops and tablets.

3. Lower power consumption: SSDs consume less energy than HDDs, thereby promoting greater energy efficiency.

4. Higher price point: SSDs are more costly than HDDs.

5. Absence of mechanical components: SSDs lack moving parts, resulting in increased durability and decreased susceptibility to mechanical failure compared to HDDs.

Flash Drive

A flash drive, also known as a pen drive, is a portable storage device that utilises flash memory to store and transfer data. It is typically small in size and connects to a computer via a USB (Universal Serial Bus) port, allowing for easy data transfer between devices. Flash drives are commonly used for backing up data.

Characteristics of Flash Drives:

1. Portability: Flash drives are compact and lightweight, making them highly portable and convenient for on-the-go use.

2. Plug-and-Play: They can easily be connected to a computer’s USB port without the need for additional software installation, enabling quick data access and transfer.

3. High Compatibility: Flash drives are compatible with various operating systems and devices, allowing for seamless data exchange between different platforms.

4. Data Storage: They offer varying storage capacities, ranging from a few gigabytes to several terabytes, providing ample space for storing and transferring different types of files.

5. Reusability: Flash drives can be erased and rewritten multiple times, allowing for the easy removal and updating of data as needed.

Communication Devices

Communication devices are instrumental in enabling the transmission of data and information between your computer and external networks, devices, or the internet. Their functionality empowers your computer to engage in data sharing, access resources, and establish connections with the global digital network. Whether it involves internet connectivity, video conferencing for collaborative purposes, or the smooth transfer of files, these devices are essential for enhancing the communication and interactive capabilities of your computer.

Types of Communication Devices

Let us learn about some commonly used communication devices.

Modem

A modem, short for modulator-demodulator, is a hardware device that allows a computer or other devices to connect to the internet. It modulates digital data into an analog signal that can be transmitted over telephone lines, cable lines, or fibre optics, and then demodulates the incoming analog signal back into digital data. There

are several types of modems, including dial-up modems, DSL modems, cable modems, and fibre modems, each of which has its own specifications and capabilities.

Characteristics of the Modem:

The following are the characteristics of a modem:

1. Connection Type: Modems can connect through various mediums, including telephone lines (dial-up), coaxial cables (cable modems), DSL lines (DSL modems), or fibre optics (fibre modems).

2. Speed: Modems have different data transmission speeds, typically measured in bits per second (bps) or megabits per second (Mbps).

3. Functionality: Some modems may also include additional features such as built-in Wi-Fi routers, multiple ethernet ports, or advanced security features.

Router

A router is a device that helps different types of computer networks to communicate with each other. A modem connects a computer to the internet, whereas a router connects two computer networks to each other as well as the internet. The main functionality of a router is to make sure that the information reaches its intended destination while keeping data safe along the way.

Characteristics of a Router:

1. Directing Traffic: Routers find the best way for information to travel from one computer to another on a network.

2. Security Features: Routers can implement security features such as firewalls to protect the computer networks from any unwanted traffic.

3. Wi-Fi: Some routers let you connect to the internet without using cables, which is called Wi-Fi (Wireless-Fidelity).

4. Updates: Routers can be updated to get new features or fix problems.

Activity Time

Activity Time

Activity 1: Group Discussion

Create groups of 4–5 students and ask them to discuss various input and output devices that they use in their daily tasks.

Activity 2: Research Work

(Group work)

(Individual work)

Visit your nearby stores, such as a grocery shop, medical store, and a restaurant. Identify and list the peripheral devices that are used at these places. Compare your list with your classmates’ and discuss.

Activity 3: Create a Collage

(Individual work)

Collect the pictures of various peripheral devices from the old newspapers, books, or magazines. Create a collage by pasting these pictures on chart paper. Paste the collage in your classroom or computer lab.

A  Select the correct option.

1  Which of the following is a type of printer that does not require a ribbon to print characters?

2  What is the primary function of a modem?

a  To print documents

c  To connect to the internet

3  Which of the following is a characteristic of a flash drive?

a  Large size and heavyweight

c  Slow data transfer rate

B  Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

b  To project images

d  To scan barcodes

b  Incompatibility with various operating systems

d  Portability and plug-and-play functionality

1 is a device that enables individuals to display their computer or device output on a wall or screen.

2 devices receive information or instructions from the external environment and convert that data into a format that the computer can read and interpret.

3 devices are instrumental in enabling the transmission of data between your computer and external networks, devices, or the internet.

C  State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  A light pen is used primarily for drawing graphics and selecting objects on the display screen.

2  Solid-state drives (SSDs) are generally more affordable than hard disk drives (HDDs).

3  The monitor is the primary output device of a computer, displaying processed data including text, images, and audio.

D  Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What are the main differences between a solid-state drive (SSD) and a hard disk drive (HDD)?

A1. The main differences between a solid-state drive (SSD) and a hard disk drive (HDD) are:

• Memory: SSDs use flash memory, while HDDs have spinning disks.

• Speed: SSDs are faster.

• Durability: SSDs have no moving parts, making them more durable.

• Power consumption: SSDs consume less power.

• Cost: SSDs are generally more expensive than HDDs.

Q2. How do input devices facilitate effective communication between the external environment and the computer? Provide examples of commonly used input devices.

A2. Input devices facilitate effective communication by receiving information or instructions from the external environment and converting that data into a format that the computer can read and interpret. Examples of commonly used input devices include the keyboard, mouse, scanner, and barcode reader.

Q3. In Samita’s class, the teacher is using the projector to display a presentation on peripheral devices. Explain some characteristics of projectors.

A3. The following are the characteristics of projectors:

• They are portable and can be effortlessly connected and used to project an image on a wall by a single individual.

• Projectors represent a highly economical solution for creating a large video display within the home.

• Projectors are compact and can be easily mounted on a back shelf, bookcase, or ceiling, as they occupy no floor space.

Answer Key

A 1. c   2. c   3. d

B 1. Projector 2. Input 3. Communication

C 1. True.

2. False. SSDs are generally more expensive than HDDs.

3. True.

Basic Computer Skills

You have learnt about various peripheral devices in the previous chapters that are used for providing input to the computer, store data, and give output. Let us now learn about some basic computer skills that are required to perform operations on the computer in this chapter.

Primary Operations

Computer systems perform several primary operations, which include input, output, storage, processing, and control. Input involves providing data to the system; processing involves performing calculations on the data; output involves providing data to the user; and storage involves saving data. Together, these operations enable the system to function properly and perform various tasks. Let us learn about these one by one.

Input Operations

The process of supplying data to a computer system for processing is known as input operation. This can be done through various devices, such as a keyboard, mouse, microphone, web camera, etc. The data is then translated into a format that the computer can understand and process. Input is crucial to the functioning of a computer system, as it allows the users to interact with the system and provide it with the necessary information to perform various tasks.

Input Devices of Computers

There are several types of input devices in a computer system. The most common ones are:

Keyboard Typing on the keyboard provides information to the computer. Keyboards come in a variety of sizes and layouts, including standard QWERTY keyboards and ergonomic keyboards designed to reduce hand and wrist strain.

Mouse A mouse is used to point and click on the screen. It comes in a variety of shapes and sizes, including wired and wireless models, and can be customised with additional buttons and features.

Scanner It is a device that scans an image (such as photographs, printed text, or handwriting) or an object (such as an ornament) and converts it to a digital image. Most scanners today are variations of the desktop (or flatbed) scanner. The flatbed scanner is commonly used in offices. A flatbed scanner functions in a manner somewhat similar to a photostat machine, with the key distinction being that a photocopier produces a physical paper copy, whereas a scanner creates a digital image that is stored on a computer.

Microphone A microphone, sometimes referred to as a mike or mic, is a device that converts sound into an electrical signal. They are used in many applications, such as telephones, hearing aids, recording studios, etc. All microphones capture sound waves with a thin, flexible diaphragm. The vibrations of this element are then converted by various methods into an electrical signal, which is an analog of the original sound.

Web Camera It is used to capture visual information and feed it into the computer. This information can be processed and used by the computer in a variety of ways, commonly in video conferencing.

Joystick A joystick is a pointing device used commonly for playing games. It includes a little handle that you can move in different directions. When you push or pull it, your game character does the same. Some joysticks also have buttons that you can press to make your character jump or do some other action.

Processing Operations

Did You Know?

The touchscreen is both an input and output device. It is used on devices like smartphones and tablets where users interact with the screen directly. Users can swipe, tap, and pinch to zoom, providing input to the computer naturally and intuitively. The display can show visual outputs too.

Processing operations are essential for the functioning of a computer system and involve manipulating data and instructions by the CPU. These operations include arithmetic, logical, input/output, control, and data movement operations. They control the flow of data and instructions, transfer data between the computer’s memory and external devices, and perform basic mathematical functions. The speed and efficiency of processing operations depend on factors such as the CPU’s clock speed, cache size, and number of processing units.

Processing Devices of a Computer

There are several types of processing devices in a computer system. The most common ones are:

Central Processing Unit (CPU) The CPU is the brain of the computer, responsible for executing instructions and managing the system’s resources.

Graphics Processing Unit (GPU) The GPU is a specialised processor designed to handle complex calculations related to graphics and video processing.

Digital Signal Processor (DSP) A DSP is a microprocessor optimised for processing digital signals, such as audio and video.

Central Processing Unit (CPU)/Processor

Application-specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) An ASIC is a specialised chip designed for a specific application or task, such as encryption or data compression.

Field-programmable Gate Array (FPGA) An FPGA is a programmable chip that can be configured to perform a wide range of functions, making it useful for applications that require flexibility and adaptability.

Output Operations

The process of displaying or producing information in a computer system is known as output operations. The computer produces output in various formats, such as text, graphics, sound, and video. Output is just as important as input because it allows users to see and perceive the information that the computer has processed.

Output Devices of a Computer

There are several types of output devices in a computer system. The most common ones are:

Printers They are used to present text, images, and other information in a physical form, making it easier to read and share. Printing can be performed using a variety of printing technologies, including inkjet, laser, and dot matrix printers.

Monitors They are used to display text, images, and videos to the user. They are available in a wide range of sizes and resolutions, from small handheld devices to large wall-mounted displays.

Speakers Speakers serve the purpose of delivering sound to the user, including music, sound effects, and voice recordings. Audio can be played through built-in speakers on a computer or through external speakers or headphones.

Projectors They are used to project visual information onto a larger screen or surface. They are commonly used in presentations, movie theatres, and events and come in various types, including LCD projectors and DLP projectors.

Headphones They serve the purpose of delivering sound directly to the user’s ears. They are commonly used for listening to music, watching videos, and playing games. They come in various types, including earbuds, over-ear headphones, and noise-cancelling headphones.

Plotter A plotter is a vector graphics printing device that connects to a computer. Plotters print their output by moving a pen across the surface of a piece of paper. This means that plotters are restricted to line art rather than raster graphics, as with other printers. Because of the mechanical movement of the pens, they can draw complex line art, including text, although they do it slowly.

Storage Operations

Storage operations are crucial for saving and retrieving data. They involve reading and writing data to and from these storage devices. This is done through input/output operations, which involve transferring data between the storage device and the computer’s memory or processor. There are two main types of storage devices: primary storage and secondary storage.

Monitor Printer

Speaker

Headphones

Projector

Primary Storage

It is temporarily used to hold data that is currently being processed by the computer. It includes:

Random Access Memory (RAM) The RAM chip provides volatile storage, where programs and data are temporarily saved during processing and permanently deleted when the computer is turned off. RAM allows the CPU to quickly read and write data, which significantly speeds up the computer’s performance.

Read-only Memory (ROM) The ROM chip retains the stored programs and data even when the computer turns off. So, unlike RAM chips, ROM chips are non-volatile. ROM contains data that is read-only, meaning it can be read but cannot be easily modified by the user. The ROM chip contains microprogrammed control instructions that instruct the machine to perform certain operations. For example, the BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) in a computer is typically stored in the ROM, ensuring that the computer can boot up and initialise its hardware components.

Cache Memory It is a high-speed memory. It can be inserted either on a motherboard or as a part of the CPU. It stores information and various instructions that are used repeatedly to execute the programs. It improves the overall performance of the computer system in terms of the execution of commands. Cache is more expensive than RAM, but the user can also buy a CPU with in-built cache memory. The CPU first examines the cache when it wants certain data.

Secondary Storage

It is used for the long-term storage of data. It includes devices such as hard disk drives, solid-state drives, CDs, pen drives, memory cards, etc. These devices are used to store files and programs that are not currently being used by the computer.

Storage Devices of Computers

There are several types of storage devices in a computer system. The most common ones are: Hard Disk Drive (HDD) HDDs are known for their large capacity, making them ideal for storing large files and programs. Hard disks are made up of one or more magnetic disks called platters. These platters store data and spin rapidly while a read/write head moves across them to access or modify data.

Solid-state Drives (SSDs) They are a newer type of storage device that uses flash memory to store data. SSDs are faster and more reliable than HDDs, making them a popular choice for gamers, video editors, and other users who require high-speed access to their data.

Flash Drives They are also known as pen drives. They are small, portable storage devices that can be easily connected to a computer’s USB port. They are ideal for transferring files between computers or for storing important data that can be easily carried around.

Memory Cards They are small, removable storage devices that are commonly used in cameras and other portable devices. They are available in a range of sizes and capacities, making them a flexible storage option for users who need to store and transfer data on the go.

External Hard Drives They are larger storage devices that connect to a computer via USB or another interface. They are ideal for users who need to store large amounts of data or who require a backup solution for their important files and programs.

Hard

Communication Networking of Computer Systems

Communication networking in computer systems refers to the exchange of data and information between two or more computers or devices. Communication networking allows computers and devices to share resources, communicate with each other, and work together regardless of their physical location.

Here are some common types of computer networks used in communication networking:

Local Area Network (LAN) A LAN is a network that connects computers and devices within a limited geographical area, such as an office, building, or campus.

Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) A MAN typically spans a city or a large campus, connecting multiple LANs within that specific geographic area.

Wide Area Network (WAN) A WAN is a network that connects computers and devices over a large geographical area, country, continent, or even the world, using technologies such as the internet.

Wireless Network A wireless network uses wireless communication technologies, such as Wi-Fi, to connect computers and devices to the network.

Bluetooth Network A Bluetooth network allows devices to communicate wirelessly over short distances, typically within a range of 30 feet.

Virtual Private Network (VPN) A VPN is a network that allows users to connect to a private network over the internet. VPNs are commonly used for secure remote access to corporate networks.

Activity Time

Activity Time

Activity 1: Group Discussion (Group Work)

Make a group of 3 or 4 students and ask them to discuss input and output operations in class.

Activity 2: Creating a Chart (Individual Work)

Tell every student to make a chart of their favourite operation of a computer system.

Activity 3: Research Work (Individual Work)

Ask the students to conduct a research in their neighbourhood and find out about the various types of computer networks that these places use to communicate with each other.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  Which of the following is NOT a primary operation of a computer?

a  Input

c  Storage

b  Processing

d  Printing

2  Which of the following is an example of an input device?

a  Monitor

c  Keyboard

b  Printer

d  Speaker

3  Which of the following refers to the saving and retrieval of data on a computer?

a  Input

c  Storage

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

b  Output

d  Control

1  The primary operations of a computer include input, processing, storage, and

2  A joystick is an example of an device.

3 is a type of storage device that uses flash memory to store data.

4  A is a network that connects computers and devices around the globe.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  Processing refers to the manipulation of data by a computer.

2  A computer network does not allow computers and devices to share resources.

3  Input is the process of entering data and commands into a computer.

4  A webcam is an example of an input device.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What are storage operations in a computer system?

A1. Storage operations are crucial for saving and retrieving data. It involves reading and writing data to and from these storage devices.

Q2. What is communication networking?

A2. Communication networking in computer systems refers to the exchange of data and information between two or more computers or devices. Communication networking allows computers and devices to share resources, communicate with each other, and work together regardless of their physical location.

Q3. Riya wants to backup her files to protect her data from potential loss. Name one device that she can use for this purpose.

A3. External hard drive.

Answer Key

2.

4. True.

Unit Reflection

Key Terms

ICT: ICT stands for Information and Communication Technology. It is a broad term that includes a wide range of technologies and tools used for handling, processing, storing, and communicating information.

Peripheral devices: Peripheral devices are the tools that expand the capabilities of computing systems. They serve as connectors between the digital and physical worlds, facilitating interaction, communication, and the exchange of information.

Global Positioning System (GPS): GPS is a radio-based satellite navigation system that uses radio signals to precisely determine a specific position.

Solid State Drives (SSDs): SSDs are storage devices that utilise flash memory for data storage rather than a spinning disk. SSDs have significantly faster speeds, enhanced durability, and reduced vulnerability to mechanical breakdowns compared to hard-disk drives (HDDs).

Pixels: Pixels are the smallest element of any image.

Cache: It is a high-speed memory. It can be inserted either on a motherboard or as a part of the CPU. It stores various information and instructions that are used repeatedly to execute the programs.

The Arithmetic and Logic Unit (ALU): It is a crucial component of the CPU responsible for executing mathematical computations and logical decisions.

Motherboard: It is the primary circuit board that connects all the essential components of a computer system. It houses the CPU, memory, and connectors for peripheral devices such as the hard drive, CD/DVD drive, and graphics card.

Things to Remember

• ICT has deeply impacted our personal lives. It has made convenience, efficiency, connectivity, and accessibility of information and resources at every doorstep possible.

• Key components of ICT are computers, software, the internet, telecommunications, networking, data storage, information security, and multimedia.

• ICT tools like smartphones, tablets, radio, televisions, laptops, and computers are part and parcel of modern society.

• The clarity of the display, also known as resolution, depends upon the number of pixels present. Higher resolution means more pixels are packed into the display area.

• Hardware refers to the physical components of a computer system. These are physical devices that can be seen or touched.

• A barcode reader is a tool that interprets information represented by light and dark lines in barcoded data. Barcoded data is frequently used for price and product identification, labelling objects, numbering books, etc.

• Software is a set of instructions or programs given to the computer to complete a task. It is a part of a computer that cannot be touched or felt.

• The Central Processing Unit (CPU) interprets and executes instructions and performs tasks such as arithmetic operations, logic comparisons, and data movement.

• The Control Unit, a vital part of the computer’s central processing unit, arranges and manages the flow of data to and from the CPU.

• Tablets are portable computing devices that are bigger than smartphones but smaller than laptops.

• An e-newspaper, or electronic newspaper, is a digital version of a traditional print newspaper that is accessible through electronic devices such as computers, tablets, smartphones, and e-readers.

• Registers, a type of temporary memory unit within the CPU, serve the purpose of directly storing data utilised by the processor.

• Peripheral devices are the tools that expand the capabilities of computing systems. They serve as connectors between the digital and physical worlds, facilitating interaction, communication, and the exchange of information.

• Input devices are electronic devices that receive instructions from the external environment and convert that data into a format that the computer can read and interpret.

• An output device is any hardware component that receives information from a computer and then presents it in various forms, such as audio, visual displays, or printed copies.

• Storage devices are integral components in which a computer retains all its data, including files, programs, operating system, etc.

• Communication devices are instrumental in enabling the transmission of data and information between your computer and external networks, devices, or the internet.

• The process of supplying data to a computer system for processing is known as input operation. This can be done through various devices, such as a keyboard, mouse, microphone, web camera, etc.

• Processing operations are essential for the functioning of a computer system and involve manipulating data and instructions by the CPU.

• Storage operations are crucial for saving and retrieving data. They involve reading and writing data to and from these storage devices.

• Communication networking in computer systems refers to the exchange of data and information between two or more computers or devices.

A. Select the correct option.

Test Your Knowledge

1. Smartphones have for maps.

a. GPS

c. SGP

b. PGS

d. GSP

2. requires an internet connection and allows users to attach files in the form of images, audio, video, or documents.

a. E-readers

c. Radio

3. What type of device is a CRT?

a. Output

c. Storage

b. E-newspaper

d. Email

b. Input

d. Processing

4. is a device that scans an image (such as photographs, printed texts, or handwritings) or an object (such as an ornament) and converts it to a digital image.

a. Barcode reader

c. Printer

b. Scanner

d. Microphone

5. is the primary memory of the computer that stores data and instructions on which the CPU is currently working.

a. RAM

c. Cache memory

b. ROM

d. None of these

B. Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1. is called the brightness of the screen.

2. ICT stands for

3. A is a device that enables individuals to display their computer or device output on a wall or screen.

4. A is a device that converts sound into an electrical signal.

5. software includes word processors, spreadsheets, and a variety of other task-specific programs.

C. State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1. Google Drive provides a cloud storage service.

2. A light pen enables drawing on the monitor screen or selecting menu items.

3. The motherboard is the primary circuit board that connects all the essential components of a computer system.

4. The CU is known as the brain of the computer.

5. LANs connect computers across larger geographical areas.

D. Short answer-type questions.

1. What is the use of ICT in banking and finance?

2. What are SD cards?

3. Name the three types of ROM.

E. Long answer-type questions.

1. What is a modem? What are its various types?

2. What is the role of ICT in personal life?

3. Differentiate between system software and application software.

F. Competency-based questions.

1. Rani got a new computer. But she does not know how to start it. Help her by telling her the procedure to start her computer.

2. It was Maira’s first day at school. During a lecture in the computer lab, she noticed that her teacher was using a device resembling a pen to draw on the monitor screen. Name the device.

Types of Business

What you want to pursue further is the most common question that people ask after graduating from school. One has to make the choice of whether one wishes to explore more employment opportunities, prepare for interviews or competitions, take up private or government jobs, or start their own business. In order to decide correctly, we must first identify our areas of strengths and interests. This is because everyone has a different area of expertise. This enables us to determine our future aspirations.

Entrepreneur

An entrepreneur is a person who recognises potential opportunities, accepts the uncertainties of both successes and failures, and establishes and manages enterprises or initiatives to fulfil the needs of the market. They take the initiative of starting and managing a business with the goal of making a profit. They often possess the quality of innovation, vision, and a strong work ethic, seeking to bring their ideas to life, create value, and achieve financial success. Let us read about the journey of Manik, who became a successful entrepreneur by following his passion and vision.

Manik loved to cook and was well-known at school for his homemade sandwiches and shakes. He had an interest in food. He always wanted to open his own cafe. After finishing school, Manik enrolled in a Hotel Management program and upon graduating, he took a loan and started searching for a place to open his cafe. He also employed his friends, who helped him with managing social media, finances, marketing, and other services. Finally, he opened his own cafe, which quickly became a favourite hangout for all the students near that area. His venture became profitable because he followed his passion and vision, took the right decisions regarding his degree, choosing the correct place for his café, and making a tasty yet affordable menu. With the money earned from the cafe, he has now opened a big dine-in restaurant in the city.

An entrepreneur can be a person from any field, such as arts, education, sports, or culinary arts, who pursues his passion and uses it to transform his skill into an enterprise. An enterprise means a business, project, or endeavour, often involving activities aimed at achieving specific goals, growth, and success. Entrepreneurs have a substantial impact on our society through the generation of employment, the provision of products and services, and an increase in our country’s national income.

Entrepreneurs Around You

Where can one find an entrepreneur, then? The answer is, all around us. If we look around, we can find many people who are self-employed and working on their own businesses. The dairy where we purchase milk, the grocery stores where we buy our essential goods, the salons where we go to groom ourselves, the boutiques where we have our clothes stitched, dry cleaners, chemist shops, and food outlets are all business entities. While some businesses operate on a small scale, others operate on a large scale, serving both local and global markets.

No Money, No Business. It is a common misconception that one needs a large sum of money to start a business, but this is untrue. One can start one’s business with a small investment as well.

Types of Business Activities

A business is an organised body or activity that engages in commercial, industrial, or professional enterprise with the primary goal of generating profit.

It involves the production, sale, or provision of goods or services to meet the demands of the customers and achieve social or financial objectives.

There are four categories of business based on their activities:

Did You Know?

According to the World Bank, Small and Medium Enterprises (SMEs) are the backbone of the world economy. 90% of world businesses are SMEs and they provide 50% of employment opportunities worldwide.

Service Business

A service business is a type of business activities that primarily offers services that are not tangible in nature. These services are not in the form of physical goods. They cannot be touched but are experienced by the customers. In a service business, the primary focus is on delivering expertise, skills, knowledge, labour, or solutions to meet the specific needs and demands of the clients or customers.

For example, if you visit a salon for a haircut, then you pay for the service you receive.

Similarly, there are other service businesses like repair shops, housekeeping agencies, schools, coaching institutes, sports academies, hotels and resorts, gymnasiums, tourism services, accounting and law firms. In all these businesses, you don’t get anything physical but pay for the services and expertise provided there.

Manufacturing Business

A manufacturing business is a type of enterprise that produces goods through various processes, often involving raw materials, labour, and machinery. Manufacturing firms acquire the necessary raw materials for the production or creation of goods, which are then processed into finished products with the help of labour and machinery. These finished goods are then distributed to wholesalers, who, in turn, supply them to retailers which in turn make them available to customers in the market.

For example, a coconut oil manufacturing unit in Kerala first collects dried coconut and with the help of labour and machinery, they extract coconut oil. The extracted oil is then refined, decolourised, and bleached before being transformed into a finished product. Then, the manufacturing units sell it to wholesalers who in turn sell it to the retailers. Finally, from the nearby retail shops, it reaches the consumer.

Merchandising Business

A merchandising business is the type of enterprise that buys products or goods from manufacturers at a wholesale rate (price paid for buying products in bulk) and sells them to consumers or other businesses at the retail price (price paid to buy an individual entity). The primary focus of a merchandising business is on buying, stocking, and reselling physical products rather than producing or manufacturing them. The difference between the wholesale rate and the retail rate is what a merchandising unit earns as a profit. These businesses play a crucial role in the supply of products by connecting manufacturers or wholesalers with end consumers.

Wholesale

Retail

For example, the famous e-commerce companies, such as Amazon, Flipkart, Ajio, and Meesho, purchase products from manufacturing units at wholesale rate and then sell them to us at a retail price. As a consumer, we are also ready to pay higher prices because we receive products in the comfort of our home.

Hybrid Business

A hybrid business is an enterprise that combines elements from the three business activities, i.e., service, manufacturing, and merchandising, to create a unique and adaptable approach to achieving its goals. Hybrid businesses blend characteristics from two or more types of business to address specific market needs or opportunities.

For example, a restaurant is an example of a hybrid business type. In restaurants, food is made with raw materials (manufacturing), and after it is prepared, they sell it to the consumer (service). In restaurants, they also engage in merchandising by offering bottled water and soft drinks to their customers.

Types of Business Based on Ownership

What kind of business would you establish if:

1. You had to produce stainless steel water bottles?

2. You had an agency providing household support? Think and Tell

It is very essential to know what type of business you want to start. Different structures can be used to organise a business. Every company has a distinct ownership structure (state of possession). When you become an owner, you have a liability (a state of responsibility) and are accountable for both success and failure. Each type of organisation is subject to its own set of laws, regulations, and liabilities. It is necessary to know the different types of business organisations before starting a business.

The four main business organisations, based on ownership, are:

Sole Proprietorship

1. A sole proprietorship is a straightforward business structure where an individual single-handedly owns and manages the entire enterprise.

2. In this form of business organisation, the owner has complete control over all aspects of the business, from decision-making to daily operations.

3. The owner enjoys the whole profit; however, he is also solely responsible for the debt.

4. This business type can be started and closed at any time, as it only includes the investment and ownership of one person.

5. The owner is personally liable for all the legal obligations.

6. This form of ownership is advantageous for starting a business because it gives individuals complete control, and they are not obligated to follow strict legal procedures to start an enterprise.

Example: Mohan toiled as a worker in a block printing factory, and after working for many years, he finally decided to open his own manufacturing unit. He started with his little savings and soon had a good consumer base. As Mohan is a single owner, he enjoys all the profit he makes and uses it to pay rent, bills, and salaries.

Partnership

1. When two or more people or entities work together to jointly own and run a business enterprise, it is known as a partnership business.

2. In a partnership, partners combine their skills, capital, and resources to accomplish common business goals.

3. To regulate partnerships, legal partnership agreements, which specify the partners’ obligations and rights, are used.

4. Each partner contributes to the management and decision-making processes, and they may or may not have an equal share in the business’s gains, losses, and liabilities.

5. One key advantage of a partnership is the distribution of responsibilities and resources, which can lead to better output and growth. However, if there is a lack of clear communication or a well-drafted partnership agreement, then conflicts can arise between the partners.

Example: Rajiv, Jashn, and Manoj opened an accounting firm as partners and founders. Their firm offers services like auditing, accounting, tax advisory, and financial consulting to businesses and individuals. They worked together to pool their resources and created a successful venture.

Corporation

1. A corporation is a legal business entity that is separate from its owners, known as shareholders.

2. Shareholders hold shares of stock in the company, which represent ownership stakes in the corporation, and shareholders may buy or sell their shares, easily transferring ownership of the business.

3. The most notable aspect of a corporation is its limited liability, meaning that shareholders are not personally liable for the corporation’s debts and legal obligations.

4. This separation of personal and corporate assets provides a level of financial protection for shareholders.

5. A corporation is typically managed by a board of directors which is elected by the shareholders. The directors manage the strategic direction of the company and appoint officers to handle day-to-day operations.

Example 1: In 1964, Indian Oil Company Limited and Indian Refineries Limited merged to establish Indian Oil Corporation Limited, a Government of India company. The corporation is divided into five divisions, one of which is the Refineries Division.

Example 2: A well-known provider of life insurance is the Life Insurance Corporation of India (LIC of India). More than 245 insurance companies and provident societies united to establish this company.

Co-operative

1. The co-operative type of business is a distinct type of business where the members who use its products or services also hold ownership stakes and actively participate in its governance.

2. Co-operatives exist primarily to benefit their members rather than external shareholders.

3. Co-operative members collectively make decisions through a democratic process, ensuring that the business’s operations, policies, and profits align with their needs and goals.

4. Members have the right to participate in the decision-making process by voting on important matters, such as electing a board of directors, setting policies, and making strategic decisions.

5. The profits are typically reinvested into the cooperative to improve services or returned to members based on their level of participation or engagement.

6. Co-operative businesses promote self-help ideas while ensuring economic sustainability, empowering communities, and allowing members to collaborate to meet their collective needs.

Example 1: The largest multi-state cooperative society in India, IFFCO, is wholly owned by Indian cooperatives and has its headquarters in New Delhi. It was established in 1967 with 57 members and has since grown to be one of the largest co-ops and a major producer of fertiliser in the nation. The mission of IFFCO is to quickly and efficiently deliver high-quality fertilisers to farmers all over the country while producing and manufacturing fertilisers sustainably to save energy and resources.

Example 2: The Indian Coffee House is a unique restaurant in all of India as the workers are also the employers. The All India Coffee Board laid off its class-four employees in 1957 after deciding to close its coffee houses across the nation. Under the direction of AK Gopalan, the leader of the All India Coffee Board Labour Union at the time, and Member of Parliament Subhadra Joshi, the workers who were laid off established their own co-operative society, which later became known as the “Indian Coffee Workers Co-operative Society”. The cooperative society soon opened its own Indian Coffee House locations in numerous states. It is very important to understand the type of business and who owns it since that influences how much planning is required to launch a venture. Every business model has unique advantages and challenges. Running a successful business involves various factors which impact on its operations, growth, and performance. These factors interact and require consideration and management to build and run a successful business.

Activity Time

Activity Time

Activity 1: Poster Making

(Individual Work)

Prepare a poster of business activities which are found in your city/village. You can use pictures from magazines, newspapers, and the internet. Pictures should be pasted and labelled properly on colourful chart paper.

Activity 2: Class Discussion

(Group Work)

In a group of 4–5 students, discuss various types of activities that are generally adopted by small businesses in your local community.

Activity 3: Shark Tank in Class

(Group Work)

Divide yourselves in groups of 5 students each. Make your own ‘Best out of Waste’ product. You must set a selling price for your product. Create an appropriate brand name and tagline for your product. Each group has to showcase their product in the class.

Activity 4: Service vs Product

(Group Work)

The class will be divided into two groups. One group will name Indian businesses that offer services in exchange for money, while the other group will name businesses that offer goods in exchange for money. Record your names on a chart paper by dividing it into two categories.

Chapter Checkup

A  Select the correct option.

1  Which of the following is an example of a service business?

a  Grocery shop

c  Salon

b  E-commerce

d  Footwear shop

2   If you are buying a product from the grocery shop, then you become a ?

a  Wholesaler

c  Retailer

b  Manufacturer

d  Consumer

3  Ramesh has a shoe store where he produces his own shoes, which he then sells to the customers. Which kind of ownership does Ramesh have?

a  Sole proprietorship

c  Corporation

B  Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1 rate is the price paid for buying products in bulk.

b  Partnership

d  Co-operative

2 is a mixed type of business with qualities of all three types.

3   When two or more people or entities work together to jointly own and run a business enterprise, it is known as a business.

4   Manufacturers use to make the final product.

C  State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  Co-operatives are owned by shareholders.

2  The difference between the wholesale rate and retail rate is merchandising unit’s loss.

3  Merchandising includes the characteristics of different types of businesses.

4  Co-operative business models empower communities.

D  Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. Differentiate between the types of business on the basis of their nature.

A1. The following is the difference between the types of business on the basis of their nature.

BasisManufacturing Service Merchandising Hybrid

Nature Produces physical products Provides intangible services Buys and sells products Combines features

Q2. Differentiate between sole proprietorship and partnership business.

A2.

Basis Sole Proprietorship Partnership

OwnershipOwned by an individual. Owned by two or more people.

Profit or losses Owner enjoys the whole profit and also bears the whole loss.

Both profit and loss are shared equally by the number of partners based on the terms.

Liability The owner has all the liabilities. Split between the partners based on the terms.

Decision making Owner can take each and every decision.

Legal obligations

Due to one owner, fewer and clear legal obligations.

Decisions need to be taken after every partner or majority is in favour of them.

If legal obligations are not clearly defined, then it can create differences among partners.

Q3. Mukesh is a farmer who is a part of a small agricultural community that relies heavily on farming for income. Mukesh and his fellow community members have decided to establish a business organisation to improve the rates of crops and other resources. Suggest the type of organisation they can start.

A3. Mukesh and his fellow community members can consider starting a Farmers’ Co-operative to collectively improve the rates of their crops and resources.

• By forming a cooperative, the community can negotiate better prices for their crops and agricultural resources when dealing with buyers, suppliers, and distributors.

• Members can pool their resources to invest in better agricultural practices, equipment, and technology.

• The co-operative provides a platform for knowledge sharing among farmers. Members can exchange information about best practices, innovative farming techniques, and crop management strategies, leading to improved agricultural outcomes.

• A farmers’ co-operative can contribute to the overall development of the community by generating income, creating jobs, and fostering economic stability.

Answer Key

C 1. False. Corporations are owned by shareholders.

2. False. The difference between the wholesale rate and retail rate is what a merchandising unit earns as a profit.

3. False. Hybrid includes the characteristics of different types of businesses.

4. True.

Entrepreneurship

Business is an economic activity that involves the regular and ongoing production and distribution of goods and services to meet consumer demand. Businesses can be for-profit corporations or charitable institutions. It involves the continuous and regular distribution of goods and services to satisfy the needs and demands of society. But occasionally, we discover a gap between what is needed and what is accessible and available. These gaps provide opportunities for those who are ready and prepared to take a chance and fill the gaps by providing the necessary products and services. They take the risk and mould the opportunity to their advantage. These individuals are entrepreneurs.

Understanding Entrepreneurship

Did You Know?

The term “entrepreneur” was first coined in 1755 by economist Richard Cantillon in his book “Essay on the Nature of Trade in General”.

Entrepreneurs are independent workers or a group of individuals with unique business ideas and the courage to take measured risks. They have the capability to transform their ideas into potential profits. Entrepreneurship is the process of creating a business plan, taking a risk to start a company, or managing it innovatively to serve customers and turn into profit.

The Rise of OYO Rooms

We all know Ritesh Agarwal, the founder and CEO of OYO Rooms, a hospitality and hotel aggregator company. OYO has rapidly expanded internationally and is one of the largest hotel chains in India. Ritesh recognised the gap that many budget hotels and guesthouses in India lacked consistency in terms of quality, cleanliness, and amenities. He wanted to standardise these accommodations. He realised the need to provide budget-friendly accommodation to a wide range of travellers by streamlining the ease of booking.

His entrepreneurial journey began at a young age when he started a budget accommodation platform called Oravel Stays in 2012. Oravel Stays eventually evolved into OYO Rooms in 2013. OYO, short for “On Your Own”, aimed to provide standardised and affordable accommodation to travellers in India. Under Ritesh Agarwal’s leadership, OYO Rooms rapidly expanded its presence not only in India but also internationally, becoming one of the world’s largest and fastest-growing hotel chains.

OYO diversified its services to include a range of hospitality solutions, including OYO Townhouse, OYO Home, and OYO Workspaces, catering to various customer needs beyond traditional hotel stays.

His innovative approach and dedication to improving the hospitality industry in India and beyond contributed to the rapid growth and success of OYO Rooms.

Entrepreneurship Development

Entrepreneurship development refers to the process of enhancing and honing the knowledge, skills, and resources of individuals to create and manage successful businesses or ventures. It involves activities and initiatives intended to foster entrepreneurial ability and support individuals in starting, growing, and managing their own businesses.

Stages in Entrepreneurship Development

Entrepreneurship development includes several stages, from nurturing the entrepreneurial idea to supporting the growth of startups and established businesses.

1. Interest and Awareness: This stage helps generate interest in entrepreneurship among individuals. It may include educational programs, awareness campaigns, and exposure to successful entrepreneurs to inspire potential future entrepreneurs.

2. Education and Training: Aspiring entrepreneurs often need education and training to develop the necessary knowledge and skills. This stage includes entrepreneurship courses, workshops, and mentoring to help individuals understand the basics of starting and managing a business.

3. Ideation and Evaluation: In this stage, individuals generate business ideas, often by identifying unmet needs or demands and treating them as opportunities in the market. They conduct market studies and analyses to understand the scope of their ideas.

4. Business Planning: After the ideation phase, entrepreneurs develop a detailed business plan. This plan outlines the business’s goals, strategies, financial projections, and operational details.

5. Resource Acquisition: Entrepreneurs need access to resources to turn their plans into reality. This stage involves securing funding, finding suitable locations, acquiring equipment, and recruiting the necessary talent.

6. Startup Launch: This phase comprises the actual launch of the business, where the entrepreneur brings the product or service to the market and starts operations.

7. Growth and Expanding: The next stage is focused on growth and scaling. Entrepreneurs seek to expand their customer base, reach new markets, and increase revenue.

8. Mentorship and Support: Entrepreneurs often pursue guidance from experienced mentors, business advisors, or industry experts to sail through the challenges and make informed decisions.

9. Networking and Partnerships: Building a network of contacts is essential for entrepreneurs. They connect with potential partners, customers, investors, and other businesses that can help their ventures grow.

10. Innovation and Adaptation: As the business evolves, entrepreneurs need to continually innovate and adapt to changing market needs, emerging technologies, and customer choices.

These stages are not always linear, and entrepreneurs may cycle through them repeatedly as they expand and refine their businesses.

Characteristics of Entrepreneurship

There are specific qualities that define successful entrepreneurship.

1. Ability to take a risk: Any new business initiative carries a considerable chance of failure. As a result, being a successful entrepreneur requires the zeal and ability to weigh the pros and cons of taking risks. Only then will the entrepreneur be able to take the desired risk.

Example: Vijay Shekhar Sharma, the founder of Paytm, ventured into the digital payment and mobile commerce industry when it was relatively new in India and involved a high level of risk.

Vijay Shekhar Sharma

2. Innovation: The entrepreneur’s idea should be an innovative and pathbreaking approach towards the opportunity identified. This will increase the chance of making a good profit.

Example: Bhavish Aggarwal is the co-founder and CEO of Ola, one of India’s leading ride-sharing and mobility companies. Ola has been at the forefront of innovation in the transportation and mobility sector, by venturing into electric vehicles (Ola Electric) and unique services like Ola Bike. Bhavish Aggarwal is an exemplary and innovative entrepreneur in the Indian startup ecosystem.

3. Leadership Skills: Entrepreneurs need to lead their teams and inspire others to share their vision. Effective leadership and communication skills are essential.

Example: Falguni Nayar is the founder and CEO of Nykaa, India’s leading e-commerce platform for beauty and cosmetics. She has shown great leadership in building Nykaa into a successful and rapidly growing brand. Under her leadership, Nykaa expanded its product offerings and entered offline retail stores, becoming a dominant player in the beauty and cosmetics industry in India.

4. Open-Mindedness: Open-mindedness is an essential quality for entrepreneurs as it allows them to be receptive to new ideas, feedback, and different perspectives. They see every event and situation as a business opportunity. For instance, during demonetization, there were companies that took advantage of the circumstances and increased their business. Such companies also understood the seriousness of the situation and improved the necessity for online transactions.

Example: The founders of Snapdeal, Kunal Bahl and Rohit Bansal, recognised the potential of e-commerce growth during demonetization. They worked on offering a wide range of products online, enabling people to make purchases without using cash.

5. Resilience and Persistence: Entrepreneurs bounce back from setbacks and failures. Entrepreneurship is full of ups and downs, and the ability to persevere in the face of adversity is crucial.

Example: Amit Agarwal, the Global Senior Vice President and Country Head of Amazon India, is known for his resilience and persistence. When Amazon entered the Indian e-commerce market, it faced fierce competition and regulatory challenges. Amazon India has maintained a strong emphasis on customer satisfaction, even in the face of intense competition.

6. Vision: Successful entrepreneurs have a clear vision for their businesses. They can see opportunities and future possibilities.

Example: Dr. K. Radhakrishnan was the former Chairman of the Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO). Dr. Radhakrishnan’s visionary leadership played a pivotal role in India’s space exploration endeavours, including the Mars Orbiter Mission (Mangalyaan), which was a remarkable achievement.

7. Adaptability: Successful entrepreneurs adapt to changing circumstances. They are flexible and open to change. They can pivot when necessary and adjust their strategies in response to changing market conditions.

Example: Mukesh Bansal is the co-founder of Cure.fit. Mukesh Bansal has demonstrated adaptability by successfully transitioning from the e-commerce industry to the health and fitness sector.

Bhavish Aggarwal

Falguni Nayar

Kunal Bahl

Rohit Bansal

Amit Agarwal

Dr. K. Radhakrishnan

Mukesh Bansal

Role of

Entrepreneurship

Entrepreneurship and society share a dynamic and mutually influential relationship. Entrepreneurship, the process of identifying, creating, and pursuing opportunities, has a far-reaching impact on various facets of society. It contributes to the economic growth of the country, leading to development and growth in society by generating employment opportunities.

Think and Tell

Think and tell the name of an entrepreneur you know about. What qualities of the person would you like to have?

Entrepreneurship benefits society in three ways: economic, psychological, and social.

Economic

1. Creation of Jobs: Entrepreneurship is an important way to create jobs. By starting a new business, entrepreneurs create massive opportunities for themselves and others, which results in a decrease in unemployment.

2. Optimal Use of Resources: One of the greatest advantages of entrepreneurship is making use of natural resources and using them judiciously.

3. Managing Economic Independence: Entrepreneurship offers economic independence, and by creating new businesses or any small businesses, they take care of the economic health of the country.

4. Adds to National Income: Entrepreneurs drive economic growth by identifying and exploiting opportunities, introducing innovative products and services, and contributing to increased productivity. They contribute to national income by earning revenue and paying taxes.

Psychological

1. Boosts Confidence: The entrepreneurs are the change agents. When their innovative ideas are well accepted, they help boost the confidence of the people involved in the process.

2. Instils Drive for Achievement: Entrepreneurs are driven by the passion to achieve and innovate, thereby bringing about changes and development in society.

Social

1. Raising the Standard of Living: Raising the standard of living is one of entrepreneurship’s most important contributions to economic growth. It not only fosters wealth creation by creating opportunities for new jobs and enterprises, but it also increases the scope of employment for both individuals and communities.

2. Creates Social Change: Social change denotes significant alterations in societal norms, behaviour, or structures. Entrepreneurs drive social change by introducing innovations that challenge existing practices.

3. Community Development: Community development refers to initiatives aimed at enhancing the well-being of a local community. Entrepreneurs contribute by supporting local causes, schools, and charities.

Rewards for Entrepreneurship

Entrepreneurship offers a range of potential rewards, both intrinsic and extrinsic, that can motivate individuals to start and grow their own businesses.

1. Financial Rewards: Successful businesses can generate profits and provide entrepreneurs with substantial income and wealth.

2. Independence and Autonomy: Entrepreneurship allows individuals to be their own boss. They have the freedom to make decisions, set their own direction, and have control over their work.

3. Creativity and Innovation: Entrepreneurs have the opportunity to bring their creative ideas to life and innovate in various industries. This freedom to innovate and create can be personally fulfilling.

4. Personal Growth: Running a business often requires individuals to continuously learn, adapt, and grow. Entrepreneurship can lead to personal development, improved problem-solving skills, and increased self-confidence.

5. Impact and Fulfilment: Many entrepreneurs are motivated by the desire to have a positive impact on their communities, industries, or society as a whole. A sense of purpose and fulfilment can be a significant reward.

6. Recognition and Reputation: Successful entrepreneurs often gain recognition and build a strong reputation in their industries. This recognition can open doors to new opportunities and partnerships.

7. Building of Legacy: Entrepreneurs have the potential to leave a lasting legacy, whether it’s through their innovative products or services, the businesses they build, or the positive impact they have on their communities.

Error Alert!

It is a common misconception that entrepreneurs have no bosses. But the truth is, entrepreneurs are answerable to their customers, investors, and sometimes even to their competitors.

Activity Time

Activity Time

Activity 1: Entrepreneurship vs Wages (Pair Work)

In pairs, discuss and elucidate the advantage of entrepreneurship over wages. You may list your thoughts in a presentable manner.

Activity 2: Entrepreneurial Quality and Responsibility (Group Work)

In groups of 4–5 students, discuss the characteristics of a good entrepreneur and the role that they play in the economy and society.

Activity 3: Skills Set of My Entrepreneur (Pair Work)

In pairs, choose an Indian entrepreneur you wish to research. Find out and present the core skill displayed by the entrepreneur you have chosen.

Activity 4: A Special Visit (Whole Grade)

Invite an entrepreneur to your school to share their journey, experiences, and success stories.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  What do you think entrepreneurship is?

a  An entrepreneur is a person who creates a new business and is self-employed

b  An entrepreneur is a person who takes risks and brings new ideas

c  Both a and b

d  None of the above

2  Which of the following is the role and benefit of being an entrepreneur?

a  Contributing to the development of the economy

c  Creating a business plan

3  Which of the following is not a reward for entrepreneurship?

a  Earning a profit

c  Personal growth

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  Businesses are an activity.

2 is an important way of creating jobs.

b  Adding to new ideas

d  Making minor adjustments

b  Dissatisfaction

d  Confidence and motivation

3  Rani has left her organisation and is planning to start a bakery business. She is an

4  A successful entrepreneur possesses qualities, which help them guide and navigate the business through challenges.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  Open-mindedness and innovation are characteristics of entrepreneurship.

2  Entrepreneurship’s most important contribution to the society and economy is to not raise the standard of living.

3  Entrepreneurs don’t have to know and understand their products properly.

4  Entrepreneurs get demotivated by the rewards and recognition that they get from society.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. List any 4 characteristics of entrepreneurship.

A1. There are specific qualities that define successful entrepreneurship. Below are a few of them.

• Ability to take a risk: Any new business initiative carries a considerable chance of failure. As a result, being a successful entrepreneur requires the bravery and ability to weigh the pros and cons of taking chances. Only then will the entrepreneur be able to take the required risk.

• Innovation: To come up with fresh ideas, launch a business, and make money from it, one must be very innovative.

• Leadership quality: The business owner needs to have a distinct vision for his new endeavour to succeed. However, a lot of resources and hard work go into making the vision a reality.

• Open-mindedness: Every situation in business may be turned into an opportunity and can be utilised to a company’s advantage.

Q2. Explain in your own words what entrepreneurship is and describe any two roles of entrepreneurship in detail.

A2. An entrepreneur is an independent worker who owns a unique business idea and has the courage to take calculated risks. Entrepreneurship is the process of creating a business plan, starting a company, or managing it innovatively to serve customers and turn a profit.

Below are two roles of entrepreneurship.

Raising the standard of living: Raising the standard of living is one of entrepreneurship’s most important contributions to economic growth. It not only fosters wealth creation by giving opportunities for new jobs and enterprises, but it also increases the scope of employment and better living for both individuals and communities.

Social Change: Entrepreneurs have the ability to bring about changes and innovation in society. Their innovative ideas may bring about social reform.

Q3. Nagma is the owner of a successfully operating bakery. She has been in the business for the past 5 years and is not getting opportunities for growth and expansion. But before that, she feels the need to hone and develop her entrepreneurial skills. She is confused as to what she should do. Suggest to her what should she do.

A3. Entrepreneurship development includes several stages, from nurturing the entrepreneurial idea to supporting the growth of startups and established businesses. These stages are not always linear, and entrepreneurs may cycle through them repeatedly as they expand and refine their businesses.

Since Nagma is looking for growth and expansion of her business, she can undergo education and training through webinars, workshops and seminars.

She can also pursue guidance from experienced mentors, business advisors, or industry experts to sail through the challenges and make informed decisions.

Answer Key

C 1. True.

2. False. Entrepreneurship’s most important contribution the society and economy is to raise the standard of living.

3. False. Entrepreneurs need to know and understand their products properly.

4. False. Entrepreneurs are motivated by the rewards and recognition that they get from society.

Key Terms

Business: A business is an organised body or activity that engages in commercial, industrial, or professional enterprise with the primary goal of generating profit.

• Service business: A service business is a type of business activity that primarily offers services that are not tangible in nature. They cannot be touched like physical goods but are experienced by the customers.

• Manufacturing business: A manufacturing business is a type of enterprise that produces goods through various processes, often involving raw materials, labour, and machinery.

• Merchandising business: A merchandising business is the type of enterprise that buys products or goods from manufacturers at a wholesale rate and sells them to consumers or other businesses at the retail price.

• Hybrid business: A hybrid business is an enterprise that combines elements from the three business activities, i.e., service, manufacturing, and merchandising, to create a unique and adaptable approach to achieving its goals.

Enterprise: An enterprise means a business, project, or endeavour, often involving activities aimed at achieving specific goals, growth, and success.

Entrepreneur: Entrepreneurs are independent workers or a group of individuals with unique business ideas and the courage to take measured risks. They have the capability to transform their ideas into potential profits.

Entrepreneurship: It is the process of creating a business plan, taking a risk to start a company, or managing it innovatively to serve customers and turn it into profit.

Entrepreneurship development: Entrepreneurship development refers to the process of enhancing and honing the knowledge, skills, and resources of individuals to create and manage successful businesses or ventures.

The four main business organisations, based on ownership, are: sole proprietorship, partnership, corporation, and co-operative.

• Sole proprietorship: A sole proprietorship is a straightforward business structure where an individual singlehandedly owns and manages the entire enterprise.

• Partnership: When two or more people or entities work together to jointly own and run a business enterprise, it is known as a partnership business.

• Corporation: A corporation is a legal business entity that is separate from its owners, known as shareholders. Shareholders hold shares of stock in the company, which represent ownership stakes in the corporation, and shareholders may buy or sell their shares, easily transferring ownership of the business.

ο Co-operative: The co-operative type of business is a distinct type of business where the members who use its products or services also hold ownership stakes and actively participate in its governance.

Things to Remember

• Entrepreneurs make a substantial impact on our society through the generation of employment, the provision of products and services, and an increase in our country’s national income.

• There are four categories of businesses based on their activities: service, manufacturing, hybrid, and merchandising.

• Entrepreneurship development includes several stages, from nurturing the entrepreneurial idea to supporting the growth of startups and established businesses, such as interest and awareness; education and training; ideation and evaluation; business planning; resource acquisition; startup launch; growth and expansion; mentorship and support; networking and partnerships; and innovation and adaptation.

• A successful entrepreneur should take risks, innovate, be open-minded, resilient, persistent, have a vision, and be adaptive to the changing market conditions.

• Entrepreneurship and society share a dynamic and mutually influential relationship.

• Entrepreneurship benefits society in three ways: economically, psychologically, and socially.

• Entrepreneurship offers a range of potential rewards, both intrinsic and extrinsic, that can motivate individuals to start and grow their own businesses, like financial rewards, independence and autonomy, creativity and innovation, personal growth, impact and fulfilment, recognition and reputation, and allows the entrepreneur to build his own legacy.

A. Select the correct option.

1. An entrepreneur is a person who

a. recognises potential opportunities

Test Your Knowledge

b. accepts uncertainties about successes and failures

c. manages enterprises to fulfil the needs of the market

d. always looks for an easy way out

2. What is NOT the role of an entrepreneur?

a. creation of jobs

b. management of economic independence

c. zero contribution to the national income

d. optimal use of resources

3. Which of the following is not a service business?

a. repair shops

c. coaching institutes

b. online shopping platforms

d. salon

4. In what way does entrepreneurship affect society?

a. economic

c. social

b. psychological

d. all of these

5. Which of the following is not a stage in the process of entrepreneurial development?

a. interest and awareness

c. startup launch

b. no resource acquisition

d. growth and expansion

B. Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1. A merchandising business buys products or goods from manufacturers at a rate.

2. is the process of creating a business plan, taking a risk to start a company, or managing it innovatively to serve customers and turn it into profit.

3. A is an example of a hybrid business type.

4. Entrepreneurship and society share a dynamic and mutually relationship.

5. An can be a person from any field who pursues his passion and uses it to transform his skill into an enterprise.

C. State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1. A partnership is a straightforward business structure where an individual single-handedly owns and manages the entire enterprise.

2. Entrepreneurs have the capability to transform their ideas into potential profits.

3. Every new business initiative is always successful.

4. Co-operative businesses promote self-help ideas while ensuring economic sustainability.

5. Entrepreneurs negatively impact economic growth by identifying and exploring opportunities.

D. Short answer-type questions.

1. What do you mean by a corporation?

2. Define entrepreneurship development.

3. What is the function of an entrepreneur?

E. Long answer-type questions.

1. Classify the businesses into different types based on the activities they perform.

2. What are the characteristics of entrepreneurship?

3. What are the rewards of entrepreneurship that can motivate an individual to?

F. Competency-based questions.

1. Ragini has always aspired to have her own fashion boutique. She has a great understanding of fabrics and fashion. Her career as a Fashion Manager at a well-known clothing retail store has given her insights into the market and has helped her generate capital.

She has resigned from her job now to open her own boutique, but she is confused about what type of business she should own. What, according to you, would be the best possible ownership option for her?

2. Rajat owns a successful startup. With the help of the uneducated tribal women of his village, he creates eco-friendly gift boxes. His boxes have started going far and wide. He has been awarded for his sustainable initiative and the ability to generate employment. How has he contributed to the society and himself through his role as an entrepreneur?

Environmental Balance

All facets of our lives are influenced by the environment around us, and all our daily actions also have an impact on the environment as well. We rely heavily on the community of plants (flora) and animals (fauna) to provide us with food and other resources necessary for our survival.

Environment

The word “environment” comes from the French word “environ” which means “to surround”. It includes the surroundings or conditions in which all living organisms exist. The environment can be classified into two types:

1. Natural Environment: It includes all the living (biotic) components like plants, animals, birds, insects; and non-living (abiotic) components like water, air, soil, and sunlight, which occur naturally on Earth. Both the components are dependent on each other for their survival.

2. Man-made Environment: It includes the components and structures created by humans to satisfy their needs and requirements like buildings, houses, schools, parks, markets, roads, factories, etc. These components are affected by physical, social, biological and cultural factors.

The natural environment provides humans with resources that they require for their growth and development. The natural environment offers all essential elements necessary for human life such as sun, soil, water, and air.

Society and Environment

There is a strong relationship between our society and the environment. They interact and influence each other in multiple ways. This kind of interaction affects the ecological balance.

Humans depend on the natural resources for fulfilling their basic needs like food, water and shelter. With the increase in population, human beings have modified their surroundings according to their needs and economic benefits. These modifications have impacted significantly on our natural environment. Industrial development and the exploitation of natural resources, like the extensive use of fossil fuels, deforestation etc. have created an imbalance in the environment. People do not use natural resources judiciously and thus it has caused a scarcity of these resources. It is important to strike a balance between both the components to avoid harmful consequences.

Ecosystem

An ecosystem is formed when the living (plants, animals, and other organisms) and the non-living components (air, water, sunlight, soil, weather, temperature etc.) interact and co-exist with each other in a physical environment. These biotic and abiotic components are interdependent on each other. All the organisms play a specific role in an ecosystem and every ecosystem is unique in itself.

Roles of Organisms in Ecosystem

Organisms in ecosystems have diverse roles:

1. Producers (like plants) create energy via photosynthesis.

2. Consumers eat other organisms as herbivores, carnivores, or omnivores.

3. Decomposers (bacteria, fungi) break down organic matter, recycling nutrients.

4. Detritivores (e.g., earthworms) accelerate decomposition.

5. Predators regulate prey populations, maintaining balance.

6. Prey species develop adaptations to avoid predators.

7. Herbivores impact on plant distribution and structure.

8. Pollinators aid in plant reproduction.

Factors That Cause an Imbalance in the Environment

In the present scenario, with increasing population, urbanisation, economic growth and the self-centred approach of humans, resources are not being used judiciously.

This has caused irrecoverable loss to the environment and created an imbalance in the ecosystems.

Overexploitation of Resources With the increase in population, human beings have started to exploit natural resources at a fast pace. This is a huge threat to biodiversity and has resulted mainly in the extinction of species, further affecting, directly or indirectly, the ecological cycle of the environment.

Deforestation Deforestation, or the thinning of forests, is one of the largest issues. This includes the removal of trees for wood products, grazing lands, and creating huge buildings in the name of development. This is a serious environmental concern as it can result in the loss of the natural environment, damage the homes of animals, and create disturbances in the water cycle.

Pollution Pollution can harm human health and the environment in many ways. Pollutants can be found in water, air, and soil. Also, there are different kinds of pollution that impact on the environment in various ways. There can be various causes of pollution like the burning of fossil fuels, smoke from industries and factories, improper industrial waste disposal, increasing number of vehicles on roads, mining etc.

Overpopulation Due to the rapid increase in population, resources are being over-utilised and production of waste is also high. People make extensive use of plastic which is harmful for marine life, street animals and also disrupts food chains, thereby, impacting on the environment.

Global Warming Due to the increase in greenhouse emissions, temperatures are rising, glaciers and polar ice caps are melting, and various species are becoming extinct. The level of carbon dioxide and other harmful gases like methane, nitrous oxide etc. in the air is increasing which also leads to depletion of the ozone layer.

Climate Change Human activities, particularly the burning of fossil fuels, contribute to the release of greenhouse gases, leading to global warming and climate change. These have far-reaching impacts on ecosystems and weather patterns.

Water Scarcity Overuse and contamination of water resources can lead to water scarcity, which has a cascading effect on ecosystems, agriculture, and human populations.

Loss of Biodiversity The extinction and decline of species due to habitat loss, pollution, climate change, and other factors can disrupt ecosystem dynamics and reduce overall resilience.

Natural Resources

Did You Know?

Humans use only 1% of the abundant water that is available on the Earth.

Natural resources are the resources drawn from nature like water, land, soil, rocks, forests, animals, fossil fuels, or minerals which are used by humans to meet their needs and requirements. These resources can be consumed directly or indirectly and can be in any form, such as solid, liquid, or gas. Various types of natural resources are land resources, forest resources, water resources, mineral resources, food resources, and energy resources.

Conservation of Natural Resources

The act of protecting and managing natural resources so that everyone will benefit from them including current and future generations is referred to as the conservation of natural resources. The necessities for our survival are gifts from nature and cannot be substituted. Resource management is another aspect of conservation that aims to stop resource exploitation, deterioration, and destruction. Less waste should be produced, and the resources should be used wisely.

We should try and follow the three R’s and contribute towards the environment.

Reduce: We should be mindful of what we are buying and not stack up stock up on unnecessary things. It is an effective way to save resources. Avoid the use of plastic and any such products which have a negative impact on our environment.

Reuse: Instead of throwing away items or discarding them, we should reuse them creatively. For example, glass jars can be used for storing things, old clothes come in handy when you need to clean your home etc. You can share your old things with those who need them.

Recycle: Recycling is a way to reduce our carbon footprint (total amount of greenhouse gases generated by any of our activities). Cans, paper products, glass etc. are all recyclable materials. They should be separated from non-recyclable materials while disposing of them. Community recycling efforts should also be encouraged.

Think and Tell

1. Think about a few steps that you practice in your daily life to preserve the environment.

2. Think about a few steps which you can practice as a community to conserve and protect our environment.

Environmental Protection and Conservation

Environmental conservation is a practice to protect the environment and manage natural resources for the present and future use. Humans should pay attention to their activities and ensure that they do not adversely affect the environment in any way.

A few steps to conserve the environment are:

1. More and more trees should be planted everywhere especially in the areas where forest cover is decreasing due to human activities. They are called life-savers as they convert the excess carbon dioxide in the air to oxygen which is important for our survival.

2. Saving water resources is another important aspect of environment conservation. Turn off the taps when not in use, repair leaky faucets, and install water-efficient appliances.

3. Discharge only clear water into the rivers after treating sewage. Waste from the industries should not be directly disposed of in water bodies as it pollutes the water.

4. To save resources or energy, they must be used effectively. Switch off lights, fans, TVs, and other electrical items when not in use.

5. Use energy efficient bulbs and tube lights that save energy rather than normal filament bulbs.

6. We can use energy-saving strategies, such as cleaning the dust from the tube lights to increase light, routinely servicing and maintaining home appliances etc. Saving money and fossil fuels are additional benefits of energy conservation.

7. Use renewable sources of energy like solar, wind, water, geothermal etc. as they can be replenished over a period of time. Non-renewable sources of energy have a limited supply and cannot be readily replenished.

8. Use public transport, bikes, carpools, bicycles etc. to travel from one place to another instead of personal vehicles. It will reduce your carbon footprint.

9. Create awareness about environmental protection and conservation in your community. Learn about environmental issues and share information with each other.

10. Make sustainable choices in your daily life and encourage others to do the same. Even individual actions can be multiplied and you can contribute to a healthier planet.

Activity Time

Activity Time

Activity 1: Poster Making

(Group Work)

Divide into groups of five. Each group will create a poster on how to conserve the environment. Once completed, every group will present it in front of the class.

Activity 2: Group Discussion

Divide the class into groups of four. Every group will discuss any one of the following topics:

• The impact of the deteriorating environment on the lives of human beings.

• Various factors that impact on our environment.

Chapter Checkup

A  Select the correct option.

1  Why should we conserve our natural resources?

a  All livings beings can benefit from them

b  They are being depleted at a fast rate

c  To make the resources available for present and future generations

d  All of the above

2   Which factor has caused an imbalance in the environment?

a  Pollution

c  Rainwater harvesting

3  ‘Environment’ is derived from which French word?

a  envion

c  envron

B  Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  The clearing or thinning of forests is called .

b  Wise use of resources

d  Forests

b  environ

d  envirn

2  The increase in greenhouse gases leads to the depletion of the layer.

(Group Work)

3  An is formed when living and non-living components interact with each other in a physical environment.

4  Make choices in your daily life and encourage others to do the same.

C  State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  Water pollution is caused by throwing waste into the waterbodies.

2  We should throw away or discard items after using them.

3  Pollution can harm human health in many ways.

4  Discharge dirty water from the industries directly into the rivers.

D  Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. Define ecosystem.

A1. An ecosystem is formed when living (plants, animals, and other organisms) and non-living components (air, water, sunlight, soil, weather, temperature etc.) interact with each other in a physical environment. These biotic and abiotic components are interdependent on each other. All the organisms play a specific role in an ecosystem and every ecosystem is unique in itself.

Q2. What are the two types of environment?

A2. The environment can be classified into two types:

• Natural environment: It includes all the living (biotic) components like plants, animals, birds and insects, and nonliving (abiotic) components like water, air, soil, and sunlight, which occur naturally on Earth. Both the components are dependent on each other for their survival.

• Man-made environment: It includes the components and structures created by humans to satisfy their needs and requirements like buildings, houses, schools, parks, markets, roads, factories etc. These components are affected by physical, social, biological and cultural factors.

Q3. Reema, who resides in Wazirabad, has decided to start an ‘Environmental Protection Club’ with her friends in her society. List a few steps that she can take to make other people aware of ways to conserve the environment.

A3. Ways to conserve the environment are:

• More and more trees should be planted everywhere especially in the areas where forest cover is decreasing due to human activities.

• Turn off the taps when not in use, repair leaky faucets, and install water-efficient appliances.

• Use public transport, bikes, carpools, bicycles etc. to travel from one place to another instead of personal vehicles.

• To save resources or energy, they must be used effectively. Switch off lights, fans, TVs, and other electrical items when not in use.

• Use energy-efficient bulbs and tube lights that save energy rather than normal filament bulbs.

Answer Key

C 1.

2. False. Instead of throwing away or discarding the items, we should try to use them in a creative way.

3. True.

4. False. Discharge only clear water into the rivers after treating sewage.

Green Economy

Earth is said to be the only known planet that can sustain life. This is because of its natural environment. But sadly, our environment is at great risk because of the growing population and the rapid consumption of natural resources. With increasing urbanisation, industrialisation, and commercialisation, natural resources are being severely depleted. Mankind has been ungrateful to nature in their usage of natural resources. Thus, various adverse effects have become prominent in the natural environment.

The environment and human activities are closely linked, as one impacts on the other. Human activities like the burning of fossil fuels, forest fires, and poor waste management affect the environment and cause climate change, which in turn causes serious threats to human life. Thus, it is highly important to foster the attitude of love and care for the environment, which can be achieved by developing green skills.

Green skills are the knowledge, abilities, values, and attitudes needed to live, flourish in, develop, and support a society that believes in preserving and conserving resources for the future through their optimal and efficient utilisation. The need to transition towards more environmentally sustainable modes of living has become a necessity for developed as well as for developing countries.

Due to the pace at which we are consuming and exploiting our resources, the world has begun to witness scarcity of many resources. Keeping in mind the lurking environmental threat, environmental scientists are advocating the need to make a shift towards green economy.

Green Economy

Green economy is a kind of economy that aims to establish a system that balances human well-being and economic growth while reducing environmental risks and replenishing our resources. The core objective is to promote a sustainable mode of production and consumption without causing any harm to the environment.

The United Nations Environment Program (UNEP), a global organisation that works under the United Nations, defines green economy as “one that results in improved human well-being and social equity while significantly reducing environmental risks and ecological scarcities. It is low carbon, resource efficient, and socially inclusive”. It aims at sustainable development.

The term “green” in green economy refers to the environmentally friendly and sustainable practices it promotes. Its principle is growth, balance, renewal, and sustainability. The emphasis is on reducing waste, conserving resources, and adopting clean technologies. In essence, it is all about finding innovative and sustainable ways to live, work, and produce goods and services that are kinder to our planet.

There are three pillars of a green economy:

Low Carbon Development

This means reducing the emission of greenhouse gases and shifting to renewable energy sources.

Resource Efficiency

It means to make efficient use of resources and to reduce waste. Products and services are designed for the circular economy, where materials are used for as long as possible and then recycled or reused.

Remember

Sustainable means meeting the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs.

Social Inclusion

This includes creating new jobs, providing opportunities for training and reskilling, and supporting vulnerable communities, ensuring that everyone benefits from the transition to a green economy.

These three pillars are interconnected. For example, low-carbon development can lead to efficient utilisation of resources and their circulation in the economy, since the enterprises invest in innovative technologies and processes to reduce their emissions. This will enable new training and creation of new jobs and thereby, inclusion of the people in society.

Did You Know?

There is another intriguing concept gaining momentum worldwide—the Blue Economy. It focuses on promoting sustainable approaches in relation to our oceans, seas, and coastal areas. Its goal is to safeguard marine ecosystems and leverage their potential for economic growth.

Pillars of Green Economy

Importance of Green Economy

The green economy is important for a number of reasons:

1. Mitigating Climate Change: Climate change is one of the most pressing concerns being faced by humanity today. A green economy can help to reduce greenhouse gas emissions that would impact on climate change.

2. Protecting the Environment: The green economy aids the sustainable use of natural resources and the protection of biodiversity. This is crucial for ensuring the well-being of our planet.

3. Creating Job Opportunities: The transition to a green economy is expected to create myriads of new jobs in various sectors, like waste management, renewable energy, and resource management. This, in turn, will boost economic growth.

4. Improving Public Health: Air pollution caused through burning of fossil fuels is a major cause of respiratory and other health problems. A green economy can help to reduce air pollution and improve the quality of life on Earth.

5. Reducing Poverty and Inequality: A green economy can create new opportunities for people in marginalised communities. It can also help to reduce the cost of living for everyone by making energy and transportation more affordable.

6. Ensuring Economic Stability: Green economy can lead to more stable economic conditions by reducing the exploitation of resources and price fluctuations. This will also reduce the cost of living associated with environmental degradation.

7. Innovation and Technological Advancement: Striving towards green economy encourages innovation in technology and sustainable practices, leading to economic growth and competitiveness in a fast-evolving global market.

8. Consideration of Moral Ethics: Adopting sustainable and responsible ways of producing and consuming aligns with ethical values and responsibility towards future generations.

9. Better Resilience to Challenges: As the world faces challenges like climate change, resource scarcity, and biodiversity loss, a green economy provides a proactive approach to adapt to and curb these challenges effectively.

Did You Know?

A study by the International Labour Organization found that the transition to a green economy could create up to 24 million new jobs globally by 2030.

Think and Tell

Could there be any drawbacks in the shift towards green economy? In your opinion, do the benefits of green economy outweigh these drawbacks?

Green Economy and India

In India, there is a growing emphasis on embracing the principles of a green economy, placing significant importance on achieving sustainable development and transitioning towards cleaner energy sources.

1. Renewable Energy: India has set ambitious targets for renewable energy deployment, and has made significant progress in recent years. The country is now one of the leading markets for solar and wind power.

2. Energy Efficiency: India is also investing in energy efficiency measures to reduce its energy consumption. This includes programs to promote energy-efficient appliances and buildings.

3. Sustainable Transportation: India is promoting electric vehicles and other sustainable modes of transportation. The country is also investing in public transportation and infrastructure for pedestrians and cyclists.

4. Sustainable Cities: India is developing sustainable cities that are more energy-efficient, less polluted, and more livable. This includes initiatives to promote green buildings, waste management, and public transportation.

5. Sustainable Agriculture: India is promoting sustainable agricultural practices to reduce its environmental impact. This includes initiatives to reduce pesticide use, improve water management, and promote organic farming. Programmes like PM KUSUM Yojana and Gobardhan Yojna are supporting green farming and sustainable practices in villages.

The transition to a green economy is creating new jobs and opportunities in India. The Indian government has estimated that the green economy could create up to 50 million new jobs by 2030.

Error Alert!

Green Economy is Expensive

There is a misconception that shifting to a green economy is excessively expensive. Though some initial investments may be required, the long-term economic benefits, such as reduced healthcare costs and increased energy efficiency, often outweigh the upfront costs.

Green Skill Advocate

As a young learner and future professional, you have a unique opportunity to learn green skills and contribute to the green economy.

1. Embrace Lifelong Learning: Stay curious and open to learning about sustainability and green practices. The more you know, the better equipped you are to make a difference.

2. Be an Agent of Change: Encourage sustainability in your workplace or community. Small actions, like reducing waste or promoting energy efficiency, can have a big impact.

3. Pursue Green Careers: Consider careers that directly align with the green economy, such as renewable energy, environmental conservation, or sustainable agriculture. But remember, green skills are relevant across all professions.

4. Advocate for Education: Promote the integration of green skills and sustainability into educational curricula. Advocate for more educational opportunities that focus on sustainability and its applications.

5. Embody Sustainability: Live a sustainable lifestyle by making conscious choices in your daily routines, from reducing plastic use to conserving energy.

Activity Time

Activity Time

Activity 1: Promoting Green Economy (Pair Work)

Work with your partner to prepare a poster that communicates the significance of the green economy. Use newspaper and magazine cuttings to make your poster appear informative and creative.

Activity 2: Group Discussions (Group Work)

Get into groups of 4–5 students and discuss the importance and benefits of green economy. Take turns to present your point of view. On an A3 size sheet of paper, summarise the points discussed by the group.

Chapter Checkup

A  Select the correct option.

1  What is the primary aim of a green economy?

a  To maximise economic growth at any cost

b  To strike a balance between human well-being and economic growth while reducing environmental risks

c  To focus solely on environmental protection without considering economic factors

d  To minimise social equity for the sake of environmental preservation

2   The three pillars of a green economy are , , and .

a  low carbon, resource deficiency, and social inclusion

b  high carbon, resource efficiency, and social inclusion

c  low carbon, resource efficiency, and social inclusion

d  low carbon, resource efficiency, and social exclusion

3  What does the term “green” in the green economy refer to?

a  A colour representing waste and pollution

b  Sustainable and environmentally friendly practices

c  Economic growth without any regard for the environment

d  Lack of growth and innovation

B  Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  The United Nations Environment Program (UNEP) defines the green economy as one that results in improved and social equity.

2  The emphasises using finite resources wisely.

3  Green skills encompass the , , and attitudes needed to thrive in, contribute to, and promote a sustainable and resource-efficient society.

4  The transition to a green economy is expected to create more in varied sectors.

C  State whether the following are True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  The green economy focuses solely on economic growth without considering environmental risks.

2  Green skills are only relevant in specific “green” job sectors.

3  Pursuing a green career is one way to contribute to the green economy.

4  India is promoting sustainable agricultural practices to reduce its environmental impact.

D  Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. Explain the three pillars of green economy.

A1. The three pillars of green economy are:

• Low Carbon Development

This means to reduce the emission of greenhouse gases and shifting to renewable energy sources

• Resource Efficiency

It means to make efficient use of resources and to reduce waste. Products and services are designed for the circular economy, where materials are used for as long as possible and then recycled or reused.

• Social Inclusion

This includes creating new jobs, providing opportunities for training and reskilling, and supporting vulnerable communities, ensuring that everyone benefits from the transition to a green economy.

Q2. Define the term green skills.

A2. Green skills are the knowledge, abilities, values, and attitudes needed to live and flourish in, develop, and support a society that believes in preserving and conserving resources for the future through their optimal and efficient utilisation. The need to transition towards more environmentally sustainable modes of living has become a necessity, for developed as well as for developing countries.

Q3. Rohan wants to contribute to the Green Economy and promote green skills in his future career. What can he do?

A3. As a young learner and future professional, Rohan has a unique opportunity to learn green skills and contribute to the green economy.

• Embrace Lifelong Learning: Stay curious and open to learning about sustainability and green practices. The more you know, the better equipped you are to make a difference.

• Be an Agent of Change: Encourage sustainability in your workplace or community. Small actions, like reducing waste or promoting energy efficiency, can have a big impact.

• Pursue Green Careers: Consider careers that directly align with the green economy, such as renewable energy, environmental conservation, or sustainable agriculture. But remember, green skills are relevant across all professions.

• Advocate for Education: Promote the integration of green skills and sustainability into educational curricula. Advocate for more educational opportunities that focus on sustainability and its applications.

• Embody Sustainability: Live a sustainable lifestyle by making conscious choices in your daily routines, from reducing plastic use to conserving energy.

Answer Key

C 1. False. The Green Economy focuses on promoting economic growth with consideration of reducing environmental risks.

2. False. Green skills are relevant in a wide range of job sectors.

3. True.

4. True.

Unit Reflection

Key Terms

Ecosystem: An ecosystem is formed when living (plants, animals, and other organisms) and non-living components (air, water, sunlight, soil, weather, temperature etc.) interact and co-exist with each other in a physical environment.

Environment: Environment includes the surroundings or conditions in which all the living organisms exist.

Green economy: It is a kind of economy that aims to establish a system that balances human well-being and economic growth while reducing environmental risks and replenishing our resources.

Green skills: It is the knowledge, abilities, values, and attitudes needed to live and flourish in, develop, and support a society that believes in preserving and conserving the resources for the future through their optimal and efficient utilisation.

ο Natural environment: It includes all the living (biotic) components like plants, animals, birds, and insects, and non-living (abiotic) components like water, air, soil, and sunlight, which occur naturally on Earth.

ο Man-made environment: It includes the components and structures created by humans to satisfy their needs and requirements like buildings, houses, schools, parks, markets, roads, factories etc.

Conservation of natural resources: It is an act of protecting and managing natural resources so that everyone can benefit from them including current and future generations.

Natural resources: They are the resources drawn from nature like water, land, soil, rocks, forests, animals, fossil fuels, or minerals which are used by humans to meet their needs and requirements.

Things to Remember

• We rely heavily on the community of plants (flora) and animals (fauna) to provide us with food and other resources necessary for our survival.

• There is a strong relationship between our society and the environment. They interact and influence each other in multiple ways.

• Modifications in the environment caused by human beings have impacted our natural environment significantly.

• Industrial development and the exploitation of natural resources like extensive use of fossil fuels, deforestation etc. have created an imbalance in the environment.

• Organisms perform the diverse roles of producers, consumers, decomposers, detritivores, predators, herbivores, pollinators, and so on.

• The imbalance in the environment is caused by multiple factors like: overexploitation of resources, deforestation, pollution, overpopulation, global warming, climate change, water scarcity, and loss of biodiversity.

• The three Rs to conserve natural resources are reduce, reuse, and recycle.

• The three pillars of green economy are: low carbon, resource efficiency, and social inclusion.

• A green economy would help to mitigate climate change, reduce poverty and inequality, bring innovative technologies and advancements, ensure economic stability, create more job opportunities, and protect the environment.

• The Indian government has estimated that the green economy could create up to 50 million new jobs by 2030.

• In order to become a green skill advocate, one should embrace lifelong learning, be an agent of change, pursue green careers, advocate for education, embody sustainability.

Test Your Knowledge

A. Select the correct option.

1. Which of the following is not one of the 3Rs of conservation of natural resources?

a. Reduce

c. Reuse

b. Refund

d. Recycle

2. Which organisation defines a green economy as “one that results in improved human well-being and social equity while significantly reducing environmental risks and ecological scarcities”?

a. United Nations Environment Program (UNEP)

b. United Nations Industrial Development Organization (UNIDO)

c. United Nations Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC)

d. United Nations Development Programme (UNDP)

3. Which organisms break down organic matter in the soil and recycle nutrients?

a. Producers

c. Decomposers

4. As a green skill advocate, you should

a. never embrace lifelong learning

b. not be an agent of change

c. not embody sustainability

d. pursue green career

b. Consumers

d. Predators

5. Which of the following items cannot be recycled?

a. cans

c. vegetable peels

b. paper products

d. glass

B. Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1. The of species due to habitat loss, pollution, climate change, and other factors can disrupt ecosystem dynamics.

2. The term “green” in green economy refers to the environmentally friendly and practices it promotes.

3. are the resources drawn from nature like water, land, soil, rocks, forests, animals, fossil fuels, or minerals.

4. are the knowledge, abilities, values, and attitudes needed to live, flourish in, develop, and support a society that believes in preserving and conserving the resources for the future.

5. There is a strong relation between our and the environment.

C. State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1. Trees are called life-savers as they convert the excess oxygen in the air to carbon dioxide.

2. Mankind has been ungrateful to nature in it’s usage of natural resources.

3. Red economy focuses on promoting sustainable approaches in relation to our oceans, seas, and coastal areas.

4. The word “environment” comes from the French word “environ” which means “to surround”.

5. The green economy creates hurdles in the sustainable use of natural resources and the protection of biodiversity.

D. Short answer-type questions.

1. Define environmental conservation. Write any two steps to conserve our environment.

2. What do you mean by green economy?

3. How is an ecosystem formed?

E. Long answer-type questions.

1. Describe a few factors which cause an imbalance in our environment.

2. List a few steps taken by India towards a green economy and achieving sustainable development.

3. How are society and the environment dependent on each other?

F. Competency-based questions.

1. Kanika is devastated by mankind’s overexploitation of natural resources. She wishes to make a difference and take a step towards conservation of the natural resources. What reforms and transitions should she practise in her life to conserve natural resources?

2. Vipin doesn’t understand why the government has been promoting the transition towards the green economy. He continues to operate his fabric manufacturing company using chemical dyes and deposits the contaminated water in the water bodies. His friend, Yogesh decides to explain to him the importance of the green economy. What should Yogesh tell him?

Part-B

IT Skills

Applications of IT

Information and Communications Technology (ICT) is the set of tools and systems that make up modern computing. It generally refers to all devices, networks, applications, and systems that together enable individuals and organisations to communicate or interact in the digital world.

Information Technology

Information Technology (IT) is an essential aspect of modern education. It uses computer systems or digital devices to access, process, and communicate information. It is a combination of both information and technology. It is the common technology used in every business to enhance their business skills. One can use this for both personal and commercial purposes.

Benefits of Information Technology

Following are some of the benefits of IT:

1. Helps in finding potential customers.

2. Helps provide immediate customer service.

3. Online feedback helps in understanding customer requirements.

4. Minimum cost, maximum profit with improved efficiency.

5. Sustainability.

Information Technology-Enabled Services (ITeS)

Information Technology-enabled Services (ITeS) is the process of outsourcing tasks or functions to a third-party business or service provider who uses information technology to provide them. This could be anything from customer service, data entry, tech support, research, or anything else that can be done remotely using technology. India has taken the lead in ITeS, and Indian companies are well-known for outsourcing these services to businesses all over the world. Using technology in this way helps companies become efficient, save money, and focus on what they do best while outsourcing non-essential tasks to specialised service providers.

Let us now discuss the most common IT-enabled services that are provided in India.

Call Centres

Call centres are centralised offices set up by companies to handle a large volume of telephone inquiries, requests, or customer support needs. They are staffed with customer service representatives who are trained to assist customers, answer queries, resolve issues, and provide information about products or services. Call centres can handle both inbound calls (incoming calls from customers) and outbound calls (calls made by the company to customers or potential clients for sales, surveys, or follow-ups).

BPO Services

BPO stands for business process outsourcing. It is a business practice in which an organisation hires a third-party service provider or vendor to perform specific business tasks. These tasks can include customer support, technical support, data entry, human resources, accounting, and other non-core functions. BPO services are commonly utilised by businesses to improve efficiency, reduce costs, and access specialised skills without the need for in-house expertise. India is a prominent destination for BPO services due to its large pool of skilled professionals and cost-effectiveness.

BPO services are often categorised into two main types:

Front-Office Outsourcing: This involves customer-related services such as customer support, technical support, sales, and marketing. Companies outsource these tasks to BPO providers to enhance the customer experience and satisfaction.

Back-Office Outsourcing: This includes internal business functions such as billing, payroll processing, data entry, and other administrative tasks. Back-office outsourcing helps companies streamline their operations and focus on their core business activities.

BPM Industry in India

The BPM (Business Process Management) industry in India is a significant and rapidly growing sector within the broader ITeS industry. BPM primarily involves the outsourcing of various business processes by organisations worldwide to service providers in India, where skilled professionals handle tasks such as answering phone calls, sorting papers, and performing computer work on behalf of other companies. These tasks are often non-core functions, allowing businesses to focus on their core activities while improving efficiency and reducing costs. The BPM industry in India has indeed experienced substantial growth, contributing significantly to the country’s economy.

Some advantages of BPM are as follows:

1. Risks reduction

2. Better organisational control

3. Optimised processes

4. Increased agility

5. Improved collaboration

6. Workflow automation

7. Ensured compliance

Structure of the IT-BPM Industry

Error Alert!

The IT industry primarily involves programming and coding. In reality, IT encompasses a wide range of activities, including hardware, software development, cybersecurity, networking, and more. It’s a diverse field with various career opportunities beyond coding.

The IT-BPM industry is an industry that combines information technology and business processes to streamline operations, improve efficiency, and deliver high-quality services. It encompasses a wide range of services, including software development, data management, and customer support.

The IT-BPM industries are categorised based on several key factors:

1. The specific market or region the company serves.

2. The types of services offered by the company.

3. The geographical coverage and reach of the company’s services.

4. The extent of the company’s operations and the profits it generates.

MNCs: Multinational corporations (MNCs) are global companies with operations in multiple countries. In the IT-BPM industry, they often establish subsidiaries or offices in various countries to tap into local talent and markets. ISPs: Internet Service Providers (ISPs) provide internet connectivity and services, forming the backbone of the IT-BPM industry by enabling online communication and data transfer.

GIC: Global In-House Centres (GICs) are offshore or nearshore centres established by MNCs to handle specific business functions or IT operations, benefiting from cost savings and access to skilled labour in other countries.

Error Alert!

Some people believe that IT is a static field where knowledge quickly becomes obsolete. However, the IT industry is dynamic and constantly evolving. It is essential for professionals to stay updated with the latest trends and technologies to remain competitive and relevant.

Applications of IT

Think and Tell

Information technology has a wide range of applications that impact various aspects of our lives and industries. It plays a crucial role in improving efficiency, productivity, communication, and decision-making.

Let’s discuss the various applications of IT in different sectors.

IT in Home Computing

Information technology plays a vital role in shaping the landscape of home computing within the ITeS sector. With the evolution of technology and changing work dynamics, remote work has become a cornerstone of the ITeS industry. IT solutions are the backbone of this transformation, facilitating seamless telecommuting for employees.

IT infrastructure, including secure virtual private networks (VPNs) and remote desktop solutions, enables individuals to work effectively from their homes, ensuring data security with firewalls, antivirus software, and encryption protocols.

The adoption of cloud computing allows easy access to essential tools and data, fostering collaboration and data sharing. Collaboration tools, video conferencing, instant messaging, and project management software are essential for remote teamwork.

IT in Everyday Life

IT is an integral part of everyday life. IT empowers us with digital solutions for various tasks, from online shopping and social networking to mobile banking and telemedicine.

In the ITeS industry, IT enables efficient customer service through chatbots and automated systems, streamlines data management, and enhances the overall consumer experience.

IT has an impact on everyday life by making our routines more convenient and businesses more efficient through the automation and digitisation of services and processes.

How has the vibrant startup ecosystem within the Indian IT-BPM industry contributed to its growth and innovation?

IT in Library

IT has revolutionised libraries within the ITeS framework. Libraries now employ digital cataloguing, online databases, and electronic resources to provide access to a wealth of information.

IT simplifies the process of searching for and accessing books and materials, making it more efficient for patrons. Additionally, self-checkout systems, automated return terminals, and digital lending platforms enhance the overall library experience.

IT facilitates remote access to digital collections, expanding a library’s reach beyond its physical boundaries. In ITeS, IT enables efficient management and maintenance of library systems and supports the broader goal of making information more accessible in an increasingly digital world.

IT at Workplace

IT facilitates seamless communication and collaboration through email, video conferencing, and project management tools. IT systems also manage and secure sensitive data, ensuring compliance with regulations.

It enables remote work, supporting employees with virtual private networks (VPNs) and cloud-based solutions. Monitoring tools track performance and productivity, while data analytics inform strategic decisions.

IT is crucial in the ITeS workplace, streamlining processes, enhancing productivity, and enabling adaptability in an increasingly digital-driven industry.

IT in Education

Let’s understand the importance of IT in education as below:

ICT in the Classroom ICT revolutionises education by providing digital tools for teaching and learning. In the classroom, ICT includes interactive whiteboards, educational software, and internet access, enriching the learning experience. It also supports remote learning and collaboration, making education accessible beyond the traditional classroom.

ICT enables educators to create dynamic, engaging lessons and empowers students with resources for research and skill development. It is a fundamental component of ITeS’s contribution to modern education, transforming how knowledge is acquired and shared.

Education Anywhere, Anytime The concept of ‘education anywhere, anytime’ within the ITeS framework signifies the transformative power of technology in learning. With the advent of digital platforms and online educational resources, individuals can access education on their own terms, breaking free from traditional classroom constraints.

ITeS empowers this shift by offering e-learning platforms, video lectures, and interactive content, enabling students and professionals to acquire knowledge at their convenience.

It fosters lifelong learning, makes education accessible to a global audience, and revolutionises the way we think about acquiring new skills and knowledge, irrespective of the location and time constraints.

Teaching Aids and Media Teaching aids and media in the context of ITeS encompass an array of digital tools and resources that enhance the learning process.

These include interactive multimedia presentations, e-books, video tutorials, and virtual simulations. ITeS leverages these aids to create engaging and effective educational content, making learning more interactive and accessible.

It caters to various learning styles, fosters better understanding, and allows educators to personalise instructions. In ITeS, these aids and media contribute to a more dynamic and versatile learning environment, ensuring that education remains at the forefront of technological advancements.

Learning Management System (LMS) In the ITeS sector, a learning management system (LMS) is a digital platform that streamlines the administration, delivery, and management of educational and training content. An LMS serves as a central hub for course materials, assignments, assessments, and communication between learners and instructors.

ITeS employs an LMS to facilitate e-learning and remote training, making education accessible to a broader audience.

It simplifies tracking progress, offers analytics for performance evaluation, and enhances the overall learning experience by providing a structured, organised, and interactive platform for both learners and educators.

IT in Entertainment

In the ITeS sector, IT has profoundly impacted the entertainment industry. IT-driven innovations have transformed how we consume and create entertainment. Streaming services, digital content distribution, and online gaming have flourished, while virtual reality and augmented reality experiences have pushed the boundaries of immersive entertainment.

IT also plays a critical role in content creation, post-production, and marketing. The ITeS industry facilitates the convergence of technology and entertainment, continuously revolutionising how we enjoy and engage with media, making it more accessible, interactive, and dynamic.

IT in Communication

IT is the backbone of communication within the ITeS sector. It facilitates seamless connectivity and interaction through various channels like email, instant messaging, video conferencing, and social media.

IT supports data management, ensuring the efficient storage and retrieval of information. In ITeS, it’s instrumental in customer service through chatbots, helpdesk systems, and data analytics for personalised communication. IT also underpins the development of communication platforms and technologies, contributing to the sector’s ability to provide efficient, real-time, and customised services to clients and customers.

IT in Business

IT enables organisations to automate processes, manage data, and enhance decision-making. IT supports everything from data analytics and customer relationship management to financial transactions and supply chain management.

In ITeS, IT solutions enable companies to deliver services efficiently and adapt to the fast-paced, technology-driven business environment.

It fosters innovation, streamlines operations, and ensures the security of sensitive information, making it an integral part of achieving success and competitiveness in the modern business landscape.

IT in Science and Engineering

IT facilitates data analysis, simulation, and modelling, enabling researchers and engineers to solve complex problems and develop innovative solutions. It supports scientific research through high-performance computing, making large-scale computations and simulations feasible. In engineering, IT aids in design and prototyping, enhancing efficiency and precision.

It also plays a critical role in data management, helping scientists and engineers organise and analyse massive datasets.

IT in Banking

In the ITeS sector, IT has revolutionised the banking industry. It underpins online and mobile banking, allowing customers to access their accounts, make transactions, and manage finances conveniently.

IT also ensures the security of financial data through encryption and authentication protocols. Additionally, IT supports data analysis for risk management, fraud detection, and personalised customer services.

With technologies like blockchain and fintech innovations, IT in banking is driving efficiency, transparency, and financial inclusion, transforming the sector’s operations and the way customers interact with their finances.

IT in Insurance

Information technology (IT) has significantly transformed the insurance industry within the ITeS sector. IT enables insurance companies to streamline their operations through digital underwriting, claims processing, and customer service. Data analytics and machine learning algorithms help assess risk more accurately, enabling better pricing models. Customer engagement and service have improved through online portals and mobile apps. IT also plays a critical role in fraud detection and prevention, safeguarding the integrity of insurance operations. In ITeS, IT is instrumental in enhancing efficiency, reducing costs, and creating a more responsive and customer-centric insurance industry.

IT in Marketing

IT has revolutionised marketing within the ITeS sector. It provides powerful tools for data analysis, targeting, and automation, enabling businesses to reach their target audience with precision.

IT supports customer relationship management (CRM) systems, email marketing, social media analytics, and digital advertising.

In ITeS, IT-driven marketing empowers companies to track consumer behaviour, personalise marketing campaigns, and measure the effectiveness of their strategies.

It has transformed marketing from a mass communication approach to a data-driven, highly targeted, and interactive process, enhancing businesses’ ability to connect with customers and drive growth.

IT in Healthcare

IT has revolutionised healthcare within the ITeS sector. It encompasses electronic health records (EHRs), telemedicine, and digital diagnostics, making patients’ information easily accessible and improving care delivery. IT also supports medical research, enabling data analysis and the development of new treatments.

It enhances administrative functions, optimising scheduling, billing, and resource management in healthcare institutions. IT in ITeS empowers healthcare professionals to provide better patient care, improve operational efficiency and drive innovation, ultimately advancing the quality and accessibility of healthcare services.

These sectors rely on IT to improve efficiency, customer experiences, and data management. Use of ICT in diagnosis:

Computerised Axial Tomography Machine A CAT or CT machine is a medical imaging device that uses X-rays and computer processing to generate detailed cross-sectional images of the body’s internal structures. These images provide valuable information for diagnosing and monitoring various medical conditions. CT scans are commonly used in hospitals and medical facilities for diagnostic purposes.

Magnetic Resonance Imaging Machine An MRI is a medical imaging technique that uses strong magnets and radio waves to generate detailed images of the internal structures of the body. This technique provides valuable information for diagnosing a wide range of medical conditions, including neurological disorders, musculoskeletal problems, and various other abnormalities. MRI is a non-invasive and versatile imaging tool widely used in the field of medicine.

Electrocardiogram (ECG) Machine Records the heart’s electrical activity, detecting rhythm abnormalities.

Cardiac Screening Machine Assesses heart health, including ECG, echocardiography, and stress tests.

Electroencephalography (EEG) Machine Records brain electrical activity, diagnosing epilepsy, sleep disorders, and brain injuries.

Blood Sugar Testing Machine Measures blood glucose, vital for diabetes management.

Blood Pressure Measuring Machine Measures blood pressure, crucial for cardiovascular assessment.

IT in the Government and Public Service

IT in the government and public services refers to the use of technology, including computers and software, to improve the efficiency, accessibility, and quality of services provided to citizens. By utilising computers, software, and digital tools, governments can streamline various functions such as record-keeping, communication, data analysis, and decision-making. These technologies enable governments to be more transparent, responsive, and efficient in serving the needs of their citizens. IT applications in government contribute to creating a more open, accessible, and responsive public administration system.

Think and Tell

How has the widespread adoption of smartphones and the internet revolutionised the way we access information and interact with technology in our daily lives? Discuss both the positive and negative impacts of this technological shift.

Activity Time

Activity 1: Making a Chart (Individual Work)

Prepare a chart on the role of IT in everyday life. Include examples of how IT impacts daily activities, such as online shopping, social media, and e-learning.

Activity 2: Preparing Case Study (Individual Work)

Analyse a real-world case study on the implementation of IT in a business or government service. Identify the benefits and challenges faced by the organisation.

Activity 3: Making a Poster (Individual Work)

Research and create a poster about various career opportunities in the IT and ITeS industries. Include information on roles such as software developer, data analyst, and IT support specialist.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  What does IT stand for in the context of modern education?

a  International Technology b  Information Technology c  Innovative Techniques d  Integrated Telecommunications

2  Which industry has been significantly transformed by IT, allowing customers to access their accounts, make transactions, and manage finances conveniently?

a  Agriculture b  Manufacturing c  Banking d  Construction

3  Which of the following are global companies with operations in multiple countries?

a  GICs b  ISPs c  MNCs d  None of these

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1 are staffed with customer service representatives who are trained to assist customers.

2  IT also supports research, enabling data analysis and the development of new treatments.

3 outsourcing includes internal business functions such as billing, payroll processing, data entry, and other administrative tasks.

4 machine records brain electrical activity, diagnosing epilepsy, sleep disorders, and brain injuries.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  It is a combination of both information and technology.

2  ISPs are offshore or nearshore centres established by MNCs to handle specific business functions, benefitting from cost savings and access to skilled labour in other countries.

3  The IT-BPM industry is an industry that combines information technology and business processes to streamline operations, improve efficiency, and deliver high-quality services.

4  The adoption of cloud computing in home computing allows easy access to essential tools and data, fostering collaboration and data sharing.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What are BPO services?

A1. BPO stands for business process outsourcing. It is a business practice in which an organisation hires a third-party service provider or vendor to perform specific business tasks. These tasks can include customer support, technical support, data entry, human resources, accounting, and other non-core functions.

Q2. Mention some advantages of the BPM industry.

A2. Following are some of the advantages of BPM industries:

• Risk reduction

• Better organisational control

• Optimised processes

• Increased agility

• Improved collaboration

• Workflow automation

• Ensured compliance

Q3. Myra wants to know how information technology (IT) has benefited the healthcare industry. Explain this by providing examples of IT applications in the healthcare sector.

A3. Information technology (IT) has revolutionised healthcare within the ITeS sector. IT encompasses electronic health records (EHRs), telemedicine, and digital diagnostics, making patient information easily accessible and improving care delivery. IT also supports medical research, enabling data analysis and developing new treatments. Answer Key

C 1. True.

2. False. GICS are offshore or nearshore centres established by MNCs to handle specific business functions, benefitting from cost savings and access to skilled labour in other countries.

3. True.

4. True.

Unit Reflection

Key Terms

ITeS: Information technology-enabled services (ITeS) is the process of outsourcing tasks or functions to a third-party business or service provider that uses information technology to provide them.

Call Centres: Call centres are centralised offices set up by companies to handle a large volume of telephone inquiries, requests, or customer support needs.

BPO: BPO stands for Business Process Outsourcing. It is a business practice in which an organisation hires a thirdparty service provider or vendor to perform specific business tasks.

Front Office Outsourcing: This involves customer-related services such as customer support, technical support, sales, and marketing. Companies outsource these tasks to BPO providers to enhance the customer experience and satisfaction.

Back Office Outsourcing: This includes internal business functions such as billing, payroll processing, data entry, and other administrative tasks. Back-office outsourcing helps companies streamline their operations and focus on their core business activities.

ISPs: Internet Service Providers (ISPs) provide internet connectivity and services, forming the backbone of the ITBPM industry by enabling online communication and data transfer.

GIC: Global In-House Centers (GIC) are offshore or nearshore centres established by MNCs to handle specific business functions or IT operations, benefiting from cost savings and access to skilled labour in other countries.

Things to Remember

• Information and Communications Technology (ICT) is the set of tools and systems that make up modern computing.

• IT is a common technology used in every business to enhance their business skills. One can use this for both personal and commercial purposes.

• BPO services are commonly utilised by businesses to improve efficiency, reduce costs, and access specialised skills without the need for in-house expertise.

• BPM primarily involves the outsourcing of various business processes by organisations worldwide to service providers in India, where skilled professionals handle tasks, such as answering phone calls, sorting papers, and performing computer work on behalf of other companies.

• The IT-BPM industry is an industry that combines information technology and business processes to streamline operations, improve efficiency, and deliver high-quality services.

• Multinational corporations (MNCs) are global companies with operations in multiple countries.

• IT systems manage and secure sensitive data, ensuring compliance with regulations.

• The concept of “education anywhere, anytime” within the ITeS framework signifies the transformative power of technology in learning.

• IT in communication facilitates seamless connectivity and interaction through various channels like email, instant messaging, video conferencing, and social media.

• IT in banking allows customers to access their accounts, make transactions, and manage finances conveniently.

• IT also supports medical research, enabling data analysis and the development of new treatments.

Test Your Knowledge

A. Select the correct option.

1. are centralised set-ups by companies to handle a large volume of telephone inquiries, requests, or customer support needs.

a. Call centres b. ISP c. GIC d. MNC

2. are offshore or nearshore centres established by MNCs to handle specific business functions.

a. ISP b. MNC c. BPO d. GIC

3. The full form of VPN is

a. Virtual Private Network

c. Virtual Personal Network

b. Virtual Public Network

d. Virtual Package Network

4. IT enable companies streamline their operations through digital underwriting, claims processing, and customer service.

a. Banking b. Marketing c. Insurance d. Healthcare

B. Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1. ITeS empowers professionals to provide better patient care, improve operational efficiency, and drive innovation.

2. The industry in India has indeed experienced substantial growth, contributing significantly to the country’s economy.

3. Multinational corporations are companies with operations in multiple countries.

4. The adoption of allows easy access to essential tools and data, fostering collaboration, and data sharing.

C. State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1. IT systems manage and secure sensitive data, ensuring compliance with regulations.

2. IT in marketing allows customers to access their accounts, make transactions, and manage finances conveniently.

3. Information technology plays a vital role in shaping the landscape of home computing within the ITeS sector.

4. It is a combination of both information and teaching.

D. Short answer-type questions.

1. List any two benefits of IT.

2. What are BPOs?

E. Long answer-type questions.

1. Differentiate between call centres and BPO services.

2. Explain the concept of the BPM industry in India.

F. Competency-based questions.

1. Shagun wants to know the key factors by which IT-BPM industries are categorised. Mention them to her.

2. Ritik has to explain the use of IT in home computing. Help him to do so.

Using Keyboard and Mouse

Data entry is the process of transcribing information or entering physical data into an electronic device, such as a computer, through data entry or input devices.

With a computer, you can use various devices for data entry, as discussed below:

Device Name Description Image

Computer Keyboard Basic input device with keys.

Mouse Basic hand-held pointing device.

Used for controlling the movement of a cursor or a pointer on a computer screen.

Light Pen

A pointing device used to select a displayed menu item or draw pictures on a monitor.

Stripe Reader

Used to read data from the magnetic stripes on most of the banking cards.

Joystick

Magnetic

Chip Readers Reads data from the chip on bank cards.

PIN Pad

An electronic device used to enter data into Automated Teller Machines (ATM) for debit, credit, or smart card-based transactions.

Optical Mark Reader (OMR) Used to read and input information from a form.

Barcode Reader

Scan codes directly from the products, books, and membership cards.

Among the devices discussed here, the most popular text-based input method is the keyboard and the handheld hardware input device that controls a cursor in a Graphical User Interface (GUI) environment is a mouse.

To strengthen operational skills while using computers, knowledge of systematic and effective keyboarding skills and typing ergonomics is essential.

Let us understand the basics of the keyboard and how to master keyboarding skills.

Keyboard

A keyboard is one of the peripheral input devices that allow users to communicate with a computer. Communication with the computer is done with the keys or buttons present on the keyboard. A standard keyboard has 104 keys. Each key on a keyboard, when pressed, corresponds to a single character (alphabet, digit, or symbol). Multiple key presses might result in actions or computer commands.

Keyboarding Skills

Did You Know?

Nowadays, wireless keyboard is also available.

The ability to touch, type, or input data through the keyboard smoothly while typing is called keyboarding skill. The touch way of typewriting, or touch-typing method, is a form of typing where only fingers are used to strike the keys that must be moved. This method of typing does not require the use of vision. It is a technique that solely relies on the tactile input from the keyboard. The sensation of touch is minimally involved, as this typing technique is controlled by muscle memory developed via extensive practice, using the right typing technique. As a result, the typist’s fingers become so accustomed to typing that they automatically press the correct keys without having to look or even feel their way around the keyboard.

Touch typing is done using a standard QWERTY keyboard with the hands placed at a starting location called the ‘home row keys’. The home row keys for the left hand are the ‘ASDF’ keys and for the right hand are ‘JKL’.

Types of Keys

The types of keys on a keyboard can be categorised as:

1. Alphabet Keys

2. Number Keys

3. Punctuation Keys

4. Special Keys

5. Modifier Keys

6. Function Keys

7. Navigation Keys

8. Toggle Keys

Let us discuss each type of keys in detail.

Alphabet Keys

There are 26 alphabet keys on the keyboard. They are marked from A to Z. (Refer Fig. 2.1.)

1. You can type words, sentences, and paragraphs with these alphabet keys for documents, articles, and essays.

2. The majority of keyboards feature a QWERTY layout with keys arranged in a non-alphabetical manner.

3. Having the conventional English-language key layout that starts with the letters Q-W-E-R-T-Y, reading from left to right across the top row of the keyboard, is known as a QWERTY keyboard. It can be found on computers, typewriters, laptops, or other electronic devices.

Number Keys

There are 10 number keys on a keyboard, numbered from 0 to 9. There are two separate positions and functions for the number keys, as shown in Fig. 2.2.

Position I:

Symbol Keys

Fig. 2.1: Alphabet Keys on Keyboard

Fig. 2.2: Number Keys on a Keyboard

Position I: Symbol Keys

The keys with symbols on them are located above the letters on the keyboard. When pressed individually, these keys function as number keys. However, when used in combination with the shift key, they function as symbol keys.

The following table shows the symbol given above the digits (Position I):

Position II: Numeric Keypad

It is located at the end of the right side of the keyboard. It is also known as a numeric keypad since it resembles a telephone number pad and used for entering numbers at a faster pace. It works in two different modes. The Num Lock key is provided to switch between these two modes.

1. Num Lock On: On pressing the numeric keys, the respective digits are typed.

2. Num Lock Off: When Num Lock is off, the keys 8, 2, 4, and 6 function as arrow keys for navigation, whereas 7, 1, 9, and 3 act as home, end, page up, and page down keys, respectively.

Did You Know?

Usually, some of the keyboards on laptops do not have a numeric keypad on the right side.

Punctuation Keys

Correct punctuation adds clarity and precision to the text. There are generally 14 punctuation marks used in the English language. (Refer Fig. 2.3.)

Fig. 2.3: Punctuation Keys on Keyboard

The following chart contains the punctuation mark’s name, symbol, and examples:

Punctuation Mark Name Symbol Example

Period

The cat is under the table.

Question Mark ? Did you complete your homework?

Exclamation Mark ! What a lovely view you have here!

Comma , In both positions, there are 10 keys, ranging from 0 to 9.

Colon : You have two choices: finish the work today or lose the contract.

Semicolon ; My daughter is a teacher; my son is a doctor.

Dash En dash (–) & Em dash(—)

Princeton–New York trains (En dash) She gave her answer—No! (Em dash)

Hyphen - Son-in-Law

Brackets [ ] I read that novel [The Great Gatsby] in high school.

Braces { } 21{11+[3-2]}=x

Parentheses ( ) I am going to visit my grandma (my dad’s mom) today.

Apostrophe ‘ She’s always on time.

Quotation Mark “ “ “Raja thinks that his brother [Akshit] will be a great dad”, said Vishal.

Ellipsis ... ‘Today … we vetoed the bill’.

Special Keys

The special keys present on the keyboard are used to carry out special actions in the text. (Refer Fig. 2.4.)

Some of the special keys and their functions are listed below:

Enter or Return Key It is used for entering commands or advancing the pointer to the start of the subsequent line.

Esc Key The Escape key is used to end (or “escape”) applications and tasks as well as communicate unique codes to devices.

Spacebar Key It is used to add space between two independent words to form a sentence.

Backspace Key It is used to delete the words and spacing before the cursor.

Windows Key It is used to open the Start Menu and use different shortcuts, like Windows + I, to open the Settings app.

Delete Key The Delete key does not move the pointer; instead, it deletes the character that is at the current cursor position of the currently selected object.

Fig. 2.4: Special Keys on a Keyboard

Modifier Keys

A modifier key is a key that modifies the action of another key when pressed simultaneously. These are used in combination with other keys to perform any action.

Shift Key It is used as a keyboard shortcut key in conjunction with another key to switch between capital and small letters.

(Refer Fig. 2.5.)

Ctrl Key To create control characters, combine the control key with other keys. Depending on the program that is running, each control character has a different meaning.

Alt Key This key, known as an Alternate, functions as a second control key. In addition, it is combined with other keys as a keyboard shortcut key.

Function Keys

The top row of the keyboard is home to the function keys, which start with the letter F, from F1 to F12 (refer Fig. 2.6), on the keyboard are the function keys. Depending on the software that is being run, these keys have varied meanings.

Navigation Keys

The navigation keys are the keys on a keyboard used to move around a screen. (Refer Fig. 2.7.) These may include up, left, right, and down arrows. These allow you to navigate through documents or other information.

1. The numeric keypad keys 8, 4, 2, and 6 can also be used as navigation keys when Num Lock is off.

2. These keys are very useful when playing games or handling tasks like video editing.

Fig. 2.6: Function Keys on Keyboard

Fig. 2.7: Navigation Keys on Keyboard

Fig. 2.5: Modifier Keys on Keyboard

Toggle Keys

By pressing a toggle key, a user can turn something on or off. (Refer Fig. 2.8.) The Caps Lock, Num Lock, and Scroll Lock keys are commonly referred to as toggle keys.

Fig. 2.8: Toggle Keys on a Keyboard

Caps Lock Key All alphabetic characters are capitalised when the setting is ON; otherwise, they are all small.

Scroll Lock Key This key is no longer seen on the majority of contemporary keyboards because it is rarely used. However, if it is available on a keyboard, it aids in stopping page scrolling until it is in use.

Num Lock Key This key is used to turn numeric 1–9 keys off. With this key in on mode, the numeric keys 8, 4, 2, and 6 can be used as navigation keys.

Home Keys and Guide Keys

Remember

There is an electrical contact made when a key is pressed. These electrical signals are sent in coded form to a microcontroller, which then relays them to the computer, describing the character that matches that key.

With good keyboard skills, time is saved, tiredness is reduced, text creation speed is increased, accuracy is improved, and workplace productivity is increased. These good keyboarding skills can be achieved only by learning the touch-typing method. Touch typing is a way of typing (with all your fingers) without looking at the keyboard; only the movement of fingers is required to press keys. With extensive training, touch typists use muscle memory to remember where the keys are present on the keyboard.

The keys are placed as:

1. Home row keys and

2. Guide keys

A, S, D, and F are the left-hand home row keys on a typical QWERTY keyboard, whereas J, K, L, and ; are the right-hand home row keys. The fingers are trained to make the correct movement to other keys, and each finger returns to its home key instantly.

The keys ‘F’ and ‘J’ are known as the left- and right-hand guide keys, respectively. Both have a small and raised noticeable mark that allows the touch typist to correctly place their fingers on the home keys.

The following points should be kept in mind for successful keyboarding techniques:

1. Press the keys with a feather touch, and do not put undue pressure on them.

2. Rest your fingers on the home row while typing.

3. Allow your fingers to fall naturally on the keys so that each rest on top of the next key along the same horizontal row.

4. While typing, release the key immediately as soon as you press it. Holding the key for a long time will repeatedly type the same character.

5. Proper sitting arrangement improves the typing speed and reduces stress on the hands.

Guide for Typing

A cursor is a small blinking line that flickers in a sentence while typing and shows the position at which you are. It serves as a guide for typing.

Positioning of Fingers on the Keyboard

Nowadays, proficiency on a computer keyboard is similar to mastery of a pen or pencil.

Mastery of typewriting skills involves gaining the requisite knowledge and skills of keyboard operation through proper finger positioning.

A touch typist starts by placing his or her fingers on the ‘start position’ on the middle row and knows which finger to move and how much to move to reach any required key. It is important to learn to place fingers in the starting position blindly, as the hands are frequently raised from the keyboard to operate the computer mouse.

The fingers of both hands must operate the keys designated to them on each row to learn how to use the keyboard. The keyboard learning process begins from the second row (Home Row), followed by the third row (Upper Row), the first row (Bottom Row), and then the fourth row (Number Row).

Allocation of Keys to Fingers on the Second Row (Home Row)

The home row keys are A, S, D, F, G, J, K, L, and ;. It is recommended to always keep your fingers on or close to the keys. Each hand and finger will only serve a range of predefined keys. The thumbs will rest on the space bar. Regular practice will build the muscle memory necessary to increase speed and accuracy.

The left hand should focus on the following home row keys:

1. The pinkie finger should be on key (A).

2. The ring finger on (S).

3. The middle finger on (D).

4. The index finger should be on (F).

The right hand should focus on the following home row keys:

1. The index finger should be on ( J).

2. The middle finger should be on (K).

3. The ring finger should be on (L).

4. The pinkie should be on (;).

The touch typist places the eight fingers in a horizontal row along the middle of the keyboard (the home row) and places the two thumbs on the space bar. The remaining two keys ‘G’ and ‘H’ on the second row are operated by the forefingers (index finger) of the left and right hands, respectively.

Fig. 2.9: Left- and Right-Hand Keys

Allocation of Keys to Fingers on the Third Row (Upper Row)

The upper row keys are Q, W, E, R, T, Y, U, I, O, and P. It is recommended to always keep your fingers on or close to the keys. Each hand and finger will only serve a range of predefined keys. Regular practice will build the muscle memory necessary to increase speed and accuracy.

The left hand should focus on the following upper-row keys:

1. The pinkie finger should be on key (Q).

2. The ring finger on (W).

3. The middle finger on (E).

4. The index finger should be on (R).

5. The index finger should be on (T).

The right hand should focus on the following upper-row keys:

1. The index finger should be on (Y).

2. The index finger should be on (U).

3. The middle finger should be on (I).

4. The ring finger should be on (O).

5. The pinkie should be on (P).

Keep your fingertips on the home row while typing on the upper row. Lifting the left hand’s fingers, type q w e r t (r and t are typed by the same finger) by pressing the upper row key one at a time.

Now, raise your right hand’s fingers once again, press the upper row keys one at a time, and type p o i u y (u and y are typed with the same finger).

One finger should be moved at a time, while the other fingers should stay in the home row.

Allocation of Keys to Fingers on the First Row (Bottom Row)

The Bottom row keys are Z, X, C, V, B, N, and M. All eight fingers on both hands were utilised to press the keys in the first two rows.

The left hand should focus on the following bottom-row keys:

1. The ring finger on (Z).

2. The middle finger on (X).

3. The index finger should be on (C).

4. The index finger should be on (V).

The right hand should focus on the following bottom-row keys:

1. The index finger should be on (B).

2. The index finger should be on (N).

3. The middle finger should be on (M).

4. The ring finger should be on (,).

5. The pinkie should be on (.).

Remember

The little finger of the left hand is not used when typing on the first row, meaning that it does not have a key assigned to it.

Allocation of Keys to Fingers on the Fourth Row (Number Row)

The left hand should focus on the following fourth-row keys:

1. The pinkie should be on 1.

2. The ring finger on 2.

3. The middle finger on 3.

4. The index finger should be on 4.

5. The index finger should be on 5.

The right hand should focus on the following fourth-row keys:

1. The index finger should be on 6.

2. The index finger should be on 7.

3. The middle finger should be on 8.

4. The ring finger should be on 9.

5. The pinkie should be on 0.

Using a Numeric Keypad

To enter numerical data correctly, the numeric keypad must be used efficiently. There are four columns and five rows on the numeric keypad. Home row is the grouping of 4, 5, 6, and +. This is the row that a touch typist starts by practicing.

The guide key on a numeric keypad is 5, and it has a little raised, evident mark that the touch typist might use as a reference when placing their fingers on other keys. The right-hand thumb is used to press the remaining keys on the numeric keypad, starting with ‘0’. The calculator keyboard can also be used to practice using the numeric keypad.

Pointing Device

A pointing device is a sort of input device that allows a user to interact with a computer by moving a pointer across a screen to choose icons and perform desired actions. The mouse, which was designed by Douglas England in 1967, is the most basic pointing device for desktop computers.

In addition to typing directly, we can select menu items from the computer screen, such as the Save or New options. This can be accomplished with point-and-draw devices such as a mouse. Such devices can be used to draw basic shapes, block arrows, and charts. Joysticks, light pens, and touch screens are further examples of point-and-draw devices.

Mouse

A mouse is a small handheld input device that allows you to move around the screen and enter commands without touching the keys. Mouse can be wired or wireless. The mouse is an essential component

Remember

The other pointing device is the touchpad for the laptop, and a small number of users prefer trackballs over the mouse.

Did You Know?

A wireless mouse uses infrared or radio waves to communicate with the computer.

Fig. 2.10: Positioning of Fingers on Numeric Keypad

of any PC’s graphical user interface (GUI). The mouse gets its name from its resemblance to a short, corded, elliptical gadget that resembles a mouse tail.

The mouse is set up by default to work with the right hand. Left-handed users can adjust the settings as per the requirement. Put your right hand on the mouse with your index and middle fingers on the left and right buttons, respectively. Use your ring finger and thumb to grip the mouse. Lightly push one mouse button, then quickly let go of it to click.

Types of Mouse

There are varieties of mouse used with computers. For a desktop computer, the most common type of mouse is an optical mouse that connects to the USB (Universal Serial Bus) port and is known as a USB mouse. For laptop computers, the most common type of mouse is the touchpad. Following is a list of the different types of mouse that can be used in computers:

Fig. 2.11: Holding a Mouse

IntelliMouse (Wheel Mouse)

Advantages of Using a Mouse

Following are the advantages of using a mouse.

Accuracy: For tasks like clicking small objects and selecting text, a mouse is more precise than other input devices like keyboards.

Speed: A mouse can be used to navigate the graphical user interface faster than other input devices.

Comfort: A mouse is more comfortable to use over a longer period than other input devices.

Mouse Pointer

A mouse pointer allows pointing on the screen. This mouse pointer appears as you move it around the screen. When using a web browser, the pointer changes to a pointing finger symbol as it moves across the page. This is used to identify a hyperlink. To navigate to another page, use the left mouse button once.

Basic Mouse Actions

Following are the basic mouse actions:

Click or Left-click: This is used to select an item. Press the left button once with your index finger.

Double-click: It is used to start a program, open a file, or trigger an action.

Right-click: The right button on a mouse is typically used to provide additional information and/or properties of an item selected. For example, if you highlight a word in Microsoft Word, pressing the right button will display a dropdown menu containing the options to cut, copy, paste, change the font, etc.

Drag and Drop: A drag-and-drop activity requires students to drag a piece of text or an image to one or more corresponding drop zones. Drag-and-drop activities are best utilised when students are engaged in sorting, grouping, matching, or placing information.

Scroll: A little wheel placed between the left and right mouse buttons on your mouse may be visible. This is referred to as the scroll wheel. You can go up and down a document or webpage by rotating the scroll wheel with your index finger.

Selecting/Blocking: It is another technique to pick text that has to be changed or formatted. You must click at the beginning of the word or sentence and hold down the left mouse button while dragging along the text, which will be highlighted in black. At the end of the paragraph or sentence, release the button.

J-Mouse

Laser Mouse

Typing Ergonomics

The science of typing ergonomics focuses on utilising good posture and stretching practices when using a computer to prevent frequent occupational injuries. It offers logistical support for speedy and accurate typing.

Sitting Posture

1. The height of the chair should be adjusted in such a manner that your feet are flat on the floor.

2. The hips should be slightly higher than the knees.

3. Keep your back straight.

4. The back of the chair should be somewhat inclined at a 100- to 110-degree angle.

5. Ensure that the keyboard is close and directly in front of you.

Hands Position

1. Put your forearms at a level with the keyboard and your palms down.

2. Elbows should be slightly higher than wrists when operating keys or a mouse. Neither touch the elbows to the body nor be too far away from the body.

3. Bend your elbows at a 90-degree angle.

4. The desk should be approximately 680- to 720-mm high.

Think and Tell

• Do you adopt the proper seated position when using a computer? Yes/No

• Are your workstation and chair ergonomic? Yes/No

• If not, have you made any necessary adjustments? Yes/No

• Are the positions of your keyboard, mouse, and computer table correct? Yes/No

Fig. 2.13: Hands Position

Fig. 2.12: Correct and Incorrect Sitting Posture

Activity Time

Guidelines to attempt Activity 1 and 2

• Practise typing the character without looking at the keyboard.

• Arrange the letters so that they are stacked one on top of the other.

• Focus on the text.

• Type slowly and accurately.

• Repeat this exercise until you have mastered it.

Activity 1: Get Perfection Over Left Hand (Individual Work)

Type the following in double-line spacing to get perfection over the Left-hand Home Row. (Using letters A, S, D, and F)

ffffddddssssaaaaffffddddssssaaaaffffddddssssaaaa

ff dd ss aa ff dd ss aa ff d ff d ff s ff s ff a ff a

fdsafdsafdsafdsafdsafdsafdsafdsa

asdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdf

fads dafssafddsaffasdadfssdafafdsfdsa

Activity 2: Get Perfection Over Right Hand (Individual Work)

Type the following in double line spacing to get perfection over the Right-hand Home Row. (Using letters J, K, L, and punctuation ;)

jjjkkklll ;;; jjjkkklll ;;; jjjkkklll ;;;jj kk ll ;; jj kk ll ;;

jj kk ll ;; jj kk ll ;; jj k jj l jj ; j k l ; j k l ; jjjkkkll ;;

jkl; jkl; jkl; jkl; jkl; jkl; jkl; jkl; jkl; jkl; jkl; jkl;

;lkj ;lkj ;lkj ;lkj ;lkj ;lkj ;lkj ;lkj ;lkj ;lkj ;lkj ;lkj ;lkj

Chapter

Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1 key is not an example of modifier keys. a  Alt b  Ctrl c  Spacebar d  Shift

2  A touch typist starts by placing his or her fingers on the ‘start position’ in the . a  Left Row b  Middle Row c  Right Row d  Down Row

3  To type capital letters, switch ON the by pressing the key before typing. a  Esc Key b  Caps Lock Key c  Enter Key d  Alt or Ctrl Key

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  On the numeric keypad, 0 is to be pressed by the thumb.

2  The keys F and J are known as .

3  The key is used to delete the character on the left-side of the cursor.

4  Q, W, E, R, T, Y, U, I, O, P are known as row keys.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  The function keys have different meanings in different software.

2  On a numeric keypad, the number 8 is the guide key.

3  The control key is used in conjunction with other keys.

4  The Alt key is always used with another key.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. Who is a touch typist?

A1. A touch typist is someone who types without looking at the keyboard. Muscle memory helps the user remember where the keys are available. Touch typists position their fingers in the centre of the row and know which finger to move and how much to move to reach any key.

Q2. Differentiate between Home Keys and Guide Keys.

A2. Home Key – The home keys for the left hand are A, S, D, and F, and the home keys for the right hand are ; (semi-colon), L, K, and J.

Guide Key – The keys ‘F’ and ‘J’ on a computer keyboard are known as left- and right-hand guide keys, respectively.

Q3. Sneha is not aware of typing ergonomics. Explain it to her by describing about the sitting posture.

A3. The science of typing ergonomics focuses on utilising good posture and stretching practices when using a computer to prevent frequent occupational injuries. It offers logistical support for speedy and accurate typing.

For the sitting posture:

• The height of the chair should be adjusted in such a manner that your feet are flat on the floor.

• The hips should be slightly higher than the knees.

• Keep your back straight.

• The back of the chair should be somewhat inclined at a 100- to 110-degree angle.

• Ensure that the keyboard is close and directly in front of you.

Answer Key

A 1. c   2. b   3. b

B 1. Right   2. Guide keys   3. Backspace    4. Upper

C 1. True.

2. False. The guide key on a numeric keypad is 5 3. True.

4. True.

Using Typing Software

Keyboarding is a technical skill that everyone should know. What makes a real difference is how good you’re at typing, i.e., speed and accuracy. If you do touch type at an above-average word-per-minute rate, you can save hundreds of hours per year. By devoting some hours to learn touch typing, every student can equip themselves with an essential skill that will pay off time and time again for the rest of their life. Effective typing is necessary for any office work.

Typing software is a computer program that teaches users how to type faster and more accurately, typically through typing drills and lessons. Although there are some programs for skilled users, most typing software is designed for beginners.

Many of the software programs available today are free of cost and are customised to learn typing efficiently and effectively. Examples of typing software are Rapid Typing Tutor, Typing Instructor, The Typing Cat, Typing Master, etc.

Touch Typing

Touch typing is a method of typing without using your vision. The typist uses muscle memory to find keys on the keyboard without having to look at them. It involves placing all eight fingers on the home row and using them to locate the keys by touch, allowing for more efficient typing. Through extensive training and practice, individuals can develop muscle memory and improve their typing speed and accuracy. Touch typing is indeed a valuable skill that can be honed through various exercises and workouts, leading to enhanced professional keyboard skills.

Benefits of Touch Typing

Speed Increase in speed and efficiency is one of the most alluring benefits of learning touch typing.

Accuracy Learning to touch type will help you type more correctly and accurately. No one would comprehend what you were trying to say if you were typing quickly but incorrectly.

Time Doing the assignment within the allotted time is another advantage of touch typing. Less time will be needed to complete the work if the typing speed is fast.

Focus You don’t have to search for the keys while typing if you know touch typing. Learning touch typing allows you to focus on your work, thereby increasing productivity.

Requirements of Touch Typing

Following are the requirements for touch typing:

Hardware A computer system with a keyboard and mouse.

Operating System Software Windows 7 and above

Application Software Rapid Typing Software 5.4

Rapid Typing Tutor Software

Rapid Typing Tutor is a free and open-source software (FOSS) program designed to help users improve their typing skills. It offers lessons, games, and typing tests to assist users in learning and practising touch typing. Rapid Typing Tutor is a convenient and easy-to-use keyboard trainer that will help you improve your typing speed and reduce typing mistakes. With its lessons organised for various student levels, it will teach you touch typing or enhance your existing skills.

Available Courses While Learning Rapid Typing

Rapid typing offers a variety of courses based on difficulty level, including Introduction, Beginner, Experienced, Advanced, and Testing.

Introduction Course This course covers every character on your keyboard.

Beginner Course The key placement on a keyboard can be learned with the aid of this course. After completing this course, you won’t need to look at the keyboard to know which finger to press each key. Capital letters, special symbols, and the numeric pad are all covered throughout the course.

Experienced Course This will assist the user in increasing typing speed by learning commonly used syllables and words.

Advanced Course By entering actual text, the user can practice their typing skills with the help of this course.

Testing Course With the help of an advanced typing test in this course, the user can assess his present typing speed and accuracy and print a copy of the results.

Starting Rapid Typing Software

Once you have downloaded the software, follow the given steps to start a rapid typing software:

1. Click the Start button > All apps > Select RapidTyping 5 from the list. OR

Type RapidTyping 5 in the search box and hit the Enter key. The screen is displayed as shown in Fig. 3.1.

Fig. 3.1: RapidTyping 5.4

Components of Rapid Typing Tutor Software

Following are the components of the RapidTyping window:

Student statistics, Ctrl + 2

Lesson editor, Ctrl + 3

Current lesson, Ctrl + 1 Options, Ctrl + O

Select course, F6

Select lesson, F7

Pause the lesson, F5

Title Bar: The title bar is the top-most bar of the RapidTyping window.

The top-left corner contains three buttons for moving between basic program modes:

1. Current Lesson: Used to check the current lesson.

2. Student Statistics: Used to check the statistics of the student’s typing skills.

3. Lesson Editor: Used to edit the lesson settings.

The top-right corner contains the following buttons:

1. Options: Used to change the settings such as language, background, text colour, themes, sound, font, help, update, and log out of the RapidTyping software.

2. Maximise, Minimise, and Close Buttons: The maximise and minimise buttons are used to control the window size and the close button is used to close the window.

Toolbar: The toolbar allows you to select the course and lesson, as well as customise the primary program features. The Lesson Control section allows you to start/stop the current lesson, return to the beginning, and view the current speed, accuracy, and remaining or elapsed lesson time in real time.

Text Area: The text to be typed appears in the text area in the centre of the window.

Status Bar: The status bar at the bottom contains suggestions for the current lesson. It provides tips for the user to follow while typing. The progress bar contains the lesson length and metronome. The volume control is used to increase or decrease the sound generated by keys while typing.

Virtual Keyboard: This will assist you in learning to type with all ten fingers. In the keyboard settings, you can customise its options.

Fig. 3.2: Components of RapidTyping Software

How to Start a Lesson

Once you open RapidTyping software, let’s start practising on the typing software by following the given steps:

1. Click the Current lesson tab. Generally, it is selected by default. You will see two drop-down lists see Fig. 3.3.

Current lesson tab

Course drop-down list Lesson dropdown list

Depending on your knowledge and experience, select a course as shown in Fig. 3.4.

2. After selecting the course, select the lesson you want to learn. Lessons are categorised by function, for example, Basics, Shift keys, Digit keys, and Numeric pad. (See Fig. 3.5.) These parts are included in the introduction and beginner courses.

Fig. 3.3: Selecting the Current Lesson

Fig. 3.4: Types of Courses

3. To begin with, first select the course, Introduction, and then select the lesson, Lesson 1. (See Fig. 3.6.)

4. Put your fingers in the base position, as shown on the keyboard (Fig. 3.7). When everything is ready, press any key to begin the lesson. Now, use the keyboard to enter the text or letter that is displayed in the text area.

Fig. 3.5: Types of Lessons

Fig. 3.6: Starting Lesson 1

Fig. 3.7: Placing Fingers on the Virtual Keyboard

5. While you are typing, see the current speed, accuracy, and remaining lesson time in real time. (See Fig. 3.8.)

6. To begin a lesson, either click the button or press any key. To pause a lesson, click the button that is displayed or press the F5 key. To restart the current lesson, click the button, or press the F8 key.

7. You can also specify time remaining or time elapsed here, as well as the speed and accuracy indicators for real-time controls.

Remember

A virtual keyboard will assist a beginner in locating the required keyboard characters. While typing, you should establish and keep a rhythm. This indicates that there should be consistent spacing between keystrokes.

8. The bottom text area contains the lesson status bar. It recommends which fingers to use to type the current character. Also, it shows two progress bars, which indicate the proportion of the current lesson that has been completed in the green progress bar (below), and the upper yellow progress indicator shows the acceptable time for typing one character. (See Fig. 3.9.) RapidTyping reports slowdown error when the yellow progress bar runs out.

9. Each lesson ends with the appearance of the Results window, as shown in Fig. 3.10. The Results pane shows your successes and provides several additional possibilities.

Typing Speed

Various accuracy levels can be used to determine the typing speed.

1. How many characters are typed for a given period?

Fig. 3.8: Current Speed, Accuracy, and Remaining Lesson Time

Fig. 3.9: Status Bar

Fig. 3.10: Result Overview

2. How many keystrokes are done for a given period? and

3. How many words are typed for a given period (the least accurate)?

Gross speed and net speed are the metrics used to calculate an operator’s typing speed.

Gross or raw speed is a measurement of how quickly you type without accounting for errors, and net speed is a calculation of how quickly you can type error-free.

The following lists the detailed descriptions of types of typing speed.

1. Words per minute (wpm): The number of words typed in one minute.

• Gross speed = WPM = (Words without errors + Words with errors) / Time spent in minutes

• Net Speed = Net WPM = WPM – (Words with errors / Time spent in minutes)

2. Characters per minute (cpm): The number of characters typed in one minute.

• Gross speed = CPM = (Characters without errors + Characters with errors) / Time spent in minutes

• Net Speed = Net CPM = CPM – (Characters with errors / Time spent in minutes)

3. Keystrokes per minute (kpm): The number of keystrokes in one minute.

• Gross speed = KPM = (Keystrokes without errors + Keystrokes with errors) / Time spent in minutes

• Net speed = Net KPM = KPM – (Keystrokes with errors / Time spent in minutes)

For example

1. A typist typed 480 characters per 4 min with errors in 40 characters.

• Gross speed = 480 characters / 4 min = 120 cpm

• Net speed = 120 cpm – (40 errors / 4 min) = 110 net cpm

2. A student typed 450 words per 10 min with errors in 50 words.

• Gross speed = 450 words / 10 min = 45 wpm

• Net speed = 45 wpm – (50 errors / 10 min) = 40 net wpm

Typing Accuracy

Typing accuracy is measured as the proportion of correctly typed characters to total characters.

The various formulas for calculating typing accuracy are listed below:

Percentage of Word Accuracy

Accuracy% = (100% – (Words with errors * 100%) / Total number of words)

Percentage of Character Accuracy

Accuracy% = (100% – (Characters with errors * 100%) / Total number of characters)

Percentage of Keystroke Accuracy

Accuracy% = (100% – (Incorrect keystrokes * 100%) / Total number of words)

Typing Errors

Typing inaccuracy is the percentage of wrongly typed words out of the total number of typed words. The various formulas for calculating Errors are listed below:

Percentage of Word Errors

Errors % = (Words with errors * 100%) / Total number of words

Percentage of Character Errors

Errors % = (Characters with errors * 100%) / Total number of characters

Percentage of Keystroke Errors

Errors % = (Incorrect keystrokes * 100%) / Total number of keystrokes

Typing Rhythm

The typing rhythm is highly crucial in touch-typing approaches. Typing rhythm implies that keystrokes should be spaced evenly. The slowdown indicator is used to manage consistent typing speed.

Percentage of Slowdown in the Words

Slowdown % = (Words with delay * 100%) / Total number of words

Percentage of Slowdown in the Characters

Slowdown % = (Characters with delay * 100%) / Total number of characters

Percentage of Slowdown in the Keystrokes

Slowdown % = (Keystrokes with delay * 100%) / Total number of keystrokes

Understanding Result Window

Understanding results is a crucial task; it helps you understand where to improve. Once you complete a lesson, the result window will display the overall rating. It will track your progress by displaying typing speed, accuracy, and keystroke slowdown. Also, there are three tabs present in the lower portion of the window, namely, Next step, Detailed statistics, and Errors overview.

Next step

The Next step tab advises that you take the lesson again or move on to the next lesson; compare your outcomes once more to the course objectives in the course selections. If you meet the three requirements (speed, accuracy, and time-out), it is advised that you move on to the next lesson else it is advised to take the lesson again.

Detailed statistics

You can view the detailed lesson statistics, typing errors and slowdowns for each character/keystroke, and typing speed on the detailed statistics tab. It shows the mistakes you made in different colours:

1. The red colour depicts a bad result.

Fig. 3.11. Next step Tab

2. The orange colour depicts an incorrect character and the time for typing a character that was exceeded by the user.

3. The yellow colour depicts the time frame that was exceeded by the user.

4. The green dashed line depicts an excellent result.

Errors Overview

You can review the errors that occurred during the lesson on the Errors overview tab.

The colours stand for the following:

1. Green depicts a proper character.

2. A yellow character indicates that the time limit has been exceeded.

3. The characters in red were typed wrong.

4. The time limit for inputting a character has been exceeded, resulting in an incorrect character.

These colours can be changed under the background and text colour settings.

Fig. 3.12: Detailed statistics Tab

Fig. 3.13: Errors overview Tab

Analyse Student Statistics

Select the Student statistics tab present in the top-left corner of the main window. The screen will open as shown.

Student statistics tab

The Student statistics window is composed of the following controls:

1. Student Accounts/Groups: This area has the following parts:

• Student Toolbar: It is used for creating new student accounts, editing current student groups, adding new student accounts, deleting existing student accounts, and saving student statistics in the following formats: PDF, HTML, XML, and CSV.

• Student Accounts: This section is used for choosing the current student account or group.

• Property Panel: You can edit the group or student properties of the currently selected item in the Navigation Tree in the Property panel.

2. Statistics Panel/Session Statistics: This area has the following parts:

• Statistics Toolbar: It has the buttons that allow you to pick courses, remove chosen statistics, and customise statistics display choices.

• Course Diagram/Statistics: The data for the entire course is displayed in the course statistics. The line moves to red if the outcome is favourable and to green if it is unfavourable.

• Lesson Diagram/Statistics: This displays the data for each character or keystroke of the selected lesson in the course diagram.

• Lesson Statistics Table: This displays the complete statistics of the selected lesson in the course diagram.

Fig. 3.14: Student Statistics

Course diagram/ statistics

Lesson diagram/ statistics

Working with the Lesson Editor

Lesson editor is used to edit your lessons as per your choice. With a lesson editor, you have complete control over your learning experience. You can create your own courses or alter ones that already exist. You can add, change, delete, or group them together in a course.

To start the Lesson editor:

Select the Lesson editor tab present on the top-left corner of the main window. The screen will open as shown.

Lesson editor tab

Fig. 3.15: Student statistics Screen

Fig. 3.16: Lesson editor Window

The controls in the Lesson editor window are as follows:

Course and Lesson List

Title Bar It shows the Lesson editor tab in addition to the title and control buttons.

Toolbar It has commands for adding, removing, inserting, and saving lessons and courses in the database.

Navigation Tree It displays a list of the currently selected score area, lesson, and keyboard configuration.

Properties This section allows you to change the course, section, and properties of the current lesson, including the lesson name and section.

Editing Panel

You can alter the course options or the currently selected lesson in the editing panel, which is located in the navigation tree.

Text Analysis Table

The amount and percentage of words, characters, spaces, and particular characters in the lesson are shown in the text analysis table.

Virtual Keyboard

The characters used in the chosen lesson are highlighted on the virtual keyboard. You can select your keyboard language in the keyboard layout; it depends on the language of the course.

Creating a New Lesson Plan

You can create a new lesson of your choice by following the given steps:

1. Click the Lesson menu

2. Select the course level where you want to add a new lesson.

3. Choose Create new lesson from the Lesson menu.

4. Give a suitable name and title in the given box.

Creating a New Course

1. Select the Lesson editor option.

2. Click the Course menu option, a drop-down menu will appear.

Remember

You can always easily hide/show:

• Click or press Ctrl+K to access the course and lesson list.

• Press Ctrl+L to access the text analysis table.

• Press Ctrl+W to access the properties.

• Press F9 to access the virtual keyboard.

3. Choose the Create new course option. A new course will be added to the navigation tree.

4. Give a suitable name and title in the given box. Press the Enter key.

Deleting a Lesson/Course

You can delete the selected lesson or course, using the delete button or by pressing the Delete key on the keyboard.

Activity Time

Activity 1: Typing Practice (Individual Work)

Anita was practising on RapidTyping software. She typed 240 words in 10 minutes and made mistakes in 6 words. Calculate the following for Anita.

• Gross and Net typing speed

• Word Accuracy Percentage

• Word Error Percentage

Activity 2: Type with Left Hand (Using Letters A S D F) (Individual Work) ffffddddssssaaaaffffddddssssaaaaffffddddssssaaaa

ff dd ss aa ff dd ss aa ff d ff d ff s ff s ff a ff a fdsafdsafdsafdsafdsafdsafdsafdsa asdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdf fads dafssafddsaffasdadfssdafafdsfdsa

Activity 3: Type with Both Hands (Individual Work) fad fads lad lads lass alas salad salads dad dads lad lads salads alas ad add ads adds as ask asks la lad lads lass da dad dada dadasa sad salad all fall falls alf alfa alfas fad fads salsa ska skald skalds flak flask flasks

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1   KPM stands for .

a  Keystrokes per minute b  Keyboard per minute c  Keys per minute d  All of these

2  In the Rapid typing tutor, which of the following is not true?

a  Green letters denote correct inputs.

b  Yellow letters stand for correct inputs in extra time.

c  Red letters denote wrong inputs within time.

d  Orange letters indicate wrong inputs within time.

3  The text to be typed appears in the in the centre of the window.

a  status bar b  text area c  toolbar d  background

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1 is used to edit the lesson settings.

2 will assist the user in increasing typing speed by learning commonly used syllables and words.

3 will assist you in learning to type with all ten fingers.

4  Gross speed and speed are the metrics used to calculate an operator’s typing speed.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  In the Rapid Typing tutor, yellow character indicates that the time limit has been surpassed.

2  The main components of the Rapid Typing tutor are the title bar, toolbar, text panel, status bar, and virtual keyboard.

3  Typing accuracy is measured as the proportion of wrongly typed characters to total characters.

4  Property panel is used for choosing the current student account or group.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What is the colour indication in typing tutor software?

A1. The following is the colour code:

• The red colour depicts a bad result.

• The orange colour depicts an incorrect character and the time for typing a character that was exceeded by the user.

• The yellow colour depicts the time frame that was exceeded by the user.

• The green dashed line depicts an excellent result.

Q2. What does the lesson editor help us to do?

A2. The lesson editor makes all the lessons fully customisable. You can add, insert, change, and delete lessons, group them in courses, and review the corresponding metrics.

Q3. Mahi is unaware of the importance of maintaining a typing rhythm. Explain it to her.

A3. The typing rhythm is highly crucial in touch-typing approaches. Typing rhythm implies that keystrokes should be spaced evenly. The slowdown indicator is used to manage consistent typing speed.

Answer Key

C 1. True.

2. True.

3. False. Typing accuracy is measured as the proportion of correctly typed characters to total characters.

4. False. The Student account section is used for choosing the current student account or group.

Unit Reflection

Key Terms

Keyboarding Skills: The ability to touch, type, or input data through the keyboard smoothly while typing is called keyboarding skills.

Alphabet Keys: There are 26 alphabet keys on the keyboard. They are marked from A to Z.

Number Keys: There are 10 number keys on a keyboard, numbered from 0 to 9.

Modifier Keys: A modifier key is a key that modifies the action of another key when pressed simultaneously. These are used in combination with other keys to perform any action.

Shift Key: It is used as a keyboard shortcut key in conjunction with another key to switch between uppercase and lowercase letters.

Ctrl Key: To create control characters, combine the control key with other keys. Depending on the program that is running, each control character has a different meaning.

Alt Key: This key, known as an alternate, functions as a second control key. In addition, it is combined with other keys as a keyboard shortcut key.

Navigation Keys: The navigation keys are the keys on a keyboard used to move around a screen.

Caps Lock key: All alphabetic characters are capitalised when the setting is ON; otherwise, they are all lowercase.

Scroll Lock key: This key is no longer seen on the majority of contemporary keyboards because it is rarely used. However, if it is available on a keyboard, it aids in stopping page scrolling until it is in use.

Num Lock key: This key is used to turn numeric 1–9 keys off. With this key in on mode, the numeric keys 8, 4, 2, and 6 can be used as navigation keys.

Pointing Device: A pointing device is a sort of input device that allows a user to interact with a computer by moving a pointer across a screen to choose icons and perform desired actions.

Gross Speed: Gross or raw speed is a measurement of how quickly you type without accounting for errors.

Net Speed: Net speed is a calculation of how quickly you can type error-free.

Typing Accuracy: It is measured as the proportion of correctly typed characters to total characters.

Typing Errors: Typing error is the percentage of wrongly typed words out of the total number of typed words.

Things to Remember

• Data entry is the process of transcribing information or entering physical data into an electronic device, such as a computer, through data entry or input devices.

• Touch typing is done using a standard QWERTY keyboard with the hands placed at a starting location called the home row keys.

• There are generally 14 punctuation marks used in the English language.

• The special keys present on the keyboard are used to carry out special actions in the text.

• The top row of the keyboard is home to the function keys, which start with the letter F (F1 to F12).

• The Caps Lock, Num Lock, and Scroll Lock keys are commonly referred to as toggle keys.

• A mouse is a small handheld input device that allows you to move around the screen and enter commands without touching the keys.

• The science of typing ergonomics focuses on utilising good posture and stretching practices when using a computer to prevent frequent occupational injuries.

• Examples of typing software are Rapid Typing Tutor, Typing Instructor, The Typing Cat, Typing Master, etc.

• Rapid Typing Tutor is a free and open-source software (FOSS) program designed to help users improve their typing skills.

• RapidTyping offers a variety of courses based on difficulty level, including Introduction, Beginner Experienced, Advanced, and Testing.

• Typing rhythm implies that keystrokes should be spaced evenly.

Test Your Knowledge

A. Select the correct option.

1. is the process of transcribing information or entering physical data into an electronic device.

a. Data entry b. Touch typing c. Keyboarding skills d. Pointing device

2. The ability to touch, type, or input data through the smoothly while typing is called a keyboarding skill.

a. Mouse b. Keyboard

c. Printer

d. Monitor

3. The section allows you to start/stop the current lesson and view the current speed, accuracy, and elapsed lesson time in real time.

a. Lesson editor b. Text area

c. Status bar

4 is measured as the proportion of correctly typed characters to total characters.

a. Typing speed b. Typing error

5. The dashed line depicts the excellent result.

d. Lesson control

c. Typing accuracy d. Touch typing

a. Green b. Yellow c. Red

B. Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

d. Orange

1. has buttons that allow you to pick courses, remove chosen statistics, and customise statistics display choices.

2. The colour depicts the incorrect character and the time for typing a character that was exceeded by the user.

3. displays the data for each character or keystroke of the selected lesson in the course diagram.

4. key is used to give spacing between two independent words to form a sentence.

5. A serves as a guide for typing.

C. State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1. The lesson diagram displays the complete statistics of the selected lesson in the course diagram.

2. The home row keys are A, S, D, F, G, J, K, and L.

3. The Status bar allows you to customise the primary program features.

4. When Num Lock is off, the keys 8, 2, 4, and 6 function as arrow keys for navigation.

5. OMR is used to read and input information from a form.

D. Short answer-type questions.

1. Define the Status bar

2. What do you mean by typing accuracy?

3. What is the use of a barcode reader?

E. Long answer-type questions.

1. What are navigation keys?

2. Define title bar. Discuss all the buttons placed on it.

3. Discuss the allocation of keys to fingers on the third row.

F. Competency-based questions.

1. Pihu wants to know about the available courses while learning Rapid Typing. Explain to her the variety of courses based on difficulty level.

2. Sneha is typing using the keyboard, but not following the proper typing ergonomics. What is typing ergonomics? Explain the importance of sitting posture while working on a computer.

Creating a Document

In today’s digital era, the skill to create organised and visually appealing documents is an important skill for both academic and professional success. Whether you are preparing school assignments or projects, or simply want to express your thoughts and ideas, word processing software has become a remarkable tool.

Let us discuss the basics of word processing software, which will help you get familiar with the essential tools and features.

Introduction to Word Processor

A document is a piece of information or a record that has been written, printed, or digitally developed that transmits information in a structured and organised way, such as facts, ideas, instructions, or conversations. Documents are important for many aspects of personal and professional lives and can be found in both physical (printed) and electronic (digital) formats. Documentation is the process of making documents.

A word processor is a computer software application designed with a single goal of allowing users to write, edit, format, and print text-based documents. Word processors are now an essential component of both personal and professional computing, allowing users to create a variety of documents such as essays, papers, assignments, or even simple personal letters.

Features of a Word Processor

The features of a word processor are listed in the table below:

Features Description

Ease and Speed

Editing Features

Formatting Features

A word processor provides a convenient and faster method to type and create documents.

It enables you to perform various operations such as copying, moving, and deleting text. Header and footer, page number, and page borders are also included.

Bold, Italics, Underline, Font name, Font size, WordArt, and Color are some of the formatting features.

Features Description

Storage Features It allows you to store documents, which you can retrieve when needed.

Tables and Charts It enables you to insert table and graphs in the documents which helps in easy understanding of data.

Printing Features

Vocabulary and Spelling Check

Mail Merge

It enables you to create a hard copy of your documents. You can also see a preview of a print copy before printing it.

This feature helps you create error-free documents. It not only helps in rectifying spelling errors but also suggesting synonyms for words. It also helps in correcting grammatical mistakes.

It helps in sharing a single document with multiple addresses. It saves a lot of time as well as effort to send everyone individually.

Graphic Feature To enhance the presentation of your document, you can insert images, charts, and drawings.

OLE Feature

OLE stands for Object Linking and Embedding. This feature allows a word processor to interact with other programs by embedding objects in the documents.

Applications of Word Processing

A word processor is a software application that can write, edit, save, and print documents. Basic word processors such as Notepad and WordPad are also referred to as Text editors. Plain text can be created and edited using these. On the other hand, you can edit the text styles in Microsoft Word and Writer, and add creative elements and a fancy text. The following is a list of some word processing applications:

1. Microsoft Word

2. Notepad and WordPad

3. OpenOffice Writer

4. LibreOffice Writer

5. Google Docs

Introduction to Writer

The LibreOffice software suite includes a word processor and publishing tool called LibreOffice Writer. Various operating systems, including Mac OS X, Microsoft Windows, Linux, FreeBSD, and Solaris, support LibreOffice Writer. LibreOffice Writer has many features, which include:

1. Spelling check

2. Thesaurus

3. Autocorrect

4. Find and replace

5. Automatic generation of tables of contents and indexes

6. Mail merge

7. Styles and templates

9. Built-in drawing tools

LibreOffice Writer is easy enough to use for a quick memo and can be used to create large documents, reports, and novels. A word processor, spreadsheet, presentation software, and vector drawing tool are all included in the free office package, LibreOffice.

Did You Know?

LibreOffice Writer is an open-source software, which means it is free to use and can be modified by anyone. It includes several applications like: Writer (word processing), Calc (spreadsheets), Impress (presentations), Draw (vector graphics and flowcharts), Base (databases), and Math (formula editing).

Starting LibreOffice Writer

To start LibreOffice Writer on your computer:

1. Click on the Start button > All apps > select LibreOffice from the list.

2. When you open the LibreOffice suite, choose the Writer Document under Create. The LibreOffice Writer blank document appears.                 OR

Type Writer or LibreOffice Writer in the search bar and directly search for it.

Directly click its shortcut icon if you have placed it on your desktop and then choose Writer.

Fig. 4.1: LibreOffice Suite

Components of LibreOffice Writer

The following are the various components of the Writer window:

Title Bar

Horizontal Ruler

Menu Bar

Standard Toolbar

Horizontal Scrollbar

Document Area

Formatting Toolbar

Vertical Scrollbar

Sidebar

Status Bar

Components Description

Title Bar

Menu Bar

Standard Toolbar

Formatting Toolbar

View Buttons Zoom Slider

Rulers

The title bar is at the top of the screen and shows the name of the current open document. On the right side, you have the options of minimising, maximising, and closing the window.

The menu bar consists of various options, which include File, Edit, View, Insert, Format, Styles, Table, Form, Tools, Window, and Help. These options come with a drop-down menu or a submenu, which enables a user to engage with the application in diverse ways.

This toolbar shows the commands, which are used frequently and the default options such as Save, Undo, Redo, New, Open, Cut, Copy, and Paste.

It displays those commands which are used for formatting and enhancing text such as changing font, changing font size, changing font colour, adding bullets, highlighting text, alignment of text and numbering.

Rulers are present at both the top and left sides of the window. The horizontal ruler measures the width of the document page and shows the setting for margins, tabs, and indentation. The vertical ruler provides control over the alignment of text, and the numbers displayed on it represent the text position on the page.

(continued...)

Fig. 4.2: Components of LibreOffice Writer

Components Description

Document Area It is an area where you write, edit, and modify your document.

Scroll Bars

Status Bar

View Buttons

The Writer window has horizontal and vertical scroll bars on the right side and bottom of the writer respectively. You can ensure a better screen display with the help of scroll bars.

It shows the number of pages and number of words in the active document. The status bar also provides the option to save your document and has a zoom slider on the right side.

The status bar has three viewing options which are Single page view, Multiple page view, and Book view. There are other viewing options also, which include Print Preview, Web Layout, and full screen.

Zoom Slider By using the zoom slider, you can adjust the zoom percentage of the workspace.

Sidebar

The buttons on the sidebar includes Sidebar Settings, Properties, Styles, Gallery, Navigator, etc. These buttons enable you to make change in the settings of toolbar and allow you to make changes to documents.

Did You Know?

Writer supports extension and addons, which allow you to extend its functionality with the extra features and tools.

Creating a New Document

The document in LibreOffice Writer can be created in the following ways:

Creating a Document Using LibreOffice Suite Window

1. Open the LibreOffice suite; it shows various options.

2. Double-click the Writer Document under Create and a blank document will open.

Creating a Document Using Keyboard, Menu Bar, and Toolbar

1. From Keyboard, press Ctrl + N.

2. From the menu bar, select File > New > Text Document.

3. From the Standard Toolbar, click the New icon.

Creating a Document Using a Template

Templates are predesigned layouts which enable users to create various documents, such as reports, resumes, or invitations in an easy way. Templates include placeholders for text, images, and other elements, guiding users on where to input specific content. Templates save time and effort by eliminating the need to start from scratch and ensure consistency in document formatting.

To create a document using a template:

1. Select File > Templates > Manage Templates.

Select File > New > Templates.

Press the Ctrl + Shift + N keys.

2. The Templates dialog box appears. Double-click the desired templates to create document.

Saving a Document

To save a document:

1. Click File > Save. The Save As dialog box appears.

2. Rename the document/file name according to your need so that you can easily find it later.

3. Click Save. The file is saved with the extension .odt

Did You Know?

You can press Ctrl + S for saving a document.

Saving a Document Automatically

Writer provides the feature to save your document automatically on a temporary basis. To save a document automatically:

1. Go to Tools from the menu bar and choose the Options.

2. Select Load/Save > General.

3. Select the check box, which states Save AutoRecovery information every and set the timer.

4. The default timer is of 10 minutes, but you can change it if needed.

5. You can also choose the Always create backup copy option.

6. To save changes, click OK.

Fig. 4.3: Saving a Document

Automatically saving document on a temporary basis prevents data loss and helps in maintaining data integrity.

Did You Know?

Writer has in-built PDF export capabilities, which allows you to create PDF documents from Writer files.

Closing a Document

You can close the document in the following ways:

1. Select File > Close. OR Click the Close button in the top right corner.

Note, if you have already saved your changes, the window will close immediately.

If the document has some unsaved changes, then a dialog box appears asking for saving the change you made. If you want to save, then click Save, otherwise, click Don't Save. You can also click Cancel, if clicked by mistake.

Fig. 4.4: Saving a Document Automatically

Fig. 4.5: Closing a Document

Opening an Existing Document

After a document is saved on your computer, you can access it whenever needed. To open an existing document, you have several options:

1. In the main startup window of LibreOffice, click Open File OR

You can go to the menu bar and choose File > Open.

If you already have a document open, a second document opens in a new window. To open another document:

2. Click the Open icon on the Standard toolbar. OR

Select File > Open. In the Open dialog box, you can locate and select your file.

3. Click the Open button. The selected file opens either in the existing window or as a new one if a document is already open.

Use of Navigator

For navigating lengthy and complex papers with several parts including tables, headings, sections, hyperlinks, and comments, the Writer’s Navigator tool is helpful. This tool makes locating and navigating between the objects easier. All these elements are listed in the Navigator window. You can access an element by double-clicking it.

To access Navigator, select View > Navigator, or you can press F5. You can also press the Navigator button on the right sidebar.

The basic functions of a navigator include:

Function

Next Page

Description

If a document consists of too many pages, then this feature comes to your aid as it enables you to move to successive pages.

Previous Page This button is used to move to the preceding page from the current page in a document.

Header, Footer This button is used to directly access the document text and Header/Footer.

Content View This button is used to toggle between all objects in the navigator or any single selected object.

Fig. 4.7: Navigator Dialog Box

Fig. 4.6: Opening a Document

Cursor and Mouse Pointer

You need to get familiar with the text cursor movement and mouse pointer for easy working with a word processing document.

1. Text Cursor Movement

The cursor is the vertical blinking line in the document window. The pointer control keys (arrow keys) can be used to move the pointer within a document. On the keyboard, there are four arrow keys: Left, Right, Up, and Down. Besides the arrow keys, other keyboard keys make it simple for you to move around the document.

Key Function

Home It moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line.

Ctrl + Home It takes you to the beginning of the document.

End It moves the cursor to the end of the current line.

Ctrl + End It takes you to the end of the document.

Page Up It scrolls the page upwards.

Page Down It scrolls the page downwards.

2. Mouse Pointer

The Mouse pointer on a computer screen is a little arrow. When you bring it over the text, it typically assumes the shape of an I-beam. It is known as a Text Select cursor in this situation. The text can be edited by highlighting the relevant text with the Text Select cursor and clicking it. Thus, the Text Cursor placement is controlled by the mouse.

Activity Time

Activity 1: My Hobbies

(Individual Work)

Create a Writer document on the topic ‘My hobbies’. Use the various effects and features you have studied in the chapter and save the file on your desktop.

Activity 2: Current Affair

Create a Writer document on any current affair topic and get it checked by your teacher.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  What is the primary purpose of a word processor?

a  Sending emails

b  Playing video games

c  Creating and formatting text-based documents d  Editing images

2  Which of the following is NOT a feature of word processing software?

a  Vocabulary and spelling check

c  Creating presentations

b  Ease and speed of typing

d  Inserting tables and charts

(Individual Work)

3  Which file extension is commonly used for saving documents in LibreOffice Writer? a  .docx b  .txt c  .pdf d  .odt

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  A word processor is an application designed for creating, editing, formatting, and printing documents.

2  The key moves the cursor to the end of the current line.

3  The text cursor can be moved to the beginning of the current line using the key.

4  Templates in word processing help users create documents with predesigned layouts, saving both and effort.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  LibreOffice Writer is a paid software application.

2  The Navigator tool in Writer helps in locating and navigating between various elements within a document, such as tables, headings, and hyperlinks.

3  The purpose of the Auto Recovery feature in LibreOffice Writer is to automatically correct spelling errors in a document.

4  Ctrl + S is used to save a document.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What are templates?

A1. Templates are predesigned layouts for various types of documents. They guide users on where to input specific content, making document creation efficient and consistent.

Q2. Describe the role of the Navigator tool in LibreOffice Writer and how it aids in document navigation.

A2. The Navigator tool in LibreOffice Writer plays a crucial role in navigating lengthy and complex documents. This tool provides a convenient way to locate and move between various elements within a document, such as headings, tables, sections, hyperlinks, and comments.

Here’s how it aids in document navigation:

Element Listing: Navigator lists all these elements at one place, making it easy to find them.

Quick Access: Users can quickly access any element listed in Navigator by double-clicking its name, which takes them directly to that part of the document.

Efficiency: For lengthy documents or documents with many elements, Navigator helps users efficiently locate and edit specific sections without manually scrolling or searching.

Organisation: It aids in the organisation of a document by providing an overview of its structure.

Q3. Parag is unaware of the Auto Recovery feature of Writer. Help him by explaining how the Auto Recovery feature benefits users.

A3. The Auto Recovery feature offers several benefits to users. It automatically saves the document at regular intervals, which can be customised by the user.

Benefits of the Auto Recovery feature:

• Data Loss Prevention: Auto Recovery ensures that users don’t lose their work due to unexpected system crashes, power outages, or software glitches. This feature regularly saves a backup copy of the document.

• Data Integrity: This feature helps maintain the integrity of the document by saving the most recent changes. Users can recover their work up to the last saved interval.

Answer Key

A 1. c   2. c   3. d

B 1. text-based   2. End   3. Home    4. time

C 1. False. It is open-source software, which is available for everyone.

2. True.

3. False. It automatically saves the document at regular intervals.

4. True.

Editing a Document

Text editing is the process of making changes to the existing written text in order to improve its quality, correctness, and consistency. It involves looking over the text and making corrections like copy, paste, and find and replace text.

Text Editing—Undo and Redo

The Undo command allows you to reverse your current action performed in a document. This feature enables you to reverse the changes which has been made in a document by mistake instead to redoing all work. To perform Undo command, click on Edit > Undo or simply press Ctrl + Z. You can also select the Undo command from the Standard toolbar.

The Redo command allows you to reverse your action performed in a document through Undo command. This feature is highlighted when you perform the Undo command. To perform Redo command, click on Edit > Redo or simply press Ctrl + Y. You can also select the Redo command from the Standard toolbar.

Selecting the Text

To perform any action on the text, sentence, or paragraph, you need to select the desired block of text. When you select a text, it comes in a highlighted manner. Various method to select a text or block of text are:

Fig. 5.1: Using Undo and Redo Commands

Selection Method

A Word To select a word, double-click it.

A Sentence

Hold down the Ctrl key and triple click anywhere in the sentence or triple click on the left margin beside the sentence.

A Paragraph Click four times anywhere in the paragraph’s left margin.

A Large Block of Text Click at the text’s beginning. Click at the end of the text while holding down the Shift key.

Entire Document To select the entire document, press Ctrl + A.

Consecutive Text

Non-consecutive Text

A Vertical Block of Text

Place the mouse pointer where you want it to go, then click. Click the text’s end while holding down the Shift key.

Place the mouse pointer where you want it. To pick the word, drag while holding down the Ctrl key. Next, choose another piece of text by dragging it while continuing to hold down the Ctrl key.

To select a vertical block or a column of text that is separated by spaces or tabs, click on Edit > Selection Mode > Block area or press Alt+ Shift + F8. Now, drag the mouse to select the text. You will observe vertical selection. To stop selecting text vertically, click on the Edit > Selection Mode > Standard.

Copying and Pasting the Text

A basic computer function called copying and pasting enables you to duplicate the text, photos, files, or data. It keeps the text at the original location as well as copy it to the desired location. This feature helps to save your time and effort of typing. With the help of this you can create multiple copies of a single text.

There are four methods for copying and pasting the text:

Method 1: Using Context Menu

1. Select the text you want to copy, perform a right-click to access the context menu and click on the Copy option.

Fig. 5.2: Copying the Text Using Context Menu

2. Next, move your cursor to the desired position, right-click there, and click the Paste option from the context menu.

Method 2: Using Standard Toolbar

1. Select the text you want to copy and press the Copy icon on the Standard toolbar.

2. Move the cursor to the position where you want to insert the copied text.

3. Click on the Paste icon on the Standard toolbar.

4. The cursor will move to the end of the inserted text.

Method 3: Using Edit Menu

1. Select the text you want to copy.

2. Click on the Edit menu and select the Copy option.

3. Next, place the cursor where you want the text and click on the Edit menu again, and select the Paste command.

4. This action will insert the selected text, and the cursor will position itself at the end of the pasted content.

Fig. 5.3: Pasting the Text Using Context Menu

Fig. 5.4: Pasting the Text Using Standard Toolbar

Fig. 5.5: Selecting Copy Option from the Edit Menu

Method 4: Using Shortcut Keys

1. Select the text you want to copy.

2. Press the Ctrl + C to copy it.

3. Place the cursor where you want the text.

4. Press the Ctrl + V to paste it.

Moving Text

Did You Know?

LibreOffice Writer provides you Auto Save feature that saves your work for short period of time which may reduce the risk of data loss due to sudden computer crash.

This feature enables you to move the position of your text from one place to another. There are four methods for moving the text:

Method 1: Using Context Menu

1. Select the text you want to move, perform a right-click to access the context menu and choose Cut option.

2. Bring the pointer to the place where you wish to paste the text. Choose the Paste option by performing a right-click on that area.

Fig. 5.6: Selecting Cut Option from Context Menu

Method 2: Using Standard Toolbar

1. Select the text you want to move and click the Cut icon on the Standard toolbar.

2. Move the cursor to the position where you want to insert the text.

3. Click on the Paste icon on the Standard toolbar.

4. The cursor will move to the end of the inserted text.

Method 3: Using the Edit Menu

1. Select the text you want to move.

2. Click the Edit menu and choose the Cut option.

3. Next, place the cursor where you want to paste the text.

4. Click the Edit menu again and select the Paste option.

5. This action will insert the selected text, and the cursor will position itself at the end of the pasted content.

Fig. 5.7: Selecting Cut Option from Standard Toolbar

Fig. 5.8: Selecting Cut Command from Edit Menu

Method 4: Using Shortcut Keys

1. Select the text you want to move.

2. Press the Ctrl + X to cut it.

3. Place the cursor where you want the text.

4. Press the Ctrl + V to paste it.

Did You Know?

Some advanced clipboard managers offer a clipboard history feature that allows you to access and paste previously cut or copied text. This can be very useful if you need to paste multiple items from your clipboard.

When you cut a text from a document, it disappears. Have you ever wondered where does it go? Here is the answer, almost every application has a temporary storage known as clipboard, it contains the text till you have pasted it somewhere or you have cut another text.

Find and Replace

Searching for a word in a large document is quite inconvenient as you might have to go through every sentence and paragraph. So, to make it easier, LibreOffice Writer has enabled users with the automated feature of finding and replacing the text, which is known as Find and Replace.

Finding Text

1. Write a paragraph in your document.

2. Click on Edit menu and select Find and Replace option or press Ctrl + F.

3. The Find and Replace dialog box appears.

4. Type the text which you want to search in the Find box and click on Match case or Whole words only Match case is used to match capital and small letters, whereas Whole words only is used to match the whole word.

5. Now, click Find All/Find Previous/Find Next. The keywords will be highlighted.

6. To replace the word with another word, type the new word in the Replace box and click Replace/Replace All as per your choice.

7. Click on the Close button to close the Find and Replace dialog box.

Fig. 5.9: Find and Replace Dialog Box

Jumping to the Page Number

Navigating a lengthy document can be challenging. To swiftly jump to a specific page, you can either double-click the Page section in the Status Bar, access the Navigator from the View menu, or press the F5 key. This action will launch the Navigator dialog box, where you can input your desired page number and press Enter, or select the page number from the up or down arrow options.

Non-printing Characters

Non-printing characters, also called as formatting marks, are characters that don’t appear in printed documents. They are used for document formatting. Common non-printable characters in word processors include space (.), non-breaking space (◦), tab (→), line break (↵), and paragraph mark (¶). By default, these characters are invisible on the screen. To toggle their visibility, you can click the Non-printing Characters button on the Standard toolbar. Alternatively, you can access this option from the View menu.

Spelling and Grammar

When you submit your homework to teacher, the teacher analyses the content of your answer for context and understanding, and also checks for spelling and grammatical mistakes. Similarly, LibreOffice Writer performs a similar task by checking the content you type, displaying red wavy lines for spelling errors and green wavy lines for grammatical errors. It uses a built-in dictionary and grammatical rules to identify and highlight these errors. To address these issues in your document, you can try the below mentioned ways to improve clarity and correctness.

Auto Spell Check

LibreOffice Writer features an Auto Spell check function that examines each word you type, marking incorrectly spelt words with a single red wavy line underneath. This spell check begins from the cursor’s position and scans the entire document. When you correct a spelling error, the red wavy line disappears.

An easy method to verify the spelling of a word is as follows:

1. Right-click the word with a red wavy line.

2. A shortcut menu appears with various suggestions.

Fig: 5.11: Using Non-printing Characters

Fig 5.10: Navigator Dialog Box

3. Choose the correct spelling from the list of suggestions.

Writer will automatically replace the incorrect spelling with the selected option.

Checking Spelling and Grammar

To initiate a spell check for the entire document after it has been fully typed, you have several options:

Click on the Check Spelling icon from the Standard toolbar. OR

Click on Tools > Spelling OR

Use the keyboard shortcut F7. A Spelling dialog box appears.

Additionally, the Spelling dialog box offers various features:

1. You can change the dictionary language, like switching to Spanish or German.

2. If you encounter a new word, you can add it to the built-in dictionary by clicking the Add to Dictionary button.

3. The Options button presents different settings such as checking CAPITAL words and words with numbers.

Automatic Correction

This feature lets you automatically correct common misspelt words or typing errors as you type. To use it, go to Tools > AutoCorrect > AutoCorrect Options, and a window will appear.

In situations where the English (India) dictionary includes many regional words and doesn’t underline misspelt words, you can change the dictionary to English (USA) to highlight your typing mistakes.

This adjustment will make it possible for you to identify and correct the errors you’ve made while typing.

Fig. 5.12: Checking Spellings

Using Thesaurus

The Thesaurus function serves as an integrated dictionary that allows you to search for equivalents, opposites, word replacements, and different phrasings. This tool enhances your writing skills and vocabulary, aiding in a deeper comprehension of the text. Imagine you’ve entered the text in a document and desire to insert a synonym for the term “Concern” in its place. To achieve this, you can employ the Thesaurus feature.

1. Select the word ‘Concern’.

2. Click on Tools > Thesaurus or press Ctrl + F7.

3. The Thesaurus dialog box appears and there you will find synonyms for the selected word.

4. Select the required word and click the Replace button to replace the word.

Fig. 5.13: Using AutoCorrect Option

Fig. 5.14: Using Thesaurus

Activity Time

Activity 1: Editing Document (Individual Work)

Create a Writer document on the topic ‘Wildlife Conservation’ and perform various text editing functions which has been explained above.

Activity 2: Creating Document (Individual Work)

Create a Writer document on the topic ‘Reflection and Refraction’. Use non-printing character option to emphasise the text.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  What is the keyboard shortcut for the Undo command in text editing? a  Ctrl + C b  Ctrl + Z c  Ctrl + V d  Ctrl + S

2  How can you select an entire paragraph in a document?

a  Click four times anywhere in the paragraph’s left margin.

b  Double-click on any word in the paragraph.

c  Hold down the Ctrl key and triple-click anywhere in the paragraph.

d  Click on any word of the paragraph while holding the Shift key.

3  What is the purpose of the Cut operation in text editing?

a  To duplicate text b  To remove text c  To select text d  To paste text

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  To reverse the most recent action performed in a document, you can use the command or by pressing Ctrl + Z.

2  When selecting a word in a document, you can on it to choose it.

3  The clipboard temporarily stores text that you have or cut until you paste it somewhere else.

4  To initiate a spell check in LibreOffice Writer, you can click the icon from the Standard toolbar.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  The Undo command in text editing allows you to redo the changes made in a document by mistake.

2  The Cut operation in text editing removes the selected text from the document and stores it in the clipboard.

3  Non-printing characters, also known as formatting marks, are visible on the screen by default in most word processors.

4  The Spelling and Grammar feature in LibreOffice Writer checks for both spelling and grammatical errors in a document.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved )

Q1. How does the Spelling and Grammar feature in LibreOffice Writer assist users?

A1. The Spelling and Grammar feature in LibreOffice Writer checks documents for spelling and grammatical errors. It displays red wavy lines under misspelt words and green wavy lines under grammatical errors. Users can right-click these flagged words to access suggestions and make corrections, ensuring their documents are error-free and grammatically correct.

Q2. Why are non-printing characters useful in word processing?

A2. Non-printing characters, also known as formatting marks, are beneficial in word processing because they provide visibility into document formatting. These characters, such as spaces, tabs, line breaks, and paragraph marks, are typically invisible but can be made visible when needed. They help users troubleshoot layout issues, adjust formatting, and ensure proper document structure by revealing hidden elements that affect the appearance and layout of the text.

Q3. Aarav wants to know the purpose of the Thesaurus in text editing. Help him by explaining the concept.

A3. The Thesaurus function serves as an integrated dictionary that allows you to search for equivalents, opposites, word replacements, and different phrasings. This tool enhances your writing skills and vocabulary, aiding in a deeper comprehension of the text.

Answer Key

C 1. False. The Undo command in text editing allows you to revert the most recent action that was performed. This command does not redo changes but rather undoes them.

2. True.

3. False. Non-printing characters are typically not visible on the screen by default in most word processors. Users usually have to enable an option to view these characters.

4. True.

A 1. b   2. a   3. b

B 1. Undo   2. double-click    3. copied    4. Spelling and Grammar

Formatting a Document

Formatting a document is an essential part of creating professional-looking content. LibreOffice makes it easy to format your documents with its powerful formatting tools. Whether you are working on a report, letter, or presentation, LibreOffice provides a wide range of formatting options to help you make your document stand out. In this chapter, we will explore the various formatting features of LibreOffice and show you how to use them to create polished and visually appealing documents.

Page Style Dialog Box

The Page Style dialog box in LibreOffice Writer helps manage page layout and formatting. This dialog box lets you customise the margins, orientation, size, headers, and footers of the document. To open the Page Style dialog box:

1. From the menu bar, click on the Format menu, and then select the Page Style option. The Page Style dialog box appears.

2. Click on the Page tab.

3. You can select the paper format, width, height, and orientation of the paper from the Paper Format section.

4. You can select the margins from the Margins section.

5. You can select the page layout from the Layout Settings section.

6. After selecting the required settings, click OK.

7. The selected settings will be applied to your page.

Fig. 6.1: Page Style Dialog Box

Formatting Text

To format text in LibreOffice, you can use the Formatting toolbar. The Formatting toolbar provides quick access to common formatting options such as font type, font size, bold, italics, and underline. LibreOffice Writer provides you various ways to format text, such as:

1. Using the Format Menu: Open the Format menu from the menu bar.

2. Using the Properties Pane: Click on the Properties option in the side bar.

If you want to go back to the original settings of the page, click on the Reset button in the Page Style dialog box.

3. Using the Character Dialog Box: Click the Format > Character option to open the Character dialog box.

4. Using the Context Menu: Select the text on which you want to apply the formatting and then right-click it. Select the desired option from the context menu that opens.

5. Using the Formatting Toolbar: The Formatting toolbar is generally displayed on the ribbon below the Standard toolbar.

6. Using Keyboard Shortcuts: You can use various shortcut key combinations to format the text.

Removing Formatting

To remove formatting in LibreOffice, you can use the Clear Direct Formatting option in the Format menu. You can also remove the formatting from the text by pressing the Ctrl + M key combination.

The steps for removing formatting from text are as follows:

1. Select the text that you want to remove formatting from, as shown in Fig. 6.2.

2. Click the Format menu in the menu bar and select Clear Direct Formatting from the drop-down menu, as shown in Fig. 6.3.

This step removes all the formatting that was applied to the selected text.

Fig. 6.3: Selecting Clear Direct Formatting Option

Fig. 6.2: Selecting Text

Common Text Formatting

LibreOffice provides a wide range of text formatting features that allow you to create professional-looking documents with ease. Some of the most common text formatting features include:

Font Name and Font Size You can choose from a variety of font types and sizes to change the appearance of your text.

Bold, Italic, and Underline You can use these formatting options to emphasise or highlight specific words or phrases in your text.

Alignment You can align your text left, right, centre, or justified to control the layout of your document.

Indentation You can use indentation to create a hierarchy of information in your text.

Line Spacing You can adjust line spacing to control the amount of space between lines of text.

Paragraph Spacing You can adjust paragraph spacing to control the distance between paragraphs in your document.

Text Colour You can change the colour of your text to make it stand out or match your document’s colour scheme.

Changing Text Case

LibreOffice provides a convenient way to change the case of your text. With just a few clicks, you can easily change your text to capital, small, or title case. To change the text capitalisation: 1. Select the text for which you need to change the case, as shown in Fig. 6.5.

Did You Know?

Wingdings is a decorative font that was created in 1990 by Microsoft. This font is known for its symbols, which are often used in email and instant messaging.

Fig. 6.4: Text Formatting

2. In the menu bar, select the Format menu and then select the Text option, as shown in Fig. 6.6. A submenu appears.

3. Select the required text case option from the submenu, as shown in Fig. 6.7.

The explanation for each option is as follows:

a. UPPERCASE: This option converts the selected text to capital letters.

b. lowercase: This option converts the selected text to small letters.

c. Cycle Case: This option cycles the case of the selected characters between title case, sentence case, uppercase and lowercase.

d. Sentence case: This option capitalises the first letter of the sentence.

e. Capitalize Every Word: This option capitalises the first letter of every word in the selected text.

f. tOGGLE cASE: This option changes the case of the selected text; that is, if the selected text is in small letters, then it will be converted to capital letters, and vice versa.

Fig. 6.5: Selecting Text

Fig. 6.6: Selecting Change Case Option

Fig. 6.7: Text Case Options

Superscript and Subscript

Superscript means to place the text slightly above the baseline of the text, and subscript means to place the text slightly lower than the baseline of the text. This text appears slightly smaller than the surrounding text. These options are commonly used for mathematical exponents, footnotes, chemical formulas, and mathematical subscripts.

To superscript or subscript the text:

1. Select the text and then select the Format > Character option from the menu bar. The Character dialog box opens.

3. Select the Position tab.

4. Select the Superscript or Subscript radio button.

5. Click OK.

6.8: Character Dialog Box

6.9: Applying Subscript and Superscript respectively

You can format your text as superscript by pressing the Ctrl + Shift + P keys. To format text as a subscript, press the Ctrl + Shift + B keys.

Paragraph Formatting

A paragraph is a group of words or characters. By default, a paragraph does not have any formatting. To enhance the appearance of a paragraph, you can adjust its right, left, top, and bottom margins, add borders to it, and specify the spacing between its lines of text.

Indenting Paragraphs

Indentation refers to the distance between the margin of the page and the text of the paragraph. By using indentation, you can move the complete paragraph or its first line to a specific number of places with respect to the left or right margin. Indentation helps the users understand the given document in a better way as it organises the text and gives structure to the paragraph.

Fig.

Fig.

There are three methods to indent the paragraph in LibreOffice Writer.

1. Using the Formatting toolbar

2. Using the Paragraph dialog box

3. Using the Properties pane

Using the Formatting Toolbar

You can indent a paragraph by clicking the Increase Indent icon in the Formatting toolbar. To indent a paragraph:

1. Select the paragraph you want to indent.

2. From the Formatting toolbar, click the Increase Indent  icon.

Fig. 6.10: Indenting a Paragraph

Fig. 6.11: Indented Paragraph

3. Similarly, you can use the Decrease Indent icon to decrease the indent from the left-hand side.

Using the Paragraph Dialog Box

To set the indent of the paragraph:

1. Select the paragraph you want to indent.

2. Click on the Format menu and select the Paragraph option. The Paragraph dialog box will open.

6.12: Paragraph Dialog Box

3. Notice that the Indents & Spacing tab is already selected.

RememberWriter includes powerful style and template features that make it easy to apply consistent formatting throughout a document. This is especially useful for long reports or documents.

4. Give the desired values in the Before text, After text, and First line spin boxes.

5. You can select the Automatic check box if you want the indentation to be set automatically.

Fig.

Using

the Properties Pane

To indent a paragraph:

1. Select the paragraph.

2. Open the Properties pane by clicking the Properties icon from the sidebar.

3. Under the Paragraph section, click the Increase Indent icon to indent the text to the right.

4. To decrease the indent, click the Decrease Indent icon.

Aligning Paragraphs

To align paragraphs in Writer:

1. Select the paragraph you want to align.

2. Select the Format menu in the menu bar, and then select the Align Text option from the drop-down menu.

3. A submenu appears, as shown in Fig. 6.14.

4. Select the desired alignment option from the submenu.

5. The alignment is applied to the selected paragraph.

You can set the alignment of the paragraphs using the Paragraph dialog box also. To set the alignment:

1. Select the paragraph.

2. From the Format menu, select the Paragraph option.

3. The Paragraph dialog box opens.

4. Click on the Alignment tab.

5. From the Options section, select the required alignment option.

6. You can preview the effect of the selected alignment option in the Preview pane.

7. Click OK.

8. The selected alignment will be applied to the text.

Fig. 6.15: Alignment Tab in Paragraph Dialog Box

Fig. 6.13: Properties Pane

Fig. 6.14: Selecting the Centered Alignment

Applying Font Colour, Highlighting, and Background Colour

You can change the font colour, highlight colour, and background colour of text in a Writer document. Let us learn how to do it.

Changing Font Colour

To change the font colour of text in a document:

1. Select the text whose font colour you want to change.

2. To change the font colour, click the Font Color icon in the Formatting toolbar.

3. The Font Color dialog box appears.

4. Select a colour from the dialog box.

5. The selected colour will be applied to the text.

You can change the font colour from the Properties pane by clicking the Font Color icon under the Character section and selecting the desired colour from the Font Color dialog box.

Changing Highlight Colour

You can highlight a piece of text to draw the reader’s attention to it. You can also change the highlight colour of the text by following the given steps:

1. Select the text that you want to highlight.

2. Select the Character Highlighting Color icon in the Formatting toolbar.

3. The Character Highlighting Color drop-down appears, as shown in Fig. 6.17.

4. Select a colour from the drop-down.

5. The text will be highlighted with the selected colour.

Fig. 6.16: Changing Font Colour

Changing the Background Colour

To change the background colour of the entire paragraph:

1. Select the paragraph.

2. Click on the Format menu and select the Paragraph option.

3. The Paragraph dialog box appears.

4. Click on the Area tab.

5. Now, click on the Color button.

6. Select a background colour of your choice from the colour palette and click on OK

Fig. 6.17: Selecting Highlight Colour

Fig. 6.18: Selecting Background Colour

Using the Bullets and Numbering

Bullets and numbering in LibreOffice Writer are used to organise information in the form of lists. Bullets are visual symbols, such as solid small circles, arrows, tick marks, and so on, that help organise and highlight textual content in a list form. Conversely, numbered lists use a variety of formats, including Roman numerals and letters of the alphabet, to organise items in a sequential order.

To create bulleted and numbered lists:

1. Place your cursor where you want to add the bullet or numbered list.

2. Select the Format menu in the menu bar, and then select the Bullets and Numbering option from the menu.

3. The Bullets and Numbering dialog box opens.

4. Select the desired bullet type in the dialog box.

5. Click OK.

6. Now, in the document, type the list item and then press the Enter key after each item.

7. The selected bullet type or numbering will be applied to the list.

Inconsistent paragraph formatting disturbs the look and appeal of your paragraph. Make sure that the paragraph styles are applied consistently.

You can also create a bulleted and numbered list by clicking the Toggle Unordered List for bullets or Toggle Ordered List icon for numbering. These icons are present either on the Formatting toolbar or in the Properties pane.

Did You Know?

A nested bulleted list is a list within a list where you have a main or parent list with one or more subordinate or child lists. This format is useful when you need to present a hierarchical or structured set of information. Each level in the hierarchy can have its own set of bullet points.

Fig. 6.20: Bulleted List

Fig. 6.19: Bullets List Type

Error Alert!

Changing Paragraph Style

Paragraph styles in LibreOffice are pre-defined formatting options that can be applied to paragraphs. These options allow you to define consistent formatting throughout your document and create your own custom styles. You can apply paragraph styles from the Styles pane. This pane can be accessed either by selecting the Styles > Manage Styles option from the menu bar or by clicking the Styles button on the sidebar.

To change the paragraph style:

1. Select the paragraph or paragraphs whose style you want to change.

2. Click the Styles menu in the menu bar and then select the Manage Styles option.

3. The Styles pane appears on the right sidebar.

4. Choose the new paragraph style that you want to apply from the list of available styles in the Default Paragraph Style option. You can scroll through the list or use the search bar to find the style you want to apply for the selected text.

Did You Know?

Writer includes AutoCorrect and AutoFormat options, which can automatically correct typos and format content as you type, saving time and improving document quality.

Fig. 6.21: Selecting Paragraph

Fig. 6.22: Selecting the Manage Styles Option

Fig. 6.23: Selecting Paragraph Style

In addition to the basic formatting options in LibreOffice, you can explore advanced features such as drop caps, borders, and shading, and hyphenation. These features can help you create more customised and professionallooking documents with improved readability.

Page Formatting

Page formatting refers to the changes made in the default settings of a page in a document. You can apply various formatting features to a page such as changing the page layout, paper size, orientation, margins, and so on. Let us learn about the various formatting options that can be applied to a page.

Setting Up a Basic Page Layout Using Styles

In LibreOffice, you can set up a basic page layout using styles to ensure consistency and professionalism throughout your document. You can format a page in LibreOffice Writer by using the Page Style dialog box, which you can access by selecting the Format menu in the menu bar and then select the Page Style option from the drop-down menu. This dialog box allows you to adjust all the page settings.

To format a page:

1. In the menu bar, click the Format menu and then select the Page Style option, as shown in Fig. 6.24.

2. You can find the various settings related to the page format under the Page tab in the Page Style dialog box, such as Format, Width, Height, Orientation, Margins, Page layout, etc.

3. Give the values in different spin boxes or drop-down menus according to your choice, and click OK

4. The page will be set according to the settings that you have selected.

Inserting a Page Break

In LibreOffice, you can easily insert a page break to start a new page within your document. A page break is useful to start the content on a new page. These are specifically used to split paragraphs across pages, control the layout of tables, and separate chapters in a document.

Fig. 6.24: Selecting the Page Style Option

Fig. 6.25: Page Style Options

To insert a page break in a document:

1. Place your cursor where you want to insert the page break.

2. In the menu bar, select the Insert menu, and then select the Page Break option, as shown in Fig. 6.26. You will see that a page break appears at the position where your cursor was.

Inserting Header or Footer

The header and the footer are the areas at the top and bottom of a page, respectively, where you can show the information that appears on every page of your document. You can use LibreOffice to insert content or information, such as page numbers, document titles, chapter titles, dates, or logos, in these areas.

To insert a header and footer in a document:

1. In the menu bar, select the Insert menu, and then select the Header and Footer, and then select the Header or Footer option to insert a header or footer into your document.

2. Now, click on the Default Page Style sub-option.

3. The cursor will start blinking in the header or footer area.

4. Write the desired text for the header or the footer.

5. After completing it, click on the text in the document.

6. You can observe that the header and/or footer appear on all the pages of the document.

Fig. 6.26: Selecting the Page Break Option

Fig. 6.27: Inserting Page Break

Fig. 6.28: Selecting Header or Footer

Fig. 6.29: Inserting Header

Inserting Page Numbers

Usually, the page numbers are inserted in the footer of the page.

To insert a page number:

1. Select the Insert menu from the menu bar, and then select Page Number from the drop-down menu.

2. A Page Number Wizard dialog box opens. You can select the Position, Alignment, and Page numbers from this dialog box.

3. Click OK.

4. The page number is inserted on all the pages in the document.

Inserting Page Borders

In LibreOffice, you can easily define borders and backgrounds to add visual effects and clarity to your text in the document. To insert page borders and backgrounds:

1. Select the Format menu from the menu bar, and then select the Page Style option. The Page Style dialog box appears.

2. Select the Borders tab.

3. From the Line Arrangement section, select the required border style from the Presets option.

4. From the Line section, select the style of the border line.

5. You can also select the colour of the border line from the Color drop-down list.

6. From the Padding section, select the margins of the border from the text with respect to all the sides.

7. You can select the shadow style, if required, from the Shadow Style section.

8. Click OK

9. The border with the specified settings is added to the page.

Fig. 6.31: Specifying Border Settings

Fig. 6.30: Inserting Page Numbers

Applying Background Colour

You can apply the background colour to the whole page, too.

To apply the background colour:

1. Select the Format menu from the menu bar, and then select the Page Style option. The Page Style dialog box appears.

2. Select the Area tab.

3. Now, select the Color button. The colour palette will open.

4. Select the desired colour from the colour palette.

5. The background colour will be applied to the page.

Inserting Images

In LibreOffice, you can easily insert images, shapes, and special characters into a document. To insert images in a document:

1. Select the Insert menu from the menu bar, and then select Image option.

2. The Insert Image dialog box appears.

3. Navigate to the location where the picture file is saved.

4. Select the picture, and then click Open to insert the picture into the document.

Fig. 6.32: Selecting Background Colour

Inserting Shapes

To insert a shape in a document:

1. Select the View menu from the menu bar, and then select the Toolbars > Drawing options. The Drawing toolbar appears.

2. Select the desired shape from the Drawing toolbar.

3. Move the cursor to the document area.

4. Draw the shape by keeping the left button of the mouse pressed, as shown in Fig. 6.35.

Fig. 6.33: Selecting the Image Option

Fig. 6.34: Insert Image Dialog Box

Fig. 6.35: Inserting Shape

Formatting a Shape or an Image

In LibreOffice, you can easily format shapes and images to enhance the overall look of your document. To format a shape or an image in the document:

1. Select the shape or image you want to format.

2. In the Properties pane, select the various options to adjust the size, position, and other properties of the shape or image, as shown in Fig. 6.36 and Fig. 6.37.

Inserting Special Characters

To insert a special character in a document:

1. Click the Insert menu from the menu bar and then select the Special Character option, as shown in Fig. 6.38.

2. The Special Characters dialog box appears.

3. Select a special character in the Special Characters dialog box and then click Insert.

4. The special character is inserted in the document.

Fig. 6.36: Displaying Shape Setting Options

Fig. 6.37: Displaying Image Setting Options

Dividing the Document Page Into Columns

In LibreOffice, you can easily divide your document page into columns to create a more visually appealing layout. This layout is usually seen in newspapers, magazines, research papers, etc. To divide a page into columns:

1. Place your cursor where you want to insert the columns.

2. In the menu bar, click the Format menu and then select the Columns option, as shown in Fig. 6.40.

Fig. 6.38: Selecting Special Character Option

Fig. 6.39: Special Characters Dialog Box

Fig. 6.40: Selecting Columns Option

4. Select the number of columns, the spacing between columns, and other options in the Columns dialog box, and then click OK, as shown in Fig. 6.41.

Activity Time

Activity 1: Formatting Document (Group Work)

Make a group of 2 to 3 students and do the following tasks:

• Create a new document and type a short paragraph. Apply text formatting options such as bold, italic, or underline, and various font styles.

• Change the text colour and then adjust the font size for specific words within the paragraph.

Activity 2: Creating List (Individual Work)

Create a list of three items in your document and apply numbering or bullet points to format the list. Adjust the line spacing between paragraphs to define the document layout and apply the indentation settings.

Activity 3: Creating Document (Individual Work)

Create a document on the topic ‘Stress Management’. Apply the page formatting options, such as paper size, orientation, margins, background colour, border, and so on.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  What is the purpose of the Page Style dialog box in LibreOffice Writer?

a  To format text b  To insert headers and footers c  To control page layout and formatting d  To add page borders and shading

2  Which keyboard combination can be used to remove formatting from selected text in LibreOffice?

a  Ctrl + B b  Ctrl + M c  Ctrl + U d  Ctrl + I

Fig. 6.41: Specifying Column Settings

3  What is the purpose of the superscript and subscript formatting options in LibreOffice?

a  To change the font colour

b  To format paragraphs

c  To raise or lower text and reduce its size compared to the normal text

d  To the change text case

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  In the document, by default, the text is aligned to the .

2  You can insert a page break in LibreOffice by selecting the Insert menu and the option.

3  Headers and footers in LibreOffice are used to insert content or information that you want to appear on the page of your document.

4  To format text in LibreOffice, you can use the toolbar.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  The Superscript formatting option in LibreOffice is typically used for mathematical exponents.

2  To divide a document page into columns, you can use the Change Case feature in LibreOffice.

3  The top and bottom positions hold the text for headers and footers in documents.

4  LibreOffice provides pre-defined paragraph styles that allow you to define consistent formatting throughout your document.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What do you mean by formatting? How does LibreOffice Writer help you format a document?

A1. Formatting a document is an essential part of creating professional-looking content. LibreOffice makes it easy to format your documents with its powerful formatting tools. Whether you are working on a report, a letter, or a presentation, LibreOffice provides a wide range of formatting options to help you make your document stand out.

Q2. Differentiate between subscript and superscript using one example of each.

A2. Superscript means to place the text slightly above the baseline of the text, and subscript means to place the text slightly lower than the baseline of the text. This text appears slightly smaller than the surrounding text.

Example of Subscript:

Example of Superscript:

Q3. Sushmita wants to create a bulleted list in her document. How can she do it?

A3. To create a bulleted list in a document:

• Place your cursor where you want to add the bulleted list.

• Select the Format menu from the menu bar, and then select the Bullets and Numbering option.

• The Bullets and Numbering dialog box appears.

• Select the desired bullet type, and then click OK.

Answer Key

A 1. c   2. b   3. c

B 1. Left   2. Manual Break   3. Every    4. Formating

C 1. True.

2. False. To divide a document page into columns, you can use the Format > Columns feature in LibreOffice.

3. True.

4. True.

Creating Tables in a Document

Creating tables in a document is a fundamental skill that every student should know. It is particularly useful when you need to organise and present data in a structured format.

A table is a combination of rows and columns. The intersection of a row and a column is called a cell. Tables can be used for various purposes, such as creating schedules and organising information in a clear and easy-to-read manner.

In this chapter, we will explore how to work with tables in LibreOffice Writer. By the end of this chapter, you will understand how to create tables and customise them according to your needs. So, let us get started.

Creating a Table

There are many methods in Writer to create a table:

1. Using the Insert Table option from the Standard toolbar

2. Using the Table menu from the menu bar

3. Using the Ctrl + F12 shortcut key

Let us learn about these methods one by one.

Using the Insert Table Option from the Standard Toolbar

To create a table by using the Insert Table option from the Standard toolbar:

1. Open a new or existing document in Writer and place the cursor where you want to insert the table.

2. Click the drop-down arrow of the Insert Table option on the Standard toolbar.

3. Select the number of rows and columns as required by hovering the mouse pointer on the grid.

4. Click the last cell of the grid, and the table will appear in the document.

Using the Table Menu from the Menu Bar

To create a table by using the Table menu:

1. Open a new or existing document in Writer and place the cursor where you want to insert the table.

2. Select the Table menu in the menu bar.

3. Select the Insert Table option from the menu, as shown in Fig. 7.2.

4. The Insert Table dialog box appears.

5. Select the number of rows and columns you want in your table, as shown in Fig. 7.3, and then click Insert to insert the table into your document.

Fig. 7.1: Using the Insert Table Option from the Standard Toolbar

Fig. 7.2: Using Table Menu from the Menu Bar

Fig. 7.3: Insert Table Dialog Box

Using the Ctrl + F12 Shortcut Key

To create a table using the Ctrl + F12 shortcut key:

1. Open a new or existing document in Writer and place the cursor where you want to insert the table.

2. Press the Ctrl + F12 key combination.

3. The Insert Table dialog box appears.

4. Select the number of rows and columns you want in your table, and then click Insert.

5. The table will appear in the document as shown in Fig. 7.4.

6. Observe that after the table is inserted, the floating Table toolbar appears below the document area. It contains several table formatting tools.

Entering Data in a Table

To enter data in a table, click inside the cell and start typing. You can move around a table in the following ways:

1. You can use the arrow keys to move to the adjacent cells.

2. You can also use the Tab key to move to the next cell in a row.

3. To move to the previous cell in a row, you can use the Shift + Tab key.

The table after entering data is as shown in Fig. 7.5.

Fig. 7.4: Inserted Table

Fig. 7.5: Inserted Data in a Table

Inserting Rows and Columns

Once you have created a table in Writer, you may need to insert additional rows or columns to accommodate new data. Let us know about the steps to insert rows and columns.

Inserting Rows

To insert rows in a table:

1. Place the cursor in the row where you want to insert a new one.

2. Select the Table menu from the menu bar, then select the Insert option.

3. From the extended menu, select the Rows option.

4. The Insert Rows dialog box appears.

5. Type the number of rows you want to insert.

6. Select Above selection or Below selection radio button in the Position section of the dialog box.

7. Click OK. The entered number of rows will be added.

Inserting Columns

To insert columns in a table:

1. Place the cursor in the column where you want to insert a new one.

2. Select the Table menu from the menu bar, then select the Insert option.

3. From the extended menu, select the Columns option.

4. The Insert Columns dialog box appears.

5. Type the number of columns you want to insert.

6. Select Before selection or After selection radio buttons in the Position section of the dialog box.

7. Click OK. The entered number of columns will be added.

Fig. 7.6: The Insert Rows Dialog Box

Fig 7.7: Inserted a New Row

Fig. 7.8: The Insert Columns Dialog Box

Fig. 7.9: Inserting a New Column

Deleting Rows and Columns

You can delete the rows and columns from a given table. Let us look at the steps for deleting a row or a column.

Deleting Rows

To delete a row:

1. Place the cursor in the row you want to delete. Here, we have placed the cursor in the third row.

2. Select the Table menu from the menu bar.

3. Select the Delete > Rows option.

Deleting Columns

To delete a column:

1. Place the cursor in the column you want to delete. Here, we have placed the cursor in the third column.

2. Select the Table menu from the menu bar.

3. Select Delete > Columns. 4. The column will be deleted.

Fig. 7.10: Selecting Delete > Rows Option 4. The row will be deleted.

Fig. 7.11: Deleted Row

Splitting and Merging Tables

Splitting a table means to divide it into two parts, and merging means to combine two tables to form a new table. Let us see how to split or merge tables.

Splitting Tables

To split a table into two parts, you need to select the row from which you want to start the new table. For this:

1. Select the cell from which you want to split the table.

2. Select Table > Split Table.

3. The Split Table dialog box appears.

Fig. 7.12: Selecting Delete > Columns

Fig. 7.13: Deleted Column

Fig. 7.14: Split Table Dialog Box

4. Select the Copy heading option from the Mode section if you want to keep the same heading in the split table.

5. You can also select the Custom heading or No heading options to either modify the heading or not give any heading to the split table.

6. Click OK

7. The table will be split into two parts, as shown in Fig. 7.15.

Merging Tables

To merge the tables into a single table, you need to delete the space between the two tables. You can either press the Delete key to delete space between the two tables. Let us see how to merge two tables:

1. Select a cell in one of the two tables.

2. From the menu bar, select Table > Merge Table.

7.16: Selecting Merge Table Option

3. The two tables will be merged into one.

Deleting a Table

If you have a table in your document that you no longer need, you can easily delete it by following these steps:

1. Click anywhere inside the table to select it.

2. Click on the Table menu in the menu bar. Select Delete > Table from the extended menu.

Fig. 7.15: Splitting Table Into Two Parts

Fig.

3. The table will be deleted from your document.

Copying a Table

Copying a table means creating a duplicate copy of it and placing it at some other location in the same document or some other document. In Writer, copying a table is a quick and easy process.

Follow the given steps:

1. First, select the table by clicking inside the first cell of the table and dragging the mouse through all the cells. OR

Click on any cell in the table and press the Ctrl + A keys twice to select the entire table.

2. Now, go to the Edit menu in the menu bar and then select the Copy option. The table will be copied to the clipboard.

3. Click at some other location in the same or another document to paste your table.

4. Go to the Edit menu and select the Paste option.

5. The table will be pasted at the new location.

Fig. 7.17: Deleting a Table

Fig. 7.18: Copying a Table

Moving a Table

Moving a table means changing the location of the table within the same document or another document. To move a table:

1. Select the table by clicking inside the first cell of the table and dragging the mouse through all the cells.

OR Click on any cell in the table and press the Ctrl + A keys twice to select the entire table.

2. Go to the Edit menu in the menu bar and select the Cut option. The table will be cut from its original location.

3. Click at some other location in the same or another document.

4. Go to the Edit menu and select the Paste option.

5. The table will appear at the new location.

Activity Time

Activity 1: Recording Local Dishes (Group Work)

Create a group of 4–5 students among yourselves and create a table to record the local dishes in your region’s cuisine. Insert more rows and columns to record more data.

Activity 2: Green Diwali (Individual Work)

Create a table with 6 rows and 4 columns. Collect data from your neighbourhood regarding their approach to ‘Green Diwali’ such as house number, owner’s name, purchase of crackers (Yes/No), use of eco-friendly diyas, and so on. Copy and paste the table in your report on ‘Diwali Celebration’.

Activity 3: Half-Yearly Performance (Individual Work)

Create a table to record your half-yearly performance. Create a column for each subject, and then record the marks for each subject in the rows.

Fig. 7.19: Moving a Table

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1 How can you create a table in LibreOffice Writer using a shortcut key?

a  Alt + T

c  Ctrl + F12

b  Ctrl + T

d  Ctrl + M

2  What is the purpose of splitting a table in Writer?

a  To create a copy of the table

c  To merge two tables together

b  To divide a table into two parts

d  To delete the table

3  What is the intersection of a row and a column in a table called?

a  Cell

c  Block

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

b  Grid

d  Sector

1  To create a table using the Table icon, open a new or existing document in Writer and click the arrow of the Table icon on the Standard toolbar.

2  To move to the next cell in a row, you can use the key.

3  To insert rows in a table, place the cursor in the row where you want to insert a new one, select the Table menu, then select the option.

4  To merge two tables, select a cell in the second table and choose the option from the menu bar.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  You can create a table in Writer using the Alt + T shortcut key.

2  You cannot change the location of a table within the same document or another document.

3  Merging a table means combining two tables into one.

4  You can delete a table in Writer by selecting the table and selecting Table > Delete > Table.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. How can you insert additional rows or columns into an existing table in LibreOffice Writer?

A1. To insert additional rows or columns, select the row or column where you want to insert new ones, and use the Table menu to choose the Insert > Rows or Columns option. Specify the number of rows or columns and their position (before or after) to insert them.

Q2. Explain the steps for copying a table in Writer and placing it in a different location. What is the purpose of copying a table, and how is it achieved?

A2. To copy a table in Writer and place it in a different location:

• Select the table by clicking inside the first cell and dragging the mouse through all the cells.

• Go to the Edit menu and choose the Copy option to copy the table to the clipboard.

• Click the new location in the same or another document.

• Again, go to the Edit menu and select the Paste option to paste the table at the new location. The purpose of copying a table is to create a duplicate copy of it and place it in a different location within the same document or another document. This is helpful when you want to reuse a table without recreating it from scratch.

Q3. Imagine you are working on a document that requires a table, and you need to insert additional rows to accommodate more data. Explain the steps you would take to insert rows in the table.

A3. To insert rows in a table:

• Place the cursor in the row where you want to insert a new one.

• Select the Table menu from the menu bar.

• Choose the Insert option.

• From the extended menu, select the Rows option.

• In the Insert Rows dialog box, type the number of rows you want to insert.

• Select Above selection or Below selection radio button in the Position section of the dialog box.

• Finally, click OK, and the entered number of rows will be added to the table to accommodate more data.

Answer Key

1. False. You can create a table using the Ctrl + F12 shortcut key.

2. False. You can move a table within the same document or another document.

3. True.

4. True.

A 1. c   2. b   3. a

B 1. Drop-down   2. Tab   3.  Insert > Rows    4. Table > Merge Table

C

Using Print Options

Printing means producing a copy of a document on paper.

As it is a copy which can be touched, it is also known as hard copy. Printed documents are cost effective, as no special device is required to read them. Also, they are portable and easy to use.

Print Preview

In word processors, the Print Preview feature offers a way to visualise how your document will look after getting printed. Before printing, double-checking the document’s content, layout, and formatting guarantees a successful result.

You can check the print preview by clicking on the Print Preview option from the File menu.

Printing Options in Writer

Did You Know?

In 1993, the world’s first digital colour printing press, Indigo, was launched.

Did You Know?

Like other word processing software, the Writer also provides various options for printing.

Steps to print a document in word processor:

1. Open the document you want to print.

2. Type some text into the document.

3. Select the Print option from the File menu. The Print dialog box appears.

4. Printing allows for choosing several options for printing. These options will be discussed further.

5. Click on the Print button. With this, you can effortlessly print your document.

Now, let us discuss the various printing options that can be selected from the Print dialog box to print a document:

1. Printer: Select the name of the printer to print page(s) of your document.

Did You Know?

The introduction of print preview was accomplished by John Day, a printer from England in the 16th century.

WYSIWYG, an acronym for What You See Is What You Get, allows user to view something very similar to the result. Print Preview is WYSIWYG only. Fig. 8.1: Print Dialog Box

2. Range and Copies: You can select any of the following options in this section:

• All Pages: This option allows you to print the complete document.

• Pages: This option allows you to print a specific page or a range of pages. You need to enter page numbers, separated by comma or a series of consecutive pages. For example, if you want to print pages 3 to 8, then you can specify the range 3–8.

• Selection: This option allows you to print the selected text.

3. Number of copies: It allows you to specify the number of copies to print.

4. Collation and Paper Sides: It allows you to print in a specific order when printing multiple copies of a document.

5. Page Layout: This section allows you to select paper size and orientation for the pages to be printed.

• Paper size: It allows you to choose the size of the paper on which you want to print your text. Some examples are Letter, A4, A5, A6, etc.

• Orientation: Page orientation is used to set the printing direction of the text on a paper. There are two types of page orientation—Landscape and Portrait. Taller than wide, portrait orientation refers to how pages are laid out, while landscape means wider than tall. Portrait is the default orientation.

You can click on the LibreOffice Writer tab in the Print dialog box and click in the Print text in black checkbox to choose for the black and white print.

Click on the Print button to print your document.

Clicking the Print button from the standard toolbar allows you to rapidly print a document. You can also use the shortcut key Ctrl + P to print your document. Also, the default printer installed on your computer receives the document that you wish to print.

Activity Time

Activity 1: Print Your Poem or Story

Write a poem or a story in a document and print all even pages of the story.

Activity 2: Preview and Print Your Motivational Story

(Individual Activity)

(Individual Activity)

Write a motivational story and print it with various options. Check the preview of pages before printing.

Activity 3: Explore Printing Options (Individual Activity)

Write any five ways in which you can save water. Apply landscape orientation, set paper size to A4, and take a colour or black and white print.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  Which of the following is not a printing option in Writer? a  Pages b  Number of copies c  Orientation d  Font size

2  Print option is available under which of the following menus? a  File b  Edit c  View d  Insert

3  Which option allows you to preview your document before printing? a  Print Preview b  Print range c  Copies d  Paper size

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  In the Print dialog box, select the option to print out all the pages of your document.

2  To print only a selected page range, option must be selected and the page numbers must be entered in the given text box.

3  To print the selected text, option must be selected.

4  In orientation the page is wider than it is tall.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  You can use the shortcut key Ctrl + P to print a document.

2  Writer offers a feature to preview your document before getting it printed.

3  To print a document in a specific size, select the desired paper size in the Print dialog box’s Paper size option.

4  Landscape is the default orientation.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What do you mean by printing?

A1. Printing means producing a copy of a document on paper.

Q2. What do you mean by orientation? What are the two types of orientation?

A2. Page orientation is used to set the direction of the text on a paper. There are two types of page orientation—Landscape and Portrait.

Q3. Chirag wants to print a document. What options can he choose from depending on the number of pages or text he wants to print?

A3. The Print range option allows him to specify the number of pages for printing. It provides following three options:

• All Pages: It enables you to print all the pages in the document.

• Pages: It enables you to print the specified pages. You need to enter page numbers, separated by comma or a series of consecutive pages. For example, if you want to print pages 3 to 8, then you can specify the range 3–8.

• Selection: It enables you to print only the selected text.

Answer Key

A 1. d   2. a   3. a

B 1. All pages   2. Pages   3. Selection   4. Landscape

C 1. True.

2. True.

3. True.

4. False. Portrait is the default orientation.

Using Mail Merge

Mail Merge is a feature commonly used in word processing software like LibreOffice Writer, to streamline the process of creating personalised documents, such as emails, letters, labels, and envelopes, for many recipients. For example, Divya is a manager in a company. She wants to send a notice to 1,000 employees of her company. The main matter of the notice will remain the same for all; only the names and addresses of employees will be changed. It is difficult for her to create 1,000 documents by manually changing the names and addresses. In such a situation, the Mail Merge feature of a word processor comes in handy.

Benefits of Mail Merge:

1. It saves time and effort.

2. It can help make changes in letters.

3. It can produce mass emails with complete labels or envelopes.

In Mail Merge, two documents need to be created:

1. Main Document: This document contains the basic text that will be the same in all the documents.

2. Data Source: It is the file that contains names, addresses, or any other information that varies with each document. For example, following is the sample of a data source:

Shruti Sector-134 Noida 2013092345645244

MohitLajpat Nagar Delhi 1100035634566540

NandaniKavi Nagar Ghaziabad 1104568675644678

Deepak Sector-45Greater Noida2034966756344090

Using Mail Merge in Writer

The Mail Merge feature combines the main document with the data source and creates a new document. For better understanding, we have divided the entire process of Mail Merge into the following steps:

1. Creating the main document

2. Creating a data source

3. Editing address block

4. Creating salutation

5. Editing individual document

6. Printing and saving the merged letter

Creating the Main Document

To create a document that works as a base for Mail Merge:

1. Open Writer and type the text of the letter you want to send.

Hi

We hope that you are doing great! We would like to cordially invite you to celebrate the annual day of the company on Wednesday, 15 November 2023, at the Hotel Grand. The details of the programme are given below:

Snacks : 8:00 PM

Dance : 9:00 PM

Dinner : 10:00 PM

Appreciation Ceremony : 11:30 PM

Venue: Hotel Grand, Delhi

Thanks and Regards, ABC Pvt. Ltd.

2. On the menu bar, click the Tools menu.

3. Select the Mail Merge Wizard option.

Fig. 9.1: Main Document for Mail Merge

Fig. 9.2: Starting Mail Merge

The Mail Merge Wizard opens with the Select Starting Document step, as shown in Fig. 9.3.

4. Select the Use the current document radio button, as we are using the current document as the main document. You can also create the main document here by selecting the Create a new document radio button.

5. Click Next

6. The Select Document Type step of the Mail Merge Wizard opens. In this step, specify the document type you want to create, it can be a Letter or an Email message, as shown in Fig. 9.4.

7. Select the Letter radio button.

8. Click Next

The Insert Address Block step of the Mail Merge Wizard opens. In this step, you can create the recipient list.

Creating the Data Source

Follow the steps given below to create a data source:

1. Click the Select Address List button. The Select Address List dialog box appears.

Fig. 9.3: Mail Merge Wizard with Step 1

Fig. 9.4: Creating a Letter

2. Click the Create button. A New Address List dialog box appears.

9.6: Selecting an Address List

3. Enter the details of the first employee. You can customise the fields by clicking the Customize button.

4. After entering the details, click the New button to enter the details of the next employee.

5. Press the Tab key to move between the fields while typing the information.

6. After entering the details of all employees, click the OK button.

The Save As dialog box appears.

7. Type the data source file name in the File name box.

8. Click the Save button.

Fig. 9.5: Inserting an Address List

Fig.

Fig. 9.7: New Address List Dialog Box

9.8: Saving a Data Source

The Select Address List dialog box reappears with a newly created data source.

9. Click the data source.

10. Click OK button.

Fig. 9.9: Selecting a Data Source

The Insert Address Block step of the Mail Merge Wizard appears again. Here, click the More button to customise the address block, according to your data source.

Editing Address Block

1. Click the More button. The Select Address Block dialog box appears.

9.10: Customising the Address List

2. Click the Edit button.

Fig.

Fig.

The Edit Address Block dialog box opens. Here, you can add, delete, or rename any field name, as shown in Fig. 9.12.

3. Click OK.

4. Click the OK button in the Select Address Block dialog box. The Mail Merge Wizard appears.

5. Click Next.

The Create Salutation step of Mail Merge Wizard appears.

Creating Salutation

1. Change the salutation format of female and male employees by clicking the New button.

2. Click the Match fields button.

Fig. 9.11: Modifying Address Block

Fig. 9.12: Edit Address Block Dialog Box

The Match Fields dialog box appears.

3. Match the fields with your data source fields.

4. Click OK.

5. Click the Next button in Mail Merge Wizard. The Adjust Layout step of the Mail Merge Wizard opens.

6. You can set the Address Block Position and Salutation Position, as shown in Fig. 9.15.

7. Click Finish

Fig. 9.13: Creating a Salutation

Fig. 9.14: Match Fields Dialog Box

Fig. 9.15: Adjusting the Layout

Editing an Individual Document

1. After adjusting the layout, when you click the Finish button, the Mail Merge Wizard dialog box closes and the Mail Merge toolbar appears below the Formatting toolbar. Current Mail Merge Entry Edit Individual Documents

Fig. 9.16: Mail Merge Toolbar Options

Use the Mail Merge toolbar to preview and edit the document by following the steps given below:

1. Enter the record number of a recipient in Current Mail Merge Entry box to preview the document of a particular recipient.

2. You can select the Exclude recipient checkbox to exclude the current recipient in the mail merge.

3. Click on the Edit Individual Documents button to edit the documents individually.

Printing and Saving the Merged Letter

Save Merged Documents Print Merged Documents

Fig. 9.17: Mail Merge Toolbar Options

To save and print merged documents, follow the steps given below:

1. Click Save Merged Documents button from the Mail Merge toolbar. The Save merged document dialog box appears as shown.

Fig. 9.18: Save merged document Dialog Box

2. Now, click on the Save Documents button in the dialog box to save the documents in your preferred location.

3. Click on the Print Merged Documents button on the Mail Merge toolbar.. The Print merged document dialog box appears.

4. You can select printer name from the Printer drop-down menu. You can print all pages by selecting the Print all documents radio button or select a range by selecting the From radio button.

5. Click the Print Documents button.

Students often make several common mistakes while using the Mail Merge feature, i.e., incorrect Data Source, mismatching Field Names, not saving the Data Source, not saving the merged documents, etc.

Activity Time

Activity 1: Invite Your Friends (Individual Activity)

Prepare a list (data source) of your friends. Using the Mail Merge feature, create an invitation letter and invite your friends to your sister’s wedding.

Activity 2: Invitation for Inter-School Science Competition (Individual Activity)

Your school is organising an inter-school Science competition. You are the coordinator of your school’s Science Club. Your teacher has asked you to create an invitation letter to seek the participation of various schools in the contest. Use Mail Merge Wizard to create the letter and merge it with the recipients’ list.

Activity 3: Invite for School's Annual Talent Show (Individual Activity)

Imagine that you are a student preparing to send out invitations for your school’s annual talent show to all the students in your grade. You have a list of all the students’ names and their respective classes. Create a step-by-step plan using Mail Merge in Writer to generate personalised invitation letters for each student. Mention the key steps and settings you would use in Mail Merge to accomplish this task.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1 What is the purpose of Mail Merge?

a To play games

c To edit images

b To create personalised documents for multiple recipients

d To browse the internet

Fig. 9.19: Print merged document Dialog Box

2 What is the main document in a Mail Merge process?

a The document containing data from the data source

b The final merged document

c The spreadsheet used for data input

d The document containing the common information for all letters

3 Which step is essential in the Mail Merge process?

a Adding Clip Art to the document

c Selecting the data source

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

b Inserting a table in the document

d Changing the font style

1 The is the letter that you wish to send to multiple recipients.

2 A merged document is created by merging the main document with the

3  You can use the Mail Merge feature of the Writer by clicking on the menu.

4 We can send the letters via e-mail by clicking the button in Mail Merge Wizard.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  The Mail Merge Wizard involves two steps to carry out the mail merge process.

2  The Mail Merge feature saves time and effort.

3 You can find the Mail Merge Wizard option in the Insert menu.

4 The document containing a list of recipients is called the data source.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What are the benefits of Mail Merge?

A1. Benefits of Mail Merge are as follows:

•  It saves time and effort.

•  It simplifies making changes in letters.

•  It can produce mass emails with complete labels or envelopes.

Q2. How is Mail Merge helpful in everyday life?

A2. Mail Merge is a feature commonly used in word processing software like LibreOffice Writer, to streamline the process of creating personalised documents, such as emails, letters, labels, and envelopes, for many recipients.

Q3. Hiral has a list of teachers with their address. She wants to send an invitation letter to all teachers. For this purpose, where can she store the details of the teachers and what is it called?

A3. She can store the details of the teachers in a data source.

Answer Key

document as e-mail

C 1. False. The Mail Merge Wizard involves eight steps to carry out the mail merge process.

2. True.

3. False. You can find the Mail Merge Wizard option in the Tools menu.

4. True.

Unit Reflection

Key Terms

Document: It is a piece of information that has been written, printed, or digitally developed.

Word Processor: It is a computer software application designed with the single goal of allowing users to write, edit, format, and print documents.

Template: It is a predesigned layout that enables users to create various documents, such as reports, resumes, or invitations, in an easy way.

Cursor: It is a vertical blinking line in a document window.

Mouse Pointer: It is an indicator of the position of a mouse through a little arrow on a computer screen.

Text Editing: It is the process of making changes to written text in order to improve its quality, correctness, and consistency.

Thesaurus: It serves as an integrated dictionary that allows you to search for equivalents, opposites, word replacements, and various phrasings.

Superscript: It means to place the text slightly above the baseline of the text.

Subscript: It means to place the text slightly lower than the baseline of the text.

Indentation: It refers to the distance between the margin of the page and the text of the paragraph.

Page Formatting: It refers to the changes made in the default settings of a page in a document.

Table: It is a combination of a row and a column.

Cell: It is an intersection of a row and a column.

Printing: It means producing a copy of a document on paper.

Mail Merge: It is a feature commonly used to streamline the process of creating personalised documents, such as emails, letters, labels, and envelopes, for many recipients.

Things to Remember

• Documentation is the process of making documents.

• Basic word processors such as Notepad and WordPad are also referred to as text editors.

• Templates save time and effort by eliminating the need to start from scratch and ensuring consistency in document formatting.

• The Navigator tool makes locating and navigating between the objects easier.

• The Undo command allows you to reverse your latest actions performed in a document.

• The Redo command allows you to reverse your actions performed in a document through the Undo command.

• To perform any action on a text, sentence, or paragraph, you need to select the desired block of text.

• A basic computer function called copying and pasting enables you to duplicate text, photos, files, or data.

• Moving the text feature enables you to move the position of your text from one place to another.

• The Find and Replace feature enables you to search for a particular word and replace it with some other word.

• Non-printing characters, also called formatting marks, are characters that don’t appear in printed documents.

• The Spelling and Grammar feature of Writer checks spelling and grammatical mistakes in a document.

• The AutoCorrect function lets you automatically correct common misspelt words or typing errors as you type.

• Formatting a document is an essential part of creating professional-looking content.

• The Page Style dialog box in LibreOffice Writer helps manage the page layout and formatting.

• The Formatting toolbar provides quick access to common formatting options, such as font type, font size, bold, italics, and underline.

• To remove formatting in LibreOffice, you can use the Clear Direct Formatting option in the Format menu.

• To enhance the appearance of a paragraph, you can adjust its right, left, top, and bottom margins, add borders to it, and specify the spacing between its lines of text.

• By using indentation, you can move a complete paragraph or its first line to a specific number of places with respect to the left or right margin.

• You can change the font colour from the Properties pane by clicking the Font Color icon under the Character section and select the desired colour from the color palette.

• Bullets and Numbering option in LibreOffice Writer in used to organise information in the form of lists.

• A nested bulleted list is a list within a list where you have a main or parent list with one or more subordinate or child lists.

• Paragraph styles in LibreOffice are the predefined formatting options that can be applied to paragraphs.

• You can apply various formatting features to a page, such as changing the page layout, paper size, orientation, and margins.

• A page break is useful to start content on a new page.

• The header and the footer are the areas at the top and bottom of a page, respectively, where you can show the information that appears on every page of your document.

• In LibreOffice, you can easily define borders and backgrounds to add visual effects and clarity to your text in the document.

• To divide a page into columns, select the Format menu and then select the Columns option.

• Tables can be used for various purposes, such as creating schedules and organising information in a clear and easy-to-read manner.

• There are many methods in Writer to create a table:

 Using the Table icon from the Standard toolbar

 Using the Table menu from the menu bar

 Using the Ctrl + F12 shortcut key

• To enter data in a table, click inside a cell in the table and start typing.

• To insert rows or columns in a table, place the cursor in the required cell and then select Table > Insert > Rows or Columns.

• To delete rows or columns from a table, select the row or column and then select Table > Delete > Rows or Columns

• Copying a table means creating a duplicate copy of it and placing it at some other location in the same document or some other document.

• Moving a table means changing the location of the table within the same document or another document.

• Printed documents are also known as hard copies.

• You can check the print preview by clicking the Print Preview option from the File menu or by pressing Ctrl + Shift + O.

• The main document contains the basic text that will be the same in all the documents.

• The data source is the file that contains names, addresses, or any other information that varies with each document.

• The Mail Merge feature combines the main document with the data source and creates a new document.

A. Select the correct option.

Test Your Knowledge

1. Which of the following is not a formatting feature of LibreOffice Writer?

a. Bold b. Underline c. Font size d. Table

2. Which of the following is not a non-printing character?

a. Tab b. Line break c. Parenthesis d. Paragraph mark

3. A table is a/an

a. Combination of rows and columns b. Intersection of rows and columns

c. Both a and b d. None of these

4. How many change case options are there in Writer?

6

5

4

5. Which option of the Tools menu allows you to start Mail Merge?

a. Wizard b. Mail Merge c. Mail Merge Wizard d. None of these

B. Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1. is an area where you write, edit, and modify your document.

2. anywhere in the left margin of the paragraph to select it.

3. Press the key to move to the previous cell in a row of a table.

4. refers to the size of the text.

5. The print option allows you to specify the number of copies to be printed.

C. State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1. The Writer window has horizontal and vertical scroll bars.

2. Writer displays green wavy lines for spelling errors and red wavy lines for grammatical errors.

3. To delete a row from a table, select Table > Columns > Delete.

4. Copying a table means creating a duplicate copy of it and placing it at some other location in the same document or some other document.

5. The Mail Merge feature combines the main document with the data source and creates a new document.

D. Short answer-type questions.

1. What is the use of Formatting toolbar in Writer?

2. Write two methods to open the Thesaurus dialog box.

3. What is the difference between splitting and merging cells in a table?

E. Long answer-type questions.

1. Write the shortcut keys for the following in the context of the cursor:

a. It moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line.

b. It takes the cursor to the beginning of the document.

c. It moves the cursor to the end of the current line.

d. It takes the cursor to the end of the document.

2. Why is indentation important? Write any one method to apply it to a document.

3. Write the steps to create a table using the menu bar.

F. Competency-based questions.

1. Divya is creating a science project in LibreOffice Writer in which she needs to add some characters that are not present on the keyboard. Which feature of LibreOffice Writer can she use to do so?

2. Kuljeet is writing an essay using a word processor. He wants to change the paper size and orientation. What type of formatting does he want to change? How can he get these options?

Creating a Spreadsheet

Aspreadsheet or worksheet is a file used for storing, organising, and manipulating data in a tabular format.  It is also called an electronic spreadsheet. A spreadsheet is used to perform calculations using formulas and functions. Spreadsheets also allow you to analyse the data visually with the help of charts. LibreOffice Calc is a spreadsheet program that interactively manages and organises data in rows and columns.

General Features of a Spreadsheet

There are a number of features that are available in a spreadsheet to perform tasks in an easy way. Some of the main features are:

1. Grid Interface: Spreadsheets are organised as a grid of rows and columns, where cells are used to input and manipulate data. Each cell is uniquely identified by a row and column label.

Fig. 10.1: A Spreadsheet

2. Data Entry: A spreadsheet allows users to enter various types of data, including numbers, text, dates, and formulas, into individual cells. This data can be manipulated, calculated, and formatted.

3. Functions: Functions are inbuilt formulas that are used for doing calculations upon the data entered. Commonly used functions are sum, average, max, min, count, etc.

4. AutoFill: The AutoFill feature allows you to quickly fill cells with repetitive or sequential data such as chronological dates, numbers, or repeated text. AutoFill can also be used to copy formulas.

5. AutoSum: This feature helps you to add up the numeric values in a group of selected cells.

6. Charts: Charts are used to represent the numerical data in a graphical manner. Charts help users analyse data in an easier way. Some commonly used charts are column, pie, bar graphs, etc.

7. Data Formatting: Spreadsheets allow users to format data in cells to control how it is displayed, including options for number formatting, font styles, alignment, borders, and fill colours.

8. Data Validation: Spreadsheets enable users to ensure data consistency and accuracy, helping users prevent errors during data entry.

9. Import and Export Data: Spreadsheets allow you to import or export data in multiple formats such as PDF, HTML, CSV, Postscript, etc.

10. Data Protection: Spreadsheets often offer password protection and access control to restrict who can view or edit certain parts of the document.

Did You Know?

Popular Spreadsheet Software Examples

Many types of spreadsheet applications have been developed by various software corporations. Some of these applications are:

Daniel Bricklin and Bob Frankston were the first Americans who discovered an electronic spreadsheet, which they named VisiCalc in early 1980s.

LibreOffice Calc is the spreadsheet application of the LibreOffice suite. This is an open-source program that can be used on multiple operating systems, such as Windows, Linux, macOS, etc.

Starting the LibreOffice Calc Application

To start the LibreOffice Calc application, perform the following steps:

1. Click on the Start button. The Start menu appears.

2. Click on the All apps option in the Start menu. A list of installed apps is displayed.

3. Select the LibreOffice Calc option from the list of apps.

The LibreOffice Calc application window displays one worksheet by default: Sheet1.

You can also open the LibreOffice Calc application window by typing Calc or LibreOffice Calc in the search bar and then clicking on the LibreOffice Calc icon.

Components of LibreOffice Calc Spreadsheet

The LibreOffice Calc application window comprises the following components:

Let us learn about each of these components:

1. Title Bar: At the top of a worksheet, there is a title bar that bears the name of the worksheet. By default, the name of the worksheet is displayed as Untitled 1. The name can be changed by the user.

2. Window Control Buttons: These buttons are used to minimize, maximize/restore and close the LibreOffice Calc window.

3. Workbook and Worksheet: A workbook can be imagined as a notebook with multiple pages in it. The pages can be said to be similar to worksheets. A worksheet is a grid of cells arranged in rows and columns. Data can be entered in each of these cells. By default, a workbook contains one worksheet. We can add more worksheets to a workbook.

Fig. 10.2: Components of a Spreadsheet

• Active Cell: When a cell is clicked, it gets highlighted by a thick black border. This is called an active cell. Data can be entered into this cell only. In Fig. 10.3, the cell in column F and row 10, called cell F10, is the active cell.

• Column Headings: Every column is marked by a head cell at the top. These head cells are marked from A to XFD. There are a total of 16,384 columns in a worksheet.

• Row Headings: Every row has a head cell at the extreme left. These are marked as numbers. There are 10,48,576 rows in a worksheet.

• Cell: The grid is formed by continuous cells running in vertical columns and horizontal rows. Each cell in a worksheet has a unique cell address. For example, a cell with address E5 refers to the cell found at the intersection of column E and row 5. All data is entered in a cell.

4. Menu Bar: The menu bar contains a number of menus, which can be used to give commands to the spreadsheet software. Typically, a menu bar contains the following menus:

• File: This menu contains file-related commands that apply to the entire worksheet. Commonly used commands in the File menu are: New, Open, Save As, Export as PDF, Digital Signatures, Print Preview, Print, etc.

Fig. 10.3: Rows and Columns in a Calc Window

Fig. 10.4: The File Menu

• Edit: This menu contains the commands that are used for editing the content in the spreadsheet. Commonly used commands in the Edit menu are Undo, Redo, Cut, Copy, Paste, Find and Replace, etc.

Fig. 10.5: The Edit Menu

• View: This menu contains the commands that can change the look of the spreadsheet. These commands are used for controlling the way you view and interact with your spreadsheet. Commonly used commands in the View menu are Page Break, Full Screen, Zoom, etc.

Fig. 10.6: The View Menu

• Insert: This menu contains the commands that allow you to add various elements and objects to your spreadsheet to enhance its functionality and appearance. Commonly used commands in the Insert menu are Image, Chart, Media, Shape, Text Box, etc.

10.7:

• Format: The layout of the entire worksheet can be changed by using the Format menu. This menu contains commands for formatting and styling cells, rows, columns, and the overall appearance of the spreadsheet. Desired changes to the worksheet can be done with respect to Cells, Merge and Unmerge Cells, Page Style, Conditional, etc.

10.8: The Format Menu

• Data: This menu contains commands for the manipulation of data. Commonly used commands in this menu are Define Range, Sort, AutoFilter, Subtotals, Consolidate, Pivot Table, etc.

Fig.

The Insert Menu

Fig.

• Tools: Commands such as Spelling, Automatic Spell Checking, Goal Seek, Share Spreadsheet, etc., can be used by this menu for spreadsheet management, data analysis, and other functionalities.

• Window: This menu contains commands for managing the windows and views within the application.

Fig. 10.9: The Data Menu

Fig. 10.10: The Tools Menu

Fig. 10.11: The Window Menu

• Help: This menu contains commands that can assist users to get help, support, and information about the software.

5. Standard Toolbar: A standard toolbar contains tools that are used for performing basic functions such as opening a new workbook, saving a workbook, printing a worksheet, inserting charts, sorting data, cutting, copying, pasting, etc.

6. Formatting Toolbar: This toolbar contains commands to format data. Some of the options that this toolbar provides are Font Name, Font Size, Bold, Italic, Underline, Background Color, Font Color, etc.

7. Name Box: The Name Box is present in the top left-hand corner of the worksheet. It displays the name or address of the active cell or range of cells.

8. Input Line: It displays the contents of the selected cell (data, formula, or function), thereby allowing editing of the cell contents. It is also known as the formula bar. To edit content using the Input line, just click in the Input line, and type in the changes. To edit within the active cell, just double-click on the active cell and type in the changes.

9. Function Wizard: It helps to search for the desired function from the list of available functions.

10. Select Function: This button is used to calculate the Sum, Average, Product, etc., of the numbers in a range of cells. It is also used to find the Min, Max, etc. of values in a range of cells.

11. Formula: Clicking on the Formula icon inserts an equal to sign (=) in the active cell, and the Input line allows the formula to be entered.

12. Status Bar: The ribbon present at the bottom of worksheets that shows the current information of the worksheet is the Status bar. The status depicted by the status bar includes the sheet number of the current worksheet, the sum of the selected numeric cells, etc.

13. Vertical Scrollbar: The vertical scrollbar enables you to scroll the worksheet vertically, allowing you to move it up or down.

14. Horizontal Scrollbar: The horizontal scrollbar enables you to scroll the worksheet horizontally, allowing you to move it left and right.

15. Navigation Buttons: The navigation buttons allow you to navigate between different worksheets within a workbook.

16. Zoom Controls: This offers the capability to adjust the zoom level of the Calc worksheet, enabling you to zoom in for a closer view or zoom out for a broader perspective.

17. Sidebar: The sidebar displays icons for accessing various panels, such as Properties, Styles, Gallery, Navigator, and Functions. These panels offer additional functionality and options for working with your spreadsheet.

Fig. 10.12: The Help Menu

Some useful key combinations to navigate within the same worksheet are:

Key or key

Combination

Output

Arrow Keys Move a single cell up, down, left, or right

Ctrl + Arrow Keys Move the cell pointer to the first and last cell of a cell range in the direction of the arrow

Home Moves to column A along the row where the active cell is selected

Ctrl + Home Moves the cell to A1 position

Ctrl + End Moves to the bottom-right cell of the data range

Page Up

Page Down

Range of Cells

Moves the worksheet one screen up

Moves the worksheet one screen down

When a number of adjacent cells are selected or denoted collectively in an area of a worksheet, this is called a range of cells. A range can be defined in a worksheet by writing the address of the starting cell, followed by that of the ending cell, separated by a colon (:). A cell range can be of three types:

1. Column Range: When the selected range of cells belong to a column, this is called a column range. When defining the range of such cells, the column letter remains the same, while the row number changes. For example, a column range that includes cells from rows 1 to 8 in column B can be written as B1:B8.

2. Row Range: The range of cells spread across a row is called the row range. In the row range, the row number remains the same while the letter of the column changes. For example, a range of cells that includes columns A to E of row 4 can be written as A4:E4.

3. Row and Column Range: Such a range includes cells from multiple rows of multiple columns, so as to form a matrix. For example, a range of cells consisting of rows 1 to 9 of columns B and C can be written as B1:C9.

Fig. 10.13: Column Range

Fig. 10.14: Row Range

Inserting a Worksheet

To insert a new worksheet, follow the steps:

Think and Tell

What are the advantages of using rows and columns to structure data in a spreadsheet?

1. Right-click on the Sheet tab and select the Insert Sheet option. OR click the blank area to the right of the Sheet tab. The Insert Sheet dialog box appears.

2. Select the desired position where you want to place the new worksheet.

3. Choose the number of sheets you want to insert.

4. Enter the name of the worksheet in the Name textbox.

5. Click the OK button.

Renaming a Worksheet

The steps to rename a spreadsheet are as follows:

1. Select the worksheet that you want to rename by clicking on the Sheet tab.

2. Right-click on the space next to the Sheet tab and select the Rename Sheet option. The Rename Sheet dialog box opens.

Fig. 10.15: Row and Column Range

Fig. 10.16: Inserting a New Worksheet

3. Specify the name of the worksheet in the Name textbox.

4. Click the OK button.

Now, the name of the worksheet gets changed.

Saving a Workbook

A workbook can be saved at the desired location by performing the following steps:

1. Click on the File menu and select the Save option. OR click on the Save button on the Standard toolbar. OR use the Ctrl + S shortcut keys.

The Save As dialog box opens.

2. Select the desired location where you want to save the workbook.

3. Enter the desired name of the workbook in the File name text box.

4. Click the Save button.

The workbook is saved as a file with the extension '.ods'.

Fig. 10.17: Renaming a Worksheet

Fig. 10.18: Saving a Workbook

Deleting a Worksheet

LibreOffice Calc allows you to delete a worksheet in a workbook. However, if there is only one worksheet in a workbook, then the whole workbook has to be deleted. A worksheet can be deleted by performing the following steps:

1. Right-click on the Sheet tab of the worksheet that you want to delete and select the Delete Sheet option. A dialog box opens, asking for confirmation to delete.

2. Click Yes if you really want to delete the worksheet; else click No.

Closing a Workbook

A workbook can be closed by adopting any of the following methods:

Select the File menu and click Close.

OR

10.19: Deleting a Worksheet

Click the Close button on the title bar.

Activity Time

Activity 1: Group Discussion

(Group Activity)

In a group of 4-5 students, discuss how the Calc spreadsheet software can be harnessed for various purposes across different professional domains.

Activity 2: Conduct a Quiz Game

(Group Activity)

Conduct a collaborative quiz game where groups of two take turns asking each other to identify specific components of a Calc worksheet. Assign 10 points for each correct identification and deduct 5 points for every incorrect answer.

Activity 3: Create and Save Your Worksheet (Individual Activity)

Open Calc spreadsheet software and perform the following steps:

• Note down the default number of worksheets in your workbook and insert one worksheet before the current worksheet.

• Rename the newly created worksheet with your name.

• Now, delete the first worksheet.

• Save the workbook with the name 'My_Workbook'. Observe the file extension with which it is saved.

• Close the workbook.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  What is the primary purpose of a spreadsheet software like LibreOffice Calc? a  Word processing b  Data analysis and manipulation c  Graphic design d  Web browsing

2  Which feature of Calc allows you to visually represent numerical data? a  Data Entry b  Functions c  Charts d  AutoSum

Fig.

3  What feature allows you to quickly copy sequential data in a spreadsheet?

a  AutoSum b  AutoFill

c  Data Validation d  Data Protection

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  In a range, the column letter remains the same while the row number changes.

2  The name or address of the active cell or range of cells is displayed in the .

3  The default extension for a saved workbook in LibreOffice Calc is .

4  The button is used to take the sum total of the numbers in the cells above the selected cell.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  Spreadsheets are used for analysing data and performing calculations.

2  The Ctrl + Home key combination moves the cell to A1 position.

3  Data entry in spreadsheets can only include numbers and dates.

4  Spreadsheets can import and export data in only one format, such as PDF.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What is an active cell?

A1. When a cell is clicked, it gets highlighted by a thick black border. This cell is an active cell. Data can be entered into this cell only.

Q2. Explain the following terms:

a. Formatting toolbar

b. Name Box

c. Input line

A2. a. Formatting Toolbar: This toolbar contains commands to format data. Some of the options that this toolbar provides are Font Name, Font Size, Bold, Italic, Underline, Background Color, Font Color, etc.

b. Name Box: The Name Box is present on the top left-hand corner of the worksheet. It displays the name or address of the active cell or range of cells.

c. Input Line: It displays the contents of the selected cell (data, formula, or function), thereby allowing editing of the cell contents. It is also known as the formula bar.

Q3. Prabhav wants to create a calendar in a spreadsheet and he has to write down the names of the months along with the days of the week for the entire year. What feature should he use to prevent manual data entries in the spreadsheet?

A3. AutoFill feature

Answer Key

A 1. b   2. c   3. b B 1. column   2. Name Box   3. ods    4. Sum C 1. True.

2. True.

3. False. Spreadsheets allow you to enter various types of data, including numbers, text, dates, and formulas.

4. False. Spreadsheets have the ability to import and export data in various formats, including but not limited to PDF, HTML, CSV, Postscript, and more.

Formulas and Functions in Spreadsheet

In this chapter, you will learn how to enter formulas and functions and perform various mathematical calculations. You should be able to create new charts and graphics using the input data. You can specify mathematical relationship(s) between the numbers using various formulas. Formulas are used for simple addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division, as well as for complex calculations. Functions are incorporated into the formula used for spreadsheets. The users need to provide cell references and addresses only. These are called arguments of the function and are given as enclosed between parentheses.

Spreadsheet Terminologies

To work upon the data and extract the desired useful information from a worksheet, some formulas and functions are applied on the data. In spreadsheets, formulas are used to calculate results from the input worksheet data. If there is some change or editing in the previously entered data, such formulas automatically recompute the updated results.

In order to get a complete understanding of formulas and functions, we have to understand some of the basic terminologies and features of the spreadsheet, such as:

Labels

A text or special character, descriptive information (non-numeric data), or a combination of numeric and non-numeric data is treated as a label. Labels cannot be treated by any mathematical operation, such as multiplication, subtraction, etc. Labels include any cell contents beginning with alphabets. Labels entered into a cell are left-aligned by default.

Value

The data, typically consisting of numeric inputs, is called value. Spreadsheets support performing calculations of various forms of data, such as integers, decimals, fractions, percentage data, etc. The numeric data entered into a cell is right-aligned by default.

Did You Know?

The values do not display the preceding zeroes, when the data is value. In order to show a preceding zero, data has to be entered as text by entering an apostrophe before the number, e.g, to enter 0765 in a cell as a value, write it as '0765. Since such a figure is treated by the sheet as a text input, it becomes left aligned by default.

The numeric data entered in the form of digits from 0 to 9 are treated as positive values. A figure with a negative value has to be specified by entering the same in parentheses or adding a sign of negative before the figure. For example, (219) or ‘-219’ represents negative value.

Formula

A formula is like a mathematical equation that performs calculations, returns information, or manipulates the contents of cells. The expression for a formula starts with an equal to sign (=), which is followed by values, cell addresses, functions, etc. On applying a formula to a cell, the value of the equation is displayed in the cell, and the formula is displayed in the Input line. A typical depiction of a formula applied to the given data is shown in Fig. 11.2.

Working with Formulas and Functions

Calc can perform various types of calculations on the data provided. It can make data undergo addition, subtraction, multiplication, etc.

Fig. 11.1: Labels and Values in a Spreadsheet

Fig. 11.2: Applying Formula in a Spreadsheet

Working with Formulas

An expression of a formula involves the addresses of multiple cells, which need to undergo the required calculations. Both simple as well as complex calculations can be performed on the data. We need to know the various elements of a formula.

Calc can perform calculations utilising formula of three types:

1. Basic Formula: A basic formula involves only one type of operator, such as addition or subtraction. Consider an example given in Fig. 11.3. We need to perform the basic calculation of adding the data provided in cells A2 to A6 to get the resultant sum in the A7 cell. For performing basic calculations, follow the given steps:

• Click on cell A7 where you want to display the result and type the ‘=’ sign.

• Click on the A2 cell. Type the ‘+’ sign after that.

• Repeat step b for cells A3 to A6 or simply type = A2+A3+A4+A5+A6 in the Input line.

• Press the Enter key. The result will appear in cell A7.

2. Compound Formula: Compound formulas use more than one operator in a single calculation. For example, refer to Fig. 11.4, where the marks obtained in the subjects of Chemistry, Physics and Maths of a certain number of students in class 8 are given. Column F contains the total marks obtained by these students, and we need to calculate the percentage of marks obtained by them in column H. Follow the given steps:

• Click on H3 and type the ‘=’ sign.

• Type the formula: =F3*100/300.

• Press the Enter key. The H3 cell displays the desired percentage of marks obtained by Anuj in the three subjects.

• Repeat the steps as above for calculating the percentage of marks of individual students.

Note that the result appears in the desired cell, and the formula is displayed in the Input line.

Fig. 11.3: Applying Basic Formula in Calc.

3. Text Formula: We can also apply formulas on text or string data. The symbol ampersand (&) is used to join the text data. Joining two or more strings of text data is called Concatenation. For example, in the sheet shown, we need to join the text given in A2, B2, and C2. Follow the given steps:

• Enter the data in cells A2, B2, and C2 as shown in Fig. 11.5.

• Enter the formula ‘=A2&B2&C2’ in cell D2 and press the Enter key.

• D2 displays the text joined together as ‘SwachhaBharatAbhiyaan’.

11.5: Applying Text Formula

Elements of a Formula

A formula can be complex, which involves multiple functions applied to multiple cells. The structure of such a formula can be understood by knowing its constituents. For example:

References: A cell or a range of cells included in a formula for performing calculations

Mathematical Operators: Symbols of calculations such as ‘+’, ‘-‘, ‘*’, ‘/’, and ‘^’

Equal to symbol, signifying the start of a formula

Constants: The values of the data or text which do not change

Functions: The operations which are predefined as formula in Calc.

Cell Adresses

Mathematical Operators

11.6: Elements of a Formula in Calc

Fig. 11.4: Applying Compound Formula

Fig.

Many operators can be used in a formula or function as required.

Mathematical Operators

Operation

Addition

Subtraction

Multiplication

Division

Exponent (Power)

The formula is evaluated by the conventional precedence only. The conventional precedence is as shown in the following table:

Consider the calculations performed in the following table:

Did You Know?

Fill handle is a small square in shape, present on the bottom right edge of a cell. Fill handle can be used to drag and fill the adjacent cells with the same formula, value or data as entered in the selected cell.

Working with Functions

Functions are predesigned formula which are built into Calc for performing accurate calculations. A function is constituted by two parts: Argument and Structure.

Arguments: Arguments are the values input to the functions. These can be in the form of Text, Numbers, Logical Values (True or False), Constants, Range of Cells, or some other functions as well.

Structure: The structure of a function acts as its basic skeleton. On the basis of this structure, a general syntax can be written that represents the actual function. The structure of a function begins with the name of the function, followed by one or multiple arguments separated by a comma. When the structure is made of some range of cells, then the same are separated by semi-colons, presented within brackets. For example, the typical structure of a function can be written as:

=Function name (Argument1, Argument2, Argument3, ……..)

Some commonly used functions are:

SUM(): The SUM function is used to add the values of the selected cells or a range of cells. Follow the given steps to use this function:

1. Click on the cell where you want to get the result of the addition operation. Say C7 in the case given.

2. Type the ‘=’ sign.

3. Type the name of the function, i.e., sum.

4. Type open parenthesis ‘(‘.

5. Type the range of cells and close the parenthesis, such as ‘=SUM(C2:C6)’.

6. Press the Enter key and see the result displayed in cell C7, as shown in Fig. 11.7.

AVERAGE(): The AVERAGE function is used to find the average or mean value of the selected cells or a range of cells. Follow the given steps to use the average function:

1. Click on the cell where you want to get the result of the average function. Say D7 in the case given (see Fig. 11.8).

2. Type the ‘=’ sign.

3. Type the name of the function, i.e., average.

4. Type open parenthesis ‘(‘.

5. Type the range of cells and close the parenthesis, such as ‘=AVERAGE(D2:D6)’.

6. Press the Enter key and see the result displayed in cell D7, as shown in Fig. 11.8.

Fig. 11.7: SUM Function

COUNT(): The COUNT function gives us the numeric count of the entered values of the selected cells. Follow the given steps to use the COUNT() function:

1. Click on the cell where you want to put the result for the count function. Say E7 in the case given (see Fig. 11.9).

2. Type the ‘=’ sign.

3. Type the name of the function, i.e., count.

4. Type open parenthesis ‘(‘.

5. Type the range of cells and close the parenthesis, such as “=COUNT(E2:E6)”.

6. Press the Enter key and see the result displayed in cell E7, as shown in Fig. 11.9.

MAX(): This function gives us the largest of the entered values of the selected cells. Follow the given steps to use the MAX() function:

1. Click on the cell where you want to put the answer to the max function. Say B8 in the case given (see Fig. 11.10).

2. Type the ‘=’ sign.

Fig. 11.8: AVERAGE Function

Fig. 11.9: COUNT Function

3. Type the name of the function, i.e., max.

4. Type open parenthesis ‘(‘.

5. Type the range of cells and close the parenthesis, such as ‘=MAX(B2:B6)’.

6. Press the Enter key and see the result displayed in cell B8, as shown in Fig. 11.10.

MIN(): This function gives us the smallest of the entered values of the selected cells. This function takes into consideration both the numeric entries as well as the logical values as arguments. If there are no valid arguments in the selected range of cells, the function returns a result of zero [‘0’]. Follow the given steps to use the MIN() function:

1. Click on the cell where you want to put the result for the min function. Say B9 in the case given (see Fig. 11.11).

2. Type the ‘=’ sign.

3. Type the name of the function, i.e., min.

4. Type open parenthesis ‘(‘.

5. Type the range of cells and close the parenthesis, such as ‘=MIN(B2:B6)’.

6. Press the Enter key and see the result displayed in cell B9, as shown in Fig. 11.11.

Fig. 11.10: Using the MAX Function

Fig. 11.11: Using the MIN Function

TODAY(): This function displays the current date. Follow the steps to use the TODAY() function:

1. Click on the cell where you want to put the result for the Today function. Say H8 in the case given (see Fig. 11.12).

2. Type the ‘=’ sign.

3. Type the name of the function, i.e., today.

4. Type open parenthesis ‘(‘.

5. Type close parenthesis, such as ‘=TODAY()’.

6. Press the Enter key and see the result displayed as a date in cell H8, as shown in Fig. 11.12.

Following are the functions to display the current day, month, and year:

1. For day: DAY(TODAY())

2. For Month: MONTH(TODAY())

3. For Year: YEAR(TODAY())

In Fig 11.12, you can see that entering the formula ‘=MONTH(TODAY())’ will display the current month.

Fig. 11.12: Depiction of Today’s Date Display in Calc

Date and time are entered into the active cell, separated by hyphens, slashes, or spaces. For example, 26th of January 2023 can be written as 26/Jan/2023, 26/01/2023, or 26-jan-2023. Calc recognises a variety of date formats. The elements of time can be separated from one another by using colons, such as 11:33:25.

Inserting Cells, Columns, and Rows

While entering data, one might need to add more cells, columns, or rows. Calc provides you with this facility.

Inserting New Cells

Follow the given steps to insert new cells:

1. Select the range of cells where you need to add more cells.

2. Right-click on the range of selected cells and choose the Insert option.

An Insert Cells dialog box appears (see Fig. 11.13), showing four options for the placement of new cells:

1. Shift cells down: This option moves the selected cell(s) down by one row (Fig. 11.14).

2. Shift cells right: This option moves the selected cell(s) right by one column (Fig. 11.15).

3. Entire row: Clicking this option lets you add rows to the entire sheet in the selected cell region (Fig. 11.16).

4. Entire column: Adds another column of new cells to the left of the selected cells (Fig. 11.17).

Fig. 11.13: Adding New Cells

Fig. 11.14: Result of Selecting ‘Shift cells down’ Option

Fig. 11.15: Result of Selecting ‘Shift cells right’ Option

11.16: Result of Selecting ‘Entire row’ Option

11.17: Result of Selecting ‘Entire column’ Option

Inserting a Column

To insert a column, follow the steps given below:

1. Right-click on the column header where you need to add a new column (Column C, for example).

2. Select the Insert Columns Before option to insert a column before the selected column; or Insert Columns After option to insert a column after the selected column.

Inserting a Row

To insert a row, follow the steps given below:

1. Right-click on the row header where you need to add a new row (Row 6, for example).

Fig.

Fig.

Fig. 11.18: Adding a New Column

2. Select the Insert Rows Above option to insert a row above the selected row; or Insert Rows Below option to insert a row below the selected row.

Deleting Columns and Rows

To delete the columns or rows, follow the steps given below:

1. Right-click on the row header (or the column header).

2. Select the Delete Rows (or the Delete Columns) option from the drop-down menu.

3. The selected row or column is deleted. (see Fig. 11.20)

Copying and Moving Data

Data entered in a worksheet can be either duplicated or made to change its position within the same worksheet or to a different sheet. The data which is to be moved needs to be cut from the original source whereas the data that needs to be duplicated needs to be copied from the original source. The data either cut or copied is transferred on a temporary memory of the computer, called Clipboard. This data on the clipboard must then be pasted to a location where you want it to move or duplicate. The action can be performed as follows:

Fig. 11.19: Adding a New Row

Fig. 11.20: Deleting a Row

Copying Data

The data in the given cells, rows, or columns can be copied as follows:

1. Select the cell(s), row(s), or column(s) whose data needs to be copied.

2. Right-click and select the Copy option.

OR

Go to the Edit menu and select Copy from the drop-down menu.

OR

Use the keyboard shortcut key Ctrl + C (see Fig. 11.21). Fig. 11.21: Copying Data from Source

3. Go to the target sheet or cell where the data is to be pasted.

4. Right-click and select the Paste option.

OR

Go to the Edit menu and select Paste from the drop-down menu.

OR

Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + V

Moving Data

The data in the given cells, rows, or columns can be moved as follows:

1. Select the cell(s), row(s), or column(s) whose data needs to be moved.

2. Right-click and select Cut option.

OR

Go to the Edit menu and select Cut from the drop-down menu.

Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + X (see Fig. 11.22).

3. Go to the target sheet or cell where the data is to be moved.

4. Right-click and select the Paste option.

OR Go to the Edit menu and select Paste from the drop-down menu.

OR

Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + V

5. This pastes the data to the selected location.

Using the Drag and Drop Method to Move Data

The data in the given cells, rows, or columns can be moved as follows:

1. Select the source cell, row, or column from where data has to be moved. Here, we have selected the cells under column C.

2. Click the mouse and drag the cells to the desired location, and then release the mouse button. This will shift the data to the new destination (say, Column G), see fig. 11.23.

Fig. 11.22: Moving Data From Source

Fig. 11.23: Moving Data by Drag and Drop Menu

Activity Time

Create a spreadsheet with a column labeled “Data” and enter a set of numerical values in cells A2 to A10: (Individual Activity) 5, 11, 8, 19, 6, 10, 7, 13, 9.

Apply the required formulas and functions to:

• find the maximum value in the provided data set.

• find the minimum value in the data set.

• calculate the sum of all the values in the data set.

• find the average of the values in the data set.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  The expression for a formula starts with sign.

a  =

b  &

c  * d  (

2  The values of the data or text which do not change are called .

a  Constants

c  Numerals

b  Operators

d  Functions

3  Which of the following is a shortcut key to move data?

a  Ctrl + C and then Ctrl + V

c  Ctrl + X and then Ctrl + V

b  Ctrl + V and then Ctrl + X

d  Ctrl + V and then Ctrl + C

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  Joining two or more strings of text data is called .

2 are the values input to the functions.

3  Calc will recognise the value (204) as .

4  By default, numbers are aligned in a cell.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  The operations which are predefined as formula in Calc are called functions.

2  TODAY( ) function gives us the current date.

3  Mouse handle can be used to drag and fill the adjacent cells with the same formula.

4  To insert a new row, click on the Rows option from the Edit menu.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What is a function?

A1. The operations which are predefined as formula for performing accurate calculations in Calc are called functions. Examples of some commonly used functions are Sum(), Average(), Min(), Max(), etc.

Q2. Evaluate the following equations using operator precedence, and then test the result in the spreadsheet.

a. 8-4/2

e. 3+2^2

b. 5*5+8

f. 5+6*2^2

i. 1+2^2-2 j. 4*3/2

c. 3+5*4

g. 8/4*4

d. 2^5+8

h. –4/2+2

Q3. Rajat has entered a formula in cell A5 in Calc. He wants to fill the adjacent cells with the same formula as entered in the selected cell. Name the feature of Calc that can help him achieve this.

A3. Fill handle

Answer Key

3. False. Fill handle can be used to drag and fill the adjacent cells with the same formula.

4. False. To insert a new row, follow the steps given below:

a. Right-click on the row header.

b. Select Insert Rows Above option to insert a row above the selected row; or Insert Rows Below option to insert a row below the selected row.

A 1. a   2. a   3. c

B 1. Concatenation   2. Arguments   3. –204    4. Right

C 1. True.

2. True.

Formatting Data

Data formatting is the process of changing the appearance and layout of a cell or range of cells to make them easier to read and more visually pleasing. Formatting data in a cell gives additional effect to the text. Additional effects include changing the font style, font size, automatic wrapping, bold, underline, italic, etc. Refer Fig. 12.1 to have a view of various types of formatted cells.

In this chapter, you will learn how to format cells in a worksheet.

Formatting the Worksheet

To format the worksheet, choose the appropriate cell or range of cells where the formatting has to be applied. It can be applied in three different ways.

Fig. 12.1: Various Types of Formatted Cells in a Worksheet

1. Apply formatting using the tools present on the formatting toolbar. Refer Fig. 12.2.

Alignment Options

Italic

Font

Format as Currency

Fig. 12.2: Using Formatting Toolbar

2. Right-click on a cell or range of cells, and choose Format Cells option. (See Fig. 12.3)

3. Select the desired range of cells. Click on Format menu and select the Cells option. (See Fig. 12.4.)

12.3: Format Cells Option from the Context Menu

Let’s explore the other formatting options that can be used on a worksheet.

Applying Formatting Effects Using Formatting Toolbar

With the aid of the tools on the formatting toolbar, you can change the font family, font style, and font size. You can apply the formatting effects through the following buttons, as shown in Fig. 12.2.

Tools

Font Name Different font types on a spreadsheet

Font Size Different font sizes on a spreadsheet

Bold Makes the selected text bold

Italic Italicises the selected text

Underline Underlines the selected text

Align Left Aligns text to the left of a cell

Align Center Aligns text to the centre of a cell

Descriptions

Fig.

Fig. 12.4: Format Menu

Tools

Align Right Aligns text to the right of a cell

Descriptions

Merge Cells Combines two or more cells to create a new, larger cell

Borders Applies a border to the cells

Background Color Changes the background colour of the cell

Font Color Makes the text stand out against the white background of the spreadsheet

Formatting Numbers

Although number formats may seem straightforward, using the wrong ones could ultimately result in inaccurate reporting. The context can be better explained with a straight-forward scenario.

Imagine that you work in an automobile business and that your store manager asks you to identify the customer who made the highest expenditure in the month so that you can give him a discount on his subsequent purchase. In this scenario, imagine that all transactions, except one, were recorded in the standard dollar format. Unfortunately, due to a hurried data entry process, you mistakenly entered the transaction amount for one of the customers in the Indian rupee format. This leads to the wrong analysis of the highest-spending customer. This example conveys how easily errors can arise and how the precision of number formatting plays a critical role in ensuring data accuracy, particularly in important decision-making processes like customer recognition and rewards. Let’s make the number formatting consistent by making all the numeric data in the Indian rupee format.

1. Enter the data in a sheet from cell A1:B6 as shown in Fig. 12.5

2. Select a cell range where you wish to add number formats. In our example, select B2:B6.

3. Click on the Format menu and select the Cells option. (Refer Fig. 12.4). It will display the Format Cells dialog box. (See Fig. 12.6.)

4. Click on the Numbers tab. Select a Category option. Here, we have selected the Currency category.

5. Under the Format section, select the currency type you would want for your numeric data.

6. Click on the OK button.

Fig. 12.6: Format Cells Dialog Box

Fig. 12.5: Data Entered

Number Formats in Calc

The following are the types of number formats available in LibreOffice Calc.

Name Description

All

All is the default number format selected for any number you type into the spreadsheet. The number appears the same way you type it, without additional decimals or modifications.

User-defined LibreOffice Calc also provides its users with a customisable option that will help them use existing formats and customise them to create a completely new one.

Number

Percent

Currency

Date

The Number format is exclusively used when you are working with the numbers. The number format will add decimal points to your data to keep it more accurate, and you can also customise the number of decimal points you wish to have.

The Percentage data format represents the values in terms of percentages. For example, 0.20 can be represented as 20%. In this number format too, you can choose the number of decimal places for your percentage value.

The Currency number format is used when you want to represent numbers in the form of currency. For example, annual investment data. You might use dollars to present such data.

The Date format is used in spreadsheets to consider your input as a calendar date instead of a regular number. For example, 31 December 2023, 31/12/23, 2023-12-31, etc., are different date formats.

Time The Time format converts the general default number format to the time format. For example, 13:37, 01:37 PM, 13:37:46, etc., are different time formats.

Scientific

Fraction

Boolean Value

Text

The Scientific number format differs slightly from currency or a general (All) number format. The Scientific Number Format has an exponential number that indicates the power of a number. Apart from exponents, the scientific number format also includes trigonometry, calculus, roots of a number, etc.

The Fraction format displays the general number in the form of a fraction according to the type of fraction you chose.

Boolean variables are stored as 16-bit (2-byte) numbers, but they can only be true or false.

The text includes the textual type of data. If number data is typed in text format, then Calc keeps it the way it is without adding any decimals or mathematical symbols to the input number data.

Formatting Cells as Numbers

Consider the format of the numeric data in the given table representing the Science and Maths marks of various students.

Fig. 12.7: Numeric data

To apply the number format, follow the given steps:

1. Select a cell range where you wish to add number formats.

2. Click on the Format menu and select the Cells option. It will display the Format Cells dialog box.

3. Select the Number format that is to be applied to the data.

4. In the Decimal places option, select the number of decimal places you want to display in the data.

5. Indicate the number of leading zeroes by choosing a suitable value in the Leading zeroes spin box.

6. Click on the checkbox for the Thousands separator to use a comma as a separator between thousands of values. This command is optional.

7. Click OK. The format has now undergone the following modification, as shown in Fig. 12.8.

Formatting a Range of Cells as Labels

Numerous numeric values beginning with zero (‘0’) are required to be entered while storing data in a spreadsheet, including postal codes, STD/ISD codes, phone numbers, employee codes, etc.

However, when entering such a number, the initial zero (‘0’) vanishes. This is due to the fact that these are kept as a numeric value, and a zero does not come before a numeric number. If you want to display these numerical values with a leading zero, then this type of data can be formatted as text or labels.

1. Select the range of cells from B2 to B6.

2. Click Format>Cells from the menu options. This opens up a Format Cells dialog box.

3. Click on the Numbers tab.

4. Select Text in the drop-down list of the Category section.

5. Click the OK button.

After formatting the data as text, you can manually add as many leading zeros as you want. From the Fig. 12.9, you can see the number of leading zeroes in the numeric data under column B.

Note that the data formatted as labels is left aligned.

Formatting a Range of Cells as Scientific Form

When a number is too big or too small to be stated in a decimal form, or if doing so would entail writing down an unwieldy, lengthy string of digits, it can be expressed using scientific notation. It is also known as standard index form or scientific form.

Scientists, mathematicians, and engineers frequently utilise this ten base notation because it can make some mathematical operations simpler. It is typically referred to as the “SCI” display mode on scientific calculators.

To display/represent numbers as scientific, follow the given steps:

1. Select the range of cells B9:B12.

2. Click Format>Cells from the menu. This opens up a Format Cells dialog box.

3. Click on the Numbers tab.

4. Select Scientific in the drop-down list of the Category section.

5. Click the OK button.

Few examples of scientific numbers is displayed in the following table.

Fig. 12.9: Formatting a Range of Cells as Labels

Fig. 12.10: Scientific Numbers

Fig. 12.8: Changing Number Format

Formatting a Range of Cells to Display Date and Time

Even though dates and time are actually stored as a regular number known as the date serial number, we can make use of extensive LibreOffice date and time formatting options to display them just the way we want. For various time zones, Calc offers numerous predefined dates and time formats. Calc stores time and dates as decimal values that are divided into an integer for the date and a decimal for the time. Every date is saved as an integer, indicating how many days have passed since January 1, 1900. Time entries are saved as decimals between .0 and .99999, where .0 is 00:00:00 and .99999 is 23:59:59, to represent that portion of the day.

Formatting Text

Changing the font of the text in your spreadsheet is an easy way to change its appearance. A font is a collection of letters, numerals, and punctuation symbols that share a common appearance. A font will contain size and style changes. Let us understand them one by one.

Text Alignment

In LibreOffice Calc, alignment is a cell formatting attribute that influences how the data in the cell(s) appears. There are six types of horizontal alignments: left, center, right, justified, filled, and distributed.

1. Left: Left alignment indicates that the text/values will begin at the left edge of the cell(s).

2. Center: The text and values will be centred in the cell(s) when using the center alignment.

3. Right: Right alignment indicates that the text/values will begin at the right edge of the cell(s).

4. Justified: Justified alignment indicates that the text and values will be aligned on both the left and right edges.

5. Filled: The Filled option fills the entire cell area by repeating the contents in it.

6. Distributed: This alignment is similar to Justified alignment, but even the last line in a cell touches both its left and right margins, with space added between words and letters.

There are five types of vertical alignment for text: top, middle, bottom, justified, and distributed.

1. Top: Aligns the text/values at the top of the cell(s).

2. Middle: Aligns the text/values at the centre of the cell(s).

3. Bottom: Aligns the text/values at the bottom of the cell(s).

Did You Know?

In a cell, the text data is by default aligned to the left. Additionally, by default, numerals are aligned to the right.

4. Justified: Aligns the text/values to distribute it evenly from the top to the bottom margins.

5. Distributed: Aligns the first words in a line of text (appearing at the top of the cell) with the top edge of the cell and the last words of a line of text with the bottom edge of the cell.

Let us understand text alignment with the help of an example.

1. Enter the data as shown (See Fig. 12.11).

2. Place the cursor in cell A3, whose alignment you wish to change.

3. Click and drag to select multiple cells till A10.

4. Right-click on the selected area and select the Format Cells option to open the Format Cells dialog box.

5. Click on the Alignment tab.

6. In the Text Alignment section, from the Horizontal drop-down list, select Left, Center, Right, Justified, Filled, or Distributed as desired. Here, we have selected Center.

7. From the Vertical drop-down list, select Top, Middle, Bottom, Justified or Distributed. In this example, we have selected Middle. (See Fig. 12.12.)

8. Click on OK.

Text Orientation

Orientation helps rotate the text values diagonally or vertically.

The orientation of the cell is a significant formatting characteristic that describes the direction in which the contents of the cell are to be displayed or printed.

You may rotate text in a cell or group of cells in many different ways using Degrees

For the selected cell(s), enter the rotation angle or the degree to which you want to rotate the text. If you click the upward pointing arrowhead of the Degrees spinbox, it will cause the text to rotate left, while the downward pointing arrowhead will cause the text to spin to the right.

Reference edge

Select the Reference edge option in the Format Cells dialog box’s Text Orientation section, to display the cell edge to write the rotated text. (See Fig. 12.13.) Reference edge has three options:

Text Extension From Lower Cell Border: displays the rotated text from the bottom cell edge onwards. (Cell A1)

Text Extension From Upper Cell Border: displays the rotated text from the top cell edge outwards. (Cell B1)

Fig.12.11: Cells to be Aligned

Fig. 12.12: Selecting Text Alignment

Text Extension Inside Cell: displays the rotated text within the cell. (Cell A2)

The Vertically stacked option stacks the letters on the top of each other. (Cell B2)

Fig.12.13: Illustration of Cell Orientation

Wrap text automatically

The best approach to fitting a lot of text into LibreOffice Calc cells is to use the text wrapping option. It allows you to rapidly change the cell’s dimensions so that all the text neatly fits inside it rather than extending outside the cell’s boundaries. The width of the cell determines how many lines will fit in.

1. Select the cell whose text needs to be wrapped.

The Properties section under the Alignment tab provides options to change the text direction in a cell.

Did You Know?

To enter a manual line break, press the Ctrl+Enter key combination in the cell.

2. Right-click the selected cell.

3. Go to the Format Cells popup option, or select the Cells option from the Format menu. The Format Cells dialog box will open.

4. Click on the Alignment tab.

5. Check the Wrap text automatically box in the Properties section.

6. Click OK to finish.

Fig. 12.14: Text Before Applying the Wrap Text Feature

Fig. 12.15: Text After Applying the Wrap Text Feature

Hyphenation active

Word hyphenation is enabled for text wrapping. Hyphenation in text wrapping is a feature that automatically adds hyphens to break words at the end of lines when text is being wrapped.

Shrink to fit cell size

Reduces the font’s perceived size so that the cell’s contents fit within the available cell width.

The Fill Handle

Did You Know?

Shrink to fit cell size cannot be used on a cell that has line breaks.

Although entering data into a spreadsheet can be highly laborious, LibreOffice Calc offers a number of features to make it easier. The fill handle is one such feature. It is a small black box at the bottom right corner of the cell. It automates input, particularly repetitive data or data that has patterns.

Using the Fill Handle

The LibreOffice Calc Fill Handle tool is used to fill the subsequent cells with the predefined value by dragging it to the desired cells. For instance, to fill in the numbers 1, 2, 3, or the days of the week Monday, Tuesday,..., or the name of the month January, February,..., enter the first two values in the cells, select them, then drag them to the following cells till you want to continue the series in succession.

Let us understand it with the help of an example.

(See Fig. 12.16.)

For example, if you want to generate the whole number series 1, 2, 3,... up to 22 using the Fill handle tool, follow the given steps:

1. In cell A1, type 1 and press the Enter key.

2. Click A1 to place the cell pointer.

3. Click the cell’s Fill Handle on the bottom-right corner of the cell. You will notice that the mouse cursor changes to a little plus sign (+).

4. While dragging over the cells, the generated values will be presented. Stop dragging when you reach the desired number, 22.

You will notice a series of numbers is generated automatically.

Remember

You can also generate a series at different intervals. For example, to get an odd number series, type 1 in the first cell and 3 in the next, select the two cells, and drag the fill handle up to the desired number of cells.

Did You Know?

1. To fill cells quickly, grab the “handle” in the bottom right-hand corner and move it in the direction you wish to fill. If the cell includes a number, it will be filled in series. If the cell includes text, the content will be filled in the direction you selected.

2. If you do not wish to fill the cells with different values, hold down the Ctrl key. This key will ensure that a repetitive series is generated instead of a series based on a pattern.

Fig. 12.16: Illustration of Fill Handle

Use of a Fill Handle to Copy a Formula

If you want to apply the same formula to a number of cells, you don’t need to manually input the formula repeatedly in each cell. You can instead use the fill handle to copy the formula. This saves time and effort and lowers the possibility of mistakes, especially when dealing with lengthy and complex formulas. This is an alternative method to copying and pasting. The AutoFill feature copies the contents of one cell to all dragged cells. The content could be data or a formula. When you enter a formula, the addresses of all filled formulas are modified.

Follow the steps below to copy the formula using the fill handle.

1. Click the F3 cell, which contains the formula for total marks. A small black + sign (fill handle) appears in the bottom-right corner of the selected cell.

2. Drag the fill handle to cell F10.

3. Release the mouse button. The total marks of all respective students will be displayed automatically. (See Fig. 12.17.)

Using a Selection List

Only text can be used in selection lists. The selection list suggests text that has already been typed in the same column. Click a blank cell and press Alt + Down arrow key to use a selection list. A drop-down list appears for any cell in the same column that has at least one text character. Select the required entry.

You can also right-click the blank cell and choose the Selection List option.

Fig. 12.17: Copying Formula With Fill Handle

Fig. 12.18: Using a Selection List

Activity Time

1. Assume that you have the given data in cell A1, as shown in Fig. a. You want to display text as given in Fig. b. How will you achieve this?

2. Identify the feature of Calc used so that the text in cell A1 of Fig. c appears as that in Fig. d.

3. Name the feature of Calc used to obtain the data as given in Fig. f.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  Numbers entered into a cell are automatically: a  Left aligned b  Right aligned c  Center aligned d  Justified

2  The Autofill feature in a spreadsheet:

a  Generates a sequential series of data

b  Changes the orientation of the selected text

c  Applies a border around the selected cells

d  Fills the selected cells with a background colour

3  Which of the following is a type of number format available in LibreOffice Calc? a  Percent b  Currency c  Date d  All of these

Fig. a

Fig. b

Fig. c

Fig. d

Fig. e

Fig. f

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1 is the process of changing the appearance and layout of a cell to make it easier to read and visually pleasing.

2 helps rotate the text values diagonally or vertically.

3 allows you to change the cell’s dimensions, so that all the text neatly fits inside it rather than extending outside the cell’s boundaries.

4 alignment aligns the data evenly on both the left and right side of a cell.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  Only numbers can be used in selection lists.

2  Merging cells combine two or more cells to create a new, larger cell.

3  Every date is saved as a text indicating how many days have passed since January 1, 1900.

4  The Formatting toolbar has an option to change the font size of the text.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What is text wrapping?

A1. The text wrapping option allows you to rapidly change the cell’s dimensions so that all the text neatly fits inside it rather than extending outside the cell’s boundaries.

Q2. What is orientation?

A2. Orientation helps rotate the text values diagonally or vertically. The orientation of the cell is a significant formatting characteristic that describes the direction in which the contents of the cell are to be displayed or printed.

Q3. If the values in the cells are as given: A1 = 5, A2 = 10, and A3 = 15, then to continue the series up to A20, which tool can we use?

A3. We can use the Fill handle tool of the Calc to generate the series 5, 10, 15, … 100.

Answer Key

A 1. b   2. a   3. d

B 1. Formatting   2. Orientation   3. Text wrapping    4. Justify

C 1. False. Only text can be used in selection lists.

2. True.

3. False. Every date is saved as an integer indicating how many days have passed since January 1, 1900.

4. True.

Cell Referencing

Each worksheet in an LibreOffice Calc consists of several cells formed by the intersection of rows and columns. Each cell has a specific reference (or cell address). For example, the cell address “A10” refers to the cell in the tenth row of column A. The cell reference helps the users to easily refer to the desired cell(s) within the functions or formulas.

This chapter provides a basic overview of LibreOffice Calc cell references. The chapter also goes through the various sorts of cell references accessible in LibreOffice Calc, as well as the step-by-step techniques for using them.

What Is Cell Referencing?

Cell referencing refers to a cell or range of cells on a spreadsheet and can be used in the formula so that the values or data associated with that cell can be utilised for calculation in formulas. We must supply the column name followed by the row number of the appropriate cell when representing the cell reference. The figure below (see Fig. 13.1(a)) shows the cell reference of the selected cell in a LibreOffice sheet:

The cell reference assists in locating the cell of the sheet and reading or using its data in the required formula or function to generate the result. The cell being referred can be on the same sheet, on a different sheet, or on a separate workbook.

External referencing is used when referencing cells from other workbooks. Remote reference occurs when cells are referenced from other spreadsheet applications.

Using a Simple Cell Reference

Let us now look at some easy examples of how to use a simple cell reference:

Simply specifying the referred cell with the equal sign demonstrates the basic use of a cell reference. For example, if we type “=A1” without quotation marks in another cell on the sheet, the value in cell A1 will be displayed in the

Fig. 13.1(a): Cell Reference of the Selected Cell

relevant cell. This signifies that the value of the selected cell, where the cell reference is entered, is the same as cell A1 (see Fig. 13.1(b)).

Reference to a Cell Range

If we use the notation “=A2:C6” without the quotes, we refer to the entire cell range from cell A2 to cell C6. However, a range alone is not valuable data in Calc. When we use this cell reference in Calc, it gives the #VALUE! error, which indicates that the formula is missing (see Fig. 13.2).

Reference to a Cell Range in a Function

You can utilise reference to a range in a function. For instance, =SUM(A2:C6) will return the sum of the values in the cells, whereas =AVERAGE(A2:C6) will provide the average of the values in these cells (see Fig. 13.3).

13.3: Reference to a Cell Range in a Function

Types of Cell Reference in LibreOffice Calc

Cell referencing is really helpful when copying and pasting LibreOffice Calc formulas in multiple cells. LibreOffice Calc provides three major types of cell references based on diverse use scenarios, including:

Fig. 13.1(b): Cell Reference

Fig. 13.2: Reference to a Cell Range

Fig.

1. Relative cell reference

2. Absolute cell reference

3. Mixed cell reference

Relative Cell Reference

LibreOffice Calc by default, uses a relative cell reference. When we include a cell reference or a range in a formula, LibreOffice Calc always uses a relative reference. The associated cell references are used in conjunction with the relative references, which often indicate the combination of column name and row number. The relative reference for the cell does not contain a dollar ($) sign.

Use of Relative Cell References in LibreOffice Calc

Let’s see how to use the relative cell references. The below-mentioned “Marks Analysis” table contains “Name” in column A (A2:A6), “Science Marks” in column B (B2:B6), “Maths Marks” in column C (C2:C6) and “Total Marks” in column D, whose values we need to find out (see Fig. 13.4).

To calculate the Total Marks for each student, we need to add the Science Marks and Maths Marks of each student. So, the formula in cell D2 would be =B2+C2.

Now, instead of entering the formula for all the cells, we can apply the above formula to the entire range. Follow the given steps to copy the formula down in column D:

1. Select cell D2.

2. Scroll down the mouse from the corner, as shown below, until cell D6. This is the AutoFill feature.

3. The total marks for cell D3 becomes ‘=B3+C3’, for cell D4 becomes '=B4+C4', and so on; this is known as relative referencing.

Here, when you copy or move a formula with a relative cell reference to another row, automatically, row references will change (similarly for columns also).

To check a relative reference, we must select any of the “Total Marks” cells in column D, and we can view the formula in the Input line (formula bar). E.g., in cell D6, we can observe that the formula has been changed from =B2+C2 to =B6+C6 (see Fig. 13.5).

Fig. 13.4: Marks Analysis

Fig. 13.5: Relative Reference

When to Use Relative Cell References

Relative cell references are useful when you need to create a formula for a group of cells, and the formula needs to make a reference to its relative cells.

If so, you can create the formula in one cell, copy it, and then paste it into each subsequent cell. You can also use the AutoFill feature of Calc for the same.

Absolute Cell Reference

There are situations when the cell reference must remain the same while copying or utilising AutoFill. Dollar signs are used to maintain a continuous column and/or row reference. Therefore, we can employ the dollar sign ($) characters to convert a relative reference into an absolute reference. When you place the $ symbol before the column letter and the row number, you obtain an absolute column or row.

We utilise absolute reference to refer to a specific fixed point on a worksheet whenever copying is performed. Since the reference is locked, when it is copied, the rows and columns won’t change.

How to Use Absolute Cell Reference?

Below is an example depicting how to use absolute cell references.

The below-mentioned Items_on_sales table contains “Items” in column A (A2:A6), “Old_Price” in column B (B2:B6), and “New_Price” in column C, whose values we need to find out with the help of an absolute cell reference.

We can see that the rate for each product has increased by 5% effective from January 2023 and this rate is listed in cell “A9” (see Fig. 13.6).

To calculate the “New_Price” for each item, we need to multiply the old price of each item by the percentage price increase (5%) and add the “Old_Price” to it.

The formula to calculate the new price for item Paint in cell C2 would be =B2*$A$9+B2.

Here, the percentage rate increase for each product is 5%, a common factor. Therefore, we must add a dollar symbol in front of the row and column number for the cell “A9” to make it an absolute reference, i.e., $A$9. Here the dollar sign fixes the reference in such a way that it remains unchanged even when you copy the formula to other cells.

When to Use Absolute Cell Reference?

Absolute cell references are useful when you don’t want the cell reference to change as you reproduce formulas. This is possible if you have to use a fixed value in the formula.

Fig. 13.6: Items_on_Sales

Mixed Cell Reference

A mixed cell reference consists of an absolute column and a relative row, or a relative column and an absolute row. When you place the $ symbol before the column letter or the row number, you obtain a mixed cell reference. $B8 is relative to row 8 but absolute to column B, whereas B$8 is relative to column B but absolute to row 8.

The dollar ($) before the row number fixes/locks the row, and the dollar ($) before the column name fixes/locks the column.

Let’s see how to use the mixed cell references through examples. In the below-mentioned table, we have values in each row and column. Here, we have to multiply cell values of each column by each row with the help of a mixed cell reference (see Fig. 13.7).

We can use two mixed-cell references here to get the desired output.

Let us apply two types of mixed references in cell “B2”.

The formula in “B2” would be =$A2*B$1.

1. $A2 refers to the absolute column and relative row.

The dollar sign before column A indicates that only the row number can change. At the same time, the column letter A is fixed. It does not change.

When we copy the formula to the right side, the reference will not change because it is locked, but when you copy it down, the row number will change because it is not locked.

2. B$1 refers to the absolute row and relative column.

The dollar sign before the row number indicates that only the column letter B can change. Whereas the row number is fixed, it does not change.

When you copy the formula downwards, the reference will not change because it is locked. But when we copy the formula to the right side, the column alphabet will change because it is not locked.

In the above example, the formulas in cells will be as shown below.

Instead of entering the formula for all the cells, we can apply a formula to the entire range; see the output in Fig. 13.8 below.

Fig.13.8: Result of Mixed References

Fig. 13.7: Mixed Reference

Activity Time

Activity 1: Using Absolute Cell Referencing (Individual Activity)

In your spreadsheet, enter ten numbers in sequence, using the AutoFill feature, starting cell A1 upto cell A10. Also enter a random value in cell G1. Create a formula using absolute reference to multiply the constant value in cell G1 with each of the numbers in column A and see results.

Activity 2: Group Discussion (Group Activity)

Divide your classmates into a group of 4-5 students and discuss specific examples to illustrate each type of reference and their practical applications.

Activity 3: Compare Marks Using Cell Referencing (Individual Activity)

Create a spreadsheet with data containing the marks for two semesters of all the students in your class. Create a formula using relative references to calculate the change in marks from the previous semester. Copy the formula to analyse how relative referencing adapts to different columns.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  Which formula has the absolute cell reference?

a  =A1+$B$2

c  =A1+B2

b  =A1*B2

d  =A1/B2

2  In the formula, which references will be updated when =$D$3+$E5 is copied?

a  Column D b  Column E

c  Row 3 d  Row 5

3  In the formula, =$D3+E5, which reference is absolute?

a  Column E b  Column D

c  Row 5 d  Row 3

4  Which formula below contains a relative cell reference?

a  $A$1+$B$2

c  $A$1+$B$3

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

b  $A$3+$B$3

d  A1+B2

1  Unlike references, references do not change when copied or filled.

2  $B$17 is a type of reference.

3 symbol is used to designate an absolute cell reference.

4  In the formula =$D$3+E$5, column is relative, meaning it will be updated if copied or if AutoFill is used.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1 Cell value references should always be used to avoid having to make multiple manual updates when one cell value changes.

2  The =F18+F19/2 formula uses relative cell reference.

3  We can employ the percent sign (%) before characters to convert a relative reference into an absolute reference.

4  $A2 refers to an absolute column and a relative row.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What is Cell Reference?

A1. Cell Reference in LibreOffice Calc is an alphanumeric value, which means it consists of a combination of a column letter and a row number that identifies a specific cell in a worksheet. It is used to refer to or manipulate data within that cell.

Q2. Differentiate between absolute and mixed references.

A2. Mixed cell references have dollar signs attached to either the column letter or the row number in a reference but not both (i.e., $A1 and A$1). Absolute cell references have dollar signs attached to both column letter and row number in a reference (for example, $A$1).

Q3. Suyash is working in a Calc spreadsheet where data is spread across various columns and rows. He wants to refer to only a single cell, A1 in all the formulas he is using. But as he copies the formula to different cells, he finds that the cell address keeps on changing. What should he do in such a scenario?

A3. He should use absolute cell reference $A$1 in all the formulas.

Answer Key

C 1. True.

2. True.

3. False. We can employ the dollar sign ($) before characters to convert a relative reference into an absolute reference. 4. True.

Charts in a Spreadsheet

One of the most popular features of LibreOffice Calc software is to generate charts based on numeric data. A chart is used to visualise data, making it easy to comprehend and analyse the data. Graphs are specifically designed to show changes and relationships in data, making them a powerful tool for data visualisation. Let us learn more about charts.

Charts

The term “chart” refers to graphic representation of data in which the data is visually represented through bars in a bar chart, lines in a line chart, or slices in a pie chart. A chart may present different information by representing tabular numerical data, functions, or certain types of quality structures.

Advantages of Using Charts

Here are the advantages of charts:

1. It improves the presentation and readability of the data.

2. It can be used to make certain judgments or do analysis.

3. It facilitates the concise and simple summarisation of a huge amount of data.

4. It facilitates more accurate data comparison.

LibreOffice Calc provides a variety of charts for analysing data. These charts have some characteristics in common that help users rationalise the data.

Types of Charts

Following are the different types of charts used in Calc.

Name of the Chart Description

Column Chart

Line Chart

This is the default chart type, as it is one of the most useful and easiest-to-understand charts. The x-axis shows categories. The y-axis shows the value for each category. It is used for displaying data that shows different trends over time.

A line chart shows values as points on the y-axis. The x-axis shows categories. The y-values of each data series can be connected by a line. It is used to display quantitative values over a specified time interval.

A pie chart shows values as circular sectors of the total circle. The length of the arc, or the area of each sector, is proportional to its value. It is used to show data as a percentage of a whole.

This type of chart is used to represent data using horizontal bars. The length of each bar is proportional to its value. The y-axis shows categories. The x-axis shows the value for each category. It is used to summarise and compare values in a data category and provide a snapshot of your data at specified points in time.

An X–Y chart in its basic form is based on one data series consisting of a name, a list of x values, and a list of y values. Each value pair (x|y) is shown as a point in a coordinate system.

It is used to observe and visually display the relationship between variables.

An area chart is a graph that combines a line chart and a bar chart to show changes in quantities over time. The data points are plotted and connected by line segments and the area below the line is coloured or shaded.

It is useful where you wish to emphasise the volume of change.

A bubble chart can display data in three dimensions, which is used specifically for showcasing relationships in social, economic, medical, and other aspects. The bubble chart replaces data points with bubbles, and the size of the bubble represents the data value.

It is often used to present financial data.

Pie Chart

Bar Chart

Scatter or XY Charts

Area Chart

Bubble Chart

Components of a Chart

A net chart is useful for comparing data that are not time series but show different circumstances, such as variables in a scientific experiment. The poles of the net chart are equivalent to the y-axes of other charts.

A stock chart is a specialised column graph specifically designed to represent the price movement of stocks and shares. The data required for these charts is quite specialised, with series for opening price, closing price, and high and low prices. The x-axis represents a time series.

A column and line chart is a dual-axis chart that combines a column and a line chart. The two charts share an X-axis, but each has its own Y-axis. It is useful for combining two distinct but related data series, for example: sales over time (column) and profit margin trends (line).

Following are the different types of chart components used in Calc.

1. Chart Title: The Chart Title is used to display the name or aim of the chart.

2. Chart Wall: The chart wall is the “vertical” background behind the data area of the chart. It is a window within the chart area that includes the plotted data series, category, and value access in addition to the actual chart itself.

3. Data Series: Data series are the bars, slices, or other elements that show the data values. If there are multiple data series in the chart, each will have a different colour or style.

4. Legend: For clarity, legends provide a brief visual depiction of each data series in the chart. If the data contains numerous coloured visuals, legends will explain what each labelled visual signifies.

5. Chart Area: This includes all the areas and objects in the chart.

6. Category Axis: Category axis, or X-axis, is the horizontal axis.

7. Value Axis: The value axis, or Y-axis, is the vertical axis used to plot the values.

8. Category Name: Category names are the labels, which are displayed on the X and Y-axes.

9. Gridlines: These can either be horizontal or vertical lines, depending on the selected chart type. They extend across the plot area of the chart. Gridlines make it easier to read and understand the values.

Refer Fig. 14.1 to have a look at the components of the chart.

Creating a Chart

To demonstrate the process of making charts and graphs in Calc, let us consider the table below.

1. Select the cells that contain the data that you want to present in your chart. In the above example, select A2:B6.

2. Click on the Insert > Chart option or click the Insert Chart  option on the Standard toolbar.

Fig. 14.1: Components of Chart

Fig. 14.2: Marks Analysis

Fig. 14.3: Selecting Chart Option from the Insert Menu

3. The Chart Wizard dialog box opens as shown in Fig. 14.4.

4. The Chart Wizard has three main parts:

• A list of the steps to insert the chart.

• Choose a chart type.

• The available options for each chart type. You can always go back to a prior step and make different choices by clicking on the Back button.

5. Choose a Chart type and its sub-type. Select Column as the chart type and then the Normal option. (Refer to Fig. 14.4). Then, click on the Next button.

6. In Step 2, Data Range is displayed according to the cells selected. Refer to Fig. 14.5.

7. Select either the rows or columns option for the data series. Verify whether the data range has labels in the first row, the first column, or both. Then click on the Finish button or Next to make further changes to the chart’s details.

8. In Fig. 14.5, click on Data series in columns. Check the First row as label and the First column as label. Click on Next.

9. In Step 3, in the Data series list box, a list of all data series in the current chart is displayed. In the given example, only one data series (Maths) is displayed. Refer to Fig. 14.6.

Fig. 14.4: Chart Wizard Dialog Box

Fig. 14.5: Data Range

10. To add a new data series below the currently chosen entry, click Add. The selected entry’s type matches that of the new data series.

• To remove the chosen entry from the Data Series list, click on Remove.

• To move the currently chosen entry in the list up or down, use the Up and Down arrow buttons.

Then, select the Next button.

11. In Step 4, Chart Elements window is displayed as shown in Fig. 14.7.

12. In the Title box, type “Class IX Marks Analysis”.

In the Subtitle box, type “Mathematics Marks”.

In the X axis box, type “Students Name”.

In the Y axis box, type “Maths Marks”.

The Right option is checked by default in the Display legend checkbox.

In the Display Grids, check Y axis

Fill in the above details as shown in Fig. 14.8.

Fig. 14.6: Data Range for Data Series

Fig. 14.7: Chart Elements

13. Then, click the Finish button. A Column chart (Refer to Fig. 14.9) is created as shown below.

In a similar manner, the above data can be analysed with the help of different chart types, such as Bar chart, Pie chart, Line Chart, and so on.

Fig. 14.8: Filled Values of Chart Elements

Fig. 14.9: Column Chart displaying Mathematics Marks Analysis

Fig. 14.10: Bar Chart Displaying Mathematics Marks Analysis

Fig. 14.11: Pie and Line Charts Displaying Mathematics Marks Analysis

Activity Time

Did You Know?

After you have created a chart, you may find things you would like to change. Through the Insert and Format menus, or by right-clicking on the chart and using the options in the Context menu, you may change the chart type, chart elements, data ranges, typefaces, colours, and many other parameters.

Activity 1: Input the following data into a spreadsheet and generate a 3D Column Chart to visualise the information. Also, give a suitable chart title. (Individual Activity)

Activity 2: Input the following data into a spreadsheet and generate a Pie chart to visualise the information. (Individual Activity)

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  Which chart will show the direction of change in numbers over a period of time by connecting data points?

a  Bar b  Line c  Pie d  Column

2  Bar Charts are most effectively used to:

a  Present scientific data b  Present stock data c  Show parts of a whole d  Compare groups of data

3 is a pictorial representation of worksheet data. a  Flowchart b  Chart c  Picture d  Graphic

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1 is the default chart type in Calc.

2 are the bars, slices, or other elements that show the data values.

3  A is the key to a chart; it explains the significance of each labelled visual in a chart.

4  A compares pieces of data using horizontal stacks.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  Graphs are not good at showing changes and relationships in data.

2  The length of the arc, or the area of each sector, is proportional to the data value in a pie chart.

3  Graphs make it hard to identify the trends in the data.

4  The value axis, or Y-axis, is the vertical axis used to plot the values.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What is a chart wall?

A1. The chart wall is the "vertical" background behind the data area of the chart. It is a window within the chart area that includes the plotted data series, category, and value access in addition to the actual chart itself.

Q2. Differentiate between a column chart and a bar chart.

A2. a. A bar chart is oriented horizontally, whereas a column chart is oriented vertically.

b. Bar charts are suitable for displaying long data labels. Column charts have limited space on the category axis. So, when your data labels are long, the category axis may look cluttered.

Q3. Shally has collected data on how much each member of her class spends on magazines each month. She wishes to display this information in a graph.

a. Name one suitable graph that Shally could use.

b. Explain how Shally could use the LibreOffice Calc to produce the graph.

A3. a. A bar graph is an appropriate graph that Shally may use to represent this information. Each student spending on magazines can be represented by a separate bar, making it easy to compare different spendings by different individuals.

b. Shally can enter student names and expenditure information into LibreOffice Calc. Then, she can choose the data, select a bar chart type, add appropriate chart title, add category names, save the graph, and integrate it into her project.

Answer Key

C 1. False. Graphs are specifically designed to show changes and relationships in data, making them a powerful tool for data visualisation.

2. True.

3. False. Graphs generally make it easier, not harder, to identify the main point or trends in the data.

4. True.

Unit Reflection

Key Terms

Spreadsheet: A spreadsheet or worksheet is a file that is used for storing, organising, and manipulating data in a tabular format.

AutoFill: The AutoFill feature allows you to quickly fill cells with repetitive or sequential data, such as chronological dates, numbers, or repeated text.

Functions: Functions are in-built formulas that are used for doing calculations using the data entered.

Labels: A text or special character, descriptive information (non-numeric data), or a combination of numeric and alphanumeric data is treated as a label for rows or columns.

Concatenation: Joining two or more strings of text data is called concatenation.

Mathematical Operators: Symbols of calculations such as ‘+’, ‘–‘, ‘*’, ‘/’, and ‘^’ are called operators.

Arguments: Arguments are the values that are input to functions. These values can be in the form of text, numbers, logical values (True or False), constants, range of cells, or some other functions.

Data Formatting: Data formatting is the process of changing the appearance and layout of a cell or range of cells to make them easier to read and more visually pleasing.

Text Wrapping: Text wrapping allows you to rapidly change the dimensions of a cell so that all the text neatly fits inside it rather than extending outside the boundaries of the cell.

Cell Referencing: Cell referencing refers to a cell or range of cells on a spreadsheet and can be used in a formula, so that the values or data associated with that cell can be utilised for calculation in formulas.

Chart: A chart refers to a graphic representation of data in which the data is visually represented through bars in a bar chart, lines in a line chart, or slices in a pie chart.

Legends: Legends provide a brief visual depiction of each data series in the chart.

Things to Remember

• The AutoSum feature helps add the numeric values in a group of selected cells.

• LibreOffice Calc is the spreadsheet application of the LibreOffice suite. This is a free-to-use, open-source program that can be used separately on multiple operating systems.

• The data that is to be moved needs to be cut from the original source, whereas the data that needs to be duplicated, needs to be copied from the original source.

• On applying a formula to a cell, the value of the equation is displayed in the cell, and the formula is displayed in the formula bar.

• There are six types of horizontal alignments: left, centre, right, justified, filled, and distributed.

• The orientation of the cell is a significant formatting characteristic that describes the direction in which the contents of the cell are to be displayed or printed.

• Only text can be used in selection lists. The selection list suggests text that has already been typed in the same column.

• Calc provides three major types of cell references: relative cell reference, absolute cell reference, and mixed cell reference.

• The dollar sign fixes the reference in such a way that it remains unchanged even when you copy or apply a formula to other cells.

• Data series are the bars, slices, or other elements that show the data values.

• Gridlines can either be horizontal or vertical lines, depending on the selected chart type. They extend across the plot area of the chart. Gridlines make it easier to read and understand the values.

Test Your Knowledge

A. Select the correct option.

1. The ribbon present at the bottom of worksheets that shows the current information on the worksheet is the bar.

a. Status b. Horizontal scroll bar

c. Formatting toolbar d. Standard toolbar

2. The formula use more than one operator in a single calculation.

a. Customised b. Basic c. Text d. Compound

3. in text wrapping is a feature that automatically adds hyphens to break words at the end of lines when text is being wrapped.

a. Hyphenation b. Shrinking c. AutoFill d. Alignment

4. A cell reference consists of an absolute column and a relative row, or a relative column and an absolute row.

a. Absolute b. Mixed c. Relative d. Hybrid

5. A chart can display data in three dimensions, which is used specifically for highlighting relationships in social, economic, medical, and other aspects.

a. Net b. Bar c. Bubble d. Pie

B. Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1. New, Open, Save As, Print Preview, Print, etc., are the commonly used commands in the menu.

2. When an cell is clicked, it gets highlighted by a thick black border.

3. The function gives us the smallest of the entered values among the selected cells.

4. If you want to display the numerical values with a leading zero, then this type of data can be formatted as

5. The axis or X-axis is the horizontal axis of a chart.

C. State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1. Google Sheets is a type of spreadsheet software application.

2. Ctrl + C is the shortcut key to paste data.

3. The Date format is used in spreadsheets to consider your input as a calendar date instead of a regular number.

4. “=B2:D6” without the quotation marks refers to the entire cell range from cell B2 to cell D6.

5. A chart can be used to do analysis.

D. Short answer-type questions.

1. What is a spreadsheet?

2. What is an argument?

3. What is relative cell referencing?

E. Long answer-type questions.

1. What are the advantages of using a chart?

2. What is data formatting? Give examples.

3. What are the elements of a formula?

F. Competency-based questions.

1. Richa is computing her monthly expenses, for which she needs to add numbers from multiple columns. Name the function that can help her compute total expenses.

2. Utsav is using LibreOffice Calc software to enter marks in various subjects for all his classmates. As this is huge data, it has now become difficult for him to analyse the data. What feature of Calc must he use for better data visualisation and analysis?

Features of an Effective Presentation

Presentation is defined as “the way in which something is shown, explained, and offered to people.” Earlier, we used overhead projectors and transparent slides to present something to the audience. On those slides, information was printed or written. These slides, known as transparencies, were made of plastic.

This method of presentation was very time-consuming and expensive. To overcome this problem, digital presentation comes into play.

Concept of Digital Presentation

A digital presentation is a method by which you can present your work to the audience without using paper or a pen. It refers to the use of digital tools and technologies to create, organise, and deliver visual content. A digital presentation contains slides in digital form, which are also known as electronic pages. When multiple slides are presented in a sequential manner, it is known as a slide show. For example, you can use text, images, diagrams, and videos to express information or ideas to an audience. It replaces physical presentations with dynamic and engaging multimedia contents. In almost every field, including entertainment, education, business, etc., there is a requirement for presentation experts.

Fig. 15.1: Overhead Projector

Fig. 15.2: Transparency

Fig. 15.3: Digital Presentation

Digital Presentation Software

There are various digital presentation software available that can help you create and deliver attractive presentations. Some of these are as follows:

1. Microsoft PowerPoint

2. LibreOffice Impress

3. OpenOffice Impress

Did You Know?

4. Adobe Connect

5. Google Slides

VCN ExecuVision was the first digital presentation software developed in 1982.

Key Elements of a Digital Presentation

A presentation may include one or more of the following elements:

1. Regular text

2. List items

3. Background

4. Table

5. Graphics elements like diagrams, shapes, 3D objects, etc.

6. Audio and video

7. Animation

Applications of a Digital Presentation

There are various places where digital presentations can be used:

1. Business organisation

2. Teaching and learning

8. Header and footer

9. Slide number

10. Date and time

3. Training

4. To show the operations of a machine digitally

Characteristics of a Good Presentation

A presentation is considered good if it effectively conveys its message to the audience, engages them, and leaves a positive and lasting impression. A good presentation should also include:

Clear Objective

1. The presentation should have a clear and well-defined objective.

2. The presentation should be able to deliver its main message to the audience.

Audience-Centred

1. The presentation should be created by considering the needs and interests of the audience.

2. The content used in the presentation should be according to the understanding level of the audience.

Text

1. Try to reduce the text and make the points shorter. Each slide should have five text lines, with no more than five words per line.

2. Try to pick a classic font so that the audience can read the contents easily. For example, Verdana, Calibri, and Helvetica, etc.

3. While selecting the text for the presentation, take care of the room size and the distance between the screen and the audience.

Design

1. Always use dark text on a light background and light text on a dark background.

2. It is important to make the tables as simple as possible.

3. Delete unnecessary outlines, colours, and borders.

Visual Aids

1. Create visually attractive slides with consistent design elements.

2. Select good-quality and high-resolution images that support your message.

Animation and Videos

1. Use animations and transitions carefully.

2. You should try to include one video or animation in a slide because including more than one video will overlap the sound.

Correct Use of Grammar and Language

1. The grammar should be correct in your presentation content.

2. You must do a spell check on each slide of your presentation.

3. Highlight the most important points and modulate your tone.

Use of Quotations

1. You should be very cautious when using quotations.

2. Avoid long and many quotations.

3. When the quotations are used, they should be correct and complete.

Rely on the Presenter View

1. Presenter View can help you greatly when delivering your presentation to viewers.

2. With this feature, you do not have to memorise everything.

Follow-Up

1. Provide a way for the audience to follow up with questions.

2. Request additional information if needed.

Too much text on a slide distracts the audience, so use less text and more graphics.

Did You Know?

Every single second, more than 350 digital presentations are launched around the world.

Activity Time

Activity 1: Storyboarding (Individual Activity)

Prepare the storyboard for the presentation that you wish to create.

Activity 2: Creating a List of Multimedia Content (Individual Activity)

List the possible multimedia content that is included while making an attractive presentation.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  Which types of content can be included in a digital presentation?

a  Text, images, diagrams, and videos

c  Only audio and video

2  What are slides in a digital presentation also known as?

a  Transparencies

c  Paper handouts

3  Which of the following is not a presentation software?

a  Google Slides

c  LibreOffice Impress

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

b  Only text and images

d  Only text and diagrams

b  Electronic pages

d  Flipcharts

b  Microsoft PowerPoint

d  OpenOffice Calc

1 in a digital presentation are known as electronic pages.

2  Earlier, slides were used for presentation which were also known as

3 view can help you greatly when delivering your presentation to viewers.

4  The presentation should be created by considering the needs and interests of the

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  Header and footer can be inserted into the presentation.

2  A good presentation is one which has 4–5 lines on one slide.

3  We cannot insert audio/video in a presentation.

4  Font size used in presentation does not depend on the distance between the audience and the screen.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. Define digital presentation.

A1. A digital presentation is a method using which you can present your work to the audience without using paper or pen.

Q2. What are the key elements of digital presentation?

A2. A presentation may include one or more of the following elements:

• Regular text

• List items

• Background

• Table

• Graphics elements like diagrams, shapes, 3D objects, etc.

• Audio and video

• Animation

• Header and footer

• Slide number

• Date and time

Q3. Aman wants to create a presentation. He does not know the applications of the presentations. Tell him about any three applications of the presentations.

A3. The three applications of the presentation are:

• Business organisation

• Teaching and learning

• Training

Answer Key

C 1. True.

2. True.

3. False. We can insert audio/video in a presentation.

4. False. While selecting the font for the presentation, you need to take care of the room size, distance between the screen and the audience.

A 1. a   2. b   3. d

B 1. Slides   2. Transparencies   3. Presenter    4. Audience

Creating a Presentation

LibreOffice Impress is a free and open-source presentation software. The main function of the Impress software is to simplify the creation and modification of presentations. It helps people create slideshows and design presentation slides, as well as add text, images, charts, and multimedia material.

Getting Started with LibreOffice Impress

There are several ways to start LibreOffice Impress on your computer.

1. Double-click on the LibreOffice Impress shortcut icon on the desktop if it is available. OR

Click on the Start button or press the Win key. Click the All apps button. A list of installed applications will open. Scroll down to the letter 'L'. Select LibreOffice, and then click on LibreOffice Impress. OR

Type the word “Impress” in the search bar and click on the application name.

2. When you start LibreOffice Impress, you will find a window called Select a Template, which is shown in Fig. 16.1. This window contains a list of predefined templates that you can use to create your presentation. We will study about templates later in this chapter.

3. Click on the Close button to close this window.

Fig. 16.1: Select a Template Window

Components of LibreOffice Impress Window

The components of the Impress main window are shown in Fig. 16.2. Title

Workspace

of Impress Window

Title Bar: It consists of the presentation file name and the program used to present the application (LibreOffice Impress). It is at the top of the LibreOffice Impress window. Minimise, Maximise, and Close buttons are found in the top right-hand corner of this bar. These are known as window manipulation buttons.

Menu Bar: It contains different menus required to create the presentation, like File, Edit, View, Insert, Format, Slide, Slide Show, Tools, Window, and Help. Each menu further contains several options.

Standard Toolbar: It is placed just below the menu bar. It contains shortcut icons for easy operations, like:

1. New: It allows you to create a new presentation.

2. Open: It is used to open an existing presentation.

3. Save: It is used to save the current presentation.

4. Export Directly as PDF: You can save files in PDF format.

5. Print: It is used to print the current presentation.

6. Cut, Copy, and Paste: These are standard editing tools for manipulating content within your presentation.

7. Insert Chart: This allows you to insert charts into your slides.

8. Table: This allows you to insert a table on your slide.

Drawing Toolbar: The Drawing toolbar contains many tools that are used to draw and colour shapes, add graphics, flowcharts, etc. The Drawing toolbar shows options, like Line Color, Fill Color, Insert Line, Basic Shapes, Callout Shapes, Shadow, Crop Image, etc.

1. Basic Shapes: It allows you to insert some basic shapes like rectangles, ellipses, curves, circles, etc.

2. Curves and Polygons: It allows you to add freeform or filled curves or lines and polygons.

Fig. 16.2: Components

Fig. 16.3: Drawing Toolbar

3. Connectors: It allows you to add connectors to your slides.

4. Symbol Shapes: It allows you to add various symbols, like a moon, a smiley face, brackets, etc.

5. Flowchart: It allows you to draw the flowcharts into your presentation.

6. Callout Shapes: It allows you to draw different types of callouts in your presentation.

7. Stars and Banners: It allows you to draw different types of stars and banner shapes in your presentation.

Text Formatting Toolbar: To display the Text Formatting toolbar in LibreOffice Impress, select the Toolbars option from the View menu. After that, scroll down to Text Formatting to select it. You will see that the Text Formatting toolbar appears adjacent and to the right of the Drawing toolbar. The Text Formatting toolbar is used to change the font style, size, and other formatting options for text. It is also used for aligning and positioning objects on your slides.

Slides Pane: It consists of thumbnail images of the presentation’s slides arranged in the order they will be displayed. When you click on a particular slide, it will be shown in the workspace.

Workspace: Workspace is the middle part of the window where the slides are created. There are various views in which a slide can appear. These are Normal, Outline, Notes, and Slide Sorter. These views are available in the View menu. Workspace contains placeholders on a slide. A placeholder is an area in the slide that contains different types of content, including text and images.

Side Bar: It is located on the right side of the LibreOffice Impress window. It can be customised according to your needs. It contains the following options: Properties, Styles, Gallery, Navigator, Shapes, Slide Transition, Animation, and Master Slides

Status Bar: It is located at the bottom of the Impress window. It displays the current slide number, the Save icon, and the cursor’s current location. It also has a zoom slider that is used to zoom in or zoom out of the slide.

Closing LibreOffice Impress

We can close LibreOffice Impress in three ways: Click the Close (x) button from the title bar to directly close the Impress application. OR

Select the Exit LibreOffice option from the File menu.

OR

Use the keyboard shortcuts Alt + F4 or Ctrl + Q

Creating a Presentation

When you create a blank presentation, you are asked to select a template for all your slides in the presentation. Templates are a group of slides. It can contain predefined layouts, colours, fonts, and themes that you use as a base or ‘starting point’ while creating your presentation to save time and effort.

To create a new blank presentation, follow these steps:

1. Click on the File menu from the menu bar.

2. Select the New → Presentation or use the shortcut keys Ctrl + N. The Select a Template dialog box opens.

Fig. 16.4: Text Formatting Toolbar

3. You can select any template of your choice.

4. A new presentation is created with the selected template.

Selecting Slide Layout

The term “layout” means to organise the elements in a presentable manner. A slide layout refers to the organisation and placement of the elements in the placeholders for text, images, charts, sounds, movies, tables, etc. The slide can be modified in the normal view and the slide sorter view.

Fig. 16.5: Select a Template Dialog Box

Fig. 16.6: Slide with Template

The specific layout can be selected from the Layouts section of the Properties pane, as shown in Fig. 16.7. Here, we have selected the Title Slide layout.

Adding Text

Follow the steps given below to add text to a slide:

1. To add text to a slide, click on the Click to add Title placeholder. A text box will appear.

2. Type "Class 9" in the text box.

3. Now, click on Click to add Text placeholder.

4. Type the text "Welcome to the Class". As you type, the outline styles are applied immediately to the text. Fig. 16.8 shows the slide after adding text.

Fig. 16.7: Selecting a Layout in Properties Pane

Fig. 16.8: Adding Text to Slide

Saving a Presentation

While creating a presentation, it is very important to save it with a name so that the data may not be lost. To save the presentation, follow these steps:

1. Click on the File menu and select the Save option.

OR

Use the shortcut key combination Ctrl + S.

OR

Click on the Save button on the Standard toolbar. The Save As dialog box opens.

2. Type the name of the presentation in the File name box.

Remember

You can save a presentation to any other format by selecting it from the Save as type drop-down list in the Save As dialog box.

3. Click on the Save button, as shown in Fig. 16.9. A presentation in Impress is saved with the extension '.odp', by default.

Saving a Presentation in PDF Format

You can save your presentation in PDF format. Adobe Acrobat Reader can be used to view PDF files. To save your presentation in PDF format, follow these steps:

1. Click on the File menu.

2. Select Export As > Export as PDF option. The PDF Options dialog box appears.

Fig. 16.9: Saving a Presentation

Fig. 16.10: PDF Options Dialog Box

3. Click on the Export button. The Export dialog box appears.

4. Select the location where you want to save the file.

5. Enter the file’s name in the File name box.

6. Click on the Save button. The presentation will be saved as a PDF.

Running a Slide Show

If you try to open an exported PDF presentation in Impress, it will not open.

As you know, a slide show is a sequence of slides. It is a tool for viewing the presentations. To run a slide show, follow any of the following methods:

1. Press F5 to start the slide show. OR

Click on the Start from First Slide option present on the Standard toolbar. OR

Click on the Slide Show menu, and then select Start from First Slide.

16.11: Export Dialog Box

2. To go to the next slide or the previous slide, click on the mouse button, or you can use the arrow keys on the keyboard.

3. To open a menu for navigating the slides, right-click anywhere on the screen.

4. To exit the slide show view, press the Esc key.

Closing a Presentation

To close a presentation, follow the given steps: Click on the File menu and select Close. OR

Use the keyboard shortcut keys Ctrl + W. If you have not saved your presentation, it prompts you to save, which is shown in Fig. 16.12:

1. If you click on the Save button, the presentation will be saved and then closed.

2. If you click on the Don't Save button, the presentation will close, and all the changes made by you will be lost.

3. If you click on the Cancel button, nothing will happen, and you can return to your presentation.

Opening a Presentation

To open a presentation, follow the given steps:

1. Click on the File menu and select Open OR

Use the keyboard shortcut keys Ctrl + O.

The Open dialog box will appear, as shown in Fig. 16.13.

2. Select your presentation.

3. Click on the Open button. The presentation will open.

16.13: Opening a Presentation

Did You Know?

You can open an Impress presentation in PowerPoint and vice versa.

Fig.

Fig. 16.12: Closing Presentation Message Box

Using the Help Menu

The Help menu consists of a list of options through which you can get help on different topics. You can select the LibreOffice Help option from the Help menu or press F1 key.

16.14: LibreOffice Help Option

Activity Time

Activity 1: Creating and Exporting a Presentation (Individual Activity)

Create a presentation (minimum 5 slides) on the topic ‘Digital Citizenship’ and save the file in PDF format.

Activity 2: Presentation Time (Individual Activity)

Create a presentation on the topic ‘The Most Exciting Cricket Match’. The presentation must contain the following slides:

1. Title of the subject

2. Teams

4. Runs Scored 5. Winning Team

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  Which of these does not belong to the main Impress window?

a  Slides pane b  Workspace

c  Work pane d  Side bar

2  Which of the following keys is used to exit the slide show?

a  Ctrl b  Shift

c  Esc d  Tab

3  Which view button is not found in the Workspace?

a  Normal view b  Thumbnail view

c  Outline view d  Notes view

3. Player Names

Fig.

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  In LibreOffice Impress, by default, the presentation is saved with extension.

2  To open a presentation, click on File > .

3  In a new blank presentation, the first slide is a .

4  The shortcut key for slide show is .

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  Slide show is an option for viewing presentations.

2  You cannot save your presentation in PDF format.

3  The shortcut key combination Ctrl + N is used to create a new blank presentation.

4  Click on the Slide Show icon present on the Standard toolbar to run the slide show.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved )

Q1. What are templates?

A1. Templates are a group of slides. It can contain predefined layouts, colours, fonts, and themes that you use as a base or ‘starting point’ when creating your presentation, so as to save time and effort.

Q2. Describe any two components of the LibreOffice Impress window.

A2. • Slides pane: It consists of thumbnail images of the presentation’s slides, arranged in the order they will be displayed. When you click on a particular slide, it will be shown in the window.

• Workspace: Workspace is the middle part of the window, where the slides are created. There are various views in which a slide can appear. These are Normal, Outline, Notes, and Slide Sorter. These views are available in the View menu.

Q3. Anuj is learning about LibreOffice Impress. Help him understand the interface of Impress window by defining the following terms:

• Slide • Slide show • Placeholder

A3. • Slide: A slide is a page of a presentation.

• Slide show: It is an option for viewing presentations.

• Placeholder: An area in the slide that contains different types of content, including text and images.

Answer Key

C 1. True.

2. False. You can save your presentation in PDF format.

3. True.

4. False. Click on the 'Start from First Slide' icon present on the Standard toolbar or press F5 key to run the slide show.

Working with Slides

LibreOffice

Impress is a powerful presentation software that allows you to create slide shows for several purposes. When you create a new presentation, it is created with only one slide, by default. You can include more slides in your presentation as and when required. A new slide can be added to the presentation either by adding an additional slide or a duplicate slide. A duplicate slide is added to a presentation to make a copy of an already present or the current slide. Let’ us know the steps to add a slide to the presentation.

Inserting a Duplicate Slide

Inserting a duplicate slide means creating an identical copy of an existing slide within your presentation. New slide will have the same content, layout, and any other elements from the original slide. Duplicating a slide is useful when you want to keep a similar structure or content across multiple slides without having to recreate each one manually. Inserting a duplicate slide in Impress is a simple process. To insert a duplicate slide in your presentation, follow these steps:

1. Select the slide in the Slides pane.

2. Click on the Slide menu.

3. Click on the Duplicate Slide option (Fig. 17.1).

OR

Right-click on the slide you want to duplicate and then select the Duplicate Slide option.

A copy of the selected slide would appear in the Slides pane.

Fig. 17.1: Inserting a Duplicate Slide

Inserting a New Slide

You can insert a new slide in the presentation as per your requirement. Following are the steps to insert a new slide:

1. Select the slide in the Slides pane.

2. Click on the Slide menu from the menu bar.

3. Select the New Slide option (Fig. 17.2).

OR

1. Right-click on the Slides pane where you want to add a new slide.

2. Select the New Slide option from the context menu.

OR

Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + M key.

Slide Layout

The arrangement of objects on a slide is determined by the slide layout. It has placeholders for the text, pictures, and title. You must apply a slide layout after adding a new slide. To change the layout of a slide, follow these steps:

1. Click on the slide in the Slides pane.

2. Click on the Slide menu from the menu bar.

3. Select the Layout option.

OR

1. Right-click on the selected slide.

Fig. 17.2: Inserting a New Slide

2. Select the Layout option from the context menu and choose any layout option from the sub-context menu.

OR

You can select a slide layout from the Layouts section in the Properties pane on the right sidebar.

Copying and Moving Slides

Copying a slide means to make a duplicate of the slide. On the other hand, moving a slide means to remove it from its original position and place it to another position. You can easily copy and move slides within a presentation.

Copying Slides

Steps to copy a slide are:

1. Select a slide in the Slides pane that you want to duplicate.

2. Right-click on the selected slide.

3. Select the Copy option to copy it or use the keyboard shortcut key Ctrl + C, as shown in Fig. 17.4.

4. To paste it, right-click in the blank space in the Slides pane.

Fig. 17.3: Selecting a Slide Layout

Fig.17.4: Copying a Slide

5. Choose the Paste option or use the keyboard shortcut key Ctrl + V (see Fig. 17.5).

1. Select the slide in the Slides pane that you want to copy.

2. Click on the Edit menu.

3. Select the Copy option (Fig. 17.6).

You can also use the Copy and Paste icons from the Standard toolbar to copy and paste a slide.

Moving Slides

Here are the steps to move the slides:

1. Select the slide in the Slides pane.

2. Click on the Edit menu.

3. Select the Cut option or press the Ctrl + X key. The selected slide is removed from its position.

4. Again, click on the Edit menu.

Fig.17.5: Pasting a Slide OR

Fig. 17.6: Copying a Slide

5. Select the Paste option or press the Ctrl + V key (Fig. 17.7). The slide will appear again in the Slides pane.

You can also move a slide by dragging it in the Slides pane and dropping it to the desired position.

Deleting Slides

Deleting slides means to remove them permanently from the presentation. To delete a slide, follow these steps:

1. Click on the slide in the Slides pane that you want to delete.

2. Right-click on the selected slide.

3. Select the Delete Slide option from the shortcut menu (Fig. 17.8).

Fig. 17.7: Moving a Slide

Fig. 17.8: Deleting a Slide

1. Click on the slide in the Slides pane that you want to delete.

2. Press the Delete or Backspace key.

3. The slide will be deleted.

Renaming Slides

Renaming a slide means changing the name of a slide. To rename the slide, follow these steps:

1. Click on the slide in the Slides pane that you want to rename.

2. Right-click on the selected slide.

3. Select the Rename Slide option. The Rename Slide dialog box opens.

4. Type the new name in the Name text box (Fig. 17.9).

5. Click on the OK button.

Copying, Moving, and Deleting Content

Similar to a slide, content of the slide can be copied, moved, and deleted.

Copying and Moving Content

The copy and paste functions allow you to duplicate content such as text, images, and other types of data from one location to another without retyping every time.

The steps to copy the content are as follows:

1. Select the text to copy.

2. Right-click on the selected text.

3. Select the Copy option (Fig. 17.10).

OR

Press Ctrl + C key on the keyboard.

OR

Select the Edit > Copy option from the menu bar.

4. Move to the location where you want to paste the copied content.

5. Right-click and select the Paste option (Fig. 17.11).

OR

Press the Ctrl + V key on the keyboard.

Fig. 17.9: Renaming a Slide

Fig. 17.10: Copying Content

Select the Paste option from the Edit menu.

To move the content, follow the steps given below:

1. Select the text you want to move.

2. Right-click on the selected text.

3. Select the Cut option.

OR

Press Ctrl + X key on the keyboard.

OR

Select the Edit > Cut option from the menu bar.

4. Move to the location where you want to paste the content.

5. Right-click and select the Paste option.

OR

Press Ctrl + V key on the keyboard.

OR

Select Edit > Paste option from the menu bar.

Deleting the Content

To delete the content from the slide:

1. Select the text that you want to delete.

2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard.

Viewing a Presentation

If the presentation was created in a newer version of the software and is being opened in an older version, it may cause errors. Error Alert!

LibreOffice Impress provides different views to help you create and manage presentations effectively. By default, you work in the Normal view. You can set the view of the presentation to be larger, smaller, or medium.

Fig. 17.11: Pasting Content

Controlling the Size of the View

In LibreOffice Impress, you can control the size of the view of your presentation by adjusting the zoom level. The zoom level determines how much of the presentation is visible on the screen.

There are several alternative methods for zooming in LibreOffice Impress. These include: Adjusting the zoom slider located on the status bar. OR

Clicking the View menu and selecting the Zoom option. Select another Zoom option from the sub-menu to open the Zoom & View Layout dialog box.

You can view the slide at 100% or vary the Zoom Percentage by selecting the option Custom, as shown in the Fig. 17.12.

Workspace Views

There are four types of views available. You can select any view from the View menu (Fig. 17.13).

Fig. 17.12: Zoom & View Layout Dialog Box

Fig. 17.13: Selecting Views

Normal View

This is the default view and provides a workspace where you can create and edit slides. In this view, you can see the Slides pane on the left and the main slide editing area in the central workspace. (Fig. 17.14).

Outline View

In this view, you can see the text content of your slides in an outline format. It is a helpful view for organising and structuring the content of your presentation (Fig. 17.15).

Fig. 17.14: Normal View

Fig. 17.15: Outline View

Slide Sorter View

The slide sorter view displays thumbnails of all slides in your presentation. It allows you to easily rearrange the order of slides and get an overview of the entire presentation (Fig. 17.16).

Notes View

In this view, you can add and view speaker notes associated with each slide. These notes are not visible during the actual presentation but can be useful for the presenter (Fig. 17.17).

Fig. 17.16: Slide Sorter View

Fig. 17.17: Notes View

Remember

The slide show view is used to present slides to an audience. It takes up the full screen, and you can navigate through the slides using keyboard keys or mouse controls. You can view the slide show by pressing the F5 key.

Activity Time

Did You Know?

Before computer-based presentations, presenters used physical slides, which were transparent sheets with images or text that could be projected onto a screen using a slide projector.

Activity 1: Creating a Presentation (Individual Activity)

Create a presentation on the topic The Role of IT in Digital Transformation. Also perform the following actions for the presentation:

• Add title of the presentation

• Insert at least five new slides

• Rename each slide

• Start the slide show

Activity 2: Using Slide Sorter View (Individual Activity)

Display all the slides of the above presentation in the Slide Sorter view.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  Which view is typically used for creating and formatting slides?

a  Normal View b  Outline View

c  Notes View d  Slide Sorter View

2  In which view, you can add and view speaker notes associated with each slide?

a  Slide Show View b  Outline View

c  Notes View d  Slide Sorter View

3  Which of the following is the shortcut key to insert a new slide?

a  Ctrl + M b  Ctrl + N

c  Ctrl + W d  Ctrl + O

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1 a slide means to make a duplicate of the slide.

2  Creating an identical copy of an existing slide is called

3  You can see the full slide in the workspace if you are in the view.

4 view displays thumbnails of all slides in your presentation.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  The arrangement of objects on a slide is determined by the slide layout.

2  The shortcut key Ctrl + C is used to cut the text.

3  Slide Show view is used for presenting your slides to an audience.

4  The shortcut key Ctrl + V is used to paste the text.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What is the meaning of moving a slide?

A1. Moving a slide means to remove it from its original position and place it to another position.

Q2. Write the steps to insert a new slide in your presentation.

A2. Here’s how you can insert a new slide:

•  Right-click on the Slides pane where you want to add a new slide.

•  Select the New Slide option from the context menu.

Q3. Nimisha is working on a presentation in LibreOffice Impress. She has some doubts related to the different views in the presentation. Help her describe the following views:

•  Normal View

•  Outline View

•  Slide Sorter View

A3. Normal View: This is the default view and provides a workspace where you can create and edit slides. In this view, you can see the Slides pane on the left and the main slide editing area.

Outline View: In this view, you can see the text content of your slides in an outline format. It is a helpful view for organising and structuring the content of your presentation.

Slide Sorter View: The slide sorter view displays thumbnails of all slides in your presentation. It allows you to easily rearrange the order of slides and get an overview of the entire presentation.

Answer Key

A 1. a   2. c   3. a

B 1. Copying   2. Duplicate slide   3. Normal    4. Slide Sorter

C 1. True.

2. False. The shortcut key Ctrl + C is used to copy the text.

3. True.

4. True.

Formatting Text and Applying Animations

Formatting refers to changing the look and appearance of text and other elements in a presentation to make it attractive. It enhances the look of the presentation and gives a dynamic feel to the audience. The contents of the slides can be formatted in several ways:

1. By using the Text Formatting toolbar

2. By selecting Format > Text from the menu bar

3. By using the keyboard shortcuts

Let us discuss these methods one by one.

Text Formatting Toolbar

You can format the contents of a slide by using the icons on the Text Formatting toolbar. It is the most commonly used method. Some of the icons of the Text Formatting toolbar are shown in Fig. 18.1.

Font Name and Font Size

Increase Font Size, Decrease Font Size Bold, Italic, Underline, Strikethrough

Fig. 18.1: Text Formatting Toolbar

Font Color

Font Name Font is the look and shape of the text. There are various fonts available in Impress. To change the font of the text, follow the given steps:

1. Select the text to change the font.

2. Click on the Font Name drop-down arrow. A list of different fonts appears.

3. Select a desired font from the list that you want to apply to the text.

Font Size Font size refers to the size of the text. To change the font size of the text, follow the given steps:

1. Select the text to change the size.

2. Click on the drop-down arrow of the Font Size box. A list of different font sizes appears.

3. Select a desired font size that you want to apply to the text. You can also change the font size by directly typing the size of the font in the Font Size box. Beside this, you can use the Increase Font Size and Decrease Font Size icons on the Text Formatting toolbar to increase or decrease the font size of the text, respectively.

Bold To bold the text:

1. Select the text.

2. Click on the Bold(B) icon in the Text Formatting toolbar or press the Ctrl + B key.

Italic To italic the text:

1. Select the text.

2. Click on the Italic(I) icon in the Text Formatting toolbar or press the Ctrl + I key.

Underline To underline the text:

1. Select the text.

2. Click on the Underline (U) icon in the Text Formatting toolbar or press the Ctrl + U key.

Toggle Shadow It is used to add a shadow behind the objects on a slide.

Aligning Text We use the alignment icons to align the text. In Impress, there are four horizontal text alignment icons and three vertical text alignment options. These options become visible when we click the right arrow buttons on the Text Formatting toolbar.

1. Align Left: The text is aligned along the left margin. Use shortcut keys Ctrl + L for left alignment.

2. Align Center: The text is aligned centrally between the left and right margins. This is the default alignment. Use shortcut keys Ctrl + E for centre alignment.

3. Align Right: The text is aligned along the right margin. Use shortcut keys Ctrl + R for right alignment.

4. Justified: The text is aligned evenly between the left and right margin. Use shortcut keys Ctrl + J for justified alignment.

5. Align Top: This option vertically aligns the top edges of the selected text.

6. Center Vertically: This option vertically centres the selected text.

7. Align Bottom: This option vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected text.

18.2: Alignment

Toggle Unordered/Ordered List Bullets and numbering are used to create an unordered list and an ordered list, respectively, in your presentation. Bullets and numbering are most commonly used to highlight key points. These are used to make a list more presentable and readable.

To create bulleted or numbered lists, follow the given steps:

1. Select the text you want to convert to bulleted or numbered list.

2. Click on the Toggle Unordered List option to create a bullet list and Toggle Ordered List option to create a numbered list.

3. You can also select a list style of your choice from the drop-down menu.

Fig.

Options of the Text Formatting Toolbar

Fig. 18.3: Bullets and Numbering Dialog Box

4. To add more items in the list, place the cursor at the end of the list and press the Enter key.

Font Color To change the colour of the text, follow the given steps:

1. Select the text to change the font colour.

2. Click on the Font Color drop-down menu in the Text Formatting toolbar. The colour palette appears.

3. Select the required colour from the colour palette that you want to apply to the text.

Custom Animation

It is important to ensure that text is formatted within a designated text box rather than directly on an image. For better control, you can add text boxes to images.

Custom animation means that you can apply animation effects that are unique and specific to each object or part in a slide. By using it, you can decide when and how the objects show up, move, or disappear during a presentation. Animation effects can make your presentation more dynamic.

Applying Animation

You can apply animations effect on a slide in Normal view.

To apply an animation effect to an object, follow the given steps:

1. Select the object on which you want to apply animation.

2. Click on the Animation icon from the sidebar.

The Animation pane appears. You can also open the Animation pane by selecting the Animation option from the View menu or by right-clicking the object and then selecting the Animation option from the context menu.

3. Click on Add button.

4. You can choose different categories of animation effects from the Animation dialog box. (See Fig. 18.4).

5. Select the desired animation effect from the Effect drop-down.

6. You can choose any of these options from the Start drop-down menu:

i. On Click: The animation stops at this effect until the next mouse click.

ii. With Previous: The animation runs at the same time as the previous animation.

iii. After Previous: The animation runs as soon as the previous animation ends.

7. Add the duration of the animation effect from the Duration spin box.

8. Add time before an animation effect runs using the Delay spin box.

9. Select the Automatic Preview check box to preview the animation.

Animation Category and Its Effect

Many animations have properties that you can set or change. For example, if you choose the Change Font Size effect on the Emphasis category, you can specify the font size. If you choose Fly In on the Entrance category, you can specify the direction from which the object flies in.

The properties changes depending on the choices available for each effect. For example, a Fly In effect has a box labeled Direction and a Change Font Size effect has a box labeled Font size.

Removing an Animation Effect

To remove the animation effect from an object, following steps are used:

1. Select the object from which to remove the animation effect.

2. Click on the Remove Effect button in the Animation pane.

Remember

You can apply one or more animation effects on an object.

Did You Know?

Bob Gaskins, along with Dennis Austin, founded Forethought, Inc., the company that originally developed PowerPoint.

Fig. 18.4: Animation Pane

Activity Time

Activity 1: Creating a Presentation (Individual Activity)

You are assigned the charge of co-curricular activities in your school. Make a presentation on these activities. Use your creative sense and make it attractive.

Activity 2: Formatting a Presentation (Individual Activity)

Make a presentation on the topic Benefits of Yoga and How to Incorporate It into Your Routine.

Make it attractive using the mentioned font size, colour, and style.

1. Title of the presentation—Arial Black (16), Underlined

2. Index—Verdana (14)

3. Text—Times New Roman (12)

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  Which feature allows you to align the text? a  Text Organizer b  Text Alignment c  Text Effects d  Text Animation

2  Which menu is used to access text formatting features? a  File b  Edit c  View d  Format

3  What does the Start option in the Animation pane allow you to control in LibreOffice Impress?

a  The order in which animations occur

b  The speed of animation c  The background color of the slide d  The duration of the animation

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  The shortcut key combination Ctrl + U is used to text.

2  The size of character/letter is called

3 are used to make a list more presentable and readable.

4 is the look and shape of the letters of the text.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  You can add bullets and numbering from the Text formatting toolbar.

2  Impress allows you to apply different fonts and font styles to individual words.

3  Animations once applied can be changed but cannot be removed.

4  The Normal view is used to apply animation on the content of slide.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What is formatting?

A1. Formatting refers to changing the look and appearance of text and the other elements in a document to make it attractive.

Q2. Explain the different horizontal alignments options.

A2. In Impress, there are four types of alignments:

• Align Left: The text is aligned along the left margin. Use shortcut keys Ctrl + L for left alignment.

• Align Center: The text is aligned centrally between the left and right margins. This is the default alignment. Use shortcut keys Ctrl + E for center alignment.

• Align Right: The text is aligned along the right margin. Use shortcut keys Ctrl + R for right alignment.

• Justified: The text is aligned evenly between the left and right margin. Use shortcut keys Ctrl + J for justified alignment.

Q3. Suman wants to apply an animation effect to an object on the slide. Help her by writing steps to apply an animation effect.

A3. To apply an animation effect to an object, following steps are used:

1. Select the object on which you want to apply animation.

2. Click on the Animation icon from the sidebar.

The Animation pane appears. You can also open the Animation pane by selecting the Animation option from the View menu or by right-clicking the object and then selecting the Animation option from the context menu.

3. Click on the Add button.

4. Choose the different categories and the effects for animation.

5. Choose a desirable option from the Start drop-down menu: On click, With previous, or After previous.

6. Choose a suitable value for Duration and Delay.

7. Select the Automatic Preview check box to preview the animation.

Answer Key

2. True.

3. False. Animations once applied can be changed and removed.

4. True.

A 1. b   2. d   3. a

B 1. underline   2. font size   3. Bullets and Numbering    4. Font

C 1. True.

Creating Tables in a Presentation

LibreOffice Impress allows you to create tables for several purposes, especially when you need to organise and present data in a tabular format. A table is an arrangement of data or information, typically in rows and columns. Tables are widely used in data analysis. Let us learn how to insert and use tables in a presentation.

Inserting a Table

To insert a table in your slide:

1. Select the slide where you want to insert a table.

2. Click the Insert menu in the menu bar.

3. Select the Table option from the drop-down menu. OR

Click on the Table icon on the Standard toolbar.

The Insert Table dialog box opens.

4. In the dialog box, specify the required number of columns and rows.

5. Click on the OK button (Fig. 19.1).

The table is inserted in the slide and a Table toolbar appears. The Table toolbar allows you to change Border Style, Border Color, Fill Color, Table Properties etc. (Fig. 19.2).

Fig. 19.2: Table and Table Toolbar

Fig. 19.1: Insert Table Dialog Box

Entering Data in a Table

After inserting a table, follow the given steps to enter data into it:

1. Click in the first cell.

2. Type the desired data.

3. Press the Tab key to move to the next cell. You can also use the arrow keys to move left, right, up, and down in the table. By pressing the Shift + Tab key, you can move to the previous cell.

4. In the same way, you can insert the data in the entire table.

5. If you reach the last cell of the table, pressing the Tab key inserts a new row into the table.

Editing Data in a Table

To edit data in a table, you first need to select the text. You can select text in various ways:

Selecting a cell: To select a cell of a table, place the mouse pointer at the left border of the cell and click, as shown in Fig. 19.4.

Row Selection: To select a row in a table, place the mouse pointer in the desired row. Click and drag it until you reach the end of the row, as shown in Fig. 19.5.

Column Selection: To select a column in a table, place the mouse pointer in the desired column. Click and drag until you reach the end of the column, as shown in Fig. 19.6.

Fig. 19.6: Column Selection

Selecting a Table: To select a complete table, place the mouse pointer in the top left-hand corner of the table and click and drag till the bottom right-hand corner of the table as shown in Fig. 19.7.

Fig. 19.7: Selecting a Table

Formatting a Table

The process of formatting a table means adjusting the size of the table, its position on the page, merging and splitting cells, and changing its borders and the background. Let us learn about these features one by one.

Fig. 19.3: Entering Data in a Table

Fig. 19.4: Selecting a Cell

Fig. 19.5: Row Selection

Inserting Row(s) and Column(s) in a Table

To insert rows and columns in a table:

1. Place the cursor in the row or column where you want to add new rows or columns and right-click.

2. Select the Insert > Insert Rows or Insert Columns. The Insert Rows or Insert Columns dialog box appears.

3. Specify the number of rows or columns in the dialog box to be inserted. You can also set the position of the new rows or columns to before or after.

4. Click OK

The new rows or columns are inserted in the table. You can also use the Table toolbar to insert rows and columns.

Merging and Splitting Cells

The merging of cells means to join two or more cells into one cell in a table, and the splitting of cells means to split one cell into two or more cells.

To merge a group of cells:

1. Select the cells to be merged.

2. Right-click on the selected cells.

3. Select the Merge Cells option. OR Click the Merge Cells option in the Table toolbar.

Fig. 19.8: Inserting Row or Column in a Table

Fig. 19.9: Merging Cells

To split a cell:

1. Place the cursor inside the cell.

2. Right-click on the cell.

3. Select the Split Cells option. Or Select the Split Cells option in the Table toolbar. The Split Cells dialog box appears.

4. Specify the number of cells to be made by splitting the cell.

5. Select the direction of the split, Horizontally (more rows), or Vertically (more columns).

6. Click OK (Fig. 19.10).

Adjusting the Column Width and the Row Height

To adjust the width of the column, follow the given steps:

1. Move the cursor to the border line between two columns.

2. Press the left mouse button and drag to adjust the column width to the desired width.

Similar adjustments can be applied to change the row height.

Table Borders

In LibreOffice Impress, you can customise the borders of tables to enhance the overall look of the table. To change the border of a table, follow these steps:

1. Right-click the selected table.

2. Select the Table Properties option from the context menu. The Table Properties dialog box opens.

3. Select the Borders tab.

4. Select any of the Presets option (e.g., No Borders, Outer Border Only, etc.) in the Line Arrangement section.

5. You can adjust various settings for the table borders, including:

• Style: Choose the style of the line (e.g., Solid, Dashed, or Dotted).

• Color: Pick the colour of the border lines.

• Width: Sets the thickness of the border (e.g., Hairline, Very thin, Thin, Medium, Thick, etc.)

Fig. 19.10: Splitting Cell

6. To apply the changes, click OK (Fig. 19.11).

Table Background

You can change the background of a table to highlight a row or enhance your document. You can colour the table cells, rows, or the entire table. To change the background of a table:

1. Right-click the selected table.

2. Select the Table Properties option from the context menu. The Table Properties dialog box opens.

3. Select the Background tab.

4. Click on the Color button and select any colour to apply the background to the cell, row, or table.

5. Click OK (Fig. 19.12).

Fig 19.11: Borders Tab of the Table Properties Dialog Box

Fig. 19.12: Table Background

Deleting a Row or Column or Table.

To delete a row or a column, follow the steps given below:

1. Select the row or column you want to delete.

2. Right-click on the selected row or column.

3. Select Delete > Delete Row/Delete Columns/Delete Table.

The selected row or column or table will be deleted.

Did You Know?

Merging or splitting cells may disturb the table structure sometimes if we enter wrong number of columns or rows. Perform these operations carefully. Error Alert!

Prezi is a presentation software application known for its zooming user interface. This software allows presenters to create a canvas and zoom in and out of specific content.

Activity Time

Activity 1: Inserting Table in a Presentation (Individual Activity) Suppose you are the head of a children’s club in your society. You and your team are planning to organise a programme to celebrate Teacher’s Day. Create a table in Impress and list all the activities that are going to be performed within the time slot.

Activity 2: Creating Timetable (Individual Activity) Create your school’s timetable in an Impress presentation.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  In LibreOffice Impress, how do you adjust the width of a column in a table?

a  Drag the column boundary

b  Right-click and select 'Adjust Column Width'

c  Press Ctrl + W

d  Use the Format menu

2  Which option of the Table toolbar is used to join two or more table cells into one cell?

a  Split Cells b  Merge Cells

c  Join Cells d  None of these

3  Which of the following is the correct way to delete selected rows in a table?

a  Right-click and select Delete > Delete Row b  Select Edit > Delete

c  Press Delete

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

d  All of these

1  A table is an arrangement of in the form of rows and columns.

2  After selecting the table, press the key to delete a table.

3 cell means to divide a cell into more than one cells.

4  The dialog box is used to change the background of the table.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  In LibreOffice Impress, you cannot add a new row or column after inserting a table.

2  The Insert > Table menu option is used to insert a table in LibreOffice Impress.

3  We cannot combine cells in a table in Impress.

4  In LibreOffice Impress, you can insert a table by using the Standard toolbar.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What is a table?

A1. A table is an arrangement of information or data, typically in rows and columns.

Q2. What do you mean by formatting a table?

A2. The process of formatting a table means adjusting the size of the table, its position on the page, merging and splitting cells, and changing its borders and the background.

Q3. Seema wants to make a large cell by combining 5 cells of a row in a table. Help her by giving the steps to do so.

A3. To merge a group of cells:

• Select the cells to be merged.

• Right-click on the selected cells.

• Select the Merge Cells option.

Answer Key

A 1. a   2. b   3. a   4. b

B 1. Data   2. Delete   3. Splitting    4. Table Properties

C 1. False. You can add a new row or column even after inserting a table.

2. True.

3. False. We can combine or merge cells in a table.

4. True.

Working with Images in a Presentation

Images enhance the look and feel of presentations. There are multiple methods to effectively integrate images into your presentation. Let us learn about these methods in detail.

Inserting Image from File

Impress supports various file formats such as GIF, JPEG, PNG, and BMP for importing images. If you have an image stored on your computer, you can easily add it to a slide in Impress. To insert an image from a file:

1. Click on the Insert menu from the menu bar.

2. Select the Image option. Alternatively, if your layout includes a picture placeholder, click the Insert Image icon. This action opens the Insert Image dialog box.

3. Browse and select the folder containing the required image.

4. Choose the image file you want to add.

5. Click the Open button (Fig. 20.1).

Fig. 20.1: Insert Image Dialog Box

Inserting Image from LibreOffice Gallery

Gallery is a collection of images suitable for presentations, accessible through LibreOffice Impress. To insert an image from the Gallery:

1. Click on the Gallery icon on the sidebar. OR Select the Gallery option from the View menu.

2. Select the images you want to use from any of these categories: Arrows, BPMN, Bullets, Diagrams, Flow chart, and Icons.

3. Click the image you want and then drag and drop on the slide.

Alternatively, you can right-click the image on the sidebar and then select Insert option from the context menu.

Formatting Images

Formatting an image means moving it to another place, changing its size, and rotating it. Let us discuss all these one by one.

Rotating an Image

To rotate an image:

1. Click on the image you want to rotate.

2. Click the Rotate icon on the Drawing toolbar. The resizing handles transform into rotation handles.

3. Position the cursor over any of the corner handles; it will change to a rotation symbol.

4. Click and drag the handle to rotate the object, as needed.

Fig. 20.3: Rotating Images

Fig. 20.2: Inserting Image From Gallery

Alternatively, you can right-click on the picture to access the Rotate or Flip option, which provides further choices:

1. Select Rotate to rotate the image using rotation handles.

2. Select Vertically to flip the picture upside down.

3. Select Horizontally to flip the picture from left to right.

Resizing an Image

Resizing involves altering the dimensions of an object by either stretching it to make it large or shrinking it to make it small. To resize an image:

1. Select the object you want to adjust in size.

2. Bring your cursor over any of the eight resizing handles on the selected object.

3. Drag the handle inward to decrease the size of the object or outward to increase it.

If you wish to resize the object uniformly, hold down the Shift key while dragging the resizing handle.

Fig. 20.4: Rotate or Flip Sub-Options

Fig. 20.5: Resizing an Image

Deleting an Image

To remove an image from the slide:

1. Select the image you want to remove. You will notice a border appearing around the image placeholder.

2. Press the Delete or Backspace key. The selected image is deleted.

Formatting Images Using the Image Toolbar

You can modify the appearance of images in a slide by using the Image toolbar. This toolbar can be accessed by clicking View > Toolbars > Image from the menu bar.

Drawing Graphic Objects

Drawing graphic objects in LibreOffice Impress means adding various visual components to your presentation slides, such as shapes, lines, text boxes, and callouts. These visual elements are used to make your slides look better and effectively communicate information.

Did You Know?

You can add animations to your graphic objects to make them come to life during your presentation.

Inserting Shapes in a Slide

Impress offers a variety of shapes in its Drawing toolbar, which you can insert into your slide, as needed. These shapes can be resized, rotated, flipped, and customised with colours.

To insert a shape:

1. Select the Basic Shapes drop-down arrow on the Drawing toolbar.

2. Select a shape from the list, and the cursor becomes a ‘+’ sign.

3. Position it on the slide and then adjust the size by dragging.

4. To add text inside the shape, double-click on the shape. The cursor appears within it.

5. You can then type the desired text.

6. Next, click anywhere else on the slide, and the text will be added inside the shape.

Fig. 20.6: Image Toolbar

Fig. 20.7: Drawing Toolbar

Fig. 20.8: Basic Shapes

Grouping and Ungrouping Shapes or Other Objects

Grouping shapes in LibreOffice Impress allows you to treat multiple shapes as a single entity. This is useful for formatting, moving, rotating, or deleting several shapes simultaneously. When shapes are grouped, they behave as one object, simplifying the management of complex slide designs. Here is how you can group and ungroup shapes:

1. Insert two or more shapes in the slide.

2. Click the Select tool on the Drawing toolbar.

3. While holding down the Shift key, select each shape you want to include in the group.

4. After selecting, you will notice resizing handles around the shapes.

5. Now, you have a few options to group them:

Click the Format menu and select Group > Group option. OR

Right-click the selected shapes and then select the Group option from the context menu. OR

Alternatively, press Shift + Ctrl + G

6. All the selected shapes will be grouped together as a single shape.

Fig. 20.9: Adding Shapes

Fig. 20.10: Grouping Shapes

Resizing a Shape

To adjust the size of a shape:

1. Select the shape you want to resize.

2. Position the cursor over one of the eight resizing handles on the selected shape.

3. Drag the handle inward to make the shape smaller or outward to make it larger.

4. If you want to maintain the shape’s proportions while resizing, hold down the Shift key while dragging the resizing handle.

Using Shadow Effects

In Impress, you have the option to enhance the visual appeal of shapes by applying shadow effects. Here is how you can do it:

1. Select the shape.

2. Click on the Format menu.

3. Select the Text Box and Shape > Area option from the drop-down menu. This will open the Area dialog box.

4. Click on the Shadow tab.

5. Select the Use shadow check box in the Properties section.

6. Specify the Distance between the object and its shadow, as well as the desired Color, Blur and Transparency in their respective input fields.

7. Click on OK. Now, the object will display with a shadow effect, enhancing its appearance.

Activity Time

Activity 1: Inserting Images in a Presentation (Individual Activity)

Create a presentation on your favourite topic. Make your presentation effective by integrating images and shapes; also, format them using the formatting tools available in the Impress.

Activity 2: Formatting Images in a Presentation (Individual Activity)

Students will be provided with a collection of unformatted images. They need to create a captivating presentation slide using these images, emphasising creative formatting, such as shadows and resizing.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1  What file formats are supported for importing images in LibreOffice Impress? a  PDF and TIFF

2  Which of the following is the correct step for inserting an image from LibreOffice Gallery?

a  Use the Insert menu and then choose the Picture option.

b  Access the gallery, choose a theme, and then drag the image on the slide.

c  Click the Insert Picture icon.

d  Click on the Gallery icon on the sidebar.

Fig. 20.11: Resizing Shape

Fig. 20.12: Area Dialog Box

3  How can you group multiple shapes together in LibreOffice Impress?

a  Press Shift + Ctrl + G.

b  Select all the shapes, right-click and then select Group > Group option.

c  Use the Select tool and select the shapes, then select the Format > Group > Group option from the menu bar.

d  All of these.

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

1  To insert an image from a file in LibreOffice Impress, navigate to the Insert menu and then select the option.

2  To delete an image, select the image and then press the key.

3  The in LibreOffice Impress is a collection of images suitable for presentations.

4  To ungroup a set of shapes or objects in Impress, right-click and then select the option.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  Dragging the resizing handle inwards makes the shape smaller.

2  The Gallery in LibreOffice Impress can be accessed from the Insert menu.

3  Resizing involves altering the dimensions of an object by either stretching it larger or shrinking it smaller.

4  Formatting an image means, changing its size and rotating it.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What is the role of images in a presentation?

A1. Images enhance the look and feel of the presentations.

Q2. What is the purpose of grouping shapes in LibreOffice Impress?

A2. Grouping shapes in LibreOffice Impress allows you to treat multiple shapes as a single entity. This is useful for formatting, moving, rotating, or deleting several shapes simultaneously. When shapes are grouped, they behave as one object, simplifying the management of complex slide designs.

Q3. Rohit is working on a presentation in which he wants to add the shadow effect to the images. Help him by writing the steps to do so.

A3. Here is how you can add the shadow effect:

• Select the shape.

• Click on the Format menu.

• Select the Text Box and Shape > Area option from the drop-down menu. The Area dialog box is opened.

• Click on the Shadow tab.

• Select the Use shadow check box in the Properties section.

• Specify the Distance between the object and its shadow, as well as the desired Color, Blur, and Transparency in their respective input fields.

• Click the OK button.

Answer Key

1. b   2. b   3. d B 1. Image   2. Delete   3. Gallery    4. Ungroup

C 1. True.

2. False. The Gallery in LibreOffice Impress is accessed using the Gallery icon on the sidebar or the Gallery option from the View menu but not from the Insert menu.

3. True.

4. True.

Working with Slide Master

In Impress, you can modify the overall look and formatting of all the slides in your presentation using the Slide Master. Themes, layouts, backgrounds, colours, fonts, and other elements can be kept consistent by using the Slide Master. Every presentation contains a Slide Master, also known as the master page, which acts as a model for each of the individual slides in your presentation. You can save time and ensure a consistent appearance throughout your presentation by making adjustments to the slide master.

Creating Slide Master

To create a new Slide Master:

1. Select the Slide menu > Change Slide Master option.

The Available Master Slides dialog box opens.

Fig. 21.1: Creating Slide Master

2. Select a slide design and click the Load button.

The Load Master Slide dialog box appears.

3. Under the Categories section, select the Presentations option.

4. In the Templates section, select a template that has the design you wish to use.

5. To preview the template, click the Preview button.

6. Click OK to apply the selected template.

To apply the slide design to all slides in your presentation:

1. Ensure that the Exchange background page check box is checked in the Available Master Slides dialog box.

2. Click on OK.

Fig. 21.2: Available Master Slides Dialog Box

Fig. 21.3: Load Master Slide Dialog Box

To apply the slide design to the current slide only:

1. Clear the Exchange background page check box in the Available Master Slides dialog box.

2. Click on OK

Applying Themes

The presentation contains multiple Slide Masters that may cause formatting inconsistencies. Review and consolidate Slide Masters to ensure a consistent design.

Themes are predesigned collections of formatting elements that include backgrounds, text styles, layouts, colour schemes, and more. Any presentation that uses them will look better overall. To apply a theme:

1. Click the Master Slides icon on the sidebar. The Master Slides pane opens.

2. Within the Available for Use section, Impress displays a list of themes that can be used for your slides.

3. By selecting any theme, you can instantly change the appearance of your slides.

Additionally, you can apply the chosen theme to specific slides by following these steps:

1. Choose the desired theme.

2. Right-click the theme and then click on the Apply to All Slides, to apply the selected theme to all the slides.

3. Select the Apply to Selected Slides option to apply the theme exclusively to the selected slides.

Fig. 21.4: Applying Theme

Fig. 21.5: Applying Theme to the Slides

You can also set the background image for a selected theme by following these instructions:

1. Select the theme you wish to use.

2. Right-click on the slide.

3. Select Slide > Set Background Image from the menu.

4. Select the image file in the Set Background Image dialog box.

5. Click on Open button.

Did You Know?

You can easily customise the background of all your slides using Slide Master. You can make uniform changes to the background, such as adding a company logo and changing the colour scheme.

Fig. 21.6: Setting Background Image

Fig. 21.7: Set Background Image Dialog Box

Adding Transitions

Transition effects are special visual enhancements used to engage and captivate the audience during a presentation. They add a professional touch and make the slides more appealing.

Applying Transition Effects to a Slide

A slide transition effect refers to the visual animation that occurs when transitioning from one slide to another during a presentation. These transitions, such as rolling down from the top or flying in from the left, apply a dynamic appeal to your slide show.

To apply these transition effects:

1. Select the slide you want to apply the transition effect to.

2. Click on the Slide > Slide Transition option from the menu bar.

OR

Click the Slide Transition icon on the sidebar.

The Slide Transition pane appears.

3. Select a transition effect from the options provided under the Slide Transition section. This will give you a preview of how the selected effect will look on the current slide.

4. Select a Variant of the selected transition effect under the Modify Transition section.

5. If you want to include a sound effect, select it from the Sound box drop-down list.

6. If you wish to repeat the sound until the next sound starts, activate the Loop until next sound check box.

To control when the next slide appears, you have two options:

1. If you want to manually advance to the next slide, choose On mouse click in the Advance Slide section.

2. Select After to specify the duration for which a slide should remain visible.

3. To apply these settings to all slides, click the Apply Transition to All Slides button.

4. If you have checked the Automatic Preview check box, you will instantly see how the selected transition effect looks in the work area. You can replay the effect anytime by pressing the Play button.

5. To begin the slide show from the current slide, click on the Slide Show button. Fig. 21.8: Applying Transition Effects

Activity Time

Activity 1: Adding a Slide Master (Individual Activity)

Create a presentation on the topic Save Energy. Add a slide master to apply consistent formatting to all slides of your presentation.

Activity 2: Applying Transition Effects (Individual Activity)

Create a presentation on the topic National Festivals of India. Add images to make your presentation more attractive. Also, apply the transition effect to add a professional touch to the presentation.

Chapter Checkup

A Select the correct option.

1 What is the purpose of the Slide Master in Impress?

a  To create individual slide designs

b  To apply themes to slides

c  To modify the overall look and formatting of all slides

d  To add transition effects to slides

2  How can you create a new Slide Master in Impress?

a  Click the Apply to All Slides button.

b  Click the Slide menu and then select the Change Slide Master option.

c  Right-click a slide and then select Set Background Picture.

d  Use the Slide Transition icon on the sidebar.

3  To apply a theme to all slides in your presentation, which option should you select in the Available Master Slides dialog box?

a  Exchange background page

c  Preview theme

B Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

b  Apply to Current Slide

d  Set Background Picture for Slide

1  To create a new slide master in Impress, you should click the Slide menu and select the option.

2  To apply a transition effect in Impress, click on the menu and then select the Slide Transition option.

3  You can control when the next slide appears in Impress by selecting either On mouse click or After options in the Advance Slide section of the Slide pane.

4  You can specify the duration for which a slide should remain visible by selecting the option.

C State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1  The slide master in Impress allows you to modify the appearance of individual slides only in your presentation.

2  To create a new slide master in Impress, you can access it directly from the Slide Transition icon on the sidebar.

3  Themes in Impress include elements such as backgrounds, text styles, layouts, and colour schemes to enhance the overall look of a presentation.

4  Transition effects in Impress are used to add dynamic appeal and engage the audience during a presentation.

D Answer the following questions. (Solved)

Q1. What is the primary purpose of the Slide Master in Impress?

A1. In Impress, you can modify the overall look and formatting of all the slides in your presentation with the slide master function.

Q2. Why are transition effects important in a presentation?

A2. A slide transition effect refers to the visual animation that occurs when transitioning from one slide to another during a presentation. These transitions, such as rolling down from the top or flying in from the left, apply a dynamic appeal into your slide show.

Q3. Nikita is creating a presentation in which she wants to use predesigned formatting elements like backgrounds, text styles, layouts, and colour schemes. Which feature of Impress will help her do this taks quickly? Also, write the steps for her.

A3. She can use the the themes feature of Impress for this purpose. Steps to do so:

• Click on the Master Slides button on the sidebar.

• Within the Available for Use section, Impress displays a list of themes that can be used for your slides.

• By selecting any theme, you can instantly change the appearance of your slides.

Answer Key

C 1. False. The Slide Master in Impress is used to modify the overall look and formatting of all slides in your presentation, not individual slides.

2. False. To create a new slide master in Impress, you need to go to the Slide menu and choose the Change Slide Master option. The Slide Transition icon in the Sidebar is used for applying transition effects, not for creating slide masters.

3. True.

4. True.

Unit Reflection

Key Terms

Digital Presentation: It is a method by which you can present your work to the audience without using paper or a pen.

Slide: An electronic page in a presentation.

Template: A template is a group of slides that contains predefined layouts, colours, fonts, and themes.

Slide Layout: It is the arrangement of objects on a slide.

Formatting: It refers to changing and arranging text in a presentation to make it attractive.

Custom Animation: It means that you can make animation effects that are unique and specific to each object or part in a slide.

Table: It is an arrangement of data or information, typically in rows and columns.

Grouping: It is the process of combining multiple drawing objects to make a single entity.

Slide Master: It acts as the model for each of the individual slides in your presentation.

Things to Remember

• The basic meaning of presentation is “the way in which something is shown, explained, and offered to people”.

• When multiple slides are presented in a sequential manner, it is known as a slide show.

• There are various digital presentation software programs available that can help you create and deliver attractive presentations.

• A presentation is considered good if it effectively conveys its message to the audience, engages them, and leaves a positive and lasting impression.

• LibreOffice Impress is a free and open-source presentation software.

• A placeholder is an area in the slide that contains different types of content, including text and images.

• A slide layout contains placeholders that hold content, such as text, images, charts, sounds, movies, tables, etc.

• While creating a presentation, it is very important to save it with a name so that the data may not be lost.

• A slide show is a sequence of slides for viewing presentations.

• The Help menu consists of a list of options through which you can get help on different topics.

• Inserting a duplicate slide means creating an identical replica of an existing slide within your presentation.

• Moving a slide means to remove it from its original position and place it in another position.

• Copying a slide means making a duplicate of the slide.

• Deleting slides means to permanently remove them from the presentation.

• Renaming a slide means changing the name of the slide.

• The zoom level determines how much of the presentation is visible on the screen.

• The normal view is the default view and provides a workspace where you can create and edit slides.

• The Slide Sorter view displays thumbnails of all slides in your presentation.

• Notes view allows you to add and view speaker notes associated with each slide.

• You can format the contents on a slide by using the icons on the Text Formatting toolbar.

• Animation effects can make your presentation more dynamic.

• You can apply animations effect on a slide in Normal view.

• Tables are widely used in data analysis.

• The process of formatting a table means adjusting the size of the table, its position on the page, merging and splitting cells, and changing its borders and background.

• The merging of cells means to join two or more cells into one cell in a table, and the splitting of cells means to split one cell into two or more cells.

• Images enhance the look and feel of the presentations.

• The Gallery is a collection of images suitable for presentations, accessible in all LibreOffice Impress.

• Resizing an image involves altering the dimensions of an object by either stretching it larger or shrinking it smaller.

• Drawing graphic objects in LibreOffice Impress means adding different visual components to your presentation slides, such as shapes, lines, text boxes, and photos.

• In Impress, you can modify the overall look and formatting of all the slides in your presentation with the Slide Master.

• Themes are pre-designed collections of formatting elements that include backgrounds, text styles, layouts, colour schemes, and more.

• A slide transition effect refers to the visual animation that occurs when transitioning from one slide to another during a presentation.

Test Your Knowledge

A. Select the correct option.

1. When multiple slides are presented in a sequential manner in a digital presentation, it is known as a

a. Document b. Essay c. Presentation

2. Which shortcut keys should we use to save a presentation?

a. Ctrl+W

b. Ctrl+O

c. Ctrl+N

3. Which of the following keys is used to stop a slideshow at any time?

a. Esc key

b. End key

c. Break key

d. Slide show

d. Ctrl+S

d. Space bar

4. Which of the following is the default view and provides a workspace where you can create and edit slides?

a. Notes view

b. Normal view

5. Which of the following is not a text alignment in Impress?

c. Outline view

a. Align left b. Align right c. Justified

B. Fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

d. Slide Sorter view

d. Middle

1. A refers to the use of digital tools and technologies to create, organise, and deliver visual content.

2. The and options are used to move a slide

3. The option runs the next animation at the same time as the previous one.

4. refers to the size of the text.

5. The toolbar allows us to draw various shapes in a presentation.

C. State whether the following is True or False. Correct the statements that are false.

1. The presentation should deliver its main message to the audience.

2. You can easily copy and move slides within a presentation.

3. There are 7 types of views available in Impress.

4. Tables are widely used in data analysis.

5. Shift+G is the shortcut key to group objects on a slide.

D. Short answer-type questions.

1. What is the benefit of duplicating a slide in a presentation?

2. Write shortcut keys for bold, italic, and underline.

3. How does a slide master save time?

E. Long answer-type questions.

1. Write three methods of running a slide show.

2. Write the steps for deleting a row or column in a table.

3. What is the difference between a custom animation and a slide transition?

1. Anita is creating a presentation in which she wants to add notes for herself. Is it possible to do it in Impress? If yes, which view will help her do this?

2. Arnav is entering some data in a table on a slide in Impress. While entering the data, he realises that data in one of the columns is shifted to the next row. He wants to increase the width of the column to fit the data in it. Help him by writing down the steps to do so.

Part-C

Practical Work

List of Practicals

1. Create a Writer document to represent the role of IT in Healthcare services.

2. Type the following using your left hand: Start were extra red seat scatter abstract feast tax vegetate desert car safe cease wave egg verb brag acre scarf eager fade grab read treat brace exact bed deserve dwarf sweet regarded brew career

3. Type the following words using your right hand: Jump-up, toy, bull, mop, noun, puppy, milky, you, kill, poll

4. Take any article from the newspaper and type it on a Writer. Keep a record of the total number of words typed, the amount of time spent on typing, and the number of words containing errors. Calculate net speed, gross speed, accuracy percentage, and error percentage based on your data.

5. Create a document in Writer and type the following quote: “Education is the passport to the future, for tomorrow belongs to those who prepare for it today”.—Malcolm X After typing the quote, perform the following actions:

• Make the text bold.

• Make 5 copies of this text.

• Save the document with the name Quotes.odt.

6. Create a new document and type a paragraph about your favourite teacher.

• Find and replace the word He/She with the name of the teacher.

• Check the spelling and grammar of the paragraph.

7. Create the following table in Writer:

Rectangle A = length × width

Square A = Side2

Circle A = πr2

Triangle A = 1/2 × b × h

8. Create a document and write any poem from your English book. After typing the poem, perform the following actions:

• Change the case of the first letter of each line to lowercase if they are in uppercase or vice versa.

• Apply any shade of the green colour as the font colour.

• Apply the background colour.

9. Create a document and type “Honesty is the best policy”. Apply the following formatting:

• Font: Calibri

• Font style: Underline

• Font size: 15 points

• Font colour: Red

• Alignment: Right alignment

• Indentation: 0.75 inch for both left and right margins

10. Create the following document in Writer and fill in the details. Take a printout and paste it in your computer notebook.

11. Create your study time table in a document and send it to your 10 classmates using mail merge. The timetable must include two breaks for 15 minutes.

12. Type the data in the Calc sheet and perform the following actions.

a. Use the AutoFill feature of Calc to fill in the remaining entries for the dates till cell A13.

b. Validate cells under the columns Expense and Reimbursement so that they can only contain currency in the Indian rupee format.

c. Find the final expense for each of the categories.

d. Find the maximum and minimum final expense that occurred on a particular date.

e. Find the average value for the final expense that occurred on different dates.

13. Given is a chart plotted using data of the Calc spreadsheet. Answer the questions using the chart data.

a. Name the chart type.

b. What is the chart title?

c. Name the legends used in the chart.

d. Name the product with the highest price.

e. Name the product with the highest customer rating.

14. Create the worksheet as shown and answer the following questions.

a. Find the total marks for each of the students.

b. Find the percentage for each of the students.

c. Find the maximum marks in the English subject.

d. Find the minimum marks in the Maths subject.

e. What is the highest percentage of marks scored by a student?

15. In Calc, write down the temperatures of any five Indian cities for any five consecutive days in Celsius.

a. Convert the temperature for each city to Fahrenheit using an appropriate formula.

b. Find the maximum and minimum temperature recorded for each of the cities.

c. Find the average temperature recorded for each city during the five days.

d. Create a bar chart using the data in the spreadsheet. Add the chart elements: chart title, legends, X axis, and Y axis.

e. Save the file with an appropriate file name.

16. Type the data in the Calc worksheet and answer the questions that follow.

a. Use the Fill handle to display data for the User ID column in the sequence 001, 002, ... 005.

b. What tool or feature should you use to display the data in the sequence @User1, @User2, ... @User5 under the column Username?

c. Calculate the total number of likes for each post.

d. Which User ID is the latest to post on social media?

e. What is the leading number of zeroes in the data for cell A3.

17. In Calc software, create a time table for a week with columns for Day, Task, Start Time, End Time, and Duration.

a. Centre align and bold the names of the columns.

b. Calculate the total time spent on each task for the entire week.

c. Calculate the least time required for a task to be completed during the week.

d. Vertically stack any one cell value.

e. Create a pie chart based on the data above to analyse the task and the duration required to complete the task.

18. Create a presentation on the topic: ‘‘Good Habits’’.

a. Open Impress.

b. Create an empty presentation.

c. Add title as ‘‘Good Habits’’.

d. Add a subtitle as ‘‘Habits are routine behaviours that we perform regularly without conscious thought, like brushing teeth, checking email, exercising, etc’’.

e. Save the presentation with the name Good ‘‘Habits.odp’’.

f. Close the presentation and Impress window.

19. Create a presentation on the topic: ‘‘Indian Freedom Fighters’’.

a. Choose any two freedom fighters and make at least two slides about each of them. One is for the introduction, and the other is for the contribution to freedom.

b. Export the presentation as a PDF.

20. Create an empty presentation and type the following text on the slide: Happy Republic Day

a. Make a duplicate copy of the slide.

b. Change the colour of the text on the duplicate slide and decrease the font size.

c. Text should be centre aligned in both the slides.

d. Save the presentation.

21. Create an empty presentation and perform the following actions:

a. Add the title ‘‘National Bird of India’’ with 45 font size and Arial font.

b. Add the image of the national bird of India in the left portion of the slide.

c. Enter a one-line description about the national bird of India with 36 font size and Times New Roman font in the right portion of the slide.

d. Add one more slide and type ‘‘National Animal of India’’ as the title. Apply the same formatting that is applied in slide 1.

e. Similarly, add the image of the national animal of India and its description.

f. Save the presentation with an appropriate name.

g. Run the slide show.

22. Create a presentation on your favourite festival.

a. The first slide should be the welcome slide.

b. Write your name in the bottom right corner of the first slide.

c. On the second slide, type the name of the festival as the title and type two lines about the festival.

d. The third slide should contain images related to the festival.

e. On the fourth slide, type any five things that you do during the festival as a bulleted list.

f. Save the presentation.

23. Create a presentation to demonstrate any 5 famous tourist places in your state.

a. The title of each slide is the name of the tourist place.

b. Add the image of each tourist place.

c. Type the address of the tourist place on each slide at the bottom centre in blue colour.

d. Apply the theme to all the slides.

24. Create a presentation on your school.

a. Type the name of your school in the middle of the first slide.

b. Create the time table of your class on the second slide.

c. Type the names of some extracurricular activities in a numbered list format on the fourth slide.

d. Save the presentation.

25. Create a presentation on the Seven Wonders of the World.

a. The title of each slide is the name of the wonder

b. Add the image or each of the wonders to the respective slide.

c. Apply custom animation on each title and image.

d. Save the presentation.

26. Create a presentation on the topic: Geometrical Shapes.

a. The title of each slide is the name of the shape.

b. Draw the respective shapes.

c. Write the formula to calculate the area of the shape.

d. Apply the transition effect to each slide.

e. Add a slide master to display your name on each slide.

Viva-Voce Questions

1. Define the role of the ISP in IT-BPM.

Ans. Internet Service Providers (ISPs) provide internet connectivity and services, forming the backbone of the ITBPM industry by enabling online communication and data transfer.

2. What is LMS?

Ans. LMS stands for Learning Management System. It is a digital platform that streamlines the administration, delivery, and management of educational and training content.

3. What do you mean by virtual keyboard?

Ans. A virtual keyboard assists you in learning to type with all ten fingers. In the keyboard settings, you can customise its options.

4. How can you calculate the percentage of character accuracy?

Ans. Accuracy% = (100% – (Characters with errors * 100%) / Total number of characters)

5. Name any two modifier keys.

Ans. Alt and Shift keys

6. What do you mean by documentation?

Ans. Documentation is the process of making documents.

7. What is the OLE feature of a word processor?

Ans. OLE stands for Object Linking and Embedding. This feature allows a word processor to interact with other programs by embedding objects in the documents.

8. What is the use of the F7 key in Writer?

Ans. The F7 key is used to initiate a spell check for the entire document.

9. What shortcut key is used to format the text as a superscript?

Ans. The Ctrl + Shift + P key is used to format the text as a superscript.

10. Where are the header and footer located in the document?

Ans. The header and the footer are the areas at the top and bottom of a page in a document.

11. What do you mean by splitting a table?

Ans. Splitting a table means dividing it into two parts.

12. Which commands are used to move a table in a document?

Ans. The Cut and Paste commands are used to move a table in a document.

13. What are the two types of orientation while printing a document?

Ans. There are two types of orientation: portrait and landscape.

14. What is the need for a print preview?

Ans. Before printing, double-checking the document’s content, layout, and formatting via print preview guarantees a successful result.

15. What is the main document in the context of the mail merge?

Ans. A main document is a document that contains the basic text that will be the same in all the documents.

16. Name any two commonly used commands in the Edit menu of Calc.

Ans. Cut and Copy

17. Name the function used in Calc to display the current day.

Ans. =Day(Today())

18. Name the three types of vertical alignments in the text.

Ans. Top, Center and Bottom

19. What are gridlines?

Ans. Gridlines can either be horizontal or vertical lines, depending on the selected chart type. They extend across the plot area of the chart. Gridlines make it easier to read and understand the values.

20. If the data in cells A1 = What, B1 = a, C1 = Beautiful, and D1 = Day. Then what will cell E1 display if the formula = A1&B1&C1&D1 is typed in cell E1 and the Enter key is pressed?

Ans. WhataBeautifulDay

21. What is a function wizard?

Ans. A function wizard helps to search for the desired function from the list of available functions.

22. Name the types of cell references used in LibreOffice Calc.

Ans. Relative, Absolute, and Mixed

23. Name any two presentation software.

Ans. Microsoft PowerPoint and LibreOffice Impress

24. Which toolbar in Impress is used to change the font style, size, and other formatting options for text?

Ans. Text Formatting Toolbar

25. What is the purpose of the Basic Shapes button on the Drawing toolbar?

Ans. The Basic Shapes button allows you to insert some basic shapes like rectangles, ellipses, curves, circles, etc. on a slide.

26. What are themes in a presentation?

Ans. Themes are predesigned collections of formatting elements that include backgrounds, text styles, layouts, colour schemes, etc.

27. What is the use of the Slide Sorter view in Impress?

Ans. The Slide Sorter view allows you to easily rearrange the order of slides and get an overview of the entire presentation.

28. What is the shortcut key to centre-align the text on a slide?

Ans. Ctrl+E

29. Which key is used to move to the next cell in a table?

Ans. The Tab key is used to move to the next cell in a table.

30. Where can you access the Image Toolbar?

Ans. The Picture toolbar can be accessed by clicking on View > Toolbars > Image from the menu bar.

Part-D Project Work

Projects

Project 1: Create a document in Writer and perform the following actions:

1. Create the following table and format it.

2. Enter the days of your birthday month.

3. Make 11 copies of this table and enter the days of all the months of the current year.

4. Save the document with the title “Yearly Calendar”.

MONTHLY CALENDAR

MONTH: ________________ YEAR: ________________

MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY SATURDAY SUNDAY

Project 2: Create the following invitation card in Writer and send it to your nearby schools using Mail Merge. You can change the colour and font size according to your requirements. Design the card by applying the background colour, borders, and inserting images.

High school presents

SCIENCE FAIR 2024

NOVEMBER 20 AT TO WN L ABS ST AR TS 7 AM

Project 3: Follow the given steps to calculate the discounted price for various fruit items.

1. Type the data for the various Items, Units, and Price per unit as given.

2. Click on the cell D6 and type the formula =B6*C6 to calculate the price of the item Apple, and then press the Enter key.

3. Click on cell D6 again and drag the fill handle to copy the formula in all the cells upto D11.

4. Click on cell E6 and type the formula =D6–(D6*$D$3) to calculate the discounted price for the item Apple and press the Enter key.

5. Click on cell E6 again and drag the fill handle to copy the formula in all the cells upto E11.

6. Click on cell E14 and type the formula =SUM(E6:E11) to calculate the total discounted price.

7. Change the background colour of some of the cells as shown in the figure using the Background Color tool from the Formatting toolbar.

8. Wrap text in cell D14 by right-clicking the cell and selecting the Format Cells option. Click the Alignment tab in the Format Cells dialog box and choose the Wrap text automatically option. Click on OK.

9. Now, create a chart to visualise and analyse the data. Add the title, X axis, and Y axis chart elements to the chart.

10. Save the file with a suitable name and close the application.

Project 4: Open the Calc spreadsheet and follow the given instructions.

1. Click on cell A1 and type “Daily Activities and Meal”. Select the cells A1 to F1 and click on the Merge Cells option from the Formatting toolbar. Also, click the Align Center option from the Formatting toolbar to centre align the text.

2. Click on cell A4 and enter the date 01/11/23. Drag the Fill handle upto cell A10. This will generate dates in the sequence automatically.

3. Similarly, click on the cell B4 and type Wednesday. Drag the Fill handle upto cell B10 to generate the days of the week in the sequence automatically.

4. Type the remaining data from the columns Weather, Activities, Meal Type, and Productivity Score.

5. Change the background colour of some of the cells as shown in the figure using the Background Color tool from the Formatting toolbar.

6. Click on cell D12 and type the formula =MAX(F4:F10) to find the maximum productivity score for the given days. Press the Enter key.

7. Similarly, click on cell D13 and type the formula =MIN(F4:F10) to find the minimum productivity score for the given days. Press the Enter key.

8. Click on cell D14 and type the formula =AVERAGE(F4:F10) to find the average productivity score for the given days. Press the Enter key.

9. Right-click the cell and select the Format Cells option. Click on the Numbers tab from the Format Cells dialog box. In the Decimal places option, choose 2 as the number of decimal places using the spin arrow.

10. Save the file with a suitable name and close the application.

Project 5: Create a presentation on the topic “Tips for Good Health”.

1. The presentation should contain at least ten slides.

2. Every slide must have an image and a tip for good health.

3. Enter a related title on each slide.

4. Apply the same theme to all slides.

5. Some sample slides are given here:

Eat the Rainbow

Consume a variety of colourful fruits and vegetables.

Balanced

Diet

Eating a variety of foods ensures your body gets all the necessary nutrients.

Exercise Daily Make exercise a part of your daily routine.

Sleep Well Consume a variety of colourful fruits and vegetables.

Project 6: Create a presentation on the topic “Famous Indian Scientists and Their Discoveries”.

1. Each slide should contain a picture of the scientist and information about one discovery.

2. Enter the name of the scientist as the title of the slide.

3. Apply custom animation to the objects of the slides.

4. Add the transition effect of your choice to each slide.

Max. Time: 2 Hours

General Instructions:

Sample Paper

Information Technology (SUBJECT CODE - 402) Class IX (Session 2023-2024)

1. Please read the instructions carefully.

2. This Question Paper consists of 21 questions in two sections: Section A & Section B.

3. Section A has Objective type questions whereas Section B contains Subjective type questions.

Max. Marks: 50

4. Out of the given (5 + 16 =) 21 questions, a candidate has to answer (5 + 10 =) 15 questions in the allotted (maximum) time of 2 hours.

5. All questions of a particular section must be attempted in the correct order.

6. SECTION A - OBJECTIVE TYPE QUESTIONS (24 MARKS):

i. This section has 05 questions.

ii. Marks allotted are mentioned against each question/part.

iii. There is no negative marking.

iv. Do as per the instructions given.

7. SECTION B - SUBJECTIVE TYPE QUESTIONS (26 MARKS):

i. This section has 16 questions.

ii. A candidate has to do 10 questions.

iii. Do as per the instructions given.

iv. Marks allotted are mentioned against each question/part.

SECTION A: OBJECTIVE TYPE QUESTIONS

Q1. Answer any 4 out of the given 6 questions on Employability Skills. (1 x 4 = 4 marks)

1. Which of the following element is not a part of non-verbal communication?

a. Gestures

c. Video calls

b. Eye contact

d. Posture

2. ‘Hurray! We won the match.’ Which type of sentence is this?

a. Assertive

c. Imperative

b. Exclamatory

d. Interrogative

3. is one of the first and oldest ICT tools.

a. Radio

c. Smartphones

b. Email

d. Tablets

4. Which of the following factors can impact your self-confidence?

a. Physical

b. Cultural

c. Social d. All of these

5. Rajan’s company buys products or goods from manufacturers at a wholesale rate and sells them to consumers at a retail price. Which type of business is this?

a. Service

c. Manufacturing

b. Merchandising

d. Hybrid

6. Which factor can cause an imbalance in the environment?

a. Afforestation

c. Global warming

Q2. Answer any 5 out of the given 6 questions.

b. Conservation of resources

d. Proper use of water resources

1. is one of the common mouse actions.

a. Comfort

c. Speed

(1 x 5 = 5 marks)

b. Double Click

d. Accuracy

2. Which of the following is not a presentation software?

a. Google Slides

c. LibreOffice Impress

b. Microsoft PowerPoint

d. OpenOffice Calc

3. It consists of thumbnail images of the presentation’s slides arranged in the order that they will be displayed.

a. Slides Pane

c. Side Bar

b. Workspace

d. Slide show

4. In the formula, =$D3+E5, which reference is absolute?

a. Column E

c. Row 5

b. Column D

d. Row 3

5. Which key combination moves the cell to A1 position in Calc?

a. Ctrl + Home

c. Shift + End

b. Ctrl + End

d. Shift + Home

6. The allow you to navigate between different worksheets within a workbook.

a. Navigation buttons

c. Vertical Scrollbar

b. Horizontal Scrollbar

d. Status Bar

Q3. Answer any 5 out of the given 6 questions. (1 x 5 = 5 marks)

1. Which of the following are global companies with operations in multiple countries?

a. GICs

c. MNCs

b. ISPs

d. None of these

2. What does the “Auto Recovery” feature in LibreOffice Writer do?

a. Automatically corrects spelling errors

b. Automatically saves the document at regular intervals

c. Suggests synonyms for words

d. Embeds objects in the document

3. You can create a table using the shortcut key.

a. Ctrl + F9

c. Ctrl + F11

b. Ctrl + F10

d. Ctrl + F12

4. Which of the following is the shortcut key to insert a new slide?

a. Ctrl + M

c. Ctrl + W

b. Ctrl + N

d. Ctrl + O

5. aligns the text evenly on both the left and right margins of a cell.

a. Align left

c. Align Center Horizontally

b. Align right

d. Justified

6. are the bars, slices, or other elements that show the data values.

a. Chart Wall

c. Legend

b. Data series

d. Gridlines

Q4. Answer any 5 out of the given 6 questions. (1 x 5 = 5 marks)

1. What is the full form of ECG Machine?

a. Electrocardiagram Machine

c. Electroncardiogram Machine

b. Electrocardiogram Machine

d. Electroncardiagram Machine

2. is a pointing device used to select a displayed menu item or draw pictures on a monitor.

a. Light pen

c. Joystick

b. Keyboard

d. OMR

3. You can adjust__________to control the amount of space between lines of text.

a. Alignment

c. Paragraph spacing

4. What is the purpose of Mail Merge?

a. To play games

b. Indentation

d. Line spacing

b. To create personalised documents for multiple recipients

c. To edit images

d. To browse the internet

5. The function gives us the numeric count of the entered values of the selected cells.

a. Sum()

c. Count()

b. Average()

d. Max()

6. In LibreOffice Impress, how do you adjust the width of a column in a table?

a. Drag the column boundary

b. Right-click and select ‘Adjust Column Width’

c. Press Ctrl + W

d. Use the Format menu

Q5. Answer any 5 out of the given 6 questions.

1. What is the purpose of the “Navigator ” tool in LibreOffice Writer?

a. To browse the internet

(1 x 5 = 5 marks)

b. To navigate between different sections of a document

c. To edit images

d. To send emails

2. In Writer, Find and Replace option is available in menu.

a. File

c. View

b. Edit

d. Insert

3. How can you create a new Slide Master in Impress?

a. Click the Apply to All Slides button.

b. Click the Slide menu and then select Change Slide Master option.

c. Right-click a slide and then select Set Background Image.

d. Use the Slide Transition icon on the sidebar.

4. Which feature allows you to align the text?

a. Text Organizer

c. Text Effects

b. Text Alignment

d. Text Animation

5. allows you to print in a specific order when printing multiple copies of a document.

a. Orientation

c. Collate

b. Paper source

d. Range and copies

6. A cell or a range of cells included in a formula for performing calculations are known as .

a. Constants

c. References

b. Functions

d. Mathematical Operators

SECTION B: SUBJECTIVE TYPE QUESTIONS

Answer any 3 out of the given 5 questions on Employability Skills. (2 x 3 = 6 marks)

Answer each question in 20–30 words.

Q6. How is self-management beneficial for us? Give any two reasons.

Q7. List any two advantages of visual communication.

Q8. Differentiate between RAM and ROM.

Q9. What is a partnership business?

Q10. Explain how entrepreneurship benefits society economically?

Answer any 4 out of the given 6 questions in 20–30 words each. (2 x 4 = 8 marks)

Q11. Explain the significance of using templates.

Q12. What is a Slide pane?

Q13. What are modifier keys?

Q14. Define Standard toolbar.

Q15. Differentiate between front office and back office outsourcing.

Q16. Differentiate between merging and splitting cells.

Answer any 3 out of the given 5 questions in 50–80 words each. (4 x 3 = 12 marks)

Q17. Megha wants to know how information technology (IT) has benefited the banking sector. Explain this by providing examples of IT applications in the banking sector.

Q18. Girdhari is not aware of basic mouse actions. Explain it to him by describing any four.

Q19. Shanu wants to know the purpose of the Auto Spell Check feature. Help her by explaining the concept.

Q20. Rohan wants to rename a slide. Help him by mentioning all the steps involved.

Q21. Radha wants to remove an animation effect from an object on the slide. Help her by writing the steps to remove animation effects.

For Visually Impaired Students

Q22. Define the following:

a. Formatting

c. Indentation

b. Scatter chart

d. Document area

Employability Skills

Unit 1: Communication Skills–I

1. Articles 2. symbols

Answer Key

subject

receiver

Visual perception

C. 1. False. A letter is a written, typed or printed message that is enclosed in an envelope and sent through a postal service.

2. False. A noisy or chaotic environment will be a barrier to a communication process.

3. True.

4. False. The article ‘an’ should be used before the noun ‘hour’.

5. True.

D. 1. Encoding includes putting ideas or information in a format that can be transmitted confidentially to a receiver. This often involves selecting words, creating visuals, and using symbols, gestures, or body language to convey the intended message accurately.

Decoding is the process by which the receiver interprets the encoded message and extracts its meaning. This process involves understanding the words, symbols, or gestures used by the sender and translating them into thoughts or emotions.

2. Advantages of visual communication are:

Makes communication meaningful Use of graphics, diagrams, charts or models makes communication effective and purposeful.

Easy comprehension Support of visual aids makes information easy to understand.

Attention grabbing

Visual communication, when coupled with verbal communication, makes it more appealing and attention-grabbing.

3. Articles are of two types: Definite and Indefinite articles.

a. Definite Article (the)

We use ‘the’ when we are talking about a specific thing that the listener or reader already knows about or can easily identify.

Example: The manager called a staff member to carry the files. (a particular manager)

b. Indefinite Articles (a/an)

We use ‘a’ or ‘an’ when we are talking about something in a general or non-specific way.

Example: I have a meeting at 2 pm.

Meaning

Use of Language

Forms

Medium

Involves using spoken or written words to convey messages and information.

Requires the use of language, including grammar and vocabulary.

Face-to-face conversations, phone calls, speeches and written documents.

Utilises spoken words, written documents, phones and computers.

Conveys meaning through facial expressions, gestures, body language and other non-verbal cues.

Does not use language directly but involves elements like tone, volume and pace.

Facial expressions, gestures, posture, eye contact and touch.

Uses body language, facial expressions, gestures and physical presence.

ExampleWriting an email or giving a speech. Nodding head or shaking hands.

2. Any three factors which affect perspectives in communication are:

• Language: The language one uses to express themselves and their proficiency in a language can influence communication. When one employs incorrect terminology or unfamiliar jargon, or fails to provide sufficient details, a language can act as a barrier to communicating what one wishes to convey.

• Experiences: The experiences of the past give shape to a person’s communication habits, triggers and sensitivities. A traumatic experience from the past can stop the person from understanding or communicating clearly or without hesitation.

• Prejudices: Prejudices, or previously built notions about individuals, groups or a thing can affect how we communicate and express our views. If we have biases against a particular group, we may be less likely to listen to their perspectives or give them the benefit of the doubt.

3. A sentence is a group of words that combines to express a complete thought. A sentence conveys a complete thought or idea and often serves as a complete statement or question. A sentence always starts with a capital letter and ends with a full stop, question mark or exclamation mark.

A sentence contains a subject and a predicate. A subject in a sentence is the thing or person about whom we get information from the sentence. A predicate in a sentence is what is being said about the person or thing in the sentence.

Subject (Who/what the sentence is about)

Predicate (What is being said about the subject)

Rajesh loves to play cricket.

F. Competency-based questions.

1. Good communication skills help us in:

• Building relationships: Effective communication helps in establishing and maintaining strong relationships, whether with friends, family or colleagues. It fosters trust and understanding.

• Effective interaction: Communication skills are important when we interact with others, whether in personal, professional or social contexts. We need to express our thoughts and ideas clearly for a meaningful exchange.

• Problem-solving: When faced with challenges, effective communication is crucial for finding solutions. Misunderstandings can escalate into larger problems. To resolve conflicts, individuals should express their concerns, understand others’ views and find mutually agreeable solutions to problems.

• Sharing knowledge: Through communication, we can pass knowledge from one generation to the next, ensuring that society continues to learn and grow.

• Leadership and influence: People who can communicate well generally become effective leaders, as they are able to convey their vision clearly, inspire others and influence decisions within an organisation.

2. A well-structured paragraph typically consists of three essential elements:

• A topic sentence: The topic sentence is like the headline of the paragraph. The sentence introduces the main idea or point that the paragraph will discuss. A topic sentence is a crucial element that guides the reader’s understanding of what is to come.

• Supporting details: Supporting details are sentences or examples that provide evidence or an explanation for the topic sentence. They add depth and context to your main idea.

• A concluding sentence: The concluding sentence summarises the main point of the paragraph and often provides a smooth transition to the next paragraph.

Unit 2: Self-management Skills–I

Answer Key

1. Self-management

C. 1. True.

2. True.

3. False. One should try to appreciate the little joys in life.

4. False. Self-management is about navigating through all uncertainties or challenges.

5. False. Self-confidence is a multi-faceted concept that is influenced by physical, social, and cultural factors.

D. 1. Self-management is the capability of an individual to exercise control over one’s feelings, ideas, thoughts, emotions, and behaviour to achieve the desired goals in both personal and professional settings. It helps an individual make effective decisions and maintain their well-being. It includes working towards the pre-determined goals and motivating oneself. Those who are better at managing themselves are able to set their priorities, manage their time, control their impulses, and take responsibility for their actions. They are more productive and content in life.

2. One should stay clean, hygienic, and smart as:

• Every individual should maintain good personal hygiene, cleanliness, and a well-groomed appearance. It will boost their confidence and help them communicate well with others.

• Everyone must maintain a daily routine to take care of their hygiene and also try to dress appropriately according to the context of the situation.

• Regular physical activity and having a balanced diet will contribute to overall well-being and appearance.

3. A self-confident person believes that they are capable of achieving their goals and will be an asset to any organisation. They typically possess these three qualities:

• Trust in their own capability

• Readiness to accept new challenges

• Willingness to take risks

E. 1. The way we perceive ourselves and the world is significantly influenced by our earliest interactions with the society around us. In this way, society acts like a mirror, reflecting and shaping our self-perception. Therefore, society plays a vital role in moulding and nurturing our self-confidence.

• Our sense of self can be impacted by the opinions of others, such as our parents, teachers, classmates, and friends. This can lead to an increase or decrease in self-confidence over time. If our parents support us, we will be able to excel in whatever we do, as their positive feedback will boost our confidence.

• Also, external pressures, comparisons, discouraging comments, lack of attention, punishments, excessive criticism, and negative remarks can weaken an individual’s self-belief and confidence. It can also break a person’s confidence.

2. The various skills that can help manage the overall personality of a person include:

Problem Solving

Teamwork

Time Management

Goal Setting

It is to identify problems and challenges and, thereby, try to find practical solutions to solve them. It includes analysing issues and implementing strategies to resolve them.

It is to collaborate and work together as a team, and believe in the collaborative effort of different individuals who work towards the same goal.

It is the ability to successfully complete tasks within specified deadlines and the ability of an individual to minimise distractions and unproductive activities.

It requires one to plan clear and achievable goals that can be accomplished and provide motivation for personal or professional growth.

Decision Making It is an individual’s ability to make informed decisions by evaluating options and consequences and taking the most appropriate way forward.

Stress Management It is the coping mechanism that enables an individual to handle work efficiently, even under pressures or difficulties.

3. Tips to build self-confidence in an individual are:

• Get rid of negative thoughts: Getting rid of negative thoughts is a very significant step in building one’s self-confidence and maintaining it. A person has to change their mindset and shift their focus to more positive things in life.

• Think positively: Positive thinking involves focusing on the positives, understanding, and working towards improvement rather than focusing on the negatives. This mindset will help a person believe in their abilities, take on challenges, and achieve their goals.

• Find happiness in small things: One should try to appreciate the little joys in life, as it will cultivate a positive mindset and enhance their self-confidence. An individual can reflect on small positive things in their daily life, as it would boost their mood, help them appreciate present moments, and increase their self-awareness.

• Chat with positive people: Positive individuals provide encouragement, inspiration, and support, which will help other people feel more confident. They will help others believe in their abilities, reinforce their achievements, and create a supportive and uplifting atmosphere.

F. 1. The self-management skills that will surely help Tanuj are:

• to have clear objectives in mind and how he has to move towards his end goals.

• to allocate his time wisely for tasks that are of priority to avoid unnecessary delays.

• to reduce the stress of pending tasks as they will be dealt with according to priority.

• to plan his schedule wisely and allot time slots to different activities in a day.

• to maintain focus, not pay attention to distractions, and stay committed to his tasks and goals.

2. Kashika’s confidence has been impacted by negative surroundings. Being surrounded by individuals with a consistently negative attitude was beginning to influence her mindset. Mocking others and pessimistic viewpoints have taken deeper roots into her thoughts and self-perception, impacting her self-confidence. Constant exposure to negativity can lead us to question our abilities and values.

1. Luminance

Unit 3: ICT Skills-I

Answer Key

Information and Communication Technology

Projector 4. Microphone 5. Application C. 1. True. 2. True. 3. True. 4. False.

5. False.

D. 1. ICT has enabled online banking, making payments through mobile apps, and managing finances efficiently.

2. SD cards are small, removable storage devices that are commonly used in cameras and other portable devices. They are available in a wide range of sizes and capacities, making them a flexible storage option for users who need to store and transfer data on the go.

3. There are three types of ROM:

• PROM (Programmable ROM)

• EPROM (Erasable PROM)

• EEPROM (Electrically EPROM)

E. 1. A modem, short for modulator-demodulator, is a hardware device that allows a computer or other devices to connect to the internet. It modulates digital data into an analog signal that can be transmitted over telephone lines, cable lines, or fibre optics, and then demodulates the incoming analog signal back into digital data. There are several types of modems, including dial-up modems, DSL modems, cable modems, and fibre modems.

2. Following is the role of ICT in personal life:

• Entertainment: Television, radio, tablets, computer applications, and web browsers are useful for watching movies, listening to music and news, etc.

• Money management: Online banking apps have made the sending and receiving of money secure and convenient. It can be used for paying bills.

• Travel: ICT has enabled people to travel across the globe with the easy booking of train/bus/aeroplane tickets and hotels.

• Learning and information: Internet enables us to watch educational videos, find answers to questions, and learn new things online.

3. System software: System software controls the overall working of a computer. It manages all the input and output operations of the computer. For example, the operating system is a part of the system software that makes a computer run smoothly. Application software: Application software facilitates fundamental computer operations. It performs specific tasks for users. This category includes word processors, spreadsheets, and a variety of other task-specific programs.

1. Given below are the steps to start a computer:

• Connect the power cable and peripherals.

• Press the power button to start the computer.

• Wait for the operating system to load.

2. Light Pen.

Unit 4: Entrepreneurial Skills-I

Answer Key

wholesale

Entrepreneurship

C. 1. False. A sole proprietorship is a straightforward business structure where an individual single-handedly owns and manages the entire enterprise.

2. True.

3. False. Any new business initiative carries a considerable chance of failure.

4. True.

5. False. Entrepreneurs positively impact economic growth by identifying and exploiting opportunities.

D. 1.

• A corporation is a legal business entity that is separate from its owners, known as shareholders.

• Shareholders hold shares of stock in the company, which represent ownership stakes in the corporation, and shareholders may buy or sell their shares, easily transferring ownership of the business.

• The most notable aspect of a corporation is its limited liability, meaning that shareholders are not personally liable for the corporation’s debts and legal obligations.

• This separation of personal and corporate assets provides a level of financial protection for shareholders.

2. Entrepreneurship development refers to the process of enhancing and honing the knowledge, skills, and resources of individuals to create and manage successful businesses or ventures. It involves activities and initiatives intended to foster entrepreneurial ability and support individuals in starting, growing, and managing their own businesses.

3. • An entrepreneur is a person who recognises potential opportunities, accepts the uncertainties of both successes and failures, and establishes and manages enterprises or initiatives to fulfil the needs of the market.

• They take the initiative of starting and managing a business with the goal of making a profit. They often possess the qualities of innovation, vision, and a strong work ethic, seeking to bring their ideas to life, create value, and achieve financial success.

• Entrepreneurs make a substantial impact on our society through the generation of employment, the provision of products and services, and an increase in our country’s national income.

E. 1. There are four categories of businesses based on their activities:

• Service business: A service business is a type of business activity that primarily offers services that are not tangible in nature. These services are not in the form of physical goods. They cannot be touched but are experienced by the customers. In a service business, the primary focus is on delivering expertise, skills, knowledge, labour, or solutions to meet the specific needs and demands of the clients or customers.

• Manufacturing business: A manufacturing business is a type of enterprise that produces goods through various processes, often involving raw materials, labour, and machinery. Manufacturing firms acquire the necessary raw materials for the production or creation of goods, which are then processed into finished products with the help of labour and machinery. These finished goods are then distributed to wholesalers, who, in turn, supply them to retailers, which in turn make them available to customers in the market.

• Merchandising business: A merchandising business is the type of enterprise that buys products or goods from manufacturers at a wholesale rate (price paid for buying products in bulk) and sells them to consumers or other businesses at the retail price (price paid to buy an individual entity). The primary focus of a merchandising business is on buying, stocking, and reselling physical products rather than producing or manufacturing them. The difference between the wholesale rate and the retail rate is what a merchandising unit earns as a profit.

• Hybrid business: A hybrid business is an enterprise that combines elements from the three business activities, i.e., service, manufacturing, and merchandising, to create an unique and adaptable approach to achieving its goals. Hybrid businesses blend characteristics from two or more types of businesses to address specific market needs or opportunities.

2. There are specific characteristics that define successful entrepreneurship.

• Ability to take a risk: Any new business initiative carries a considerable chance of failure. As a result, being a successful entrepreneur requires zeal and the ability to weigh the pros and cons of taking risks. Only then will the entrepreneur be able to take the desired risk.

• Innovation: The entrepreneur’s idea should be an innovative and pathbreaking approach towards the opportunity identified. This will increase the chance of making a good profit.

• Leadership skills: Entrepreneurs need to lead their teams and inspire others to share their vision. Effective leadership and communication skills are essential.

• Open-mindedness: Open-mindedness is an essential quality for entrepreneurs as it allows them to be receptive to new ideas, feedback, and different perspectives. They see every event and situation as a business opportunity. For instance, during demonetization, there were companies that took advantage of the circumstances and increased their business. Such companies also understood the seriousness of the situation and improved the necessity for online transactions.

• Resilience and persistence: Entrepreneurs bounce back from setbacks and failures. Entrepreneurship is full of ups and downs, and the ability to persevere in the face of adversity is crucial.

• Vision: Successful entrepreneurs have a clear vision for their business. They can see opportunities and future possibilities.

• Adaptability: Successful entrepreneurs adapt to changing circumstances. They are flexible and open to change. They can pivot when necessary and adjust their strategies in response to changing market conditions.

3. Entrepreneurship offers a range of potential rewards, both intrinsic and extrinsic, that can motivate individuals to start and grow their own businesses.

• Financial rewards: Successful businesses can generate profits and provide entrepreneurs with substantial income and wealth.

• Independence and autonomy: Entrepreneurship allows individuals to be their own boss. They have the freedom to make decisions, set their own direction, and have control over their work.

• Creativity and innovation: Entrepreneurs have the opportunity to bring their creative ideas to life and innovate in various industries. This freedom to innovate and create can be personally fulfilling.

ο Personal growth: Running a business often requires individuals to continuously learn, adapt, and grow. Entrepreneurship can lead to personal development, improved problem-solving skills, and increased self-confidence.

ο Impact and fulfilment: Many entrepreneurs are motivated by the desire to make a positive impact on their communities, industries, or society as a whole. A sense of purpose and fulfilment can be a significant reward.

• Recognition and reputation: Successful entrepreneurs often gain recognition and build a strong reputation in their industries. This recognition can open doors to new opportunities and partnerships.

• Building of legacy: Entrepreneurs have the potential to leave a lasting legacy, whether it’s through their innovative products or services, the businesses they build, or the positive impact they have on their communities.

F. Competency-based questions.

1. Ragini should own a sole proprietorship business, as she will have complete control over all aspects of the business, from decision-making to daily operations.

She will enjoy the whole profit. She will not be obligated to follow strict legal procedures to start her boutique.

2. Rajat’s role as an entrepreneur has been able to make a difference in himself and the society in the following manner:

• Community development: He has been able to support the local community by generating employment opportunities for uneducated tribal women.

• Social change: He has been able to make a transition towards a sustainable way of exchanging gifts and promote the idea of sustainable living.

• Boosts confidence: The acceptance of his innovative ideas has helped to boost his confidence as well as the women involved in the process.

• Instils drive for achievement: Having received the award and acknowledgement has motivated him to work hard and to achieve and innovate; thereby, bringing about changes and development in society.

Unit 5: Green Skills–I

Answer Key

C. 1. False. Trees are called life-savers as they convert the excess carbon dioxide in the air to oxygen.

2. True.

3. False. Blue economy focuses on promoting sustainable approaches in relation to our oceans, seas, and coastal areas.

4. True.

5. False. The green economy aids the sustainable use of natural resources and the protection of biodiversity.

D. 1. Environmental conservation is a practice to protect the environment and manage the natural resources for the present and future use.

Any two steps are:

• More and more trees should be planted everywhere especially in the areas where forest cover is decreasing due to human activities.

• Saving water resources is another important aspect of environment conservation. Turn off the taps when not in use, repair leaky faucets, and install water efficient appliances.

2. A green economy is a kind of economy that aims to establish a system that balances human well-being and economic growth while reducing environmental risks and replenishing our resources. The core objective is to promote a sustainable mode of production and consumption without causing any harm to the environment.

The United Nations Environment Program (UNEP), a global organisation that works under the United Nations, defines a green economy as “one that results in improved human well-being and social equity while significantly reducing environmental risks and ecological scarcities. It is low carbon, resource efficient, and socially inclusive”. It aims for sustainable development.

3. An ecosystem is formed when the living (plants, animals, and other organisms) and the non-living components (air, water, sunlight, soil, weather, temperature etc.) interact and co-exist with each other in a physical environment. These biotic and abiotic components are interdependent on each other. All the organisms play a specific role in an ecosystem and every ecosystem is unique in itself.

E. 1. Few factors which cause an imbalance in the environment are:

• Overexploitation of resources: With the increase in population, human beings have started to exploit natural resources at a fast pace. This is a huge threat to biodiversity and has mainly resulted in the extinction of species, further affecting, directly or indirectly, the ecological cycle of the environment.

• Deforestation: Deforestation, or the thinning of forests, is one of the largest issues. This includes the removal of trees for wood products, grazing lands, and creation of huge buildings in the name of development. This is a serious environmental concern as it can result in the loss of the natural environment, damage the homes of animals, and create disturbances in the water cycle.

c

B. 1. extinction 2. sustainable 3. Natural resources 4. Green skills

• Pollution: Pollution can harm human health and the environment in many ways. Pollutants can be found in water, air, and soil. Also, there are different kinds of pollution that impact the environment in various ways. There can be various causes of pollution like burning of fossil fuels, smoke from industries and factories, improper industrial waste disposal, increasing vehicles on roads, mining etc.

• Overpopulation: Due to the rapid increase in population, resources are being over-utilised and production of wastes is also high. People make extensive use of plastic which is harmful to marine life, and street animals and also disrupts food chains, thereby, impacting the environment.

• Global warming: Due to the increase in greenhouse emissions, temperatures are rising, glaciers and polar ice caps are melting, and various species are becoming extinct. The level of carbon dioxide and other harmful gases like methane, nitrous oxide etc. is increasing in the air which also leads to the depletion of the ozone layer.

2. In India, there is a growing emphasis on embracing the principles of a green economy, placing significant importance on achieving sustainable development and transitioning towards cleaner energy sources.

• Renewable energy: India has set ambitious targets for renewable energy deployment, and has made significant progress in recent years. The country is now one of the leading markets for solar and wind power.

• Energy efficiency: India is also investing in energy efficiency measures to reduce its energy consumption. This includes programs to promote energy-efficient appliances and buildings.

• Sustainable transportation: India is promoting electric vehicles and other sustainable modes of transportation. The country is also investing in public transportation and infrastructure for pedestrians and cyclists.

• Sustainable cities: India is developing sustainable cities that are more energy-efficient, less polluted, and more liveable. This includes initiatives to promote green buildings, waste management, and public transportation.

• Sustainable agriculture: India is promoting sustainable agriculture practices to reduce its environmental impact. This includes initiatives to reduce the use of pesticides, improve water management, and promote organic farming. Programmes like PM KUSUM Yojana and Gobardhan Yojna are supporting green farming and sustainable practices in villages.

3. • There is a strong relation between our society and the environment. They interact and influence each other in multiple ways. This kind of interaction affects the ecological balance.

• Humans depend on natural resources for fulfilling their basic needs like food, water, and shelter. With the increase in population, human beings have modified their surroundings according to their necessities and economic benefits. These modifications have impacted our natural environment significantly.

• Industrial development and the exploitation of natural resources, like the extensive use of fossil fuels, deforestation etc. have created an imbalance in the environment. People do not use natural resources judiciously and thus it has caused a scarcity of these resources.

• Thus, it is important to strike a balance between both components to avoid harmful consequences.

F. Competency-based questions.

1. Kanika should start by making a few transitions in her life and advocate for the same in and around her house.

• Reduce: She should be mindful of what she is buying and not stacking up unnecessary things. It is an effective way to save the resources. Avoid the use of plastic and any such products which have a negative impact on our environment.

• Reuse: Instead of throwing items or discarding them, she should reuse them creatively. For example, glass jars can be used for storing things, old clothes come in handy when she needs to clean her home etc. She can also share her old things with those who need them.

• Recycle: Cans, paper products, glasses etc. are all recyclable materials. She should separate them from non-recyclable materials while disposing them. Community recycling efforts should also be encouraged.

2. Yogesh should highlight the importance of a green economy to Vipin:

• Protecting the environment: The green economy aids the sustainable use of natural resources and the protection of biodiversity. This is crucial for ensuring the well-being of our planet.

• Consideration of moral ethics: Adopting sustainable and responsible ways of producing and consuming aligns with ethical values and responsibilities towards future generations.

• Innovation and technological advancement: Striving towards a green economy encourages innovation in technologies and sustainable practices, leading to economic growth and competitiveness in a fast-evolving global market.

• Creating job opportunities: The transition to a green economy is expected to create myriads of new jobs in varied sectors, like waste management, renewable energy, and resource management. This in turn will boost economic growth.

Unit 1: Introduction to IT-ITeS Industry IT Skills

Answer Key

C. 1. True.

2. False. IT in banking allows customers to access their accounts, make transactions, and manage finances conveniently.

3. True.

4. False. It is a combination of information and technology.

D. 1. Following are some of the benefits of IT:

•  Help in finding potential customers.

•  It helps provide immediate customer service.

2. BPO stands for Business Process Outsourcing. It is a business practice in which an organisation hires a third-party service provider or vendor to perform specific business tasks.

E. 1. Call centres are centralised offices or set up by companies to handle a large volume of telephone inquiries, requests, or customer support needs. They are staffed with customer service representatives who are trained to assist customers, answer queries, resolve issues, and provide information about products or services.

BPO stands for Business Process Outsourcing. It is a business practice in which an organisation hires a third-party service provider or vendor to perform specific business tasks. These tasks can include customer support, technical support, data entry, human resources, accounting, and other non-core functions.

2. The BPM (Business Process Management) industry in India is a significant and rapidly growing sector within the broader ITeS industry. BPM primarily involves the outsourcing of various business processes by organisations worldwide to service providers in India, where skilled professionals handle tasks such as answering phone calls, sorting papers, and performing computer work on behalf of other companies. These tasks are often non-core functions, allowing businesses to focus on their core activities while improving efficiency and reducing costs. The BPM industry in India has indeed experienced substantial growth, contributing significantly to the country’s economy.

F. 1. The IT-BPM industries are categorised based on several key factors:

•  The specific market or region the company serves

•  The types of services offered by the company

•  The geographical coverage and reach of the company’s services

•  The extent of the company’s operations and the profits it generates

2. Information technology plays a vital role in shaping the landscape of home computing within the ITeS sector. With the evolution of technology and changing work dynamics, remote work has become a cornerstone of the ITeS industry. IT solutions are the backbone of this transformation, facilitating seamless telecommuting for employees.

IT infrastructure, including secure virtual private networks (VPNs) and remote desktop solutions, enables individuals to work effectively from their homes, ensuring data security with firewalls, antivirus software, and encryption protocols.

The adoption of cloud computing allows easy access to essential tools and data, fostering collaboration and data sharing. Collaboration tools, video conferencing, instant messaging, and project management software are essential for remote teamwork.

Unit 2: Data Entry and Keyboarding Skills

Answer Key

B. 1. Statistics toolbar 2. Orange 3. Lesson diagram/Statistics

4. Spacebar 5. Cursor

C. 1. False. The lesson statistics table displays the complete statistics of the selected lesson in the course diagram.

2. True.

3. False. The toolbar allows you to customise the primary program features.

4. True.

5. True.

D. 1. The status bar at the bottom contains suggestions for the current lesson. It provides tips for the user to follow while typing.

2. Typing accuracy is measured as the proportion of correctly typed characters to total characters.

3. It is used to scan codes directly from the products, books, or membership cards.

E. 1. The navigation keys are the keys on a keyboard used to move around a screen. These may include up, left, right, and down arrows. These allow you to navigate through documents or other information.

2. Title Bar: The title bar is the top-most bar of the Typing Tutor window.

The top-left corner contains three buttons for moving between basic program modes:

•  Current lesson: Used to check the current lesson

•  Student statistics: Used to check the statistics of the student’s typing skills

•  Lesson editor: Used to edit the lesson settings

The top-right corner contains the following buttons:

•  Options: Used to change the settings such as language, background, text colour, themes, sound, font, help, update, and log out of the Rapid Typing software.

•  Maximise, Minimise, and Close buttons: Maximize and minimize buttons are used to control the window size and the close button is used to close the window.

3. The upper-row keys are Q, W, E, R, T, Y, U, I, O, P. It is recommended to keep your fingers on or close to the keys at all times. Each hand and finger will only serve a range of predefined keys. Regular practice will build the muscle memory necessary to increase speed and accuracy.

The Left hand should focus on the following Upper-row keys:

•  The pinkie finger should be on key Q

•  The ring finger on W

•  The middle finger on E

•  The index finger should be on R

•  The index finger should be on T

The right hand should focus on the following Upper-row keys:

•  The index finger should be on Y

•  The index finger should be on U

•  The middle finger should be on I

•  The ring finger should be on O

•  The pinkie finger should be on P

F. 1. Rapid typing offers a variety of courses based on difficulty level, including Introduction, Beginner Experienced, Advanced, and Testing.

Introduction Course – This course covers every character on your keyboard.

Beginner Course – The key placement on a keyboard can be learned with the aid of this course. After completing this course, you won’t need to look at the keyboard to know which finger to press each key. Uppercase letters, special symbols, and the numeric pad are all covered throughout the course.

Experienced Course – This will assist the user in increasing typing speed by learning commonly used syllables and words.

Advanced Course – By entering actual text, the user can practice their typing skills with the help of this course.

Testing Course – With the help of an advanced typing test in this course, the user can assess their present typing speed and accuracy, and print a copy of the results.

2. The science of typing ergonomics focuses on utilising good posture and stretching practices when using a computer to prevent frequent occupational injuries. It offers logistical support for speedy and accurate typing.

Sitting Posture

•  The height of the chair should be adjusted in such a manner that your feet are flat on the floor.

•  The hips should be slightly higher than the knees.

•  Keep your back straight.

•  The back of the chair should be somewhat inclined at a 100- to 110-degree angle.

•  Ensure the keyboard is close and directly in front of you.

A. 1. d

Unit 3: Digital Documentation

Answer Key

B. 1. Document area 2. Triple-click 3. Shift + Tab 4. Font size

5. Number of copies

C. 1. True.

2. False. Writer displays red wavy lines to show spelling errors and green wavy lines to show grammatical errors.

3. False. To delete a row from a table, select Table > Delete > Rows.

4. True.

5. True.

D. 1. The Formatting toolbar displays the commands that are used for formatting and enhancing text, such as changing the font, changing the font size, changing the font colour, adding bullets, highlighting the text, and aligning the text and numbering.

2. Select Tools > Thesaurus or just press Ctrl + F7.

3. Splitting a table means dividing it into two parts, and merging means combining two tables to form a new table.

E. 1. a. Home b. Ctrl + Home c. End d. Ctrl + End

2. Indentation helps users understand a given document in a better way, as it organises the text and gives structure to the paragraph.

To indent a paragraph:

•  Select the paragraph you want to indent.

•  On the Formatting toolbar, click the Increase Indent or Decrease Indent icon.

3. To create a table by using the Table menu:

•  Open a new or existing document in Writer and then move the cursor where you want to insert the table.

•  Select the Table menu in the menu bar.

•  Select the Insert Table option from the menu.

•  The Insert Table dialog box appears.

•  Select the number of rows and columns you want in your table, and then click Insert to insert the table in your document.

F. 1. She can use the Special Character feature to add characters that are not present on the keyboard.

2. He wants to change the page formatting. He can get these options by selecting the Format menu and then the Page Style option from the menu bar.

B. 1. File

C. 1. True.

Unit 4: Electronic Spreadsheet

Answer Key

Active

2. False. Ctrl + V is the shortcut key to paste data.

3. True.

4. True.

5. True.

Category

D. 1. A spreadsheet or worksheet is a file used for storing, organising, and manipulating data in a tabular format. A spreadsheet is used to perform calculations using formulas and functions.

2. Arguments are the values that are input to functions. These values can be in the form of text, numbers, logical values (True or False), constants, range of cells, or some other functions.

3. LibreOffice Calc uses a relative cell reference by default. When we include a cell reference or a range in a formula, LibreOffice Calc always uses a relative reference. The associated cell references are used in conjunction with relative references, which often indicate a combination of a column name and a row number. The relative reference for a cell does not contain a dollar ($) sign.

E. 1. The advantages of using a chart are:

•  It improves the presentation and readability of the data.

•  It can be used to make certain judgments or do analysis.

•  It facilitates the concise and simple summarisation of large data.

•  It facilitates accurate data comparison.

2. Data formatting is the process of changing the appearance and layout of a cell or a range of cells to make them easier to read and more visually pleasing. Formatting data in a cell provides an additional effect on the text. Additional effect includes changing the font style, font size, automatic wrapping, bold, underline, and italic.

3. Following are the elements of a formula:

•  References: A cell or a range of cells included in a formula for performing calculations.

•  Mathematical operators: Symbols of calculations such as ‘+’, ‘–‘, ‘*’, ‘/’, and ‘^’.

•  Constants: The values of the data or text that do not change.

•  Functions: The operations that are predefined as formulas in Calc.

F. 1. Sum

2. Charts

c

MIN( )

Unit 5: Digital Presentation

Answer Key

B. 1. digital presentation 2. Cut, Paste 3. With previous 4. Font size 5. Drawing C. 1. True.

2. True.

3. False. There are 5 types of views available in Impress.

4. True.

5. False. Shift + Ctrl + G is the shortcut key to group objects on a slide.

D. 1. Duplicating a slide is useful when you want to keep a similar structure or content across multiple slides without having to recreate each one manually.

2. Shortcut keys for bold, italic, and underline are Ctrl + B, Ctrl + I, and Ctrl + U, respectively.

3. You may save time and ensure a consistent appearance throughout your presentation by making the desired changes to the slide master.

E. 1. To run a slide show, follow any one of the following methods: Press F5 to start the slide show.

OR

Click on the Start from First Slide icon present on the Standard toolbar. OR

Click on the Slide Show menu, and then select Start from First Slide.

2. To delete a row or column, follow the steps given below:

•  Select the row or column you want to delete.

•  Right-click on the selected row or column.

•  Select Delete > Delete Row/Delete Columns.

3. Custom animation is an effect that can be applied to the objects of a slide, whereas the slide transition effect is applied to the slide. Custom animation controls the appearance of the objects; on the other hand, slide transition controls how one slide transits to the next slide during the slide show.

F. 1. Yes, it is possible to add notes for the speaker of the presentation. She can use Notes View to do so.

2. To adjust the width of the column, follow the steps given below:

•  Move the cursor to the border line between two columns.

•  Press the left mouse button and drag to adjust the column width to the desired width.

A. 1. d

d

a

b 5. d

About the Book

This two-book series on IT (Subject Code 402) has been designed for students in grades 9 and 10. The series accurately aligns to the latest CBSE curriculum, imparts theoretical knowledge, helps in developing practical skills of students and enables them to prepare effectively for examinations.

The series introduces students to fundamental concepts in digital documentation, spreadsheet, presentation, database management, and internet security. It also comprises units that cultivate the employability skills and vocational proficiencies of students.

Key Features

Every chapter within the book consists of the following key elements that enhance the learning process and make exam preparations more effective.

• Remember: Important points to aid memory and recall.

• Error Alert: Common misconceptions with clear solutions.

• Did You Know?: Fun facts related to the topic, included to captivate students' interest.

• Key Terms: Important terms to ensure a firm grasp of important concepts.

• Points to Remember: Chapter-end point-wise summary to consolidate concepts.

• Chapter Checkup: Chapter-end exercises containing objective and subjective questions to enable comprehensive practice of concepts.

• Activity Time: Classroom and laboratory-based group and individual activities for an enhanced learning experience.

• Practical Section: Recommended list of practical questions for active learning.

• Viva Questions: Reference list of viva questions to better prepare for oral examinations.

• Projects: Detailed projects that promote the application of knowledge.

• Latest Sample Paper: Sample paper, adhering to CBSE guidelines, to ensure preparedness for theoretical exams.

• Answers Key: Solutions to unsolved questions to support independent practice and learning.

About Uolo

Uolo partners with K-12 schools to bring technology-based learning programs. We believe pedagogy and technology must come together to deliver scalable learning experiences that generate measurable outcomes. Uolo is trusted by over 10,000 schools across India, South East Asia, and the Middle East.